path: root/35139.txt

The Project Gutenberg EBook of Manual for Noncommissioned Officers and
Privates of Cavalry of the Army of the United States 1917
to be also used by Engineer Companies (Mounted) for Cavalry Instruction
and Training, by U. S. War Department

This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with
almost no restrictions whatsoever.  You may copy it, give it away or
re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included
with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org


Title: Manual for Noncommissioned Officers and Privates of Cavalry of the Army
of the United States 1917 to be also used by Engineer Companies (Mounted)
for Cavalry Instruction and Training

Author: U. S. War Department

Release Date: February 1, 2011 [EBook #35139]

Language: English

Character set encoding: ASCII

*** START OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK MANUAL FOR NONCOMMISSIONED ***




Produced by Chris Curnow, Christine P. Travers and the
Online Distributed Proofreading Team at http://www.pgdp.net









  WAR DEPARTMENT


  MANUAL
  FOR NONCOMMISSIONED OFFICERS AND
  PRIVATES OF
  CAVALRY
  OF THE ARMY OF THE UNITED STATES


  1917


  TO BE ALSO USED BY ENGINEER COMPANIES
  (MOUNTED) FOR CAVALRY INSTRUCTION
  AND TRAINING




  WASHINGTON
  GOVERNMENT PRINTING OFFICE
  1917




  WAR DEPARTMENT,
  Document No. 620.
  _Office of The Adjutant General._




  ADDITIONAL COPIES
  OF THIS PUBLICATION MAY BE PROCURED FROM
  THE SUPERINTENDENT OF DOCUMENTS
  GOVERNMENT PRINTING OFFICE
  WASHINGTON, D. C.
  AT
  50 CENTS PER COPY




                                                  WAR DEPARTMENT,
                                     WASHINGTON, _June 28, 1917_.

The following Manual for Noncommissioned Officers and Privates of
Cavalry is published for the information and guidance of all
concerned.

[2582824 C.--A. G. O.]

BY ORDER OF THE SECRETARY OF WAR:

                                                 TASKER H. BLISS,
                          _Major General, Acting Chief of Staff_.

OFFICIAL:

  H. P. MCCAIN,
  _The Adjutant General_.




TABLE OF CONTENTS.

                                                            Page.
  CHAPTER I. MILITARY DISCIPLINE AND COURTESY.................. 9
    Section 1. Oath of enlistment.............................. 9
    Section 2. Obedience....................................... 9
    Section 3. Loyalty........................................ 11
    Section 4. Discipline..................................... 11
    Section 5. Military courtesy.............................. 13
    Section 6. Saluting....................................... 13
    Section 7. Rules governing saluting....................... 15
    Section 8. Courtesies in conversation..................... 18


  CHAPTER II. ARMS, UNIFORMS, AND EQUIPMENT................... 20
    Section 1. The rifle...................................... 20
    Section 2. Care of the rifle.............................. 21
    Section 3. Cleaning the rifle............................. 23
    Section 4. Uniforms....................................... 27
    Section 5. The service kit................................ 30
    Section 6. The surplus kit................................ 32
    Section 7. Assembling equipment........................... 33


  CHAPTER III. RATIONS AND FORAGE............................. 36
    Section 1. The ration..................................... 36
    Section 2. Individual cooking............................. 37
    Section 3. The forage ration.............................. 41


  CHAPTER IV. PERSONAL HYGIENE AND CARE OF THE FEET........... 43


  CHAPTER V. EXTRACTS FROM CAVALRY DRILL REGULATIONS, 1916.... 50
    Section 1. Definitions.................................... 50
    Section 2. General provisions, individual instruction..... 54
    Section 3. School of the trooper, dismounted.............. 57
    Section 4. School of the trooper, mounted................ 112
    Section 5. General provisions, elementary collective
               instruction................................... 134
    Section 6. Basic principles of the drill................. 134
    Section 7. The school of the squad....................... 139
    Section 8. Tent pitching................................. 176


  CHAPTER VI. FIELD SERVICE.................................. 180
    Section 1. Principles of training........................ 180
    Section 2. Combat........................................ 181
    Section 3. Patrolling.................................... 199
    Section 4. Advance guards................................ 210
    Section 5. Rear guards................................... 212
    Section 6. Flank guards.................................. 213
    Section 7. Outposts...................................... 213
    Section 8. Rifle trenches................................ 219


  CHAPTER VII. MARCHING AND CAMPING.......................... 223
    Section 1. Breaking camp and preparation for a march..... 223
    Section 2. Marches, camps................................ 225


  CHAPTER VIII. TARGET PRACTICE.............................. 233
    Section 1. Preliminary training and marksmanship......... 233
    Section 2. Sight adjustment.............................. 233
    Section 3. Table of sight corrections.................... 235
    Section 4. Aiming........................................ 235
    Section 5. Battle sight.................................. 236
    Section 6. Trigger squeeze............................... 237
    Section 7. Firing positions.............................. 238
    Section 8. Calling the shot.............................. 240
    Section 9. Coordination.................................. 241
    Section 10. Advice to riflemen........................... 241
    Section 11. The course in small-arms firing.............. 243
    Section 12. Targets...................................... 244
    Section 13. Pistol and revolver practice................. 245


  CHAPTER IX. EXTRACTS FROM MANUAL OF INTERIOR GUARD
              DUTY, 1914..................................... 254
    Section 1. Introduction.................................. 254
    Section 2. Classification of interior guards............. 255
    Section 3. Details and rosters........................... 255
    Section 4. Commander of the guard........................ 258
    Section 5. Sergeant of the guard......................... 263
    Section 6. Corporal of the guard......................... 266
    Section 7. Musicians of the guard........................ 271
    Section 8. Orderlies and color sentinels................. 271
    Section 9. Privates of the guard......................... 273
    Section 10. Orders for sentinels......................... 273
    Section 11. Countersigns and paroles..................... 282
    Section 12. Guard patrols................................ 283
    Section 13. Watchmen..................................... 283
    Section 14. Compliments from guards...................... 284
    Section 15. Prisoners.................................... 286
    Section 16. Guarding prisoners........................... 289
    Section 17. Stable guards................................ 292
    Section 18. Flags........................................ 296
    Section 19. Reveille and retreat gun..................... 298
    Section 20. Guard mounting............................... 298
    Section 21. Relieving the old guard...................... 306


  CHAPTER X. MAP READING AND SKETCHING....................... 309
    Section 1. Military map reading.......................... 309
    Section 2. Sketching..................................... 322


  CHAPTER XI. MESSAGE BLANKS................................. 325


  CHAPTER XII. SIGNALS AND CODES............................. 326


  CHAPTER XIII. FIRST-AID RULES.............................. 338


  CHAPTER XIV. LAWS AND REGULATIONS.......................... 350
    Section 1. General provisions............................ 350
    Section 2. The Army of the United States................. 351
    Section 3. Rank and precedence of officers and
               noncommissioned officers...................... 351
    Section 4. Insignia of officers and noncommissioned
               officers...................................... 353
    Section 5. Extracts from the Articles of War............. 353


  CHAPTER XV. ENGLISH-FRENCH VOCABULARY...................... 371


  APPENDIX. FORM FOR LAST WILL AND TESTAMENT................. 389




MANUAL

FOR

NONCOMMISSIONED OFFICERS AND PRIVATES Of CAVALRY

OF THE

ARMY OF THE UNITED STATES.




CHAPTER I.

MILITARY DISCIPLINE AND COURTESY.


=Section 1. Oath of enlistment.=

Every soldier on enlisting in the Army takes upon himself the
following obligation:

"I, ----, do solemnly swear (or affirm) that I will bear true faith
and allegiance to the United States of America; that I will serve them
honestly and faithfully against all-their enemies whomsoever; and that
I will obey the orders of the President of the United States, and the
orders of the officers appointed over me according to the Rules and
Articles of War." (109th Article of War.)


=Section 2. Obedience.=

The very first paragraph in the Army Regulations reads:

"All persons in the military service are required to =obey strictly=
and to =execute promptly= the lawful orders of their superiors."

Obedience is the first and last duty of a soldier. It is the
foundation upon which all military efficiency is built. Without it an
army becomes a mob, while with it a mob ceases to be a mob and becomes
possessed of much of the power of an organized force. It is a quality
that is demanded of every person in the Army from the highest to the
lowest. Each enlisted man binds himself, by his enlistment oath, to
obedience. Each officer, in accepting his commission, must take upon
himself the same solemn obligation.

Obey strictly and execute promptly the lawful orders of your
superiors. It is enough to know that the person giving the order,
whether he be an officer, a noncommissioned officer, or a private
acting as such, is your lawful superior. You may not like him, you may
not respect him, but you must respect his position and authority, and
reflect honor and credit upon yourself and your profession by yielding
to all superiors that complete and unhesitating obedience which is the
pleasure as well as the duty of every true soldier.

Orders must be strictly carried out. It is not sufficient to comply
with only that part which suits you or which involves no work or
danger or hardship. Nor is it proper or permissible, when you are
ordered to do a thing in a certain way or to accomplish a work in a
definitely prescribed manner, for you to obtain the same results by
other methods.

Obedience must be =prompt and unquestioning=. When any soldier (and
this word includes officers as well as enlisted men) receives an
order, it is not for him to consider whether the order is a good one
or not, whether it would have been better had such an order never been
given, or whether the duty might be better performed by some one else,
or at some other time, or in some other manner. His duty is, first, to
understand just what the order requires, and, second, to proceed at
once to carry out the order to the best of his ability.

"Officers and men of all ranks and grades are given a certain
independence in the execution of the tasks to which they are assigned
and are expected to show initiative in meeting the different
situations as they arise. Every individual, from the highest commander
to the lowest private, must always remember that inaction and neglect
of opportunities will warrant more severe censure than an error in the
choice of the means." (_Preface, Field Service Regulations._).


=Section 3. Loyalty.=

But even with implicit obedience you may yet fail to measure up to
that high standard of duty which is at once the pride and glory of
every true soldier. Not until you carry out the desires and wishes of
your superiors in a hearty, willing, and cheerful manner are you
meeting all the requirements of your profession. For an order is but
the will of your superior, however it may be expressed. Loyalty means
that you are for your organization and its officers and
noncommissioned officers--not against them; that you always extend
your most earnest and hearty support to those in authority. No soldier
is a loyal soldier who is a knocker or a grumbler or a shirker. Just
one man of this class in a troop breeds discontent and dissatisfaction
among many others. You should, therefore, not only guard against doing
such things yourself but should discourage such actions among any of
your comrades.


=Section 4. Discipline.=

"1. All persons in the military service are required to obey strictly
and to execute promptly the lawful orders of their superiors.

"2. Military authority will be exercised with firmness, kindness, and
justice. Punishments must conform to law and follow offenses as
promptly as circumstances will permit.

"3. Superiors are forbidden to injure those under their authority by
tyrannical or capricious conduct or by abusive language. While
maintaining discipline and the thorough and prompt performance of
military duty, all officers, in dealing with enlisted men, will bear
in mind the absolute necessity of so treating them as to preserve
their self-respect. Officers will keep in as close touch as possible
with the men under their command and will strive to build up such
relations of confidence and sympathy as will insure the free approach
of their men to them for counsel and assistance. This relationship may
be gained and maintained without relaxation of the bonds of discipline
and with great benefit to the service as a whole.

"Courtesy among military men is indispensable to discipline; respect
to superiors will not be confined to obedience on duty, but will be
extended on all occasions.

"5. Deliberations or discussions among military men, conveying praise
or censure, or any mark of approbation, toward others in the military
service, and all publications relating to private or personal
transactions between officers are prohibited. Efforts to influence
legislation affecting the Army or to procure personal favor or
consideration should never be made except through regular military
channels; the adoption of any other method by any officer or enlisted
man will be noted in the military record of those concerned." (_Army
Regulations._)

"The discipline which makes the soldier of a free country reliable in
battle is not to be gained by harsh or tyrannical treatment. On the
contrary, such treatment is far more likely to destroy than to make an
army. It is possible to impart instruction and give commands in such
manner and in such tone of voice as to inspire in the soldier no
feeling but an intense desire to obey, while the opposite manner and
tone of voice can not fail to excite strong resentment and a desire to
disobey. The one mode or the other of dealing with subordinates
springs from a corresponding spirit in the breast of the commander. He
who feels the respect which is due to others can not fail to inspire
in them regard for himself, while he who feels, and hence manifests,
disrespect toward others, especially his inferiors, can not fail to
inspire hatred against himself." (_Address of Maj. Gen. John M.
Schofield to the United States Corps of Cadets, Aug. 11, 1879._)

When, by long-continued drill and subordination, you have learned your
duties, and obedience becomes second nature, you have acquired
discipline. It can not be acquired in a day nor a month. It is a
growth. It is the habit of obedience. To teach this habit of obedience
is the main object of the close-order drill, and, if good results are
to be expected, the greatest attention must be paid to even the
smallest details. The troop, platoon, or squad must be formed promptly
at the prescribed time--not a minute or even a second late. All must
wear the exact uniform prescribed and in the exact manner prescribed.
When at attention there must be no gazing about, no raising of hands,
no chewing or spitting in ranks. The manual of the rifle, the pistol,
the saber, and all movements must be executed absolutely as
prescribed. A drill of this kind teaches discipline. A careless,
sloppy drill breeds disobedience and insubordination. In other words,
discipline simply means efficiency.


=Section 5. Military courtesy.=

In all walks of life men who are gentlemanly and of good breeding are
always respectful and courteous to those about them. It helps to make
life move along more smoothly. In civil life this courtesy is shown by
the custom of tipping the hat to ladies, shaking hands with friends,
and greeting persons with a nod or a friendly "Good morning," etc.

In the Army courtesy is just as necessary, and for the same reasons.
It helps to keep the great machine moving without friction.

"Courtesy among military men is indispensable to discipline; respect
to superiors will not be confined to obedience on duty, but will be
extended on all occasions." (_Par. 4, Army Regulations, 1913._)

One method of extending this courtesy is by saluting. When in ranks
the question of what a private should do is simple--he obeys any
command that is given. It is when out of ranks that a private must
know how and when to salute.


=Section 6. Saluting.=

In the old days the free men of Europe were all allowed to carry
weapons, and when they met each would hold up his right hand to show
that he had no weapon in it and that they met as friends. Slaves or
serfs, however, were not allowed to carry weapons, and slunk past the
free men without making any sign. In this way the salute came to be
the symbol or sign by which soldiers (free men) might recognize each
other. The lower classes began to imitate the soldiers in this
respect, although in a clumsy, apologetic way, and thence crept into
civil life the custom of raising the hand or nodding as one passed an
acquaintance. The soldiers, however, kept their individual salute, and
purposely made it intricate and difficult to learn in order that it
could be acquired only by the constant training all real soldiers
received. To this day armies have preserved their salute, and when
correctly done it is at once recognized and never mistaken for that of
the civilian. All soldiers should be careful to execute the salute
exactly as prescribed. The civilian or the imitation soldier who tries
to imitate the military salute, invariably makes some mistake which
shows that he is not a real soldier; he gives it in an apologetic
manner, he fails to stand or march at attention, his coat is
unbuttoned or hat on awry, or he fails to look the person saluted in
the eye. There is a wide difference in the method of rendering and
meaning between the civilian salute as used by friends in passing, or
by servants to their employers, and the MILITARY SALUTE, the symbol
and sign of the military profession.

=To salute with the hand=, first assume the position of a soldier or
march at attention. Look the officer you are to salute straight in the
eye. Then, when the proper distance separates you, raise the right
hand smartly till the tip of the forefinger touches the lower part of
the headdress or forehead above the right eye, thumb and fingers
extended and joined, palm to the left, forearm inclined at about 45 deg.,
hand and wrist straight. Continue to look the officer you are saluting
straight in the eye and keep your hand in the position of salute until
the officer acknowledges the salute or until he has passed. Then drop
the hand smartly to the side. The salute is given with the right hand
only.

=To salute with the rifle=, bring the rifle to right shoulder arms if
not already there. Carry the left hand smartly to the small of the
stock, forearm horizontal, palm of the hand down, thumb and fingers
extended and joined, forefinger touching the end of the cocking piece.
Look the officer saluted in the eye. When the officer has acknowledged
the salute or has passed, drop the left hand smartly to the side and
turn the head and eyes to the front. The rifle salute may also be
executed from the order or trail. See paragraph 94, Infantry Drill
Regulations, and paragraph 111, Cavalry Drill Regulations, 1916.

=To salute with the pistol when drawn=, assume the position of =Raise
Pistol=, muzzle up, the hand holding the stock with the thumb and last
three fingers, forefinger outside the guard, barrel to the rear and
inclined to the front at an angle of 30 deg., hand as high as the neck and
6 inches in front of the point of the right shoulder. The pistol is
carried in the holster, except when about to be used. It will not be
drawn for the purpose of saluting. When armed only with the pistol in
the holster, salute with the hand.

=To salute with the saber=, bring the saber to carry saber if not
already there, carry the saber to the front with arm half extended
until the thumb is about 6 inches in front of the chin, the blade
vertical, guard to the left, all four fingers grasping the grip, the
thumb extending along the back in the groove, the fingers pressing the
back of the grip against the heel of the hand. Look the officer
saluted in the eye. When the officer has acknowledged the salute or
has passed, bring the saber down with the blade against the hollow of
the right shoulder, guard to the front, right hand at the hip, the
third and fourth fingers on the back of the grip and the elbow back.

Always stand or march at attention before and during the salute. The
hat should be on straight, coat completely buttoned up, and hands out
of the pockets.


=Section 7. Rules governing saluting.=

=912.= (1) Salutes shall be exchanged between officers and enlisted
men not in a military formation, nor at drill, work, games, or mess,
on every occasion of their meeting, passing near or being addressed,
the officer junior in rank or the enlisted man saluting first.

(2) When an officer enters a room where there are several enlisted men
the word "attention" is given by some one who perceives him, when all
rise, uncover, and remain standing at attention until the officer
leaves the room or directs otherwise. Enlisted men at meals stop
eating and remain seated at attention.

(3) An enlisted man, if seated, rises on the approach of an officer,
faces toward him, stands at attention, and salutes. Standing, he faces
an officer for the same purpose. If the parties remain in the same
place or on the same ground, such compliments need not be repeated.
Soldiers actually at work do not cease work to salute an officer
unless addressed by him.

(4) Before addressing an officer an enlisted man makes the prescribed
salute with the weapon with which he is armed, or if unarmed, with the
right hand. He also makes the same salute after receiving a reply.

=913.= (1) In uniform, covered or uncovered, but not in formation,
officers and enlisted men, salute military persons as follows: With
arms in hand, the salute prescribed for that arm (sentinels on
interior guard duty excepted); without arms, the right-hand salute.

(2) In civilian dress, covered or uncovered, officers and enlisted men
salute military persons with the right-hand salute.

(3) Officers and enlisted men will, render the prescribed salutes in a
military manner, the officer junior in rank or the enlisted men
saluting first. When several officers in company are saluted all
entitled to the salute shall return it.

(4) Except in the field under campaign or simulated campaign
conditions, a mounted officer (or soldier) dismounts before addressing
a superior officer not mounted.

(5) A man in formation shall not salute when directly addressed, but
shall come to attention if at rest or at ease.

=914.= (1) Saluting distance is that within which recognition is easy.
In general, it does not exceed 30 paces.

(2) When an officer entitled to the salute passes in rear of a body of
troops, it is brought to attention while he is opposite the post of
the commander.

=915.= In public conveyances, such as railway trains and street cars,
and in public places, such as theaters, honors and personal salutes
may be omitted when palpably inappropriate or apt to disturb or annoy
civilians present.

=925.= Soldiers at all times and in all situations pay the same
compliments to officers of the Army, Navy, Marine Corps, and
Volunteers, and to officers of the National Guard as to officers of
their own regiment, corps, or arm of service.

=918.= Sentinels on post doing interior guard duty conform to the
foregoing principles, but salute by presenting arms when armed with
the rifle. They will not salute if it interferes with the proper
performance of their duties. Troops under arms will salute as
prescribed in drill regulations.

=919.= (1) Commanders of detachments or other commands will salute
officers of grades higher than the person commanding the unit by first
bringing the unit to attention and then saluting as required by
subparagraph (1), paragraph 913. If the person saluted is of a junior
or equal grade, the unit need not be at attention in the exchange of
salutes.

(2) If two detachments or other commands meet, their commanders will
exchange salutes, both commands being at attention.

=920.= Salutes and honors, as a rule, are not paid by troops actually
engaged in drill, on the march, or in the field under campaign or
simulated campaign conditions. Troops on the service of security pay
no compliments whatever.

=921.= If the command is in line at a halt (not in the field) and
armed with the rifle, or with sabers drawn, it shall be brought to
=present arms= or =present saber= before its commander salutes in the
following cases: When the National Anthem is played, or when =to the
color= or =to the standard= is sounded during ceremonies, or when a
person is saluted who is its immediate or higher commander or a
general officer, or when the national or regimental color is saluted.

=922.= At parades and other ceremonies, under arms, the command shall
render the prescribed salute and shall remain in the position of
salute while the National Anthem is being played; also at retreat and
during ceremonies when to the color is played, if no band is present.
If not under arms, the organizations shall be brought to attention at
the first note of the National Anthem, =to the color= or =to the
standard=, and the salute rendered by the officer or noncommissioned
officer in command as prescribed in regulations, as amended herein.

=910.= Whenever the National Anthem is played at any place when
persons belonging to the military service are present, all officers
and enlisted men not in formation shall stand at attention facing
toward the music (except at retreat, when they shall face toward the
flag). If in uniform, covered, they shall salute at the first note of
the anthem, retaining the position of salute until the last note of
the anthem. If not in uniform and covered, they shall uncover at the
first note of the anthem, holding the headdress opposite the left
shoulder and so remain until its close, except that in inclement
weather the headdress may be slightly raised.

The same rules apply when =to the color= or =to the standard= is
sounded as when the National Anthem is played.

When played by an Army band, the National Anthem shall be played
through without repetition of any part not required to be repeated to
make it complete.

The same marks of respect prescribed for observance during the playing
of the National Anthem of the United States shall be shown toward the
national anthem of any other country when played upon official
occasions.

=917.= Officers and enlisted men passing the uncased color will render
honors as follows: If in uniform, they will salute as required by
subparagraph (5), paragraph 759; if in civilian dress and covered,
they will uncover, holding the headdress opposite the left shoulder
with the right hand; if uncovered, they will salute with the
right-hand salute.

The national flag belonging to dismounted organizations is called a
color; to mounted organizations, a standard. An uncased color is one
that is not in its waterproof cover.

Privates do not salute noncommissioned officers. =Prisoners are not
permitted to salute;= they merely come to attention if not actually at
work. The playing of the National Anthem as a part of a medley is
prohibited in the military service.


=Section 8. Courtesies in conversation.=

In speaking to an officer, always stand at attention and use the word
"Sir." Examples:

"Sir, Private Brown, Company B, reports as orderly."

"Sir, the first sergeant directed me to report to the captain."

(Question by an officer:) "To what company do you belong?"

(Answer:) "Company H, sir."

(Question by an officer:) "Has first call for drill sounded?"

(Answer:) "No, sir;" or "Yes, sir; it sounded about five minutes ago."

(Question by an officer:) "Can you tell me, please, where Major
Smith's tent is?"

(Answer:) "Yes, sir; I'll take you to it."

Use the third person in speaking to an officer. Examples:

"Does the Lieutenant wish," etc.

"Did the Captain send for me?"

In delivering a message from one officer to another, always use the
form similar to the following: "Lieutenant A presents, his compliments
to Captain B and states," etc. This form is not used when the person
sending or receiving the message is an enlisted man.

In all official conversation refer to other soldiers by their titles,
thus: Sergeant B, Private C.

=909.= In rendering personal honors, when the command _present arms_,
officers and men in uniform who are not in formation and are in view
and within saluting distance shall salute and shall remain in the
position of salute until the end of the ruffles and flourishes, or, if
none, until _order arms_. (_Cavalry Drill Regulations, 1916._)

This extract covers the conduct of officers and soldiers who may be in
the vicinity of troops rendering honors to the President or other
persons entitled to personal salutes.




CHAPTER II.

ARMS, UNIFORMS, AND EQUIPMENT.


=Section 1. The rifle.=

The rifle now used by the Army of the United States is the United
States magazine rifle, model of 1903, caliber .30.

It is 43.212 inches long and weighs 8.69 pounds.

The bayonet weighs 1 pound and the blade is 16 inches long.

The rifle is sighted for ranges up to 2,850 yards.

The maximum range, when elevated at an angle of 45 degrees, is 4,891
yards (389 yards less than 3 miles).

The smooth bore of the rifle is 0.30 inch in diameter. It is then
rifled 0.004 inch deep, making the diameter from the bottom of one
groove to the bottom of the opposite groove 0.308 inch. The rifling
makes one complete turn in each 10 inches of the barrel.

The accompanying plate shows the names of the principal parts of the
rifle.

The only parts of a rifle that an enlisted man is permitted to take
apart are the bolt mechanism and the magazine mechanism. Learn how to
do this from your squad leader, for you must know how in order to keep
your rifle clean. Never remove the hand guard or the trigger guard,
nor take the sights apart unless you have special permission from a
commissioned officer.

The cartridge used for the rifle is called the .30-caliber model 1906
cartridge. There are four types of cartridges.

=The ball cartridge= consists of the brass case or shell, the primer,
the charge of smokeless powder, and the bullet. The bullet has a sharp
point, is composed of a lead core and a jacket of cupro nickel, and
weighs 150 grains. The bullet of this cartridge, when fired from the
rifle, starts with an initial velocity at the muzzle of 2,700 feet
per second.

=The blank cartridge= contains a paper cup instead of a bullet. It it
dangerous up to 100 feet. Firing blank cartridges at a represented
enemy at ranges less than 100 yards is prohibited.

=The guard cartridge= has a smaller charge of powder than the ball
cartridge, and five cannelures encircle the body of the shell at about
the middle to distinguish it from the ball cartridge. It is intended
for use on guard or in riot duty, and gives good results up to 200
yards. The range of 100 yards requires a sight elevation of 450 yards,
and the range of 200 yards requires an elevation of 650 yards.

=The dummy cartridge= is tin plated and the shell is provided with six
longitudinal corrugations and three circular holes. The primer
contains no percussion composition. It is intended for drill purposes
to accustom the soldier to the operation of loading the rifle.

All cartridges are secured five in a clip to enable five cartridges to
be inserted into the magazine at one motion. Sixty ball cartridges in
12 clips are packed in a cloth bandoleer to facilitate issue and
carrying. When full the bandoleer weighs about 3.88 pounds. Bandoleers
are packed 20 in a box, or 1,200 rounds in all. The full box weighs 99
pounds.


=Section 2. Care of the rifle.=

Every part of the rifle must be kept free from rust, dust, and dirt. A
dirty or rusty rifle is a sure sign that the soldier does not realize
the value of his weapon, and that his training is incomplete. The
rifle you are armed with is the most accurate in the world. If it gets
dirty or rusty it will deteriorate in its accuracy and working
efficiency, and no subsequent care will restore it to its original
condition. =The most important part of the rifle to keep clean is the
bore.= If, after firing, the bore is left dirty over night, it will be
badly rusted in the morning; therefore your rifle must be cleaned not
later than the evening of the day on which it was fired. The fouling
of the blank cartridge is as dangerous to the bore as the fouling of
the ball cartridge.

Never attempt to polish any part that is blued. If rust appears,
remove by rubbing with oil. Never use emery paper, pomade, or any
preparation that cuts or scratches, to clean any part of the rifle.

To beautify and preserve the stock rub with raw linseed, oil. The use
of any other preparation on the stock is strictly forbidden.

Always handle your rifle with care. Don't throw it around as though it
were a club. Don't stand it up against anything so that it rests
against the front sight. Don't leave a stopper or a rag in the bore;
it will cause rust to form at that point. It may also cause the gun
barrel to burst if a shot is fired before removing it.

Guard the sights and muzzle carefully from any blow that might injure
them. The front sight cover should always be on the rifle except when
rifle is being fired. This is especially necessary to protect the
front sight while rifle is being carried in scabbard by a mounted man.

In coming to the "order arms," lower the piece =gently= to the ground.

When there is a cartridge in the chamber the piece is always carried
locked. In this position the safety lock should be kept turned fully
to the right, since if it be turned to the left nearly to the "ready"
position and the trigger be pulled, the rifle will be discharged when
the safety lock is turned to the "ready" position at any time later
on.

Cartridges can not be loaded from the magazine unless the bolt is
drawn fully to the rear. When the bolt is closed, or only partly open,
the cut-off may be turned up or down as desired, but if the bolt is
drawn fully to the rear, the magazine can not be cut off unless the
top cartridge or the follower be pressed down slightly and the bolt
pushed forward so that the cut-off may be turned "off."

In the case of a misfire, don't open the bolt immediately, as it may
be a hangfire. Misfires are often due to the fact that the bolt handle
was not fully pressed down. Sometimes in pulling the trigger the
soldier raises the bolt handle without knowing it.

Unless otherwise ordered, arms will be unloaded before being taken to
quarters or tents, or as soon as the men using them are relieved from
duty.

=Keep the working parts oiled.=

In every troop there should be at least one copy of the Manual of the
Ordnance Department entitled "Description and Rules for the Management
of the U. S. Magazine Rifle." This manual gives the name and a cut of
every part of the rifle, explains its use, shows how to take the rifle
apart and care for the same, and also gives much other valuable and
interesting information.


=Section 3. Cleaning the rifle.=

"=Cleaning the rifle.=--(_a_) The proper care of the bore requires
conscientious, careful work, but it pays well in the attainment of
reduced labor of cleaning, prolonged accuracy life of the barrel, and
better results in target practice. Briefly stated, the care of the
bore consists in removing the fouling, resulting from firing, to
obtain a chemically clean surface, and in coating this surface with a
film of oil to prevent rusting. The fouling which results from firing
is of two kinds--one, the products of combustion of the powder; the
other, cupro-nickel scraped off (under the abrading action of
irregularities or grit in the bore). Powder fouling, because of its
acid reaction, is highly corrosive; that is, it will induce rust and
must be removed. Metal fouling of itself is inactive, but may cover
powder fouling and prevent the action of cleaning agents until
removed, and when accumulated in noticeable quantities it reduces the
accuracy of the rifle.

(_b_) Powder fouling may be readily removed by scrubbing with hot soda
solution, but this solution has no effect on the metal fouling of
cupro-nickel. It is necessary, therefore, to remove all metal fouling
before assurance can be had that all powder fouling has been removed
and that the bore may be safely oiled. Normally, after firing a barrel
in good condition the metal fouling is so slight as to be hardly
perceptible. It is merely a smear of infinitesimal thickness, easily
removed by solvents of cupro-nickel. However, due to pitting, the
presence of dust, other abrasives, or to accumulation, metal fouling
may occur in clearly visible flakes or patches of much greater
thickness, much more difficult to remove.

(_c_) In cleaning the bore after firing it is well to proceed as
follows: Swab out the bore with soda solution (subparagraph _j_) to
remove powder fouling. A convenient method is to insert the muzzle of
the rifle into the can containing the soda solution and, with the
cleaning rod inserted from the breech, pump the barrel full a few
times. Remove and dry with a couple of patches. Examine the bore to
see that there are in evidence no patches of metal fouling which, if
present, can be readily detected by the naked eye, then swab out with
the swabbing solution--a dilute metal-fouling solution (subparagraph
_j_). The amount of swabbing required with the swabbing solution can
be determined only by experience, assisted by the color of the
patches. Swabbing should be continued, however, as long as the wiping
patch is discolored by a bluish-green stain. Normally a couple of
minutes' work is sufficient. Dry thoroughly and oil.

(_d_) The proper method of oiling a barrel is as follows; Wipe the
cleaning rod dry; select a clean patch and thoroughly saturate it with
sperm oil or warmed cosmic, being sure that the cosmic has penetrated
the patch; scrub the bore with the patch, finally drawing the patch
smoothly from the muzzle to the breech, allowing the cleaning rod to
turn with the rifling. The bore will be found now to be smooth and
bright so that any subsequent rust and sweating can be easily detected
by inspection.

(_e_) If patches of metal fouling are seen upon visual inspection of
the bore the standard metal fouling solution prepared as hereinafter
prescribed must be used. After scrubbing out with the soda solution,
plug the bore from the breech with a cork at the front end of the
chamber or where the rifling begins. Slip a 2-inch section of rubber
hose over the muzzle down to the sight and fill with the standard
solution to at least one-half inch above the muzzle of the barrel. Let
it stand for 30 minutes, pour out the standard solution, remove hose
and breech plug, and swab out thoroughly with soda solution to
neutralize and remove all trace of ammonia and powder fouling. Wipe
the barrel clean, dry, and oil. With few exceptions, one application
is sufficient, but if all fouling is not removed, as determined by
careful visual inspection of the bore and of the wiping patches,
repeat as described above.

(_f_) After properly cleaning with either the swabbing solution or the
standard solution, as has just been described, the bore should be
clean and safe to oil and put away, but as a measure of safety a patch
should always be run through the bore on the next day and the bore
and wiping patch examined to insure that cleaning has been properly
accomplished. The bore should then be oiled, as described above.

(_g_) If the swabbing solution or the standard metal-fouling solution
is not available, the barrel should be scrubbed, as already described,
with the soda solution, dried, and oiled with a light oil. At the end
of 24 hours it should again be cleaned, when it will usually be found
to have "sweated"; that is, rust having formed under the smear of
metal fouling where powder fouling was present, the surface is puffed
up. Usually a second cleaning is sufficient, but to insure safety it
should be again examined at the end of a few days, before final
oiling. The swabbing solution should always be used, if available, for
it must be remembered that each puff when the bore "sweats" is an
incipient rust pit.

(_h_) A. clean dry surface having been obtained, to prevent rust it is
necessary to coat every portion of this surface with a film of neutral
oil. If the protection required is but temporary and the arm is to be
cleaned or fired in a few days, sperm oil may be used. This is easily
applied and easily removed, but has not sufficient body to hold its
surface for more than a few days. If rifles are to be prepared for
storage or shipment, a heavier oil, such as cosmic, must be used.

(_i_) In preparing arms for storage or shipment they should be cleaned
with particular care, using the metal-fouling solution as described
above. Care should be taken, insured by careful inspection on
succeeding day or days, that the cleaning is properly done and all
traces of ammonia solution removed. The bore is then ready to be
coated with cosmic. At ordinary temperatures cosmic is not fluid. In
order, therefore, to insure that every part of the surface is coated
with a film of oil the cosmic should be warmed. Apply the cosmic first
with a brush; then, with the breech plugged, fill the barrel to the
muzzle, pour out the surplus, remove the breechblock, and allow to
drain. It is believed that more rifles are ruined by improper
preparation for storage than from any other cause. If, the bore is not
clean when oiled--that is, if powder fouling is present or rust has
started--a half inch of cosmic on the outside will not stop its
action, and the barrel will be ruined. Remember that the surface must
be perfectly cleaned before the heavy oil is applied. If the
instructions as given above are carefully followed, arms may be stored
for years without harm.

(_j_) Preparation of solutions:

_Soda solution._--This should be a saturated solution of sal soda
(bicarbonate of soda). A strength of at least 20 per cent is
necessary. The spoon referred to in the following directions is the
model 1910 spoon issued in the mess outfit.

Sal soda, one-fourth pound, or four (4) heaping spoonfuls.

Water, 1 pint or cup, model of 1910, to upper rivets.

The sal soda will dissolve more readily in hot water.

_Swabbing solution._--Ammonium persulphate, 60 grains, one-half
spoonful smoothed off.

Ammonia, 28 per cent, 6 ounces, or three-eighths of a pint, or 12
spoonfuls.

Water, 4 ounces, or one-fourth pint, or 8 spoonfuls.

Dissolve the ammonium persulphate in the water and add the ammonia.
Keep in tightly corked bottle; pour out only what is necessary at the
time, and keep the bottle corked.

_Standard metal fouling solution._--Ammonium persulphate, 1 ounce, or
2 medium heaping spoonfuls.

Ammonium carbonate, 200 grains, or 1 heaping spoonful.

Ammonia, 28 per cent, 6 ounces, or three-eighths pint, or 12
spoonfuls.

Water, 4 ounces, or one-fourth pint, or 8 spoonfuls.

Powder the persulphate and carbonate together, dissolve in the water
and add the ammonia; mix thoroughly and allow to stand for one hour
before using. It should be kept in a strong bottle, tightly corked.
The solution should not be used more than twice, and used solution
should not be mixed with unused solution, but should be bottled
separately. The solution, when mixed, should be used within 30 days.
Care should be exercised in mixing and using this solution to prevent
injury to the rifle. An experienced noncommissioned officer should mix
the solution and superintend its use.

Neither of these ammonia solutions have any appreciable action on
steel when not exposed to the air, but If allowed to evaporate on
steel they attack it rapidly. Care should, therefore, be taken that
none spills on the mechanism and that the barrel is washed out
promptly with soda solution. The first application of soda solution
removes the greater portion of the powder fouling and permits a more
effective and economical use of the ammonia solution. These ammonia
solutions are expensive and should be used economically.

(_k_) It is a fact recognized by all that a highly polished steel
surface-rusts, much less easily than one which is roughened; also that
a barrel which is pitted fouls much more rapidly than one which is
smooth. Every effort, therefore, should be made to prevent the
formation of pits, which are merely enlarged rust spots, and which not
only affect the accuracy of the arm but increase the labor of
cleaning.

(_l_) The chambers of rifles are frequently neglected because they are
not readily inspected. Care should be taken to see that they are
cleaned as thoroughly as the bore. A roughened chamber delays greatly
the rapidity of fire, and not infrequently causes shells to stick.

(_m_) A cleaning rack should be provided for every barrack. Rifles
should always be cleaned from the breach, thus avoiding possible
injury to the rifling at the muzzle, which would affect the shotting
adversely. If the bore for a length of 6 inches at the muzzle is
perfect, a minor injury near the chamber will have little effect on
the accuracy of the rifle. The rifle should be cleaned as soon as the
firing for the day is completed. The fouling is easier to remove then,
and if left longer it will corrode the barrel.

(_n_) The principles as outlined above apply equally well for the care
of the barrel of the automatic pistol. Special attention should be
paid to cleaning the chamber of the pistol, using the soda solution.
It has been found that the chamber pits readily if it is not carefully
cleaned, with the result that the operation of the pistol is made less
certain." (_Par, 134, Small Arms Firing Manual, 1913._)


=Section 4. Uniforms.=

Uniforms and clothing issued to enlisted men must not be sold, pawned,
loaned, given away, lost, or damaged through neglect or carelessness.
Any soldier who violates this rule may be tried by a military court
and punished.

All uniforms and articles of clothing issued to enlisted men, whether
or not charged on their clothing allowance, remain the property of
the United States and do not become the property of the soldier either
before or after discharge from the service. Under the law a soldier
honorably discharged from the Army of the United States is authorized
to wear his uniform from the place of his discharge to his home within
three months after the date of such discharge. To wear the uniform
after three months from the date of such discharge renders such person
liable to fine or imprisonment, or both.

The =dress uniform= dismounted (the blue uniform) consists of the
dress cap, dress coat, dress trousers, and russet-leather shoes. The
straight, standing, military, white linen collar, showing no opening
in front, is always worn with this uniform, with not to exceed
one-half inch showing above the collar of the coat. Turndown,
piccadilly, or roll collars are not authorized.

When under arms, white gloves and the garrison belt are worn. The
dress uniform mounted is the same as dismounted, except that riding
gloves, leggings, and spurs are worn, and the saddle cloth, showing
regimental number and troop letter, is placed over the saddle blanket.

The =full-dress uniform= is the same as the dress uniform, with the
breast cord added.

The =service uniform= is either cotton (summer) or woolen (winter)
olive drab.

For duty in the field it consists of the service hat, with cord sewed
on, service coat or sweater, service breeches, olive-drab flannel
shirt, leggings, russet-leather shoes, spurs, riding gloves, and
identification tag. In cold weather olive-drab woolen gloves may be
prescribed.

In warm weather the coat, sweater, and riding gloves may be omitted
when authorized by the commanding officer.

When not in the field, the service cap is worn instead of the campaign
hat. Under arms, dismounted, white gloves and the garrison belt (or
russet-leather belt and cartridge box) are worn.

Spurs and riding gloves are worn on all mounted duty or when on
mounted pass.

Wear the exact uniform prescribed by your commanding officer, whether
you are on duty or off duty.

Never wear a mixed uniform as, for instance, a part of the service
uniform with the blue uniform.

Never wear any part of the uniform with civilian clothes. It is very
unsoldierly, for example, to wear a civilian overcoat over the uniform
or to wear the uniform overcoat over a civilian suit.

Keep the uniform clean and neat and in good repair.

Grease spots and dust and dirt should be removed as soon as possible.

Rips and tears should be promptly mended. In taking the field always
wear new clothing as it may be some time before you are again
supplied, and old clothing on field service goes to pieces rapidly.

Missing buttons and cap and collar ornaments should be promptly
replaced.

There is but one correct and soldierly way to wear the cap. Never wear
it on the back or side of the head.

The service hat should be worn in the regulation shape, peaked, with
four indentations, and with hat cord sewed on. Do not cover it with
pen or pencil marks. The chin cord should always be in order and fit
for long field service.

Never appear outside your room or tent with your coat or olive-drab
shirt unbuttoned or collar of coat unhooked. Chevrons, service
stripes, and campaign medals and badges are a part of the uniform and
must be worn as prescribed.

When coats are not worn with the service uniform olive-drab shirts are
prescribed.

Suspenders must never be worn exposed to view.

Never appear in breeches without leggings.

Leather leggings should be kept clean. Saddle soap should be used to
clean _all leather_. Should the shoes, leggings, or leather equipment
be soaked by rain or swimming they will not become hard if covered
with a light coat of neat's-foot oil applied just before they dry out.
All new leather should be oiled before being placed in service.
Leather can be preserved for years by the use of saddle soap and
neat's-foot oil, but once it becomes hard and cracked nothing will
make it serviceable. Canvas leggings should be scrubbed when dirty.

Russet-leather (tan) shoes should be kept clean. Leather cleaned with
saddle soap can be polished by rubbing with a flannel cloth.

The overcoat when worn must be buttoned throughout and the collar
hooked. When the belt is worn it will be worn outside the overcoat.


=Section 5. The service kit.=

The service kit is composed of two parts--(_a_) the field kit, which
includes everything the soldier wears or carries with him in the
field, and (_b_) the surplus kit.

The field kit consists of--

  (1) The clothing worn on the person.
  (2) Arms and equipment, consisting of--

(_a_) Arms and equipments of all enlisted men (except buglers
and members of bands and machine-gun troops):

  1 brush and thong.[1]
  1 canteen, cavalry.[2]
  1 canteen strap, cavalry.[2]
  90 cartridges, ball, caliber .30
  21 cartridges, ball, pistol, caliber .45.
  1 cartridge belt, caliber .30, cavalry.
  1 cartridge-belt suspenders, pair.
  1 cup
  1 fork.
  1 front-sight cover
  1 gun sling.
  1 knife.
  2 magazines, pistol, extra.
  1 magazine pocket web, double
  1 meat can
  1 oiler and thong case.[1].
  1 pistol
  1 pistol holster.
  1 pouch for first-aid packet.
  1 rifle scabbard.
  1 rifle, United States, caliber .30.
  1 saber and scabbard, cavalry.
  1 saber knot.
  1 saber straps, pair.
  1 spoon.
  1 spurs, pair.
  1 spur straps, set.

(_b_) Members of bands and buglers:

  1 canteen, cavalry.[2]
  1 canteen strap, cavalry.[2]
  21 cartridges, ball, pistol, caliber .45.
  1 cup.
  1 fork.
  1 knife.
  2 magazines, pistol, extra.
  1 meat can.
  1 pistol belt without saber ring.
  1 pistol.
  1 pistol holster.
  1 pouch for first-aid packet.
  1 spoon.
  1 spurs, pair.
  1 spur straps, set.

(_c_) In addition to (_b_) first sergeant of headquarters troop (drum
major) will have:

  1 saber and scabbard, cavalry, 2 saber straps.
  1 saber knot.

(_d_) For members of machine-gun troops, except that buglers attached
to machine-gun troops (only) will have 1 pistol belt without saber
ring in lieu of 1 cartridge belt, 1 cartridge-belt suspenders, pair,
and 1 magazine pocket, web, double:

  1 bolo.
  1 bolo scabbard.
  1 canteen, cavalry.[4]
  1 canteen strap, cavalry.[4]
  21 cartridges, ball, pistol, caliber .45.
  1 cartridge belt, caliber .30, cavalry.
  1 cartridge-belt suspenders, pair.
  1 cup.
  1 fork.
  1 knife.
  2 magazines, pistol, extra.
  1 magazine pocket, web, doubles.
  1 meat can.
  1 pistol.
  1 pistol holster.
  1 pouch for first-aid packet.
  1 spoon.
  1 spurs, pair.
  1 spur straps, set.

(_e_) Horse equipments for each enlisted man individually mounted on a
horse:

  1 bridle, cavalry, model of 1909
    or 1912, or curb bridle, model
    of 1902.
  1 bridle, watering, if curb bridle
    model of 1902 is issued.
  1 currycomb.
  1 halter headstall.
  1 halter tie rope.
  1 horse brush.
  1 lariat.
  1 lariat strap.
  1 link
  1 nose bag, or feed bag (with
    grain bag).
  1 picket pin.
  1 saddle, cavalry, complete.[3]
  1 saddlebags, pair.
  1 saddle blanket.
  1 surcingle.

         [Footnote 1: To be omitted if rifle is provided with
         spare-part container.]

         [Footnote 2: In lieu of these the canteen, model of 1910,
         with canteen cover, dismounted, may be issued.]

         [Footnote 3: One saddle for each troop and the saddles for
         the 2 color sergeants are to be provided with a guidon
         stirrup.]

         [Footnote 4: In lieu of these the canteen, model of 1910,
         with canteen cover, dismounted, may be issued.]


=Care of saddlery.

(Cav. Drill Reg. 1916.)=

=975.= The saddlery and equipment must always be cleaned after use.
This duty, like the care of the horse, is to be regarded as part of
the mounted duty itself; thus a drill is not over until horse,
saddlery, arms, and equipments have been put again in condition.
According to need, the leather is simply wiped off with a damp sponge
or fully taken apart and well soaped and cleaned. In no case must it
be soaked in water.

If the soap used does not contain a sufficient amount of free oil the
leather must be oiled to keep it pliable. A mixture of one-half
neat's-foot oil and one-half mutton tallow, well rubbed in, keeps
leather in good condition. Special care is taken to keep the underside
of the skirts of the saddle and the parts which do not come in contact
with the clothing well oiled. The seat and outside of the skirts will
rarely require oil.

Metal parts are kept clean and free from rust; they may require oiling
if not regularly used.

The saddle blanket must be kept clean and soft and free from wrinkles.
After use it must be dried and then well shaken (unfolded). It must
never be folded wet and left thus with the saddle. Provision will be
made in the saddle room or stables for hanging it up to dry.

When necessary the blanket should be thoroughly cleansed by repeated
immersions in tepid soapsuds and hung over a pole or line to dry
without wringing or pressing it.


=Section 6. The surplus kit.=

  The surplus kit for each man consists of--
  1 breeches, pair.
  1 drawers, pair.
  1 shirt, olive drab.
  1 shoes, russet-leather, pair.
  2 stockings, pair.
  1 undershirt.
  1 shoe laces, extra, pair.

Each surplus kit bag contains 1 jointed cleaning rod and case.

Squad leaders are responsible that surplus kit bags are kept in order
and fully packed in the field.[5] Men are allowed access to them for
the purpose of making substitutions.

The surplus kits are packed in surplus kit bags, one for each squad,
one for sergeants, and one for cooks and buglers.

The kit of each man will be packed as follows:

Stockings to be rolled tightly, one pair in the toe of each shoe;
shoes placed together, heels at opposite ends, soles outward, wrapped
tightly in underwear, and bundle securely tied around the middle by
the extra pair of the shoe laces, each bundle to be tagged with the
company number of the owner. These individual kits will be packed in
the surplus kit bag in two layers of four kits each, the breeches and
olive drab shirts to be neatly folded and packed on the top and sides
of the layers, the jointed cleaning rod and case, provided for each
squad, being attached by the thongs on the inside of the bag.

When overcoats or sweaters are not prescribed to be worn on the person
they will be collected into bundles of convenient size and secured by
burlap or other suitable material, or will be boxed. They will be
marked ready for shipment to be forwarded when required.[5]

         [Footnote 5: In campaign or simulated campaign, when an
         organization is restricted to its prescribed field-train
         transportation, surplus kits, overcoats, and sweaters are
         stored on the line of communications or other designated
         place with the permanent camp equipment of the organization.]


=Section 7. Assembling equipment.=

TO MAKE THE BLANKET ROLL.

Spread the shelter half, triangular part to the right, buttons
underneath. Fold triangular part across shelter half, making a
rectangle.

Fold blanket through center, parallel to stripes; fold again through
center perpendicular to stripes. Lay folded blanket on shelter half,
longer side of blanket parallel to and 1 inch from edge of shelter
half opposite straps and equidistant from sides. Place tent,
pole, folded, close to and parallel to near edge of blanket, end of
pole flush with left side of blanket; pins and tent rope to be
similarly placed at right side of blanket, occupying about the same
space as pole. Arrange the clothing and toilet articles on right and
left sides of blanket, leaving center space clear.

Fold the free portions of the right and left sides of shelter half
over the blanket. Fold the far edge of the shelter half 6 inches
toward the blanket, making a pocket.

With hands and knees roll the blanket and shelter half toward and into
the pocket. Buckle straps around roll, strap buckles on line with
shelter half buttons.


ROLL THE OVERCOAT AND SLICKER.

Turn the garment inside out, collar extended, and fold once the long
way. Roll tightly from the front edge, making roll the full length of
garment.


TO PACK THE McCLELLAN SADDLE.

Put saddle pockets on saddle; fasten straps to cincha rings. Place
articles pertaining to the man in near pocket, those pertaining to the
horse in off pocket.

The overcoat, slicker, or both, to be strapped on pommel, collar to
left.

Blanket roll to be strapped on cantle. Feed bag, if empty, neatly
folded on top of roll, "U. S." up. If grain is carried, the grain bag
is tied inside the feed bag, which is strapped on top of the pommel
roll, above the overcoat or slicker.

Lariat, in uniform coils of about 10-inch diameter, fastened to near
cantle ring by lariat strap fastened to one ring and passing through
the other; coil secured by two outside straps of saddle pocket flap.
To prevent flapping and injuring adjacent troopers and horses the
picket pin may be inserted through the saddlebag strap ring, point
downward, or it may be placed horizontally under the flap straps of
the near saddlebag, point to the rear.

Canteen snapped into off cantle ring, canteen strap passing through
handle of cup, except the cup model 1910, which is fitted over the
bottom of the canteen, model 1910, inside the cover.

Rifle on near side; saber on off side, attached to pommel ring.

The surcingle is buckled over the saddle. The two extra fitted
horseshoes, one front and one hind, may be wired, one on bottom of
each stirrup, or they may be fastened together with a nail and carried
in off saddle pocket. To prevent rust the horseshoe nails should
always be well oiled and wrapped in canvas or leather. They are
carried in the off saddle pocket.

The two reserve rations, extra ammunition, and other extra articles
should be so distributed between the two pockets as to balance the
weight on the horse.

[Illustration: McCLELLAN SADDLE.

Full pack, near side.]

[Illustration: McCLELLAN SADDLE.

Full pack, off side.]

[Illustration: EQUIPMENT ARRANGED FOR INSPECTION.

The arrangement should be uniform in each regiment.]

[Illustration: SHELTER TENT AND EQUIPMENT ARRANGED FOR INSPECTION.

The arrangement should be uniform in each regiment.]

[Illustration: PLATE A.]

[Illustration: PLATE B.]




CHAPTER III.

RATIONS AND FORAGE.


=Section 1. The ration.=

A ration is the allowance of food for one man for one day.

In the field there are three kinds of rations issued, as follows:

The _garrison ration_ is intended to be issued in kind whenever
possible. The approximate net weight of this ration is 4.5 pounds.

The _reserve ration_ is the simplest efficient ration, and constitutes
the reserve carried for field service. It consists of--

                                    Ounces.
  Bacon                               12
  Hard bread                          16
  Coffee, roasted and ground           1.12
  Sugar                                2.4
  Salt                                  .16
                                     ------
  Approximate net weight   pounds      2

The _field ration_ is the ration prescribed in orders by the commander
of the field forces. It consists of the reserve ration, in whole or in
part, supplemented by articles requisitioned or purchased locally or
shipped from the rear.

In campaign a command carries as a part of its normal equipment the
following rations:

  (_a_) On each man: At least two days' reserve rations.
  (_b_) In the ration section of the field train, for each man:
    Two days' field and one day's reserve, and for each
    animal two days' grain rations.
  (_c_) In the supply train:
    Of an infantry division, two days' field and grain
      rations.
    Of a cavalry division, one day's field and grain
      rations.

In addition to the foregoing, commanders will require each man on the
march to carry the unconsumed portion of the day's ration issued the
night before for the noonday meal. In the same manner, cavalry and
field artillery carry on their horses a portion of their grain ration
issued the night before for a noonday feed. Reserve rations are
consumed only in case of extreme necessity, when other supplies are
not available. They are not to be consumed or renewed without an
express order from the officer in command of the troops who is
responsible for the provision of supplies, namely, the division
commander or other independent-detachment commander. Every officer
within the limits of his command is held responsible for the
enforcement of this regulation. Reserve rations consumed must be
replaced at the first opportunity.


=Section 2. Individual cooking.=

Sometimes rations for several days are issued to the soldier at one
time, and in such cases you should be very careful to so use the
rations that they will last you the entire period. If you stuff
yourself one day, or waste your rations, you will have to starve later
on.

Generally the cooking for the troop will be done by the troop cook,
but sometimes every soldier will have to prepare his own meals, using
only his field mess kit for the purpose.

The best fire for individual cooking is a small, clear one, or, better
yet, a few brisk coals. To make such a fire, first gather a number of
sticks about 1 inch in diameter. These should be dry. Dead limbs
adhering to a tree are dryer than those picked up from the ground.
Split some of these and shave them up into kindling. Dig a trench in
the ground, laid with the wind, about a foot long, 4 inches wide, and
6 inches deep. Start the fire in this trench gradually, piling on the
heavier wood as the fire grows. When the trench is full of burning
wood, allow it a few minutes to burn down to coals and stop blazing
high. Then rest the meat can and cup over the trench and start
cooking. Either may be supported, if necessary, with green sticks. If
you can not scrape a trench in the soil, build one up out of rocks or
with two parallel logs.

The following recipes have been furnished from the office of the
Quartermaster General, United States Army:

_Coffee._--Fill the cup two-thirds full of water and bring to a boil.
Add one heaping spoonful of coffee and stir well, adding one spoonful
of sugar if desired. Boil five minutes and then set it to the side of
the fire to simmer for about 10 minutes. Then, to clear the coffee,
throw in a spoonful or two of cold water. This coffee is of medium
strength and is within the limit of the ration if made but twice a
day.

_Cocoa._--Take two-thirds of a cupful of water, bring to a boil, add
one heaping spoonful of cocoa, and stir until dissolved. Add one
spoonful of sugar, if desired, and boil for five minutes.

_Chocolate._--Take two-thirds of a cupful of water, bring to a boil,
add a piece of chocolate about the size of a hickory nut, breaking or
cutting it into small pieces and stirring until dissolved. Add one
spoonful of sugar, if desired, and boil for five minutes.

_Tea._--Take two-thirds of a cupful of water, bring to a boil, add
one-half of a level spoonful of tea, and then let it stand or "draw"
for three minutes. If allowed to stand longer the tea will get bitter,
unless separated from the tea leaves.


MEATS.

_Bacon._--Cut slices about five to the inch, three of which should
generally be sufficient for one man for one meal. Place in a meat can
with about one-half inch of cold water. Let come to a boil and then
pour the water off. Fry over a brisk fire, turning the bacon once and
quickly browning it. Remove the bacon to lid of meat can, leaving the
grease for frying potatoes, onions, rice, flapjacks; etc., according
to recipe.

_Fresh meat_ (to fry).--To fry, a small amount of grease (one to two
spoonfuls) Is Necessary. Put grease in the meat can and let come to a
smoking temperature, then drop in the steak and, if about one-half
inch thick, let fry for about one minute before turning, depending
upon whether it is desired it shall be rare, medium, or well done.
Then turn and fry briskly as before. Salt and pepper to taste.

Applies to beef, veal, pork, mutton, venison, etc.

_Fresh meat_ (to broil).--Cut in slices about one inch thick, from
half as large as the hand to four times that size. Sharpen a stick or
branch of convenient length--say, from two to four feet long--and
weave the point of the stick through the steak several times, so that
it may be readily turned over a few brisk coals or on the windward
side of a small fire. Allow to brown nicely, turning frequently. Salt
and pepper to taste. Meat with considerable fat is preferred, though
any meat may be broiled in this manner.

_Fresh meat_ (to stew).--Cut into chunks from one-half inch to one
inch cubes. Fill cup about one-third full of meat and cover with about
one inch of water. Let boil or simmer about one hour, or until tender.
Add such fibrous vegetables as carrots turnips, or cabbage, cut into
small chunks, soon after the meat is put on to boil, and potatoes,
onions, or other tender vegetables when the meat is about half done.
Amount of vegetables to be added, about the same as meat, depending
upon supply and taste. Salt and pepper to taste. Applies to all fresh
meat and fowls. The proportion of meat and vegetables used varies with
their abundance, and fixed quantities can not be adhered to. Fresh
fish can be handled as above, except that it is cooked much quicker,
and potatoes and onions and canned corn are the only vegetables
generally used with it, thus making a chowder. A slice of bacon would
greatly improve the flavor. May be conveniently cooked in meat can or
cup.


VEGETABLES.

_Potatoes_ (fried).--Take two medium-sized potatoes or one large one
(about one-half pound), peel and cut into slices about one-fourth inch
thick and scatter well in the meat can in which the grease remains
after frying the bacon. Add sufficient water to half cover the
potatoes, cover with the lid to keep the moisture in, and let come to
a boil for about 15 to 20 minutes. Remove the cover and dry as
desired. Salt and pepper to taste. During the cooking the bacon
already prepared may be kept on the cover, which is most conveniently
placed bottom side up over the cooking vegetables.

_Onions_ (fried).--Same as potatoes.

_Potatoes_ (boiled).--Peel two medium-sized potatoes (about one-half
pound) or one large one, and cut in coarse chunks of about the same
size--say, 1-1/2-inch cubes. Place in meat can and three-fourths fill
with water. Cover with lid and let boil or simmer for 15 or 20
minutes. They are done when easily penetrated with a sharp stick. Pour
off the water and let dry out for one or two minutes over hot ashes or
light coals.

_Potatoes_ (baked).--Take two medium-sized potatoes (about one-half
pound) or one large one cut in half. Lay in a bed of light coals and
cover with same and smother with ashes. Do not disturb for 30 or 40
minutes, when they should be done.

_Canned tomatoes._--One 2-pound can is generally sufficient for five
men.

_Stew._--Pour into the meat can one man's allowance of tomatoes and
add about two large hardtacks broken into small pieces and let come to
a boil. Add salt and pepper to taste, or add a pinch of salt and
one-fourth spoonful of sugar.

_Or_, having fried the bacon, pour the tomatoes into the meat can, the
grease remaining, and add, if desired, two broken hardtacks. Set over
a brisk fire and let come to a boil.

_Or_, heat the tomatoes just as they come from the can, adding two
pinches of salt and one-half spoonful of sugar, if desired.

_Or_, especially in hot weather, eaten cold with hard bread, they are
very palatable.

_Rice._--Take about two-thirds of a cupful of water, bring to a boil,
add 4 heaping spoonfuls of rice, and boil until the grains are soft
enough to be easily mashed between the fingers (about 20 minutes). Add
two pinches of salt and, after stirring, pour off the water and empty
rice out on meat can. Bacon grease or sugar may be added.

_Corn meal, fine hominy, oatmeal._--Take about one-third of a cupful
of water, bring to a boil, add 4 heaping spoonfuls of the meal or
hominy, and boil about 20 minutes. Then add about two pinches of salt
and stir well.

_Dried beans and peas._--Put 4 heaping spoonfuls in about two-thirds
of a cupful of water and boil until soft. This generally takes from
three to four hours. Add one pinch of salt. About half an hour before
the beans are done add one slice of bacon.


HOT BREADS.

_Flapjacks._--Take 6 spoonfuls of flour and one-third spoonful of
baking powder and mix thoroughly (or dry mix in a large pan before
issue, at the rate of 25 pounds of flour and 3 half cans of baking
powder for 100 men). Add sufficient cold water to make a batter that
will drip freely from the spoon, adding a pinch of salt. Pour into the
meat can, which should contain the grease from fried bacon or a
spoonful of butter or fat, and place over medium hot coals sufficient
to bake, so that in from 5 to 7 minutes the flapjack may be turned by
a quick toss of the pan. Fry from 5 to 7 minutes longer, or until by
examination it is found to be done.

_Hoecake._--Hoecake is made exactly the same as flapjacks by
substituting _corn meal_ for _flour_.

_Emergency rations._--Detailed instructions as to the manner of
preparing the emergency ration are found on the label of each can.
Remember that even a very limited amount of bacon or hard bread, or
both, consumed with the emergency ration makes it far more palatable,
and generally extends the period during which it can be consumed with
relish. For this reason it would be better to husband the supply of
hard bread and bacon for use with the emergency ration when it becomes
evident that the latter must be consumed rather than to retain the
emergency ration to the last extremity and force its exclusive use for
a longer period than two or three days.


=Section 3. The forage ration.=

"_1077, Army Regulations._--The forage ration for a horse is 14 pounds
of hay and 12 pounds of oats, corn, or barley, and 3-1/3 pounds of
straw (or hay) for bedding; for a Field Artillery horse of the
heavy-draft type, weighing 1,300 pounds or over, 17 pounds of hay and
14 pounds of oats, corn, or barley, and 3-1/3 pounds of straw (or hay)
for bedding; for a mule, 14 pounds of hay and 9 pounds of oats, corn,
or barley, and 3-1/3 pounds of straw (or hay) for bedding. To each
animal 3 pounds of bran may be issued in lieu of that quantity of
grain.

"The commanding officer may, in his discretion, vary the proportions
of the components of the ration (1 pound of grain, 1-1/2 pounds of
hay, and 2 pounds of straw being taken as equivalents), and in the
field may substitute other recognized articles of forage obtained
locally, the variation or the substitution not to exceed the money
value of the components of the ration at the contract rates in effect
at the time of change.

"_1078, Army Regulations._--Where grazing is practicable, or when
little work is required of the animals, commanding officers will
reduce the forage ration. When, on the other hand, conditions demand
it, they are authorized to increase the ration, not in excess,
however, of savings made."

In the field the authorized allowances must often be reduced and
supplemented by grazing and other kinds of food, such as green forage,
beans, peas, rice, palay, wheat, and rye. Wheat and rye should be
crushed and fed sparingly (about one-fourth of the allowance). For
unshelled corn, add about one-quarter weight.

On the march the grain ration is the only forage carried. It consists
of 12 pounds of grain for each horse and 9 pounds of grain for each
mule. Recourse must be had to grazing if it is not possible to procure
long forage in the country traversed.

In campaign a command carries as a part of its normal equipment the
following forage:

(_a_) For each draft animal: On each vehicle a _reserve_ of one day's
grain ration for its draft animals.

(_b_) On animals and vehicles: A portion of their grain ration issued
the night before, for a noonday feed.

(_c_) In the ration section of the field train, for each animal, two
days' grain rations.

(_d_) In supply train of an Infantry division two days' grain
rations, and of a Cavalry division one day's grain ration.




CHAPTER IV.

PERSONAL HYGIENE AND CARE OF THE FEET.


PERSONAL HYGIENE.

History shows that in almost every war many more men die of disease
than from wounds received in battle. Much of this disease is
preventable and is due either to the ignorance or carelessness of the
person who has the disease or of other persons about him. It is a
terrible truth that one man who violates any of the great rules of
health may be the means of killing many more of his comrades than are
killed by the bullets of the enemy.

=It is therefore most important that every soldier should learn how to
take care of his health when in the field and that he should also
insist that his comrades do not violate any of the rules prescribed
for this purpose.=

A great many diseases are due to germs, which are either little
animals or little plants so very small that they can only be seen by
aid of the microscope. All diseases caused by germs are "catching."
All other diseases are not "catching."

There are only five ways of catching disease:

(_a_) Getting certain germs on the body by touching some one or
something which has them on it. Thus, one may catch venereal diseases,
smallpox, measles, scarlet fever, chicken pox, mumps, boils, body
lice, ringworm, barber's itch, dhobie itch, and some other diseases.
Wounds are infected in this manner.

(_b_) Breathing in certain germs which float in the air. In this way
one may catch pneumonia, consumption, influenza, diphtheria, whooping
cough, tonsilitis, spinal meningitis, measles, and certain other
diseases.

(_c_) Taking certain germs in through the mouth in eating or drinking.
Dysentery, cholera, typhoid fever, diarrhea, and intestinal worms may
be caught in this manner.

(_d_) Having certain germs injected into the body by the bites of
insects, such as mosquitoes, fleas, and bedbugs. Malaria, yellow
fever, dengue fever, and bubonic plague may be caught in this way.

(_e_) Inheriting the germ from one's parents.

Persons may have these germs sometimes without apparently being sick
with any disease. Such persons and persons who are sick with the
diseases are a great source of danger to others about them. Germs
which multiply in such persons are found in their urine and excretions
from the bowels; in discharges from ulcers and abscesses; in the spit
or particles coughed or sneezed into the air; in the perspiration or
scales from the skin; and in the blood sucked up by biting insects.

Those who have taken care of their health and who have not become
weakened by bad habits, exposure, and fatigue are not only less liable
to catch disease, but are more apt to recover when taken sick.

Knowing all these things, the soldier can understand the reasons for
the following rules and how important it is that they should be
carried out by each and every person:

Stay away from persons having "catching" diseases.

If you have any disease, don't try to cure it yourself, but go to the
surgeon. Insist that other soldiers do likewise.

Typhoid fever is one of the most dangerous and common camp diseases.
Modern medicine has, however, discovered an effective preventative for
this disease in the typhoid prophylactic, which renders the person
immune from typhoid fever. The treatment consists in injecting into
the arm a preventative serum. The injection is given three times at
10-day intervals.

Association with lewd women is dangerous. It may result in disabling
you for life. It is the cause of a disease (syphilis) which may be
transmitted by a parent to his children. Soldiers with venereal
diseases should not use basins or toilet articles used by others, as
the germs of these diseases if gotten into the eye very often cause
blindness. Likewise, if they use the same drinking cup used by others
they may give others the disease. They should promptly report their
trouble to the surgeon, that they may receive the best medical advice
and attention.

Should a soldier expose himself to infection by having intercourse
with an unknown woman, he should report as soon as possible afterwards
to the regimental infirmary for prophylactic treatment, which, if
taken within a few hours after intercourse, will prevent to a large
degree the liability of contracting any disease.

Cooked germs are dead and therefore harmless. Water, even when clear,
may be alive with deadly germs. Therefore, when the conditions are
such that the commanding officer orders all drinking water to be
boiled, be careful to live up to this order.

Use the latrines and don't go elsewhere to relieve yourself. In open
latrines cover your deposit with dirt, as it breeds flies and may also
be full of germs.

Flies carry germs from one place to another. Therefore, see that your
food and mess kit are protected from them.

All slops and scraps of food scattered about camp soon produce bad
odors and draw flies. Therefore do your part toward keeping the camp
free from disease by carefully depositing such refuse in the pits or
cans used for this purpose.

Urinate only in the latrines, or in the cans set out for this purpose,
never on the ground around camp, because it not only causes bad smells
but urine sometimes contains the germs of "catching" diseases.

Soapy water thrown on the ground soon produces bad odors. Therefore in
camps of several days' duration this water should be thrown in covered
pits or in cans used for this purpose.

As certain mosquitoes can transmit malaria and yellow fever, use your
mosquito bar for this reason as well as for personal comfort.

Keep your mouth clean by brushing your teeth once or twice a day. It
helps to prevent the teeth from decaying. Decayed teeth cause
toothache. They also lead one to swallow food without properly chewing
it, and this leads to stomach troubles of various kinds. Food left
around and between the teeth is bad for the teeth and forms good
breeding places for germs.

Keep the skin clean. Through the pores of the skin the body gets rid
of much waste and poisonous matter. Therefore remove this and keep the
pores open by bathing once every day, if possible. If water is scarce,
rub the body over with a wet towel. If no water is at hand, take a dry
rub. Wash carefully the armpits, between the legs, and under the
foreskin, as this will prevent chafing.

The skin protects the sensitive parts underneath from injury and helps
to keep out germs. Therefore when blisters are formed don't tear off
the skin. Insert a needle under the skin a little distance back from
the blister and push it through to the opposite side. Press out the
liquid through the holes thus formed. Heat the needle red hot first,
with a match or candle, to kill the germs.

When the skin is broken (in cuts and wounds) keep the opening covered
with a bandage to keep out germs and dirt; otherwise the sore may
fester. Pus is always caused by germs.

Keep your hair short. Long hair and a long beard in the field
generally means a dirty head and a dirty face and favors skin
diseases, lice, and dandruff.

=Don't let any part of the body become chilled, as this very often is
the direct cause of diarrhea, dysentery, pneumonia, rheumatism, and
other diseases.=

Wet clothes may be worn while marching or exercising without bad
results, but there is great danger if one rests in wet clothing, as
the body may become chilled.

Don't sit or lie or sleep directly on damp ground, as this is sure to
chill the body.

When hot or perspiring or when wearing damp clothes, don't remain
where a breeze can strike you. You are sure to become chilled.

Every day, if possible, hang your blanket and clothing out to air in
the sun; shake or beat them with a small stick. Germs and vermin don't
like this treatment, but damp, musty clothing suits them very well.
Wash your shirts, underwear, and socks frequently. The danger of blood
poisoning from a wound is greatly increased if the bullet passes
through dirty clothes.

Ditch your tent as soon as you can, particularly a shelter tent, even
if you camp for one night only. Otherwise a little rain may ruin a
whole night's rest.

Always prepare your bed before dark. Level off the ground and scrape
out a little hollow for your hips. Get some straw or dry grass if
possible. Green grass or branches from trees are better than nothing.
Sleep on your poncho. This keeps the dampness from coming up from the
ground and chilling the body. Every minute spent in making a good bed
means about an hour's good rest later on.

Avoid the food and drink found for sale in the cheap stands about
camp. The quality is generally bad, and it is often prepared in filthy
places by very dirty persons.

The use of intoxicating liquor is particularly dangerous in the field.
Its excessive use, even at long intervals, breaks down one's system.
Drinking men are more apt to get sick and less liable to get well than
are their more sober comrades. If alcohol is taken at all, it is best
after the work of the day is over. It should never be taken when the
body is exposed to severe cold, as it diminishes the resistance of the
body. Hot tea or coffee is much preferable under these circumstances.


CARE OF THE FEET.

A soldier can not march with sore feet, and marching is the main part
of an infantryman's daily duty in the field. _All soldiers_ should be
familiar with the proper methods of caring for the feet. Sore feet are
generally due to carelessness, neglect, or ignorance on the part of
the soldier.

The most important factor in the care of the feet and the marching
ability of the soldier is the shoe. Civilian shoes, particularly
light, patent leather, or low shoes, are sure to cause injury and in
time will ruin a man's foot. Only the marching shoe issued by the
Quartermaster Corps should be worn, and they must be properly fitted
to the individual. It will not suffice to order a marching shoe of the
same size as one's ordinary civilian shoes, for it must be remembered
that a soldier may have to march many miles daily over rough roads and
carrying a heavy pack. The pack itself causes the foot to spread out
to a larger size, and the rough roads give so much exercise to the
muscles of the feet that they swell greatly through the increased
blood supply. (For directions as to measuring the foot for the
marching shoe, see General Order No. 26, War Department, 1912, a copy
of which should be on hand in each company.)

Do not start out on a march wearing new shoes. This is a frequent
cause of sore feet. New shoes should be properly broken in before
beginning a march by wearing them for several hours daily for a week
before the march, and they should be adapted to the contours of the
feet by stretching them with shoe stretchers with adjustable knobs to
take the pressure off painful corns and bunions. Such stretchers are
issued by the Quartermaster Corps, and there should be one or more
pair in every company of infantry. Should this be impracticable, then
the following is suggested:

The soldier stands in his new shoes in about 2-1/2 inches of water for
about five minutes until the leather is thoroughly pliable and moist;
he should then walk for about an hour on a level surface, letting the
shoes dry on his feet, to the irregularities of which the leather is
thus molded in the same way as it was previously molded over the shoe
last. On taking the shoes off a very little neat's-foot oil should be
rubbed into the leather to prevent its hardening and cracking.

If it is desired to waterproof shoes at any time, a considerable
amount of neat's-foot oil should be rubbed into the leather.
Waterproof leather causes the feet of some men to perspire unduly and
keeps them constantly soft.

Light woolen or heavy woolen socks will habitually be worn for
marching. Cotton socks will not be worn unless specifically ordered by
the surgeon. The socks will be large enough to permit free movement of
the toes, but not so loose as to permit of wrinkling. Darned socks, or
socks with holes in them, will not be worn in marching.

Until the feet have hardened they should be dusted with foot powder,
which can be obtained at the regimental infirmary, before each day's
march. Clean socks should be worn daily.

As soon as possible after reaching camp after a day of marching the
feet should be washed with soap and water, and the soldier should put
on a dry pair of socks and his extra pair of shoes from his surplus
kit. If the skin is tender, or the feet perspire, wash with warm salt
water or alum water, but do not soak the feet a long time, as this,
although very comforting at the time, tends to keep them soft. Should
blisters appear on the feet, prick and evacuate them by pricking at
the lower edge with a pin which has been passed through the flame of a
match and cover them with zinc oxide plaster applied hot. This plaster
can be obtained on request at the regimental infirmary. If serious
abrasions appear on the feet, or corns, bunions, and ingrowing nails
cause trouble, have your name placed on sick report and apply to the
surgeon for treatment. Cut the toenails square (fairly close in the
middle, but leaving the sides somewhat longer), as this prevents
ingrowing nails.




CHAPTER V.

EXTRACTS FROM CAVALRY DRILL REGULATIONS.

UNITED STATES ARMY, 1916.


=Section 1. Definitions.=

=Alignment.=--The placing of several troopers or units on the same
straight line; also the line on which such adjustment is made.

=Assembly.=--The grouping =in order=, and in a close-order formation,
of the elements of a command. The special arrangement and condition
that constitute =order= for each unit are explained in the
corresponding part of the text. The purpose of the assembly is to
bring about a close-order formation in order.

=Base.=--The element on which a formation or movement is regulated.
The base may be a trooper, two, four, section, platoon, or larger
unit. When the base is a single trooper in ranks, he may also be
termed the =guide=.

=Center.=--The middle point or element of a command. If the number of
elements considered be even, the right center element will be meant
when the center element is referred to.

=Column.=--A formation in which the elements of a command are placed
one behind the other. The elements here referred to may be troopers,
twos, fours, sections, platoons, or larger units. When used in these
regulations as a =word of command=, without qualifying words
indicating the kind of column (as =of twos=, =of platoons=, etc.),
=column= signifies =a column of fours=. In all other cases the word is
to be understood in its general sense unless the context indicates
the contrary.

=Deployment.=--An evolution in which the command extends its front, as
in forming line from column or in passing from close order to extended
order.

=Depth.=--The space from front to rear of any formation, including the
front and rear elements.

=Directing leader.=--The leader of a subordinate unit who temporarily
conducts the march when the commander is not leading in person. A
trooper in the rank of a platoon or smaller unit who similarly
conducts the march is termed =a directing guide=.

=Direction of march.=--The direction in which the base of the command
in question, whether actually in march or halted, is facing at the
instant considered.

=Disposition.=--The distribution of the elements of a command, and the
formations and duties assigned to each for the accomplishment of a
common purpose.

=Distance.=--The space between men or bodies of troops measured in the
direction of depth. Distance is measured--mounted, from the croup of
the horse in front to the head of the horse in rear; dismounted, from
the back of the trooper in front to the breast of the trooper in rear.

=Dress.=--The act of taking a correct alignment.

=Drill.=--The exercises and evolutions, taught on the drill ground and
executed in accordance with definitely prescribed methods.

=Echelon.=--A body of troops is in _echelon_ with reference to another
when it is more advanced or less advanced and unmasks or uncovers the
other body, wholly or in part; units thus placed are called
_echelons_.

=Element.=--One of the component subdivisions of a command. As used in
these regulations the term _element_ is a general one and may mean a
single trooper, a set of twos, a four, section, platoon, or larger
unit, according to the command and formation that are being
considered. The expression =elements of the column= refers to the
several troopers, fours, platoons, or other units that are placed
successively, one behind another, in any column formation.

=Evolutions.=--Movements by which a command changes its position or
passes from one formation to another.

=File closers.=--Officers or noncommissioned officers placed out of
ranks, whose duty it is to supervise the men in ranks and see that the
orders of the commander are carried out. For convenience, this term is
applied to any man posted as a file closer.

=Flank.=--The right or left of a command in line or column. In
speaking of the enemy the term right flank or left flank is used to
designate the flank that would be so designated by him.

=Flank guard.=--An element of a command disposed with a view to
protecting a flank.

=Foragers.=--Mounted troopers distributed in line in extended order;
also the formation in which the troopers are so distributed.

=Formation.=--The arrangement of the elements of a command in line,
column, or echelon.

=Gait.=--One of the special movements of the horse, as the walk, the
trot, or the gallop.

=Gait of march.=--The gait at which the base of the command in
question is moving at the instant considered.

=Horse length.=--A term of measurement. For convenience in estimating
space, a horse length is considered as 3 yards; by actual measure it
is about 8 feet.

=Interval.=--The lateral space between the elements or fractions of a
command. Interval is measured: Mounted, from the left knee of the man
at the right of the open space to the right knee of the man at the
left of the open space; dismounted, interval is measured on similar
principles, but from elbow to elbow.

=Line.=--A formation in which the different elements are abreast of
each other. When the elements are in column the formation is called a
line of columns.

=Maneuvers.=--Operations against an outlined or actual force under a
separate commander, who, within the limits of the assumed situation,
is free to adopt any formations and make any movements he chooses.

=Order.=--An indication of the will of the commander in whatever form
conveyed. An order may be given orally, by signal, or in any manner
that is intelligible to those for whom it is intended. The
expression, =in order=, has no reference to this definition, but is
used to indicate a special arrangement and condition of the elements
of a command.

=Order, close.=--This includes formations in which the intervals and
distances between elements are habitually based upon those required
for forming the normal line formation of each unit of the formation.

=Order, extended.=--The formation in which the troopers, or the
subdivisions, or both, are separated by intervals or distances greater
than in close order.

=Pace.=--Used with reference to gait, pace signifies the rate of speed
of the gait. Used as a unit of measure, pace signifies a step of 30
inches.

=Patrol.=--A group detached from a command and operating with specific
mission, usually related to security or information. The term is
ordinarily applied to groups varying in size from two men to a
platoon. They are frequently designated by special names connected
with their principal mission or their composition; as, =reconnoitering
patrols=, =combat patrols=, =visiting patrols=, =officer's patrols=.

=Ployment.=--An evolution in which the command diminishes its front,
as in passing from line to column, or from extended order to close
order.

=Rally.=--The rapid grouping behind the leader of the elements of a
command, without reference to their previous situation or formation.

The object of the rally is to reestablish cohesion with a view to
immediate action, or to form line in a new direction when the regular
method of forming line would be slow or complicated. It is executed in
the order of arrival of the elements of the command without regard to
their normal order. The formation in which each unit is rallied is
fixed in the drill instructions of that unit.

=Rank.=--Two or more troopers placed side by side.

=Scouts.=--Individual troopers detached from their commands and
operating with a definite mission related to security or information.

=Skirmishers.=--Dismounted troopers in line in extended order; also
the formation in which the troopers are so placed.

=Successive formation.=--A formation in which the elements take their
places successively.

=Tactical exercise.=--An operation against an outlined or represented
enemy whose movements are restricted with a view to illustrating some
particular tactical principle.


PART I.--INDIVIDUAL INSTRUCTION.

=Section 2. General provisions.=

=34.=[6] Thorough training in the school of the trooper is the basis
of efficiency.

         [Footnote 6: The numbers refer to paragraphs in the Cavalry
         Drill Regulations, 1916.]

=35.= Short and frequent drills are preferable to long ones, which
exhaust the attention of both instructor and recruit.

=36.= As the instruction progresses, the recruits will be grouped
according to proficiency, in order that all may advance as rapidly as
their abilities permit. Those who lack aptitude and quickness will be
separated from the others and placed under experienced drillmasters.

=37.= The individual dismounted instruction of the recruit is
habitually given by experienced noncommissioned officers, especially
selected for that purpose. All such instruction is under the careful
personal supervision of a commissioned officer, and in the
corresponding mounted instruction it is desirable that the actual
instructor be a commissioned officer when this is practicable. All
lieutenants will be required to instruct recruits in person
sufficiently to acquire skill in such work.

When recruits, upon their arrival at a station, are assigned to their
respective troops for training, the captains prescribe and supervise
the instruction.

=38.= The instructor will always maintain a military bearing and by a
quiet, firm demeanor, set a proper example to his men. A calm and even
temper is indispensable. Unnecessarily loud commands and prolonged
explanations are to be avoided.

As the recruits become somewhat proficient in the school of the
trooper, the officer superintending the instruction may call upon them
in turn to drill the squad in his presence and to correct any errors
that may be observed. This will increase their interest, hasten their
instruction, and facilitate judgment upon their fitness for the duties
of noncommissioned officers.

=39.= A carefully thought out program of instruction, prepared in
advance and based upon the probable time and facilities for
instruction that the case in question may present, is essential to
economy of time and effort and to systematic, thorough instruction.

=40.= The preliminary individual instruction, dismounted and mounted,
should be carried on during different drill hours of the same days.
This preliminary phase should include, in addition to regular drill,
instruction in: The elements of discipline; the names of the various
parts of the arms and equipment; the proper care of arms, equipment,
and clothing; elementary instructions as to the names of those parts
of the horse that are frequently referred to at drill and stable duty;
grooming; a few simple rules regarding the care of the horse; personal
hygiene; and other related subjects.

=41.= As soon as the instruction shall have advanced so far as to
include the few necessary preliminary drills, collective instruction
=in the school of the squad= will be taken up. This instruction may,
like the individual instruction, properly be carried on during
different hours of the same drill days, in both mounted and dismounted
phases. The recruits meanwhile continue their progress in the
individual instruction.

=42.= The progress in =mounted= collective instruction must be
carefully regulated in accordance with the recruit's confidence and
skill in the management of his mount, and must progress no faster than
the recruit's horsemanship justifies; but this restriction need not
affect the =dismounted= collective instruction, and the latter may
properly be carried forward as rapidly as the state of the dismounted
individual instruction will permit. By the time the recruit's
instruction in equitation has progressed so as to prepare him for
mounted drills at the faster gaits, he should have learned the
mechanism of all the movements by executing them at a walk. His course
of dismounted training should meanwhile have included not only the
close-order movements of the squad but the mechanism of extended
order, practice in the use of the saber, a little preparatory range
practice with the rifle and pistol, and work in the nature of minor
field exercises involving dismounted fire action. He should, during
the same period, have learned the mechanism of passing from mounted
action to dismounted action and should have acquired familiarity with
all commands and signals used in the squad. The recruit will thus
ordinarily be ready to enter with reasonable efficiency upon certain
phases of the work in the platoon and troop before his individual
mounted instruction is completed.

=43.= There are two kinds of commands:

The =preparatory= command, such as =forward=, indicates the movement
that is to be executed.

The command of =execution=, such as =MARCH=, =HALT=, or =ARMS=, causes
the execution.

=Preparatory= commands are distinguished by =boldface type=, those of
execution by =CAPITALS=.

The =preparatory= command should be given at such an interval of time
before the command of =execution= as to admit of being properly
understood; the command of =execution= should be given at the instant
the movement is to commence.

The preparatory command is enunciated distinctly, with a rising
inflection at the end, and in such manner that the command of
execution may be more energetic.

On foot, the command of execution is firm in tone and brief.

In mounted movements the preparatory command is usually somewhat
prolonged to insure its being heard, and the command of execution is
always prolonged.

_Commands will be given no louder than is necessary._

Laxness or indifference suggested in the manner of giving a command is
certain to result in corresponding carelessness of execution.

=44.= To revoke a preparatory command, or being at the halt, to begin
anew a movement improperly begun: =AS YOU WERE=. Any movement ceases
and the former position is resumed.

=45.= To stay the execution of a movement when marching, for the
correction of errors, the commands may be given: 1. =In place=, 2.
=HALT=. All halt and stand fast. If executed dismounted, the position
of the rifle is not changed. To resume the movement, the commands are:
1. =Resume=; or, 1. =Resume, trot=; or, 1. =Resume, gallop=. 2.
=MARCH=. The movement is then completed as if it had not been
interrupted.

=46.= Movements that may be executed toward either flank are explained
as toward but one flank, it being necessary to substitute the word
"left" for "right," and the reverse, to have the explanation of the
corresponding movement toward the other flank. The commands are given
for the execution of the movements toward either flank. The substitute
word of the command is placed within parentheses.

=47.= Any movement may be executed either from the halt or when
marching unless otherwise prescribed.

Any movement on foot not specially excepted may be executed in double
time.

If at a halt, or if marching in quick time, the command =double time=
precedes the command of execution.

=48.= As instructors, officers and noncommissioned officers go
wherever their presence is necessary.

=49.= Before beginning work, the instructor always assures himself
that those under his charge are neatly dressed and in proper uniform.
At mounted formations he will also require that horses be properly
groomed and that equipments be in good condition and adjusted as
prescribed.

=50.= The value of recruit drill as an exercise in teaching discipline
must be kept constantly in view by the instructor. No phase of the
instruction is of such great ultimate importance.


=Section 3. School of the trooper, dismounted.=

=51.= The object of this school is to develop the strength and agility
of the trooper, to give him a military bearing, to fix in him the
habit of sustained attention and instant obedience, to prepare him for
instruction in mounted combat with the saber and pistol, and to train
him in dismounted combat with the rifle.

In order to make rapid progress in those exercises which form the
basis of instruction of the trooper, it is necessary that the lessons
should, as far as practicable, be given individually.

=52.= _Cautions to instructors._--The instructor explains briefly each
movement, first executing it himself if practicable. He requires the
recruits to take the proper positions unassisted and does not touch
them for the purpose of correcting them, except when they are unable
to correct themselves. He avoids keeping them too long at the same
movement, although each should be understood before passing to
another. He exacts by degrees the desired precision and uniformity.
Recruits should be allowed to stand at ease frequently. During these
pauses the instructor will not be idle, but opportunity will be taken
to talk to the men, to encourage them to ask questions, and so to
develop their confidence and common sense.

=53.= During the period devoted to preliminary instruction, without
arms, the recruit will be prepared for subsequent instruction with
arms by being taught the names of the principal parts of the different
weapons and the proper methods of cleaning, disassembling, assembling,
and operating the latter.


PHYSICAL TRAINING.

=54.= The physical training of the soldier must receive due attention.
Its direct results are to increase the soldier's strength, agility,
and endurance, and it has indirect results of far-reaching value in
connection with discipline and morale. It should begin with his first
instruction as a recruit and be continued throughout his entire
enlistment. The methods prescribed in the authorized Manual of
Physical Training will be followed with a view to making the soldier's
development thorough and well balanced, and to prevent the instruction
from becoming unnecessarily tedious and monotonous.

=55.= In the earlier phases of the recruit instruction, and under
temporary conditions that do not favor the carrying out of a more
comprehensive scheme of training, special attention will be given to
the =setting-up exercises=. Running, jumping, and swimming are phases
of training of special importance to the soldier.


INDIVIDUAL INSTRUCTION WITHOUT ARMS.

=56.= For this instruction a few recruits, usually not exceeding 3 or
4, are placed (as a squad) in single rank, facing to the front.

=57.= To teach the recruits how to form in ranks the instructor will
first place them in single rank, arranged according to height, the
tallest man on the right, with intervals of about 4 inches between
men, and will explain that the object of these intervals is to give
freedom of movement in marching and in the use of the rifle in ranks.
He will then direct each man singly to place the palm of the left hand
on the hip, fingers pointing downward, and draw attention to the fact
that the indicated interval of about 4 inches may be verified by each
man so placing himself that his right arm, when hanging naturally at
his side, touches the elbow of the man on his right. When this is
understood, he will cause the recruits to fall out and successively to
place themselves as before, each man verifying his interval by causing
his right arm to touch the left elbow of the man on his right, the
latter's hand being on his hip, as already explained. He will then
explain that at the command =FALL IN= the men will, beginning with the
right trooper, successively and quickly take their places in rank,
each man placing the left hand at the hip as above and dropping his
hand to his side as soon as the man on his left has the proper
interval.

=58.= The recruits having had sufficient instruction to understand how
to form by command, the instructor commands: =FALL IN=.

The men assemble as prescribed in par. 57, each taking the position of
=attention= as described below.

As soon as the recruits have had sufficient preliminary instruction
they will habitually be formed as regularly prescribed for a squad.


POSITION OF THE TROOPER, OR ATTENTION (DISMOUNTED).

=59.= Heels on the same line and as near each other as the
conformation of the man permits.

Feet turned out equally and forming an angle of about 45 deg..

Knees straight without stiffness.

Hips level and drawn back slightly; body erect and resting equally on
hips; chest lifted and arched; shoulders square and falling equally.

Arms and hands hanging naturally, thumb along the seam of the
breeches.

Head erect and squarely to the front, chin drawn in so that the axis
of the head and neck is vertical; eyes to the front.

Weight of the body resting equally upon the heels and balls of the
feet.


THE RESTS.

=60.= Being at a halt, the commands are: =FALL OUT=; =REST=; =AT
EASE=; and 1. =Parade=, 2. =REST=.

At the command =fall out=, the men may leave the ranks, but are
required to remain in the immediate vicinity. They resume their former
places, at attention, at the command =fall in=.

At the command =rest=, each man keeps one foot in place, but is not
required to preserve silence or immobility.

At the command =at ease=, each man keeps one foot in place and is
required to preserve silence, but not immobility.

1. =Parade=, 2. =REST=. Carry the right foot 6 inches straight to the
rear, left knee slightly bent; clasp the hands, without constraint, in
front of the center of the body, fingers joined, left hand uppermost,
left thumb clasped by the thumb and forefinger of the right hand;
preserve silence and steadiness of position.

=61.= Being in march, at the command: 1. =Route order=, 2. =MARCH=; or
1. =At ease=, 2. =MARCH=, the men keep their places in ranks, but are
not required to keep the step; at =route order=, they are not required
to preserve silence. If halted from =route order=, the men stand at
=rest=; if halted from =at ease=, they remain at ease.

Marching at =route order= or =at ease=, rifles are carried at will,
the muzzles elevated.

=62.= To resume the attention: 1. =Squad=, 2. =ATTENTION=.

If at a halt, the men take the position of the trooper, dismounted
(par. 59). If marching, the cadenced step in quick time is resumed,
and rifles, if carried, are brought to the right shoulder.

=63.= To dismiss the squad: =DISMISSED=.


EYES RIGHT OR LEFT.

=64.= 1. =Eyes=, 2. =RIGHT=, 3. =FRONT=.

At the command =right=, turn the head to the right oblique, eyes fixed
on the line of eyes of the man in, or supposed to be in, the same
rank. At the command =front=, turn the head and eyes to the front.


FACINGS.

=65.= To the flank: 1. =Right=, 2. =FACE=.

Raise slightly the left heel and right toe; face to the right, turning
on the right heel, assisted by a slight pressure on the ball of the
left foot; place the left foot by the side of the right. Left face is
executed on the left heel in the corresponding manner.

=66.= To the rear: 1. =About=, 2. =FACE=.

Carry the toe of the right foot about a half foot length to the rear
and slightly to the left of the left heel without changing the
position of the left foot; face to the rear, turning to the right on
the left heel and right toe; place the right heel by the side of the
left.

=67.= 1. =Hand=, 2. =SALUTE=.

Raise the right hand smartly till the tip of the forefinger touches
the lower part of the headdress above the right eye, thumb and fingers
extended and joined, palm to the left, forearm inclined at about 45 deg.,
hand and wrist straight; at the same time look toward the person
saluted.

(=TWO=), Drop the arm smartly by the side. The salute for officers is
the same (Fig. 1).

[Illustration: FIG. 1, par. 67.]


STEPS AND MARCHES.

=68.= All steps and marchings executed from a halt, except right step,
begin with the left foot.

=69.= The length of the full step in =quick time= is 30 inches,
measured from heel to heel, and the cadence is at the rate of 120
steps per minute.

The length of the full step in =double time= is 36 inches; the cadence
is at the rate of 180 steps per minute.

The instructor, when necessary, indicates the cadence of the step by
calling =one=, =two=, =three=, =four=, or =left=, =right=, the instant
the left and right foot, respectively, should be planted.

=70.= All steps and marchings and movements involving march are
executed in quick time unless the squad be marching in double time, or
double time be added to the command; in the latter case double time is
added to the preparatory command.

Example: 1. =Forward, double time=, 2. =MARCH=.

=71.= It should be explained to the recruits that in collective drills
and exercises one of the troopers, termed the =guide=, habitually has
to follow a leader or direct himself upon some designated objective,
the other troopers regulating their march so as, in line, to march
abreast of the guide, maintaining their approximate intervals. The
necessity, in this connection, for learning to march steadily in a
given direction without wavering from side to side should further be
pointed out. Each recruit should then be practiced individually in
marching upon a designated objective, selecting for that purpose two
points of direction on the straight line that passes through the
trooper and the objective and keeping constantly in the prolongation
of that line. When the objective is sufficiently distinct it should be
taken as one of the points of direction and another point in line with
the trooper and the objective, and either nearer or more distant than
the latter be selected as a second point to fix the direction of
march.


QUICK TIME AND DOUBLE TIME.

=72.= Being at a halt, to march forward in quick time: 1. =Forward=,
2. =MARCH=.

At the command =forward=, shift the weight of the body to the right
leg, left knee straight.

At the command =march=, move the left foot smartly straight forward 30
inches from the right, sole near the ground, and plant it without
shock; next, in like manner, advance the right foot and plant it as
above; continue the march. The arms swing naturally.

=73.= Being at a halt, or in march in quick time, to march forward in
double time: 1. =Forward=, =double time=, 2. =MARCH.=

If at a halt, at the first command shift the weight, of the body to
the right leg. At the command march, raise the forearms, fingers
closed, to a horizontal position along the waist line, take up an easy
run with the step and cadence of double time, allowing a natural
swinging motion to the arms.

If marching in quick time, at the command =MARCH=, given as either
foot strikes the ground, take one step in quick time and then step off
in double time.

=74.= To resume the quick time: 1. =Quick time=, 2. =MARCH.=

At the command =march=, given as either foot strikes the ground,
advance and plant the other foot in double time; resume the quick
time, dropping the hands by the sides.


TO MARK TIME.

=75.= Being in march: 1. =Mark time=, 2. =MARCH.=

At the command =march=, given as either foot strikes the ground,
advance and plant the other foot; bring up the foot in rear and
continue the cadence by alternately raising each foot about 2 inches
and planting it on line with the other.

Being at a halt, at the command march, raise and plant the feet as
described above.


THE HALF STEP.

=76.= 1. =Half step=, 2. =MARCH.=

Take steps of 15 inches in quick time, 18 inches in double time.

=77.= =Forward=, =half step=, =halt=, and =mark time= may be executed
one from the other in quick or double time.

To resume the full step from half step or mark time: 1. =Forward=, 2.
=MARCH=.


SIDE STEP.

=78.= Being at a halt or mark time: 1. =Right (left) step=, 2.
=MARCH.=

Carry and plant the right foot 15 inches to the right; bring the left
foot beside it and continue the movement in the cadence of quick time.

The side step is used for short distances only and is not executed in
double time.

If at order arms, the side step is executed =at trail= without other
command.


BACK STEP.

=79.= Being at a halt or mark time: 1. =Backward=, 2. =MARCH.=

Take steps of 15 inches straight to the rear.

The back step is used for short distances only and is not executed in
double time.

If at order arms, the back step is executed =at trail= without other
command.


TO HALT.

=80.= To stop the march in quick or double time: 1. =Squad=, 2.
=HALT.=

At the command _halt_, given as either foot strikes the ground, plant
the other foot as in marching; raise and place the rear foot by the
side of the other. If in double time, drop the hands by the sides.


TO MARCH BY THE FLANK.

=81.= Being in march: 1. =By the right (left) flank=, 2. =MARCH.=

At the command march, given as the right foot strikes the ground,
advance and plant the left foot, then face to the right in marching,
and step off in the new direction with the right foot.

This movement is not executed by =signal= except in =foragers=.


TO MARCH TO THE REAR.

=82.= Being in march: 1. =To the rear=, 2. =MARCH.=

At the command =march=, given as the right foot strikes the ground,
advance and plant the left foot, turn to the right-about on the balls
of both feet, and immediately step off with the left foot.

If marching in double time, turn to the right-about, taking four steps
in place, keeping the cadence, and then step off with the left foot.

This movement is not executed by =signal= except in =foragers=.


CHANGE STEP.

=83.= Being in march: 1. =Change step=, 2. =MARCH.=

At the command =march=, given as the right, foot, strikes the ground,
advance and plant the left foot, plant the toe of the right foot near
the heel of the left, and step off with the left foot.

The change on the right foot is similarly executed, the command
=MARCH= being given as the left foot strikes the ground.


TO COUNT FOURS.

=84.= Being in line, at the command, =COUNT FOURS=, all the troopers
in the rank except the right trooper execute =eyes right= and,
beginning on the right, count successively =1=, =2=, =3=, =4=. Each
turns his head and eyes to the front as he counts.

Fours may be counted at the halt or marching, mounted or dismounted,
in line or in column of twos or troopers. In counting fours in column
of twos or troopers the elements count off successively from front to
rear in the column and from right to left in each two. =Eyes right= is
not executed when counting fours from column of twos or troopers.


TO TAKE INTERVALS AND DISTANCES.

=85.= Being in line at a halt: 1. =Take intervals, to the right
(left)=, 2. =MARCH=, 3. =Squad=, 4. =HALT.=

At the command =march=, all face to the right and the leading trooper
steps off; the other men step off in succession, each following the
preceding trooper at four paces.

At the command =halt=, given when all have their intervals, all halt
and face to the front.

=86.= Being at intervals, to assemble the squad: 1. =Assemble to the
right (left)=, 2. =MARCH.= The trooper on the right stands fast. The
other troopers face to the right, close by the shortest line and face
to the front.

=87.= Being in line at a halt and fours having been counted: 1. =Take
distance=, 2. =MARCH=, 3. =Squad=, 4. =HALT.=

At the command =march=, No. 1 moves straight to the front; Nos. 2, 3,
and 4 in the order named, move straight to the front, each stepping
off so as to follow the preceding man at 4 paces. The command halt is
given when all have their distances.

If there be more than one No. 1, all the Nos. 1 move forward together,
guiding on the right trooper. The same principle applies to the other
numbers.

=88.= The normal interval and distance of 4 paces indicated,
respectively, in pars. 34 and 36, may be increased or diminished by
adding to the corresponding preparatory command the indication of the
interval or distance desired; thus: 1. =Take interval to the right at
1 pace=, 2. =MARCH=, etc.; 1. =Take distance, at 2 paces=, 2. =MARCH=,
etc.

=89.= Being at distances, to assemble the squad: 1. =Assemble=, 2.
=MARCH.=

No. 1 of the front rank stands fast; the other numbers move forward to
their proper places in line.


INDIVIDUAL INSTRUCTION WITH ARMS.

MANUAL OF THE RIFLE.

=90.= When the recruit has made fair progress in the instruction
without arms, including that required by par. 53, he is taught the
manual of arms. Instruction without arms and that with arms alternate.

=91.= The following rules govern the carrying of the rifle:

=First.= The rifle is not carried with cartridges in either the
chamber or the magazine except when specifically ordered. When so
loaded, or supposed to be loaded, it is habitually carried locked;
that is, with the =safety lock= turned to the "safe." At all other
times it is carried unlocked, with the trigger pulled.

=Second.= Whenever troops are formed under arms, rifles are
immediately inspected at the commands: 1. =Inspection=, 2. =ARMS=; 3.
=Order (right shoulder, port)=, 4. =ARMS.=

A. similar inspection is made immediately before dismissal.

If cartridges are found in the chamber or magazine they are removed
and placed in the belt.

=Third.= The cut-off is kept turned "off" except when cartridges are
actually used.

=Fourth.= =Fall in= is executed with the rifle at the order arms.
=Fall out=, =rest=, and =at ease= are executed as without arms. On
resuming =attention= the position of order arms is taken.

=Fifth.= If at the order, unless otherwise prescribed, the rifle is
brought to the right shoulder at the command =march=, the three
motions corresponding with the first three steps. Movements may be
executed at =the trail= by prefacing the preparatory command with the
words =at trail=, as, 1. =At trail=, =forward=, 2. =MARCH=; the trail
is taken at the command =march=.

When the facings, alignments, open and close ranks, taking interval,
and assemblings are executed from the order, raise the rifle to the
trail while in motion and resume the order on halting.

=Sixth.= The rifle is brought to the order on halting. The execution
of the order begins when the halt is completed.

=Seventh.= A disengaged hand in double time is held as when without
arms.

=92.= The following rules govern the execution of the manual of arms:

=First.= In all positions of the left hand at the balance (center of
gravity) the thumb clasps the rifle; the sling is included in the
grasp of the hand. (Figs. 6, 12.)

=Second.= In all positions of the rifle "diagonally across the body"
the position of the rifle, left arm, and hand are the same as in port
arms. (Fig. 6.)

=Third.= In resuming the order from any position in the manual, the
motion next to the last concludes with the butt of the rifle about 3
inches from the ground, barrel to the rear, the left hand above and
near the right, steadying the rifle, fingers extended and joined,
forearm and wrist straight and inclining downward, all fingers of the
right hand grasping the rifle. To complete the order, lower the rifle
gently to the ground with the right hand, drop the left quickly by the
side, and take the position of order arms. (Fig. 2.)

Allowing the rifle to drop through the right hand to the ground, or
other similar abuse of the arm to produce effect in executing the
manual, is prohibited.

=Fourth.= The cadence of the motions is that of quick time; the
recruits are first required to give their whole attention to the
details of the motions, the cadence being gradually acquired as they
become accustomed to handling their rifles.

=Fifth.= The manual is taught at a halt and the movements are for the
purpose of instruction, divided into motions and executed in detail;
in this case the command of =execution= determines the prompt
execution of the first motion, and the commands, =two=, =three=,
=four=, that of the other motions.

To execute the movements in detail, the instructor first cautions: =By
the numbers=; all movement divided into motions are then executed as
above explained until he cautions: =Without the numbers=; or commands
movements other than those in the manual of arms.

=Sixth.= Whenever circumstances require, the regular positions of the
manual of arms and the firings may be ordered without regard to the
previous position of the rifle.

Under exceptional conditions of weather or fatigue the rifle may be
carried in any manner directed.

[Illustration: FIG. 2, par. 92.]

[Illustration: FIG. 3, par. 93.]

[Illustration: FIG. 4, par. 93.]

=93.= =Position of order arms, standing=: The butt rests evenly on the
ground, barrel to the rear, toe of the butt on a line with toe of, and
touching, the right shoe, arms and hands hanging naturally, right hand
holding the rifle between the thumb and fingers.

=94.= =Being at order arms=: 1. =Present=, 2. =ARMS.=

With the right hand carry the rifle in front of the center of the
body, barrel to the rear and vertical, grasp it with the left hand at
the balance, forearm horizontal and resting against the body. (=TWO=)
Grasp the small of the stock with the right hand. (Fig. 5.)

[Illustration: FIG. 5, par. 94.]

=95.= =Being at order arms=: 1. =Port=, 2. =ARMS.=

With the right hand raise and throw the rifle diagonally across the
body, grasp it smartly with both hands; the right, palm down, at the
small of the stock; the left, palm up, at the balance; barrel up,
sloping to the left and crossing opposite the junction of the neck
with the left shoulder; right forearm horizontal; left forearm resting
against the body; the rifle in a vertical plane parallel to the front.
(Fig. 6.)

[Illustration: FIG. 6, par. 95.]

=96.= =Being at present arms=: 1. =Port=, 2. =ARMS.=

Carry the rifle diagonally across the body and take the position of
port arms.

=97.= =Being at port arms=: 1. =Present=, 2. =ARMS.=

Carry the rifle to a vertical position in front of the center of the
body and take the position of present arms.

=98.= =Being at present or port arms=: 1. =Order=, 2. =ARMS.=

Let go with the right hand; lower and carry the rifle to the right
with the left hand; regrasp it with the right hand just above the
lower band; let go with the left hand, and take the next to the last
position in coming to the order. (=TWO=) Complete the order.

=99.= =Being at order arms=: 1. =Right shoulder=, 2. =ARMS.=

With the right hand raise and throw the rifle diagonally across the
body; carry the right hand quickly to the butt, embracing it, the heel
between the first two fingers. (=TWO=) Without changing the grasp of
the right hand, place the rifle on the right shoulder, barrel up and
inclined at an angle of about 45 deg. from the horizontal, trigger guard
in the hollow of the shoulder, right elbow near the side, the rifle in
a vertical plane perpendicular to the front; carry the left hand,
thumb, and fingers extended and joined, to the small of the stock, tip
of the forefinger touching the cocking piece, wrist straight and elbow
down. (=THREE=) Drop the left hand by the side. (Fig. 7.)

[Illustration: FIG. 7, par. 99.]

=100.= =Being at right shoulder arms=: 1. =Order=, 2. =ARMS.=

Press the butt down quickly and throw the rifle diagonally across the
body, the right hand retaining the grasp of the butt. (=TWO=),
(=THREE=) Execute order arms as described from port arms.

=101.= =Being at port arms=: 1. =Right shoulder=, 2. =ARMS.=

Change the right hand to the butt. (=TWO=), (=THREE=) As in right
shoulder arms from =order arms=.

=102.= =Being at right shoulder arms=: 1. =Port=, 2. =ARMS.=

Press the butt down quickly and throw the rifle diagonally across the
body, the right hand retaining its grasp of the butt. (=TWO=) Change
the right hand to the small of the stock.

=103.= =Being at right shoulder arms=: 1. =Present=, 2. =ARMS.=

Execute port arms. (=THREE=) Execute present arms.

=104.= =Being at present arms=: 1. =Right shoulder=, 2. =ARMS.=

Execute port arms. (=TWO=), (=THREE=), (=FOUR=). Execute right
shoulder arms as from port arms.

=105.= =Being at port arms=: 1. =Left shoulder=, 2. =ARMS.=

Carry the rifle with the right hand and place it on the left shoulder,
barrel up, trigger guard in the hollow of the shoulder; at the same
time grasp the butt with the left hand, heel between first and second
fingers, thumb and fingers closed on the stock. (=TWO=) Drop the right
hand by the side.

=Left shoulder arms= may be ordered directly from the order, right
shoulder, or present, or the reverse. At the command =Arms= execute
=port arms= and continue in cadence to the position ordered.

=106.= =Being at left shoulder arms=: 1. =Port=, 2. =ARMS.=

Grasp the rifle with the right hand at the small of the stock. (=TWO=)
Carry the rifle to the right with the right hand, regrasp it with the
left and take the position of port arms.

=107.= =Being at order arms=: 1. =Parade=, 2. =REST.=

Carry the right foot 6 inches straight to the rear, left knee slightly
bent; carry the muzzle In front of the center of the body, barrel to
the left; grasp the rifle with the left hand just below the stacking
swivel and with the right hand below and against the left. (Fig. 8.)

=Being at parade rest=: 1. =Squad=, 2. =ATTENTION.=

Resume the order, the left hand quitting the rifle opposite the right
hip.

[Illustration: FIG. 8, par. 107.]

=108.= =Being at order arms.= 1. =Trail=, 2. =ARMS.=

Raise the rifle, right arm slightly bent, and incline the muzzle
forward so that the barrel makes an angle of about 30 deg. with the
vertical. (Fig. 9.)

When it can be done without danger or inconvenience to others, the
rifle may be grasped at the balance and muzzle lowered until the rifle
is horizontal; a similar position in the left hand may be used.

[Illustration: FIG. 9, par. 108.]

=109.= =Being at trail arms=: 1. =Order=, 2. =ARMS.=

Lower the rifle with the right hand and resume the order.


RIFLE SALUTE.

=110.= =Being at right shoulder arms=: 1. =Rifle=, 2. =SALUTE.=

Carry the left hand smartly to the small of the stock, forearm
horizontal, palm of the hand down, thumb and fingers extended and
joined, forefinger touching end of cocking piece; look toward the
person saluted. (=TWO=) Drop left hand by the side; turn head and eyes
to the front. (Fig. 10.)

With the rifle on the left shoulder, the salute is rendered in a
corresponding manner with the right hand.

[Illustration: FIG. 10, par. 110.]

=111.= =Being at order or trail arms=: 1. =Rifle=, 2. =SALUTE.=

Carry the left hand smartly to the right side, palm of the hand down,
thumb and fingers extended and joined, forefinger against the rifle
near the muzzle; look toward the person saluted. (=TWO=) Drop the left
hand by the side; turn the head and eyes to the front. (Fig. 11.)

[Illustration: FIG. 11, par. 111.]


THE INSPECTION.

=112.= =Being at order arms=: 1. =Inspection=, 2. =ARMS.=

At the second command, take the position of port arms. (=TWO=) Seize
the bolt handle with the thumb and forefinger of the right hand, turn
the handle up, draw the bolt back and glance at the chamber. Having
found the chamber empty, or having emptied it, raise the head and eyes
to the front. (Fig. 12.)

[Illustration: FIG. 12, par. 112.]

=113.= =Being at inspection arms=: 1. =Order (right shoulder, port)=,
2. =ARMS.=

At the preparatory command, push the bolt forward, turn the handle
down, pull the trigger, and resume port arms. At the command arms
complete the movement ordered.


TO DISMISS.

=114.= =Being at halt=: 1. =Inspection=, 2. =ARMS=, 3. =Port=, 4.
=ARMS=, 5. =DISMISSED.=


TO STACK AND TAKE ARMS.

=115.= Three rifles only are used to make a stack; rifles not so used
are, in this connection, termed loose rifles.

=Being in line at a halt=: =STACK ARMS.=

=At the command stack=, No. 3 steps back and covers No. 2, No. 2
raises his rifle with the right hand, grasps it with the left at the
upper band and rests the butt between his feet, barrel to the front,
muzzle inclined slightly to the front and opposite the center of the
interval on his right, the thumb and forefinger raising the stacking
swivel; No. 3 then passes his rifle, barrel to the rear, to No. 2, who
grasps it between the bands with his right hand and throws the butt
about 2 feet in advance of that of his own rifle and opposite the
right of the interval, the right hand slipping to the upper band, the
thumb and forefinger raising the stacking swivel, which he engages
with that of his own rifle; No. 1 raises his rifle with the right
hand, carries it well forward, barrel to the front, the left hand
guiding the stacking swivel, engages the lower hook of the swivel of
his own rifle with the free hook of that of No. 3; he then turns the
barrel outward into the angle formed by the other two rifles and
lowers the butt to the ground to the right of and against the toe of
his right shoe. No. 2 lays loose rifles on the stack; No. 3 resumes
his place in line. When each man has finished handling rifles, he
takes the position of attention. The instructor may then rest or
dismiss the squad, leaving the arms stacked.

On re-forming, the men take their places in rear of the stacks.

=116.= =Being in line, behind the stacks: TAKE ARMS.=

No. 3 steps back and covers No. 2; No. 2 returns the loose rifles,
then grasps his own rifle with the left hand, the rifle of No. 3 with
his right hand, grasping both between the bands; No. 1 grasps his
rifle in the same way with the right hand. No. 1 disengages his rifle
by raising the butt from the ground and then turning the rifle to the
right, detaches it from the stack; No. 2 disengages and detaches his
rifle by turning it to the left, and then passes the rifle of No. 3 to
him; No. 3 resumes his place in line; all resume the order.


KNEELING AND LYING DOWN.

=117.= If standing: =KNEEL=.

Half face to the right; carry the right toe about 1 foot to the left
rear of the left heel; kneel on the right knee, sitting as nearly as
possible on the right heel; left forearm across left thigh; rifle
remains in position of order arms, right hand grasping it above the
lower band. This is the position of =order arms=, kneeling. (Fig. 13.)

[Illustration: FIG. 13, par. 117.]

=118.= If standing or kneeling: =LIE DOWN=.

Kneel, but with right knee against left heel; carry back the left foot
and lie flat on the belly, inclining body about 35 deg. to the right;
rifle horizontal, barrel up, muzzle off the ground and pointed to the
front; elbows on the ground; left hand at the balance, right hand
grasping the small of the stock opposite the neck. This is the
position of =order arms=, lying down. (Fig. 14.)

[Illustration: FIG. 14, par. 118.]

=119.= If kneeling or lying down: =RISE=.

If kneeling, stand up, faced to the front, on the ground marked by the
left heel.

If lying down, raise the body on both knees; stand up, faced to the
front, on the ground marked by the knees.

=120.= If lying down: =KNEEL=.

Raise the body on both knees, take the position of kneel. When
deployed as skirmishers, a sitting position may be taken instead of
the position kneeling.


II. INSTRUCTION WITH THE RIFLE.

=23.= The commands for and the execution of the foot movements are the
same as already given for movements without the rifle.

=24.= The men having taken intervals or distances, the instructor
commands:

1. =Bayonet exercise=, 2. =GUARD=.

At the second command take the position of guard (see par. 15); at the
game time throw the rifle smartly to the front, grasp the rifle with
the left hand just below the lower hand, fingers between the stock and
gun sling, barrel turned slightly to the left, the right hand grasping
the small of the stock about 6 inches in front of the right hip,
elbows free from the body, bayonet point at the height of the chin.

[Illustration: FIG. 15, par. 24.]

=25.= 1. =Order=, 2. =ARMS=.

Bring the right foot up to the left and the rifle to the position of
order arms, at the same time resuming the position of attention.

=26.= During the preliminary instruction, attacks and defenses will be
executed from guard until proficiency is attained, after which they
may be executed from any position in which the rifle is held.


ATTACKS.

=27.= 1. =THRUST=.

Thrust the rifle quickly forward to the full length of the left arm,
turning the barrel to the left, and direct the point of the bayonet at
the point to be attacked, but covering the right forearm. At the same
time straighten the right leg vigorously and throw the weight of the
body forward and on the left leg, the ball of the right foot always on
the ground. Guard is resumed immediately without command.

The force of the thrust is delivered principally with the right arm,
the left being used to direct the bayonet. The points at which the
attack should be directed are, in order of their importance, stomach,
chest, head, neck, and limbs.

[Illustration: FIG. 16, par. 27.]

=28.= =1. LUNGE.=

Executed in the same manner as the thrust, except that the left foot
is carried forward about twice its length. The left heel must always
be in rear of the left knee. Guard is resumed immediately without
command. Guard may also be resumed by advancing the right foot if for
any reason it is desired to hold the ground gained in lunging. In the
latter case the preparatory command forward will be given. Each method
should be practiced.

[Illustration: FIG. 18, par. 28.]

=29.= 1. =Butt=, 2. =STRIKE.=

Straighten right arm and right leg vigorously and swing butt of rifle
against point of attack, pivoting the rifle in the left hand at about
the height of the left shoulder, allowing the bayonet to pass to the
rear on the left side of the head. Guard is resumed without command.

The points of attack in their order of importance are head, neck,
stomach, and crotch.

[Illustration: FIG. 17, par. 29.]

=30.= 1. =Cut=, 2. =DOWN.=

Execute a quick downward stroke, edge of bayonet directed at point of
attack. Guard is resumed without command.

[Illustration: Par. 19.]

[Illustration: Par. 20.]

=31.= 1. =Cut=, 2. =RIGHT (LEFT).=

With a quick extension of the arms execute a cut to the right (left),
directing the edge toward the point attacked. Guard is resumed without
command.

The cuts are especially useful against the head, neck, and hands of an
enemy. In executing left cut it should be remembered that the false,
or back, edge is only 5.6 inches long. The cuts can be executed in
continuation of strokes, thrusts, lunges, and parries.

=32.= To direct an attack to the right, left, or rear the soldier will
change front as quickly as possible in the most convenient manner, for
example: 1. =To the right rear=, 2. =Cut=, 3. =DOWN=; 1. =To the
right=, 2. =LUNGE=; 1. =To the left=, 2. =THRUST=, etc.

Whenever possible the impetus gained by the turning movement of the
body should be thrown into the attack. In general this will be best
accomplished by turning on the ball of the right foot.

These movements constitute a change of front in which the position of
guard is resumed at the completion of the movement.

=33.= Good judgment of distance is essential. Accuracy in thrusting
and lunging is best attained by practicing these attacks against rings
or other convenient openings, about 3 inches in diameter, suitably
suspended at desired heights.

=34.= The thrust and lunges at rings should first be practiced by
endeavoring to hit the opening looked at. This should be followed by
directing the attack against one opening while looking at another.

=35.= The soldier should also experience the effect of actual
resistance offered to the bayonet and the butt of the rifle in
attacks. This will be taught by practicing attacks against a dummy.

=36.= Dummies should be constructed in such a manner as to permit the
execution of attacks without injury to the point or edge of the
bayonet or to the barrel or stock of the rifle. A suitable dummy can
be made from pieces of rope about 5 feet in length plaited closely
together into a cable between 6 and 12 inches in diameter. Old rope is
preferable. Bags weighted and stuffed with hay, straw, shavings, etc.,
are also suitable.


DEFENSES.

=37.= In the preliminary drills in the defenses the position of guard
is resumed, by command, after each parry. When the men have become
proficient the instructor will cause them to resume the position of
guard instantly without command after the execution of each parry.

=38.= 1. =Parry=, 2. =RIGHT.=

Keeping the right hand in the guard position, move the rifle sharply
to the right with the left arm, so that the bayonet point is about 6
inches to the right.

=39.= 1. =Parry=, 2. =LEFT.=

Move the rifle sharply to the left front with both hands so as to
cover the point attacked.

=40.= 1. =Parry=, 2. =HIGH.=

Raise the rifle with both hands high enough to clear the line of
vision, barrel downward, point of the bayonet to the left front.

When necessary to raise the rifle well above the head, it may be
supported between the thumb and forefinger of the left hand. This
position will be necessary against attacks from higher elevations,
such as men mounted or on top of parapets.

[Illustration: FIG. 21, par. 40.]

=41.= 1. =Low parry=, 2. =RIGHT (LEFT).= Carry the point of the
bayonet down until it is at the height of the knee, moving the point
of the bayonet sufficiently to the right (left), to keep the
opponent's attacks clear of the point threatened.

These parries are rarely used, as an attack below the waist leaves the
head and body exposed.

[Illustration: FIG. 22, par. 41.]

[Illustration: FIG. 23, par. 41.]

=42.= Parries must not be too wide or sweeping, but sharp, short
motions, finished with a jerk or quick catch. The hands should, as far
as possible, be kept in the line of attack. Parries against butt
strike are made by quickly moving the guard so as to cover the point
attacked.

=43.= To provide against attack from the right, left, or rear the
soldier will change front as quickly as possible in the most
convenient manner; for example: 1. =To the left rear=, 2. =Parry=, 3.
=HIGH=; 1. =To the right=, 2. =Parry=, 3. =RIGHT=, etc.

These movements constitute a change of front in which the position of
guard is resumed at the completion of the movement.

In changing front for the purpose of attack or defense, if there is
danger of wounding a comrade, the rifle should first be brought to a
vertical position.


III. INSTRUCTION WITHOUT THE BAYONET.

=44.= 1. =Club rifle=, 2. =SWING.=

Being at order arms, at the preparatory command quickly raise and turn
the rifle, regrasping it with both hands between the rear sight and
muzzle, barrel down, thumbs around the stock and toward the butt; at
the same time raise the rifle above the shoulder farthest from the
opponent, butt elevated and to the rear, elbows slightly bent and
knees straight. Each individual takes such position of the feet,
shoulders, and hands as best accords with his natural dexterity.
=SWING.= Tighten the grasp Of the hands and swing the rifle to the
front and downward, directing it at the head of the opponent, and
immediately return to the position of club rifle by completing the
swing of the rifle downward and to the rear. Repeat by the command,
=SWING=.

The rifle should be swung with sufficient force to break through any
guard or parry that may be interposed.

Being at club rifle, order arms is resumed by command.

The use of this attack against dummies or in fencing is prohibited.

[Illustration: FIG. 24, par. 44.]

[Illustration: FIG. 25, par. 44.]

=45.= The position of =club rifle= may be taken from any position of
the rifle prescribed in the Manual of Arms. It will not be taken in
personal combat unless the emergency is such as to preclude the use of
the bayonet.


IV. COMBINED MOVEMENTS.

=46.= The purpose of combined movements is to develop more vigorous
attacks and more effective defenses than are obtained, by the single
movements; to develop skill in passing from attack to defense and the
reverse. Every movement to the front should be accompanied by an
attack, which is increased in effectiveness by the forward movement of
the body. Every movement to the rear should ordinarily be accompanied
by a parry and should always be followed by an attack. Movements to
the right or left may be accompanied by attacks or defenses.

=47.= Not more than three movements will be used in any combination.
The instructor should first indicate the number of movements that are
to be combined as =two movements= or =three movements=. The execution
is, determined by one command of execution, and the position of guard
is taken upon the completion of the last movement only.


EXAMPLES.

  =Front pass and LUNGE.=
  =Right step and THRUST.=
  =Left step and low parry RIGHT.=
  =Rear pass, parry left and LUNGE.=
  =Lunge and cut RIGHT.=
  =Parry right and parry HIGH.=
  =Butt strike and cut DOWN.=
  =Thrust and parry HIGH.=
  =Parry high and LUNGE.=
  =Advance, thrust and cut RIGHT.=
  =Right step, parry left and cut DOWN.=
  =To the left, butt strike and cut DOWN.=
  =To the right rear, cut down and butt STRIKE.=

=48.= Attacks against dummies will be practiced. The approach will be
made against the dummies both in quick time and double time.


V. PRACTICAL BAYONET COMBAT.

=49.= The principles of practical bayonet combat should be taught as
far as possible during the progress of instruction in bayonet
exercises.

=50.= The soldier must be continually impressed with the extreme
importance of the offensive due to its moral effect. Should an attack
fail, it should be followed immediately by another attack before the
opponent has an opportunity to assume the offensive. Keep the opponent
on the defensive. If, due to circumstances, it is necessary to take
the defensive, constantly watch for an opportunity to assume the
offensive and take immediate advantage of it.

=51.= Observe the ground with a view to obtaining the best footing.
Time for this will generally be too limited to permit more than a
single hasty glance.

=52.= In personal combat watch the opponent's eyes if they can be
plainly seen, and do not fix the eyes on his weapon nor upon the point
of your attack. If his eyes can not be plainly seen, as in night
attacks, watch the movements of his weapon and of his body.

=53.= Keep the body well covered and deliver attacks vigorously. The
point of the bayonet should always be kept as nearly as possible in
the line of attack. The less the rifle is moved upward, downward, to
the right, or to the left, the better prepared the soldier is for
attack or defense.

=54.= Constantly watch for a chance to attack the opponent's left
hand. His position of guard will not differ materially from that
described in paragraph 24. If his bayonet is without a cutting edge,
he will be at a great disadvantage.

=55.= The butt is used for close and sudden attacks. It is
particularly useful in riot duty. From the position of port arms a
sentry can strike a severe blow with the butt of the rifle.

=56.= Against a man on foot, armed with a sword, be careful that the
muzzle of the rifle is not grasped. All the swordsman's energies will
be directed toward getting past the bayonet Attack him with short,
stabbing thrusts and keep him beyond striking distance of his weapon.

=57.= The adversary may attempt a greater extension in the thrust and
lunge by quitting the grasp of his piece with the left hand and
advancing the right as far as possible. When this is done, a sharp
parry may cause him to lose control of his rifle, leaving him exposed
to a counter attack, which should follow promptly.

=58.= Against odds a small number of men can fight to best advantage
by grouping themselves so as to prevent their being attacked from
behind.

=59.= In fighting a mounted man armed with a saber every effort must
be made to get on his near, or left, side, because here his reach is
much shorter and his parries much weaker. If not possible to disable
such an enemy, attack his horse and then renew the attack on the
horseman.

=60.= In receiving night attacks the assailant's movements can be best
observed from the kneeling or prone position, as his approach
generally brings him against the sky line. When he arrives within
attacking distance rise quickly and lunge well forward at the middle
of his body.


VI. FENCING EXERCISES.

=61.= Fencing exercises in two lines consist of combinations of
thrusts, parries, and foot movements executed at command or at will,
the opponent replying with suitable parries and returns.

=62.= The instructor will inspect the entire fencing equipment before
the exercise begins and assure himself that everything is in such
condition as will prevent accidents.

=63.= The men equip themselves and form in two lines at the order,
facing each other, with intervals of about 4 paces between files and a
distance of about 2 paces between lines. One line is designated as
number 1; the other, number 2. Also as attack and defense.

=64.= The opponents being at the order facing each other, the
instructor commands: =SALUTE.=

Each man, with eyes on his opponent, carries the left hand smartly to
the right side, palm of the hand down, thumb and fingers extended and
joined, forearm horizontal, forefinger touching the bayonet. (Two.)
Drop the arm smartly by the side.

This salute is the fencing salute.

All fencing exercises and all fencing at will between individuals will
begin and terminate with the formal courtesy of the fencing salute.

=65.= After the fencing salute has been rendered the instructor
commands: 1. =Fencing exercise=, 2. =GUARD.=

At the command =guard= each man comes to the position of =guard=,
heretofore defined, bayonets crossed, each man's bayonet bearing
lightly to the right against the corresponding portion of the
opponent's bayonet. This position is known as the =engage= or =engage
right=.

=66.= Being at the engage right: =ENGAGE LEFT.=

The attack drops the point of his bayonet quickly until clear of his
opponent's rifle and describes a semicircle with it upward and to the
right; bayonets are crossed similarly as in the engaged position, each
man's bayonet bearing lightly to the left against the corresponding
portion of the opponent's bayonet.

=67.= Being at engage left: =ENGAGE RIGHT.=

The attack quickly drops the point of his bayonet until clear of his
opponent's rifle and describes a semicircle with it upward and to the
left and engages.

=68.= Being engaged: =ENGAGE LEFT AND RIGHT=.

The attack =engages left= and then immediately =engages right=.

=69.= Being engaged left: =ENGAGE RIGHT AND LEFT=.

The attack =engages right= and then immediately =engages left=.

=70.= 1. =Number one, ENGAGE RIGHT (LEFT)=; 2. =Number two, COUNTER.=

Number one executes the movement ordered, as above; number two quickly
drops the point of his bayonet and circles it upward to the original
position.

=71.= In all fencing while maintaining the pressure in the engage a
certain freedom of motion of the rifle is allowable, consisting of the
play, or up-and-down motion, of one bayonet against the other. This
is necessary to prevent the opponent from divining the intended
attack. It also prevents his using the point of contact as a pivot for
his assaults. In changing from one engage to the other the movement is
controlled by the left hand, the right remaining stationary.

=72.= After some exercise in engage, engage left, and counter,
exercises will be given in the assaults.


ASSAULTS.

=73.= The part of the body to be attacked will be designated by name,
as head, neck, chest, stomach, legs. No attacks will be made below the
knees. The commands are given and the movements for each line are
first explained thoroughly by the instructor; the execution begins at
the command assault. Number one executes the attack, and number two
parries; conversely, at command, number two attacks and number one
parries.

=74.= For convenience in instruction assaults are divided into =simple
attacks=, =counter attacks=, =attacks on the rifle=, and =feints=.


SIMPLE ATTACKS.

=75.= Success in these attacks depends on quickness of movement. There
are three simple attacks--the =straight=, the =disengagement=, and the
=counter disengagement=. They are not preceded by a feint.

=76.= In the =straight= the bayonet is directed straight at an opening
from the engaged position. Contact with the opponent's rifle may or
may not be abandoned while making it. If the opening be high or low,
contact with the rifle will usually be abandoned on commencing the
attack. If the opening be near his guard, the light pressure used in
the engage may be continued in the attack.

Example: Being at the =engage right=, 1. =Number one, at neck= (head,
chest, right leg, etc.), =thrust=; 2. =Number two, parry right=; 3.
=ASSAULT.=

=77.= In the =disengagement= contact with the opponent's rifle is
abandoned and the point of the bayonet is circled under or over his
bayonet or rifle and directed into the opening attacked. This attack
is delivered by one continuous spiral movement of the bayonet from the
moment contact is abandoned.

Example: Being at the =engage right=, 1. =Number one, at stomach=
(left chest, left leg, etc.), =thrust=; 2. =Number two, parry left=
(etc.); 3. =ASSAULT.=

=78.= In the =counter disengagement= a swift attack is made into the
opening disclosed while the opponent is attempting to change the
engagement of his rifle. It is delivered by one continuous spiral
movement of the bayonet into the opening.

Example: Being at the =engage right=, 1. =Number two, engage left=; 2.
=Number one, at chest, thrust=; 3. =Number two, parry left=; 4.
=ASSAULT.=

Number two initiates the movement, number one thrusts as soon as the
opening is made, and number two then attempts to parry.

=79.= A =counter attack= or =return= is one made instantly after or in
continuation of a parry. The parry should be as narrow as possible.
This makes it more difficult for the opponent to recover and counter
parry. The counter attack should also be made at or just before the
full extension of the opponent's attack, as when it is so made a
simple extension of the arms will generally be sufficient to reach the
opponent's body.

Example: Being at =engage=, 1. =Number two, at chest, lunge=; 2.
=Number one, parry right=, and at stomach (chest, head, etc.),
=thrust=; 3. =ASSAULT.=


ATTACKS ON THE RIFLE.

=80.= These movements are made for the purpose of forcing or
disclosing an opening into which an attack can be made. They are the
=press=, the =beat=, and the =twist=.

=81.= In the =press= the attack quickly presses against the opponent's
bayonet or rifle with his own and continues the pressure as the attack
is delivered.

Example: Being at the =engage=, 1. =Number one, press=, and at chest,
=thrust=; 2. =Number two, parry right=; 3. =ASSAULT.=

=82.= The attack by =disengagement= is particularly effective
following the =press=.

Example: Being at the =engage=, 1. =Number one, press=, and at
stomach, =thrust=; 2. =Number two, low parry left=; 3. =ASSAULT.=

=83.= The =beat= is an attack in which a sharp blow, is struck against
the opponent's rifle for the purpose of forcing him to expose an
opening into which an attack immediately follows. It is used when
there is but slight opposition or no contact of rifles.

Example: Being at the =engage=, 1. =Number one, beat=, and at stomach
(chest, etc.), =thrust=; 2. =Number two, parry left=; 3. =ASSAULT.=

=84.= In the =twist= the rifle is crossed over the opponent's rifle or
bayonet and his bayonet forced downward with a circular motion and a
straight attack made into the opening. It requires superior strength
on the part of the attack.

Example: Being at the engage, 1. =Number one, twist=, and at stomach,
=thrust=; 2. =Number two, low parry left=; 3. =ASSAULT.=


FEINTS.

=85.= Feints are movements which threaten or simulate attacks and are
made with a view to inducing an opening or parry that exposes the
desired point of attack. They are either single or double, according
to the number of such movements made by the attack.

=86.= In order that the attack may be changed quickly, as little force
as possible is put into a feint.

Example: Being at the =engage=, 1. =Number one, feint head thrust=; at
stomach, =lunge=; 2. =Number two, parry right and low parry right=; 3.
=ASSAULT.=

Number one executes the feint and then the attack. Number two executes
both parries.

=87.= In double feints first one part of the body and then another is
threatened and a third attacked.

Example: Being at the =engage=, 1. =Number one, feint straight thrust=
at chest; =disengagement= at chest; at stomach, =lunge=; 2. =Number
two, parry right, parry left=, and =low parry left=; 3. =ASSAULT.=

=88.= An opening may be offered or procured by opposition, as in the
=press= or =beat=.

=89.= In fencing exercises every feint should at first be parried.
When the defense is able to judge or divine the character of the
attack the feint is not necessarily parried, but may be nullified by a
counter feint.

=90.= A =counter feint= is a feint following the opponent's feint or
following a parry of his attack and generally occurs in combined
movements.


COMBINED MOVEMENTS.

=91.= When the men have become thoroughly familiar with the various
foot movements, parries, guards, attacks, feints, etc., the instructor
combines several of them and gives the commands in quick succession,
increasing the rapidity and number of movements as the men become more
skillful. Opponents will be changed frequently.

1. Example: Being at the =engage=, 1. =Number one, by disengagement=
at chest, =thrust=; 2. =Number two, parry left, right step= (left foot
first), and =lunge=; 3. =ASSAULT.=

2. Example: Being at =engage left=, 1. =Number one, press and lunge=;
2. =Number two, parry right, left step=, and =thrust=; 3. =ASSAULT.=

3. Example: Being at the =engage=, 1. =Number one, by disengagement=
at chest, =thrust=; 2. =Number two, parry left, front pass=, and at
head =butt strike=; 3. =Number one, right step=; 4. =ASSAULT.=

=92.= Examples 1 and 2 are typical of movements known as =cross
counters=, and example No. 3 of movements known as =close counters=.

=93.= A =chancery= is an attack by means of which the opponent is
disarmed, which causes him to lose control of his rifle, or which
disables his weapon.

=94.= When the different combinations are executed with sufficient
skill the instructor will devise series of movements to be memorized
and executed at the command =assault=. The accuracy and celerity of
the movements will be carefully watched by the instructor, with a view
to the correction of faulty execution.

=95.= It is not intended to restrict the number of movements, but to
leave to the discretion of company commanders and the ingenuity of
instructors the selection of such other exercises as accord with the
object of the drill.


VII. FENCING AT WILL.

=96.= As satisfactory progress is made the instructor will proceed to
the exercises at will, by which is meant assaults between two men,
each endeavoring to hit the other and to avoid being hit himself.
Fencing at will should not be allowed to degenerate into random
attacks and defenses.

=97.= The instructor can supervise but one pair of combatants at a
time. Frequent changes should be made so that the men may learn
different methods of attack and defense from each other.

=98.= The contest should begin with simple, careful movements, with a
view to forming a correct opinion of the adversary; afterwards
everything will depend on coolness, rapid and correct execution of the
movements, and quick perception of the adversary's intentions.

=99.= Continual retreat from the adversary's attack and frequent
dodging to escape attacks should be avoided. The offensive should be
continually encouraged.

=100.= In fencing at will, when no commands are given, opponents
facing each other at the position of order arms, =salute=. They then
immediately and simultaneously assume the position of guard, rifles
engaged. Neither man may take the position of guard before his
opponent has completed his salute. The choice of position is decided
before the salute.

=101.= The opponents being about two paces apart and the fencing
salute having been rendered, the instructor commands, 1. =At will=, 2.
=ASSAULT=, after which either party has the right to attack. To
interrupt the contest the instructor will command, =HALT=, at which
the combatants will immediately come to the order. To terminate the
contest, the instructor will command, 1. =Halt=, 2. =SALUTE=, at which
the combatants will immediately come to the order, salute, and remove
their masks.

=102.= When men have acquired confidence in fencing at will, one
opponent should be required to advance upon the other in quick time at
charge bayonet, from a distance not to exceed 10 yards, and deliver an
attack. As soon as a hit is made by either opponent the instructor
commands, =HALT=, and the assault terminates. Opponents alternate in
assaulting. The assailant is likewise required to advance at double
time from a distance not exceeding 20 yards and at a run from a
distance not exceeding 30 yards.

=103.= The instructor will closely observe the contest and decide
doubtful points. He will at once stop the contest upon the slightest
indication of temper. After conclusion of the combat he will comment
on the action of both parties, point out errors and deficiencies, and
explain how they may be avoided in the future.

=104.= As additional instruction, the men may be permitted to wield
the rifle left handed--that is, on the left side of the body, left
hand at the small of the stock. Many men will be able to use this
method to advantage. It is also of value in case the left hand is
wounded.

[Illustration: FIG. 26, par. 104.]

=105.= After men have fenced in pairs, practice should be given in
fencing between groups, equally and unequally divided. When
practicable, intrenchments will be used in fencing of this character.

In group fencing it will be necessary to have a sufficient number of
umpires to decide hits. An individual receiving a hit is withdrawn at
once from the bout, which is decided in favor of the group having the
numerical superiority at the end. The fencing salute is not required
in group fencing.


RULES FOR FENCING AT WILL.

=106.= 1. Hits on the legs below the knees will not be counted. No hit
counts unless, in the opinion of the instructor, it has sufficient
force to disable.

2. Upon receiving a hit, call out "hit."

3. After receiving a fair hit a counter attack is not permitted. A
position of engage is taken.

4. A second or third hit in a combined attack will be counted only
when the first hit was not called.

5. When it is necessary to stop the contest--for example, because of
breaking of weapons or displacement of means of protection--take the
position of the order.

6. When it is necessary to suspend the assault for any cause, it will
not be resumed until the adversary is ready and in condition to defend
himself.

7. Attacks directed at the crotch are prohibited in fencing.

8. Stepping out of bounds, when established, counts as a hit.


SUGGESTIONS FOR FENCING AT WILL.

=107.= When engaging in an assault, first study the adversary's
position and proceed by false attacks, executed with speed, to
discover, if possible, his instinctive parries. In order to draw the
adversary out and induce him to expose that part of the body at which
the attack is to be made, it is advisable to simulate an attack by a
feint and then make the real attack.

=108.= Return attacks should be frequently practiced, as they are
difficult to parry, and the opponent is within easier reach and more
exposed. The return can be made a continuation of the parry, as there
is no previous warning of its delivery, although it should always be
expected. Returns are made, without lunging if the adversary can be
reached by thrusts or cuts.

=109.= Endeavor to overcome the tendency to make a return without
knowing where it will hit. Making returns blindly is a bad habit and
leads to instinctive returns--that is, habitual returns with certain
attacks from certain parries--a fault which the skilled opponent will
soon discover.

=110.= Do not draw the rifle back preparatory to thrusting and
lunging.

=111.= The purpose of fencing at will is to teach the soldier as many
forms of simple, effective attacks and defenses as possible.
Complicated and intricate movements should not be attempted.


HINTS FOR INSTRUCTORS.

=112.= The influence of the instructor is great. He must be master of
his weapon, not only to show the various movements but also to lead in
the exercises at will. He should stimulate the zeal of the men and
arouse pleasure in the work. Officers should qualify themselves as
instructors by fencing with each other.

=113.= The character of each man, his bodily conformation, and his
degree of skill must always be taken into account. When the instructor
is demonstrating the combinations, feints returns, and parries the
rapidity of his attack should be regulated by the skill of the pupil,
and no more force than is necessary should be used. If the pupil
exposes himself too much in the feints and parries, the instructor
will, by an attack, convince him of his error; but if these returns be
too swiftly or too strongly made the pupil will become overcautious
and the precision of his attack will be impaired. The object is to
teach the pupil, not to give exhibitions of superior skill.

=114.= Occasionally the instructor should leave himself uncovered and
fail to parry, in order to teach the pupil to take quick advantage of
such opportunities.


SUGGESTIONS.

Instruction in bayonet exercise and bayonet fencing should be
conducted with a view to teaching the aggressive use of the bayonet.
Unless troops are so thoroughly trained with the bayonet that they
believe that with it they are superior to their opponents it will be
difficult or impossible to develop that morale which is necessary for
a successful assault. Men should be impressed with the importance of
acting always on the offensive in bayonet combat, of pushing their
attack with all their might. Troops which are successful in their
first few bayonet encounters will seldom thereafter be called upon to
use the bayonet--their opponents will not await the assault.


LOADINGS AND FIRINGS.

=121.= The commands for loading and firing are the same whether
standing, kneeling, or lying down. The firings are always executed at
a halt.

The instruction in firing will be preceded by a command for loading.

Loadings are executed in line and skirmish line only.

=122.= Rifles having been ordered loaded are kept loaded without
command until the command =unload= or =inspection arms=, fresh clips
being inserted when the magazine is exhausted.

=123.= The aiming point or target is carefully pointed out. This may
be done before or after announcing the sight setting. Both are
indicated before giving the command for firing, but may be omitted
when the target appears suddenly and is unmistakable; in such cases
the battle sight is used if no sight setting is announced. The
troopers must be practiced repeatedly in locating targets, making the
appropriate sight settings, and simulating fire on the target
indicated.

=124.= The target or aiming point having been designated and the sight
setting announced, such designation or announcement need not be
repeated until a change of either or both is necessary.

Troops are trained to continue their fire upon the aiming point or
target designated and at the sight setting announced until a change
is ordered.

=125.= If the men are not already in the position of load, that
position is taken at the announcement of the sight setting; if the
announcement is omitted, the position is taken at the first command
for firing.

=126.= When deployed, the use of the sling as an aid to accurate
firing is discretionary with each man.

=127.= The correct estimation of distances is of great importance in
connection with all rifle firing except that at short ranges.
Instruction of the recruit in this phase of training must not be
delayed until range firing is taken up, but should be begun in the
early instruction and carried forward progressively, thus gradually
developing the faculties involved. In the same way the occasional
firing of a few shots, first with blank cartridges and later with ball
cartridges at short range and under conditions permitting very careful
detailed supervision of each man's position, will be found of
exceptional value as a preliminary exercise to the course of range
firing prescribed for recruits. Detailed directions for conducting the
instruction of the recruit in estimating distances and in rifle firing
are prescribed in the =Small Arms Firing Manual=.


TO LOAD.

=128.= Being in line or skirmish line at halt: 1. =With dummy (blank
or ball) cartridges=, 2. =LOAD.=

At the command load each trooper faces half right and carries the
right foot to the right, about 1 foot, to such position as will insure
the greatest firmness and steadiness of the body, raises or lowers the
rifle and drops it into the left hand at the balance, left thumb
extended along the stock, muzzle at the height of the breast, and
turns the cut-off up. With the right hand he turns and draws the bolt
back, takes a loaded clip and inserts the end in the clip slots,
places the thumb on the powder space of the top cartridge, the
fingers extending around the rifle and tips resting on the magazine
floor plate; forces the cartridges into the magazine by pressing down
with the thumb; without removing the clip thrusts the bolt home,
turning down the handle; turns the safety lock to the "safe"; and
carries the hand to the small of the stock.

A skirmish line may load while moving, the rifles being held as nearly
as practicable in the position of load.

If kneeling or sitting, the position of the piece is similar; if
kneeling, the left forearm rests on the left thigh; if sitting, the
elbows are supported by the knees; if lying down, the left hand
steadies and supports the piece at the balance, the toe of the butt
resting on the ground, the muzzle off the ground.

For reference, these positions (standing, kneeling, and lying down)
are designated as that of load. (Figs. 15, 16.)

[Illustration: FIG. 27, par. 128.]

[Illustration: FIG. 28, par. 128.]

=129.= For instruction in loading: 1. =Simulate=, 2. =LOAD.=

Executed as above described, except that the cut-off remains "off" and
the handling of cartridges is simulated.

The recruits are first taught to simulate loading and firing; after a
few lessons dummy cartridges may be used. Later, blank cartridges may
be used.

=130.= The rifle may be used as a single loader by turning the
magazine "off." The magazine may be filled in whole or in part while
"off" or "on" by pressing cartridges singly down and back until they
are in the proper place. The use of the rifle as a single loader is,
however, to be regarded as exceptional.


TO UNLOAD.

=131.= =UNLOAD.=

Take the position of load, turn the safety lock up and move bolt
alternately back and forward until all the cartridges are ejected.
After the last cartridge is ejected the chamber is closed by first
thrusting the bolt slightly forward to free it from the stud holding
it in place when the chamber is open, pressing the follower down and
back to engage it under the bolt, and then thrusting the bolt home;
the trigger is pulled. The cartridges are then picked up, cleaned, and
returned to the belt, and the rifle is brought to the order.


TO SET THE SIGHT.

=132.= =RANGE, ELEVEN HUNDRED (EIGHT-FIFTY, ETC.), or BATTLE SIGHT.=

The sight is set at the elevation indicated. The instructor explains
and verifies sight settings.


TO FIRE BY VOLLEY.

=133.= 1. =READY=, 2. =AIM=, 3. =Squad=, 4. =FIRE.=

At the command ready, turn the safety lock to the "ready;" at the
command aim, raise the rifle with both hands and support the butt
firmly against the hollow of the right shoulder, right thumb clasping
the stock, barrel horizontal, left elbow well under the rifle, right
elbow as high as the shoulder; incline the head slightly forward and a
little to the right, cheek against the stock, left eye closed, right
eye looking through the notch of the rear sight so as to perceive the
object aimed at, second joint of forefinger resting lightly against
the front of the trigger and taking up the slack; top of front sight
is carefully raised into, and held in, the line of sight.

In aiming kneeling the left elbow rests on the left knee, point of
elbow in front of kneecap. In aiming sitting the elbows are supported
by the knees.

In aiming lying down raise the rifle with both hands, rest on both
elbows and press the butt firmly against the right shoulder.

At the command =fire=, press the finger against the trigger; fire
without deranging the aim and without lowering or turning the rifle;
lower the rifle to the position of load and load. (Figs. 17, 18, 19.)

[Illustration: FIG. 29, par. 133.]

[Illustration: FIG. 30, par. 133.]

[Illustration: FIG. 31, par. 133.]

=134.= To continue the firing: 1. =AIM=, 2. =Squad=, 3. =FIRE.=

Each command is executed as previously explained. Load (from magazine)
is executed by drawing back and thrusting home the bolt with the right
hand, leaving the safety lock at the "ready."


TO FIRE AT WILL.

=135.= =FIRE AT WILL.=

Each man, independently of the other, comes to the =ready=, aims
carefully and deliberately at the aiming point or target, fires,
loads, and continues the firing until ordered to =suspend= or =cease
firing=.

=136.= To increase (decrease) the rate of fire in progress the
Instructor shouts: =FASTER (SLOWER)=.

Men are trained to fire at the rate of about three shots per minute at
effective ranges and five or six at close ranges, devoting the minimum
of time to loading and the maximum to deliberate aiming. To illustrate
the necessity for deliberation, and to habituate men to battle
conditions, small and comparatively indistinct targets are designated.


TO FIRE BY CLIP.

=137.= =CLIP FIRE.=

Executed in the same manner as fire at will, except that each man,
after having exhausted the cartridges then in the rifle, _suspends
firing_.


TO SUSPEND FIRING.

=138.= The instructor blows a long blast of the whistle and repeats
same, if necessary, or commands: =SUSPEND FIRING=.

Firing stops; rifles are held, loaded, and locked in a position of
readiness for instant resumption of firing, sights unchanged. The men
continue to observe the target or aiming point, or the place at which
the target disappeared, or at which it is expected to reappear.

This whistle signal may be used as a preliminary to cease firing.


TO CEASE FIRING.

=139.= =CEASE FIRING.=

Firing stops; rifles not already there are brought to the position of
load, the cut-off turned down if firing from magazine, the cartridge
is drawn or the empty shell is ejected, the trigger is pulled, sights
are laid down, and the rifle is brought to the order.

=Cease firing= is used for long pauses to prepare for changes of
position or to steady the men.

=140.= Commands for suspending or ceasing fire may be given at any
time after the preparatory command for firing whether the firing has
actually commenced or not.


TARGET DESIGNATION.

=141.= In the training of men in the mechanism of the firing line,
they should be practiced in repeating to one another target and aiming
point designations and in quickly locating and pointing out a
designated target. They should be taught to distinguish, from a prone
position, distant objects, particularly troops, both with the naked
eye and with field glasses.

Owing to the invariable custom of attempting to conceal fire trenches,
it is necessary to have some ready method of indicating the exact
location of an indistinct pit or trench occupied or supposed to be
occupied by an enemy in order that effective fire may be opened. The
so-called clock system furnishes one of the simplest devices for so
doing. Two methods of applying this system are indicated below.

=First method=: That in which an imaginary clock dial is assumed to be
horizontal, its center at the _firing point_ and the center-XII line
of the dial perpendicular to the front of the firing line.

To designate a target the commander announces, for example: =Target at
11 o'clock, range 800 yards, a trench.= Each man looks along the
center-11 o'clock line of his imaginary dial, estimates the distance
(800 yards) along that line, and thereby locates the trench.

In this method it is necessary that the target be visible to the naked
eye and that each man be able to estimate distances with fair
accuracy.

=Second method=: That in which an imaginary clock dial is assumed to
be vertical, its center being at a prominent, distant point selected
by the commander and called the =reference point=.

To designate a target the commander announces, for example: =Reference
point, that clump of trees on hill crest.= When the men have located
the reference point he announces: =Target at 4 o'clock, 2 finger
widths, range 1,000 yards, a gun pit.= By a finger width is meant the
distance on the face of the assumed vertical clock (actually on the
landscape) intercepted by the breadth of a man's finger held
perpendicularly to his hand and arm, the latter being fully extended
in the direction of the reference point.

Each man looks along the center-4 o'clock line of the imaginary
(vertical) dial, measures, on this line, a point distant 2
finger-widths from the reference point (the center of the dial), and
thus locates the gun pit.

A combination of the two methods may be necessary when, in using the
second method, the reference point is not readily identified. Thus, in
the case mentioned, it may, for example, be necessary to say:
=Reference point at 1 o'clock, clump of trees on hill crest.=

In both methods the sequence of commands laid down should be observed.

Various devices for pointing out indistinct targets may be improvised
and used.


THE USE OF COVER.

=142.= The recruit should be given careful instruction in the
individual use of cover.

It should be impressed upon him that, in taking advantage of natural
cover, he must be able to fire easily and effectively upon the enemy;
if advancing on an enemy, he must do so steadily and as rapidly as
practicable, taking advantage of any available cover while setting
the sights, firing, or advancing.

To teach him to fire easily and effectively, at the same time
concealing himself from the view of the enemy, he is practiced in
simulated firing in the prone, sitting, kneeling, and crouching
positions, from behind hillocks, trees, heaps of earth or rocks, from
depressions, gullies, ditches, doorways, or windows. He is taught to
fire around the right side of his concealment whenever practicable,
or, when this is not practicable, to rise enough to fire over the top
of his concealment.

When these details are understood, he is required to select cover with
reference to an assumed enemy and to place himself behind it in proper
position for firing.

=143.= The disadvantage of remaining too long in one place, however
good the concealment, should be explained. He should be taught to
advance from cover to cover, selecting cover in advance before leaving
his concealment.

It should be impressed upon him that a man running rapidly toward an
enemy furnishes a poor target. He should be trained in springing from
a prone position behind concealment, running at top speed to cover and
throwing himself behind it. He should also be practiced in advancing
from cover to cover by crawling, or by lying on the left side, rifle
grasped in the right hand, and pushing himself forward with the right
leg.

He should be taught that when fired on while acting independently, he
should drop to the ground, seek cover, and then endeavor to locate his
enemy; also that in the sun he is visible to a much greater degree
than when in the shade.

The instruction of the recruit in the use of cover is continued in
combat exercises of the squad and platoon, but he must then be taught
that the proper advance of the platoon or troop and the effectiveness
of its fire is of greater importance than the question of cover for
individuals _should the two considerations conflict_. He should also
be taught that he may not move about or shift his position in the
firing line except to get a better view of the target.


OBSERVATION.

=144.= In order to develop the faculty of rapid and accurate
observation, which is of great importance in campaign, the recruit
should be trained in taking notice of his surroundings, at first from
selected positions and later at the various gaits.

He should be practiced under various conditions of weather in
recognizing colors and forms; in pointing out and naming military
features of the ground; in observing the effect of the direction of
light on distinctness of objects; in recognizing at gradually
increasing distances the animate and inanimate objects ordinarily met
with in the field; in counting distant objects; and in estimating the
size of groups, such as herds of animals and bodies of troops.


MANUAL OF THE PISTOL.

=145.= Instruction under this head is first given on foot, the recruit
having previously been made familiar with the mechanism of the pistol,
the names of the principal parts, and the method of cleaning,
assembling, and operating it.

When a lanyard is used the snaps are attached to the butt of the
pistol and the magazine, the lanyard is passed over the head, and the
sliding loop drawn snug against the right armpit. The lanyard should
then be of just such length that the arm can be extended without
constraint.

For dismounted instruction with the pistol the troopers may be formed
with or without intervals.

During _instruction_ in the manual of the pistol given when dismounted
_with intervals_ each trooper terminates the first execution of =raise
pistol= by carrying his right foot 24 inches to the right and placing
his left hand in the position of his bridle hand. This position is
then retained until =return pistol= is executed, when the position of
=attention= is resumed.

At _all other times_ when movements in the manual of the pistol are
executed dismounted the left hand is raised to the position of the
bridle hand whenever used to manipulate the mechanism and is then
dropped again to the side.

=146.= Except in the act of firing, the automatic pistol, when
actually on the person, whether loaded or unloaded, will be carried
cocked and locked. At all other times the hammer will be lowered
_fully down_.

=147.= The pistol being in the holster, to raise pistol: 1. =Raise=,
2. =PISTOL.=

Raise: Unbutton the flap of the holster with the right hand and grasp
the stock, back of the hand outward.

=PISTOL=: Draw the pistol from the holster; reverse it, muzzle up, the
hand holding the stock with the thumb and last three fingers,
forefinger outside the guard, barrel to the rear and inclined to the
front at an angle of 30 deg., hand as high as the neck and 6 inches in
front of the point of the right shoulder. This is the position of
raise pistol. (Fig. 32.)

[Illustration: FIG. 32, par. 147.]

=148.= Being at =raise pistol=, to inspect pistol: 1. =Inspection=, 2.
=PISTOL.=

(_a_) =When a magazine is in the pistol=: Push down the safety lock
and lower the right hand to within easy reach of the left, pistol
pointed upward and to the right front at an angle of about 30 deg.; grasp
the corrugations of the slide with the left thumb and forefinger,
thumb to the right; thrust upward with the right hand, thus drawing
back the slide until the slide stop is engaged (fig. 35); resume
=raise pistol= (fig. 33).

(_b_) =When no magazine is in the pistol=: Push down the safety lock and
lower the pistol to the left hand, rotating the pistol so that the
sights move to the left, barrel pointing downward and to the left
front, stock pointing upward and to the right front; with the left
thumb and forefinger grasp the corrugations of the slide, back of the
left hand down (fig. 34); change the grasp of the right hand slightly
until the thumb presses against the rounded surface of the slide stop;
thrust downward and to the left front with the right hand, thus
drawing back the slide, and at the same time press the slide stop with
the right thumb against the slide until it engages; resume raise
pistol.

=Inspection pistol= is never executed with a loaded pistol or with a
loaded magazine in the pistol.

[Illustration: FIG. 33, par. 148 (_a_).]

[Illustration: FIG. 34, par. 148 (_b_).]

=149.= 1. =Return=, 2. =PISTOL.=

(_a_) Being at =raise pistol=; lock the pistol, if not locked; lower
the pistol to the holster, reversing it, muzzle down, back of the hand
to the right; raise the flap of the holster with the right thumb;
insert the pistol in the holster and thrust it home; button the flap
of the holster with the right hand.

(_b_) Being at =inspection pistol=; (with a magazine in the pistol)
lower the pistol to the left hand and grasp the slide as prescribed
for inspection pistol without magazine (par. 148-b, fig. 22); thrust
downward and to the left front with the right hand, thus relieving the
pressure on the slide stop, and at the same time disengage the slide
stop with the right thumb; release the slide; reverse and lock the
pistol; place it in holster as prescribed in (_a_). If there is no
magazine in the pistol, lower it to the bridle hand as in =load= (par.
151); draw back the slide and release it; lock the pistol and place it
In the holster.

When the last shot is fired the slide stop engages automatically.
=Return pistol= is then executed as from inspection pistol (_b_).

=150.= Being at raise pistol, to insert a magazine in the pistol: 1.
=Insert=, 2. =MAGAZINE=, or 2. =LOADED MAGAZINE.=

(_a_) When a magazine is in the pistol: Lower the pistol into the left
hand, rotating it so that the sights move to the left; grasp the slide
with the left hand, back of the hand down, barrel pointing downward to
the left front, stock pointing upward to the right front; release the
magazine catch with the middle finger of the left hand; withdraw the
magazine with the right hand; insert the designated magazine and
resume =raise pistol=. If there be no empty space in the magazine
pocket when the magazine is withdrawn from the pistol, the magazine
may be held between the left thumb and the stock of the pistol until
the magazine has been taken from the pocket and inserted; the magazine
withdrawn from the pistol is then inserted in the magazine pocket.

Whenever the magazine catch is released, the right hand should be so
placed as to limit the motion of the magazine and prevent its falling
out.

(_b_) =When no magazine is in the pistol=: Lower the pistol into the
left hand and grasp it as before; insert the designated magazine and
resume =raise pistol=.

A loaded magazine will never be inserted without specific command.

=151.= Being at =raise pistol= with a loaded magazine in the pistol,
to load: =LOAD=: Push down the safety lock and lower the pistol to the
bridle hand as prescribed for inspection pistol when a magazine is in
the pistol (par. 148 (_a_)); operate the slider, engage the safety
lock with the right thumb, and raise pistol. (Fig. 35.)

To simulate loading for instruction, first withdraw the empty
magazine.

The command load may be given in connection with the insertion of the
magazine, for example: 1. =Insert=, 2. =LOADED MAGAZINE=; 3. =LOAD.=

After inserting magazine, reverse the pistol and load as above
prescribed.

[Illustration: FIG. 35, par. 151.]

=152.= Being in any position, to eject the cartridge from the
receiver: =UNLOAD=.

Pass the pistol into the left hand as in =insert magazine=; release
the magazine catch with the middle finger of the left hand, slightly
disengaging the magazine; push down the safety lock with the right
thumb; operate the slide to eject the cartridge; engage the magazine;
raise and lock the pistol.

=153.= Being in any position, to withdraw the magazine from the
pistol: =WITHDRAW MAGAZINE=.

Handle the pistol as in =insert magazine=; release the magazine catch;
withdraw the magazine and execute raise pistol.

Recruits are taught the motions of loading and firing without
cartridges, and preferably without a magazine in the pistol to avoid
wear on the magazine lips. Loading and pointing practice should be
had at all gaits.

=154.= The hammer is always lowered preparatory to placing the pistol
in the arm rack or other place of deposit.

=155.= Being at raise pistol, to lower the hammer:

(_a_) =Using both hands=: Push down the safety lock; assume the
position of load; seat the right thumb firmly on the hammer and hold
it there; raise the left hand, to the right and press the grip safety
with the left thumb; insert the forefinger inside the trigger guard;
press the trigger and carefully let the hammer down with the right
thumb. Resume =raise pistol=.

(_b_) =Using but one hand=: Raise the right hand until the muzzle of
the pistol is well above the head; disengage the safety lock; seat the
ball of the right thumb firmly on the hammer; bear down the grip
safety by pressure on the hammer; press the trigger and carefully let
down the hammer with the right thumb.

=156.= =To charge the magazine=: Hold the magazine in the left hand,
open end up, rounded side to the right. Take the cartridge in the
right hand, thumb on the rim, bullet end pointing to the right; place
the rim on the end of the magazine follower; force down the magazine
spring and slip the cartridge to the left of the magazine. The next
cartridge is similarly slipped in by placing it on the cartridge just
inserted and forcing down the spring.

The magazine may be charged with any number of cartridges from one to
seven.

Before dismissing the squad, pistols will be inspected, and if found
loaded, will be unloaded and magazines withdrawn to prevent loaded or
partially loaded magazines being left in the pistol. Except at target
practice, on guard duty, or active service, the pistol is habitually
carried unloaded with empty magazine.


EMPLOYMENT OF THE PISTOL.

=157.= The pistol is primarily a weapon for use at very close range.
Its characteristic employment by cavalry is in mounted firing from a
horse moving at a rapid gait. Under such conditions its effectiveness
is almost negligible at ranges over 25 yards against individuals or
over 50 yards against a line in close order except in the hands of
exceptionally skilled shots, and the effectiveness rapidly decreases
at ranges over 5 to 10 yards. These limitations on the use of the
pistol are due not to its short range as a weapon but to the
difficulties of directing it accurately under the conditions of use.
While the pistol is a weapon employing fire action, its tactical
employment is more nearly analogous to that of either the saber or
bayonet than to that of the rifle.

=158.= From the preceding paragraph it results that there is no need,
in connection with the employment of the pistol as a weapon of mounted
combat, for commands that purport to designate a target or to indicate
range or other details for the direction of fire. The only commands
ordinarily needed are those required for instruction purposes. (See
Small-Arms Firing Manual.)

=159.= The effectiveness of the individual trooper in mounted pistol
combat depends upon:

(_a_) Thorough familiarity with the weapon and facility in
manipulating its mechanism under all conditions. This is acquired by
training in the =Manual of the Pistol=. Constant practice is necessary
in rapidly drawing the pistol from its holster, loading it,
withdrawing magazine, and inserting magazine, at first at a halt,
later in motion, and finally at rapid gaits.

(_b_) Skill in firing the pistol. This is acquired by actual practice
in the preliminary exercises and range firing as prescribed in the
=Small-Arms Firing Manual=.

(_c_) Control of the horse. This is acquired in the =School of the
Trooper=.

(_d_) The thorough inculcation in the trooper of the habit of
_withholding his fire until within close range_. This can well be
accomplished in individual training by exercises in firing or
simulating fire at one or more silhouette targets. The trooper
approaches at a gait graduated in accordance with his state of
training and is required to withhold his fire until he passes a
certain line.

=160.= The other elements that enter into effective use of the pistol
as a mounted weapon relate to the formations and tactics employed
rather than to individual training. They pertain, therefore, to
collective rather than individual instruction.

=161.= If any command be required in connection with the
characteristic use of the pistol in mounted combat, it consists simply
of an indication of the moment at which fire may begin. For this
purpose the command =COMMENCE FIRING= may be employed in any case for
which a command may be desirable.


MANUAL OF THE SABER, DISMOUNTED.

=162.= For this instruction, dismounted, the saber in the scabbard is
carried in the left hand.

In the position of attention the saber will be held upright by the
side, guard to the front, the shoe of the scabbard resting on the
ground close to the left foot and just in front of the heel. The left
arm will be extended, the fingers and thumb grasping the scabbard,
back of the hand outward.

In the necessary movements on foot with the saber in hand the saber is
carried with the hilt to the front and higher than the shoe of the
scabbard.

Officers, dismounted, may carry the saber in the hollow of the left
arm, elbow bent, forearm horizontal, guard of the saber to the front,
blade vertical. An officer or noncommissioned officer habitually draws
saber before giving any commands involving the use of that weapon by
those under him. Officers and noncommissioned officers out of ranks
draw saber only on occasions when the men draw saber unless otherwise
prescribed. The saber may be drawn for signaling.

=163.= The saber is intended for mounted combat. The instructor will
impress upon the recruit from the first that the use of the saber in
war is ordinarily limited to occasions of mounted combat, and that
instruction on foot in its use is merely preliminary to the mounted
training which the recruit will receive later.

=164.= For dismounted instruction, if the squad is in ranks the
instructor causes intervals or distances (pars. 85-88) to be taken
before drawing saber.

=165.= 1. =Draw=, 2. =SABER.=

At the command =draw=, grasp the scabbard with the left hand about 4
inches from the mouth, place the left hand against the thigh, and
carry the hilt to the front; turn the head slightly to the left
without deranging the position and glance at the saber knot; engage
the right wrist in the saber knot and give it two turns inward to
secure it; grasp the hilt with the right hand and draw the saber about
6 inches from the scabbard and look to the front.

At the command saber, draw the saber quickly, raising the arm to the
front and upward to its full length, saber in prolongation of the arm.
Make a short pause with the saber raised, then bring it down with the
blade against the hollow of the right shoulder, guard to the front,
right hand at the hip, the third and fourth fingers on the back of the
grip and the elbow back.

The left hand holds the scabbard as at attention.

This is the position of =carry saber dismounted=.

=166.= 1. =Return=, 2. =SABER.=

At the command return, grasp the scabbard as in draw saber and carry
the opening to the front. Carry the saber to the front with arm half
extended until the thumb is about 6 inches in front of the chin, the
blade vertical, guard to the left, the thumb extended along the side
of the grip, the little finger joined with the others.

At the command saber, move the wrist to opposite the left shoulder,
lower the blade and pass it across and along the left arm, point to
the rear. Turn the head to the left, fixing the eyes upon the opening
of the scabbard: raise the right hand and insert the blade in the
scabbard and push it home. Disengage the wrist from the saber knot and
resume the position of attention.

=167.= Being at =carry saber=: 1. =Present=, 2, =SABER.=

Without changing the position of the left hand, execute at the command
saber what is prescribed in par. 166 at the command =return=, except
that the grip is held in the full grasp. The saber is said to be held
in the full grasp when all four fingers grasp the grip, the thumb
extending along the back in the groove, the fingers pressing the back
of the grip against the heel of the hand.

Officers at the command: 1. =Present=, execute =present saber= as
described above; at the command: 2. =SABER=, they lower the saber
until the point is 12 inches from the ground and directed to the
front, guard to the left, right arm straight, hand beside the thigh.
=Mounted, the point Is lowered to the level of the stirrup.=

=168.= Being at =carry saber=: 1. =Port=, 2. =SABER.=

Carry the right foot about 24 inches to the right, bring the left hand
to the position of the bridle hand and raise the saber to a vertical
position, guard to the front, grip held in the full grasp, right hand
about 12 inches in front of the shoulder.

To resume the carry: 1. =Carry=, 2. =SABER.=

=169.= Being at =carry saber=, or in any position: =GUARD=.

Carry the right foot about 24 inches to the right and bend knees to
simulate the position mounted. Incline the body to the front from the
waist (not the hips). Let the blade fall to the front to a position
nearly horizontal, elbow well away from the body, forearm and saber
forming one straight line, guard to the right, point at the height of
the adversary's breast, the left hand in the position of the bridle
hand. (Fig. 24.)

[Illustration: FIG. 36, par. 169.]

=170.= Being at =carry saber=: 1. =Inspection=, 2. =SABER=.

Carry the right hand upward, arm half extended until the thumb is at
the height of the chin, grip held in the full grasp, blade vertical,
guard to the left. Make a slight pause, then loosen the grasp on the
grip and turn the saber with the guard to the right. Again make a
slight pause, then resume the first position and return to the carry.

=171.= Saber exercise is conducted, and instruction given, as
prescribed in the =Saber exercise=. For =Manual of the Saber
Mounted=, _see_ par. 245.


=Section 4. School of the Trooper, Mounted.=

GENERAL PROVISIONS.

=172.= _Object._--The primary object of this school is to train the
trooper in horsemanship and in the ready use of his weapons while
mounted.

=173.= _The instructor._--It is essential that the instructor (par.
37) be a skilled and experienced horseman, properly mounted. He should
always supplement the original explanation of a movement by executing
it himself, so that the recruits may actually see the result that is
desired and the means by which it is effected.

=174.= _Cautions to instructors._--The instructor must first develop
the confidence of the recruit, give him a proper seat, and make him
supple on the horse. Progress should be suited to his capacity and
exempt him as far as practicable from falls or other accidents.
Instruction in the use of the aids and in the means employed to train
the horse to obey them will follow.

When the recruit has acquired confidence in his ability to ride and
control his horse he will be instructed in the use of arms mounted.

Instruction is given individually; every new movement is made the
object of a particular lesson given to each trooper in turn.

During the exercise the instructor avoids general remarks and (in so
far as possible) unfamiliar terms; in the correction of faults he
addresses by name those committing them.

He passes frequently from one trooper to another repeating advice and
endeavoring to impress upon the troopers the principles embodied in
the regulations. In doing this he need not use the language of the
text.

The instructor may be on foot or mounted. For the first lessons it is
advantageous to remain on foot so as better to explain movements and
correct faults.

Steady, well-trained horses are selected for the first lessons. The
troopers exchange horses from time to time during the lesson on
indication from the instructor.

There should be frequent rests, especially with recruits. During these
rests advantage may be taken of the opportunity to question the
troopers respecting the instruction they have received.

In all exercises the instructor varies the gait so as not to weary the
troopers or the horses. The instruction is conducted without hurry.
The daily work begins and ends at the walk.

=175.= _The standard required of troopers._--To be a good military
horseman each trooper should--

(_a_) Have a strong seat.

(_b_) Be able to apply correctly the aids by which a horse is
controlled.

(_c_) Be capable of covering long distances on horseback with the
least possible fatigue to his horse and to himself.

(_d_) Be able to use his horse to the utmost advantage in a mounted
fight.

(_e_) Be capable of riding across country.

(_f_) Under proper directions, be able to train an unbroken horse in
garrison and in the field, understand how to detect and treat the
minor ailments to which the horse is liable, and be a good groom.

All officers, in addition to being good military horsemen and
instructors in riding, must be able to train remounts and to direct
their training.

=177.= _General provisions._--For the preparatory exercises the horses
are saddled and equipped with the snaffle bit only, saddles stripped.
Spurs are not worn.

These exercises are conducted at first in a riding hall or on an
inclosed course out of doors.

References to the riding hall are to be understood as ordinarily
applying equally to any out-of-doors inclosure or to the space
included in any course marked off for instruction in equitation (pars.
269, 296).

At first, the troopers, dismounted, lead their horses to the riding
hall and return them to the stable in the same manner. When they have
received sufficient instruction they go and return mounted.

As soon as the instruction has advanced sufficiently to permit the
use of such commands and methods, the instructor will confine himself
to the commands and means prescribed in the School of the Trooper.


TO FOLD THE SADDLE BLANKET.

=178.= The blanket, after being well shaken, will be folded into six
thicknesses, as follows: Hold it well up by the two corners, the long
way up and down; double it lengthwise (so the fold will come between
the "U" and "S"), the folded corner (middle of blanket) in the left
hand; take the folded corner between the thumb and forefinger of the
right hand, thumb pointing to the left; slip the left hand down the
folded edge two-thirds its length and seize it with the thumb and
second finger; raise the hands to the height of the shoulders, the
blanket between them extended; bring the hands together, the double
fold falling outward; pass the folded corner from the right hand into
the left hand, between the thumb and forefinger, slip the second
finger of the right hand between the folds and seize the double folded
corner; turn the left (disengaged) corner in and seize it with the
thumb and forefinger of the right hand, the second finger of the right
hand stretching and evening the folds; after evening the folds grasp
the corners and shake the blanket well in order to smooth the folds;
raise the blanket and place it between the chin and breast; slip the
hands down half way, the first two fingers outside, the other fingers
and thumb of each hand inside, seize the blanket with the thumbs and
first two fingers and let the part under the chin fall forward; hold
the blanket up, arms extended, even the lower edges, seize the middle
points between the thumbs and forefingers, and flirt the outside part
over the right arm; the blanket is thus held before placing it on the
horse.

While retaining the general method of folding the blanket as above
indicated, troop commanders will require the blanket to be refolded
frequently with a view to equalizing the wear on the different
sections of the blanket.


TO PUT ON THE BLANKET AND SURCINGLE.

=179.= The instructor commands: =BLANKET=.

Approach the horse on the near (left) side, with the blanket folded
and held as just described; place it well forward on his back by
tossing the part of the blanket over the right arm to the off (right)
side of the horse, still keeping hold of the middle points; slide the
blanket once or twice from front to rear to smooth the hair. Being
careful to raise the blanket in bringing it forward, place the blanket
with the forefinger of the left hand on the withers and the forefinger
of the right hand on the backbone, the blanket smooth; it should then
be well forward with the edges on the left side; remove the locks of
mane that may be under it, pass the buckle end of the surcingle over
the middle of the blanket and buckle it on the near side a little
below the edge of the blanket.


TO PUT ON AND TAKE OFF THE WATERING BRIDLE.

=180.= The instructor commands: =BRIDLE=.

Take the reins in the right hand, the bit in the left; approach the
horse on the near side, slip the reins over the horse's head and let
them rest on his neck; reach under and engage the snap in the right
halter ring; insert the left thumb in the side of the horse's mouth
above the tush and press open the lower jaw; insert the bit and engage
the snap in the left halter ring. The bit should hang so as to touch,
but not draw up, the corners of the mouth. At the command =unbridle=,
pass the reins over the horse's head and disengage the snaps.


TO SADDLE.

=181.= (_a_) (McClellan saddle.) For instruction the saddle may be
placed four yards in rear or front of the horse. The stirrups are
crossed over the seat, the right one uppermost; then the cincha and
cincha strap are crossed above the stirrups, the strap uppermost. The
blanket having been placed as previously explained, the instructor
commands: =SADDLE=.

Seize the pommel of the saddle with the left hand and the cantle with
the right, approach the horse on the near side from the direction of
the croup and _place the center of the saddle on the middle of the
horse's back_, the end of the side bar about three-finger widths
behind the point of the shoulder blade; let down the cincha strap and
cincha, pass to the off side, adjust the cincha and straps, and see
that the blanket is smooth; return to the near side, raise the blanket
slightly under the pommel arch so that the withers may not be
compressed; take the cincha strap in the right hand, reach under the
horse and seize the cincha ring with the left hand, pass the end of
the strap through the ring from underneath (from inside to outside),
then up and through the upper ring from the outside, if necessary,
make another fold in the same manner.

The strap is fastened as follows: Pass the end through the upper ring
to the front; seize it with the left hand, place the fingers of the
right between the outside folds of the strap, pull from the horse with
the right hand and take up the slack with the left; cross the strap
over the folds, pass the end of it with the right hand underneath and
through the upper ring back of the folds, then down and under the loop
that crosses the folds and draw it tightly; weave the ends of the
strap into the strands of the cincha.

Another method of fastening the cincha strap is as follows: Pass, the
end through the upper ring to the rear; seize it with the right hand;
place the fingers of the left hand between the outer folds of the
strap; pull from the horse with the left hand and take up the slack
with the right; pass the end of the strap underneath and draw it
through the upper ring until a loop is formed; double the loose end of
the strap and push it through the loop and draw the loop taut. The
free end should be long enough to be seized conveniently with the
hand.

Having fastened the cincha strap, let down the right stirrup and then
the left.

The surcingle is then buckled over the saddle, and should be a little
looser than the cincha.

The cincha when first tied should admit a finger between it and the
belly. After exercising for a while the cincha will be found too loose
and should be tightened.

(_b_) (Service saddle, model of 1912.) Troops equipped with this model
will saddle as prescribed for the McClellan saddle with the following
modifications;

Place the saddle on the blanket so that the front edge of the side bar
approaches the shoulder blade without pressing upon it. After the
saddle has been so placed, let down; the girth; pass to the off side,
adjust the girth and saddle skirt, and see that the blanket is smooth,
return to the near side and push the blanket well up into the pommel
arch; reach under the horse, seize the girth with the left hand and
bring up its free end to the near side of the saddle; with the right
hand raise the saddle skirt and buckle the girth straps to the
corresponding buckles of the girth, beginning with the forward strap,
lower the saddle skirt and let down the stirrups, beginning with the
right stirrup. The girth should ordinarily be about 4 inches in rear
of the point of the elbow.

=182.= To approximate the length of the stirrup straps before
mounting, they are adjusted so that the length of the stirrup strap,
including the stirrup, is about 1 inch less than the length of the
arm, fingers extended.


TO UNSADDLE.

=183.= The instructor commands: =UNSADDLE=.

(_a_) (McClellan saddle.) Stand on the near side of the horse;
unbuckle and remove the surcingle; cross the left stirrup over the
saddle; loosen the cincha strap and let down the cincha; pass to the
off side, cross the right stirrup, then the cincha; pass to the near
side, cross the cincha strap over the saddle; grasp the pommel with
the left hand, the cantle with the right, and remove the saddle over
the croup and place it in front or rear of the horse as may be
directed, pommel to the front; grasp the blanket at the withers with
the left hand and at the loin with the right, remove it in the
direction of the croup, the edges falling together, wet side in, and
place it on the saddle, folded edge on the pommel.

If in the stable, place the saddle on its peg when taken off the
horse.

(_b_) (Service saddle, model of 1912.) Stand on the near side of the
horse; cross the left stirrup over the saddle; raise the saddle skirt
with the left hand, and with the right unbuckle the girth straps,
beginning with the rear strap; let down the girth; pass to the off
side; cross the right stirrup and then the girth over the saddle; pass
to the near side, grasp the pommel with the left hand, the cantle with
the right, and remove and dispose of the saddle as prescribed in
(_a_).

The service saddle, model 1912, should be hung on a bracket,
sufficiently wide for the saddle to rest on its side bars. If a
narrower support is used, the saddle will rest on the low point; in
the leather seat and become misshapen.


TO PUT ON AND TAKE OFF THE BIT AND BRIDOON BRIDLE (MODEL 1909).

=184.= Before bridling the curb chain is unhooked on the near side The
instructor commands: =BRIDLE=.

Take the reins in the right, the crownpiece in the left hand; approach
the horse on the near side, passing the right hand along his neck;
slip both reins over his head and let them rest on his neck; take the
crownpiece in the right hand and the lower left branch of the curb bit
in the left hand, the forefinger against the mouthpiece, the snaffle
bit above and resting on the mouthpiece of the curb bit; bring the
crownpiece in front of and slightly below its proper position; insert
the thumb into the side of the mouth above the tush; press open the
lower jaw and insert the bits by raising the crownpiece; with the left
hand draw the ears gently under the crownpiece, beginning with the
left ear; arrange the forelock, secure the throatlatch, and hook up
the curb chain on the near side below the snaffle bit.

The bridle is adjusted as prescribed in par. 302.

The throatlatch should admit four fingers between it and the throat.

=185.= At the discretion of the instructor, the halter may be taken
off before bridling, the reins being first passed over the neck; the
hitching strap, if not left at the manger or picket line, is tied
around the horse's neck; if the horse be saddled, in the near pommel
ring.

=186.= The instructor commands: =UNBRIDLE=.

Stand on the near side of the horse; pass the reins over the horse's
head, placing them on the bend of the left arm; unhook the curb chain
on the near side; unbuckle the throatlatch, grasp the crownpiece with
the right hand and, assisting with the left hand, gently disengage the
ears; gently disengage the bits from the horse's mouth with the left
hand by lowering the crownpiece; place the crownpiece in the palm of
the left hand, take the reins in the right hand, pass them together
over the crownpiece, make two or three turns around; the bridle, then
pass the bight between the brow band and crownpiece and draw it snug.

The bridle is hung up by the reins or placed across the saddle on the
blanket.

If the horse has no halter on, unbridle and push the bridle back so
that the crownpiece will rest on the neck behind the poll until the
halter is replaced.

=187.= =Stand to horse=: At this command each trooper places himself,
facing to the front, on the near side of the horse, opposite his head,
and takes the position of _attention_, except that the right hand,
nails down, grasps the reins, the forefinger separating them, about 6
inches from the bit. The bights of the reins rest on the neck near the
pommel of the saddle.

=188.= =To lead out=: The troopers being at =stand to horse=, to leave
the stable or picket line, the instructor commands: =LEAD OUT=.

Each trooper, holding his right hand well up and firm, leads his
horse, without looking at him, to the place designated by the
instructor.

=189.= Upon entering the riding hall or inclosure the instructor
disposes the troopers upon a line at intervals of 3 yards, the
troopers at =stand to horse=, the horses correctly disposed and
perpendicular to the line of troopers.

A horse is correctly disposed when he stands squarely on all four
feet, having his head, neck, and body in line.

=190.= =Stirrups=: The stirrups are properly adjusted when, the
trooper being properly seated with the feet removed from the stirrups
and the legs falling naturally, the tread of the stirrups is about 1
inch above the top of the heel of the shoe.

The stirrups should bear only the weight of the lower leg; about
one-third of the foot should be inserted in the stirrup, so that the
ball of the foot rests on the tread, the heel lower than the toe.

The flat of the stirrup strap should rest against the leg of the
mounted trooper. To accomplish this the trooper's toe should be so
inserted in the stirrup as to place the front branch of the latter on
the outside. By the front branch of the stirrup is meant the forward
branch as the stirrup hangs before the trooper mounts.

Placing too much weight on the stirrup disturbs the seat and contracts
the leg, hindering it's freedom of action.

If the toe is not inserted far enough the trooper risks losing his
stirrup; if inserted too far suppleness is diminished.

The heel is carried naturally lower than the toe if the ankle joint is
not rigid.

For the extended gallop, in the charge, for the use of weapons, and
for leaping obstacles the foot is inserted fully in the stirrup.

=191.= =To mount=: Being at =stand to horse=, =MOUNT=.

(_a_) Face to the right, drop the right rein, grasp the left rein in
the right hand, take two steps to the right, sliding the hand along
the left rein, make a half face to the left When opposite the girth;
with the aid of the left hand take both reins in the right, forefinger
between the reins, the right hand on the pommel, the reins coming into
the hand on the side of the forefinger, and held so as to feel lightly
the horse's mouth, the bight falling on the off side. Place the left
foot in the stirrup, assisted by the left hand if necessary, and bring
the left knee against the saddle; grasp a lock of the mane with the
left hand, lock coming out between the thumb and forefinger.

(_b_) Spring from the right foot, keeping the hands firmly in place,
the left knee bent and pressed against the saddle, bring the right
foot by the side of the left, body inclining slightly forward; pass
the right leg, knee bent, over the croup without touching it, sit down
lightly-in the saddle; let go of the mane; insert the right foot in
the stirrup, assisted by the right hand if necessary; take a rein in
each hand, the rein coming into the hand under the little finger and
passing out over the second joint of the forefinger, the thumbs closed
on the reins, the bight of the reins falling to the right.

The reins should be so held that the trooper feels lightly the horse's
mouth, the fingers closed until the nails lightly touch the palms of
the hands; the reins well up in the crotch of the fingers; the backs
of the hands vertical and in prolongation of the forearm; the wrists
flexible; the elbows near the body and low, so that the forearms will
be in prolongation of the reins; the hands about 9 inches apart.

The instructor takes care that the recruit in adjusting the reins
provokes no movement of the horse and deranges in no manner the
position of the horse's head.

The instructor cautions the trooper to avoid touching the horse with
the left toe in mounting; this fault begets nearly all the resistance
of horses to standing quietly while being mounted.

The modifications incident to mounting and dismounting a horse
equipped with the double snaffle or bit and bridoon are indicated in
pars. 271, 303, and 307. The troopers are also trained to mount on the
right side.

=192.= =To dismount=: Being halted, =DISMOUNT=.

(_a_) Seize the reins with the right hand in front of and near the
left, forefinger between the reins, the reins entering the hand from
the side of the forefinger; drop the reins with the left hand; place
the right hand on the pommel; grasp a lock of the mane with the left
hand, the lock coming out between the thumb and forefinger; take the
right foot out of the stirrup.

(_b_) Rise upon the left stirrup, pass the right leg, knee bent, over
the croup without touching the horse, and bring the right foot by the
side of the left, the left knee against the saddle, the upper part of
the body inclined slightly forward; descend lightly to the ground and
take the position of =stand to horse=.

The troopers are also trained to dismount on the right side.

=193.= Commanding officers may authorize the following alternative
method of mounting and dismounting by officers and enlisted men on all
occasions except those when it is required that mounting and
dismounting be executed in unison at the corresponding command (par.
354). Instruction, in the methods authorized in this paragraph is
optional.

Being at =stand= to horse, at the command =MOUNT=, face to the right,
drop the right rein, take a step to the right to be opposite the
shoulder of the horse; at the same time seize the bights of the reins
in the right hand and pull them taut enough to give a gentle, even
bearing on the horse's mouth; grasp the reins with the left hand, with
the little finger between them, and the bight coming out between the
thumb and forefinger, which also hold a lock of the mane. Place the
left foot in the stirrup, assisted by the right hand if necessary, and
bring the left knee against the saddle.

Place the right hand upon the cantle, rise by an effort of the right
leg, aided by the arms, the left knee bent and pressed against the
saddle, the upper part of the body inclined slightly forward to keep
the saddle from turning; bring the right foot by the side of the left;
change the right hand to the pommel, pass the right leg, knee bent,
over the croup without touching it, and sit down lightly in the
saddle. Put the right foot in the stirrup, assisted by the right hand
if necessary.

At the command =DISMOUNT=, pass the right rein into the left hand and
grasp with this hand a lock of the mane, place the right hand on the
pommel, and remove the right foot from the stirrup; pass the right
leg, knee bent, over the croup without touching the horse and bring
the right foot by the side of the left, the left knee against the
saddle, the upper part of the body inclined slightly forward, right
hand on the cantle. Descend lightly to the ground and take the
position of stand to horse.

=194.= =To take the reins in one hand and to separate them=: At the
command =IN LEFT HAND TAKE REINS=, place the left hand opposite the
middle of the body, pass the right rein into the left hand, separating
it from the left rein by the little finger; let the right hand fall by
the side.

=195.= At the command =IN BOTH HANDS TAKE REINS=, grasp the right rein
with the right hand and replace the hands 9 inches apart.

The reins are taken in the right hand and again separated in a similar
manner.

=196.= To adjust the reins the trooper brings the wrists together and
grasps with one hand, above and near the opposite thumb, the rein that
he desires to shorten.

=197.= The instructor causes the reins to be dropped and retaken by
the commands =DROP REINS= and =REINS=.

At the first command, the trooper drops the reins behind the pommel
and lets the hands fall by the side.

The reins are dropped as an exceptional measure, and always with
precaution against accident.

=198.= =Position of the trooper, or attention (mounted)=: The position
described below should be considered a standard toward which all
troopers should gradually approximate.

The buttocks bearing equally upon and well forward in the middle of
the saddle.

The thighs turned without constraint upon their flat side, clasping
the horse evenly and stretched only by their own weight and that of
the lower legs.

The knees bent and flexible.

The lower legs falling naturally, the calves in contact with the horse
without pressure, the toes dropping naturally when the trooper is
without stirrups.

The back supple and never hollowed.

The upper part of the body easy, free, and erect.

The shoulders thrown back evenly.

The arms free, the elbows falling naturally.

The head erect and turned to the front, but without stiffness.

Eyes alert, well up, and directed to the trooper's front.

The reins held as heretofore prescribed.

This position may be modified by the instructor to suit varying
conditions and unusual conformations. When not at attention, the head
and eyes are directed so as best to favor alertness and observation.
In other respects the position should be practically unchanged.

=199.= The body and lower legs are movable and should be under the
control of the trooper, either acting intermittently as aids for
guiding the horse or as a means of binding the rider to the horse
while following his movements.

The thighs, on the other hand, should remain fixed immovably to the
saddle, except while posting at the trot. This fixity should be
obtained not by the pressure of the knees but by the clinging of the
buttocks, which is secured by the suppleness of the loins and the
relaxation of the thighs. It is acquired very rapidly by daily
"_rotation of the thighs_," which gradually presses the large thigh
muscles to the rear and permits the femur to rest solidly against the
saddle.

The trooper should sit with his buttocks well under the upper part of
his body and especially avoid bowing the back by thrusting the
buttocks to the rear and the lower part of the spine to the front.
Sitting well forward in the middle of the saddle will tend to assist
the trooper in avoiding the defect just referred to. If the buttocks
are thrust back too much the trooper can not conform to the movements
of the horse and carries forward the upper part of his body.

If the thigh is too nearly horizontal, the trooper is doubled, up and
his power of action diminished; if the thigh is too nearly vertical,
the trooper is on the crotch and lacks ease.

To sum up: The trooper should take a relaxed sitting position,
squarely on his buttocks, with the thighs inclined downward.

The various defects of position are overcome by suitable suppling
exercises (pars. 209-220).

=200.= _The aids._--The legs, the reins, and the weight are the means
of controlling the horse in riding. They are called the aids.

=201.= =The legs=: The legs serve to urge the horse forward, to
increase his pace or gait, and to engage the hind quarters or move
them laterally. The legs act by the pressure of the calves. If
pressure alone is insufficient the trooper increases the action by
blows with his calves.

It is essential to obtain from the horse perfect obedience to the
action of the legs. He should respond to the simultaneous and equal
action of both legs by engaging his hindquarters and moving forward;
to the predominant action of one leg by moving his haunches to the
opposite side.

=202.= =The reins=: The reins serve to prepare the horse to move, to
decrease or increase his pace, to change the gait, or to change
direction.

=Contact= is a light bearing of the mouth of the horse on the hand of
the rider. It should be constantly maintained.

The reins are held in the full hand, the thumb pressing them lightly
upon the second joint of the forefinger. By means of closing and
relaxing the fingers and flexing the wrist, arm, and shoulder, the
trooper, while maintaining contact and keeping the reins taut, follows
easily the movements of the head of the horse without anticipating or
interfering with these movements. The hand is then said to be passive.
It is kept so as long as the trooper is not required to change the
pace, gait, or direction.

=203.= =The direct rein=: When the trooper, with the hands separated
and the reins adjusted, closes his fingers upon the reins without
raising the hands he exercises an action from front to rear, called
the effect of the direct reins. This effect, when on one rein only, is
called that of the =right (or left) direct rein=.

=204.= =The leading rein=: When the trooper carries the right hand to
the right and forward in a manner to preserve contact but not to
increase pressure on the bit the effect is called that of the =right
leading rein=.

The back of the hand should remain vertical, the wrist in prolongation
of the forearm, the elbow remaining near the body.

The horse's head and neck are drawn to the right, the shoulders
follow, and he turns to the right.

=205.= =The bearing rein=: When the trooper carries the right hand
forward, upward, and to the left in a manner to preserve contact, but
not to increase pressure on the bit, the effect is said to be that of
the =right bearing rein=.

The back of the hand should remain vertical, the wrist in prolongation
of the forearm.

The horse's head is =turned slightly to the right=, but the effect is
to the left; the neck bends and is convex to the left and is followed
by the shoulders. The horse turns to the left.

The action of the bearing rein is much more powerful than that of the
leading rein, and is used to the exclusion of the latter to turn the
horse when riding with the reins in one hand.

=206.= =The indirect rein of opposition=: When the trooper carries the
right hand to the left in a manner to press the shoulders to the left
and to produce a diagonal traction on the rein in the direction of the
left shoulder or haunch the effect is called that of the =right
indirect rein of opposition=.

Its effect may be produced =in front of the withers= if the hand be
slightly raised; =in rear pf the withers= if the hand be slightly
lowered. It is frequently used by the trooper when riding with one
hand (as he must do in order to use his weapons), and its effect
should be studied and practiced from, the beginning.

=207.= Manner of applying the aids: The action of the reins and legs
and weight should not be continuous. The trooper alternately closes
and relaxes the fingers, the hands preserving contact in the intervals
between the actions. In the same manner he uses the legs, neither
gripping nor releasing altogether, but preserving light contact in the
intervals between the blows with the calves. The weight likewise is
used in a similar manner, being quickly applied to the front, to the
rear, or to a side, alternating with returns to the normal position.

If an action of the aids is prolonged the horse has opportunity to
establish the corresponding resistance, but if produced by =repeated
applications= the effect is very marked.

All action of the aids should diminish in intensity when obedience
begins and cease entirely as soon as the desired result is secured.

Troopers must be thoroughly trained in riding with the reins in one
hand.

=208.= The instructor, in teaching troopers to avail themselves of
their legs and reins, is governed by the preceding considerations, and
from the first watches vigilantly the action of the aids.

The hand should always be kept low. The most thoughtful care should be
exercised in the combined application of the aids, so that they may
not be opposed to each other in their action; that is, one favoring
the intended movement, the other opposing it.

The instructor impresses upon the troopers that their hands must be
kept still; that is, free from bobbing up and down, and pulling, and
from giving and taking when there is no reason therefor.

Likewise their legs should remain in light contact with the horse's
sides and the heels not be used to kick the horse constantly in a
nervous manner.

Moreover, that the effects of the aids may be perfectly clear, and
that there may be no contradiction between them, =there should never
be simultaneous action of the direct reins demanding slowing up or
halting and of the legs provoking a forward movement=. This condition
is essential for preserving the composure indispensable to the horses
of the troop.

=242.= =Posting=: Posting is habitually employed when the troopers
have stirrups and understand their use.

It is executed as follows: The horse moving at a trot, the trooper
inclines the upper part of his body forward, then supporting himself
on the stirrups while maintaining the clinging of his knees he rises
under the impulsion of the horse, maintains his position detached from
the saddle while the succeeding impulse is produced, again sits down
in the saddle, and continues in this way, avoiding alternate impulses.

At the beginning the mechanism of posting is made easier to the
trooper by causing him to stroke the horse's neck or to grasp a lock
of the mane with either hand, thus determining the forward inclination
of the body.

Its proper execution requires that the seat be raised moderately, that
contact with the saddle be resumed gently and without shock, that the
full support of the stirrup be obtained while keeping the lower leg
steady, that the ankle joint be supple, and that the heel be kept
lower than the toe.

=243.= =Care of horses and saddlery=: The recruits will be given talks
and practical illustrations in every phase of the care of horses and
the care of saddlery. This in addition to their daily attention to
those subjects as a matter of routine.

=244.= _The use of arms, mounted._--During the period in which the
instruction in the school of the trooper is held, there must be
thorough instruction in the use of arms mounted. After the first few
drills there should be daily instruction in some phase of this
important part of the trooper's training. Progress in the more
advanced steps of this instruction must necessarily depend upon the
trooper's progress in horsemanship; but by making the dismounted
instruction thorough and keeping it well in advance of the
corresponding parts of the mounted program, many difficulties will be
obviated and much time saved. Success with the pistol and saber will
be dependent upon that familiarity with their use that can be gained
only by daily practice extending over a considerable period. The
dismounted instruction already prescribed in connection with the use
of the weapons must be supplemented by thorough mounted work at all
gaits, when passing obstacles, etc. The trooper must learn to control
his horse thoroughly with one hand while carrying and using his weapon
in the other; he must learn to handle his weapon mounted with a
minimum of danger to himself, his comrades, or his horse. The
principal drill on at least one day of each week during the entire
period devoted to the school of the trooper should ordinarily be
devoted, to the above instruction, thus supplementing and testing the
results accomplished in the shorter daily drills. At this weekly drill
the troopers should habitually appear fully armed and equipped, the
saddles being packed as for field service.

The employment of the saber mounted is taught as prescribed in the
=Saber Exercise=; the use of the pistol in firing mounted, as
prescribed in the =Small-Arms Firing Manual=.

=245.= =Manual of the Saber, Mounted=: The saber suspended from the
_left_ side of the saddle--

1. =Draw=, 2. =SABER.= Pass the right hand over the reins and execute
with it rapidly what is prescribed for drawing the saber on foot;
place the pommel near the hip and resting on top of the thigh, flat of
the blade against the point of the shoulder. This is the position of
=carry saber, mounted=.

=246.= The saber suspended from the _right_ side of the saddle--

1. =Draw.= Turn the head to the right without deranging the position
of the body and glance toward the hilt; engage the right wrist in the
saber knot; pull the hilt forward; seize the grip in the full hand,
nails to the right; draw the blade 6 inches from the scabbard, and
look to the front.

2. =SABER.= Draw the saber as prescribed on foot and take the position
of carry saber.

=247.= The troopers are also exercised in drawing the saber as quickly
as possible at the single command: =DRAW SABER=.

=248.= To =return saber=: The scabbard suspended from the _left_ side
of the saddle--

1. =Return.= Execute as prescribed on foot.

2. =SABER.= Execute as prescribed on foot, supporting the back of the
blade against the left forearm until the point is engaged in the
scabbard.

This command is given only at a halt or when marching at a walk.

=249.= The scabbard suspended on the right--

1. =Return.= Execute as prescribed on foot.

2. =SABER.= Carry the wrist opposite the right shoulder; lower the
blade to the right of the horse's neck; let the grip turn in the hand
so that the hand grasps the guard at the pommel, back of the hand up;
turn the head to the right and fix the eyes on the opening of the
scabbard; raise the hand; insert the blade and push it home; disengage
the wrist from the saber knot; and turn the head to the front.

When the saber is carried on the right the return saber is executed,
so far as possible, at the halt.

=250.= =Inspection saber= and =present saber= are executed as when
dismounted.

=251.= _Guard._--Thrust the feet home in the stirrups and crouch
slightly in the saddle, bending forward from the waist. Otherwise as
explained dismounted.

=In the charge= in close order the trooper (in single rank) assumes
the position indicated in par. 297, the body almost in a horizontal
line over the horse's neck, the arm fully extended to the front, the
saber, in the full grasp, in prolongation of the arm, guard up, finger
nails to the right, point at the height of the eye. When difficult
ground is encountered the trooper takes the position of =guard= while
passing it.

If charging in double rank, the front-rank troopers conform to the
positions indicated for single rank. Those troopers who are in the
rear rank or who are directly in rear of others, take the position of
=port saber=.

In the melee the troopers take the position of guard toward the
nearest enemy, crouching slightly in the saddle and alive to all
possible attacks.


MANUAL OF THE PISTOL, MOUNTED.

=252.= The modifications of the dismounted manual, incident to, the
employment of the pistol mounted are explained in the corresponding
paragraphs of the =Manual of the Pistol, Dismounted= (pars. 145-156).


THE RIFLE.

(=For troops armed with the Cavalry Equipment, Model of 1912.=)

=253.= Before standing to horse the trooper attaches his rifle to his
belt by passing the muzzle up through the belt ring and engaging the
snap hook of the belt ring into the trigger guard.

Being at stand to horse, upon any preparatory command, except for
mounting or securing horses unsling the rifle from the belt ring and
take the position of order arms, removing the snaffle reins from the
horse's neck and passing the right arm through them if necessary.

If a command to secure horses is given, link or couple first and then
unsling the rifle.

To mount, proceed as without the rifle. When seated in the saddle,
grasp the rifle at the bolt with the left hand, barrel to the front,
place the butt of the rifle in the bucket, steadying the latter with
the left foot if necessary and take the position of the trooper
mounted.

To dismount: At the preparatory command, seize the rifle at the bolt
with the left hand, give it a quick, forcible pull, lifting the butt
from the bucket, and let the rifle hang from the belt.

(=For troops armed with equipment corresponding to the McClellan
saddle.=)

=254.= At =stand to horse=, the rifle is held on the left side of the
trooper in a position corresponding to =order arms= (par. 93), as
modified by substituting the word =left= for =right= wherever the
latter occurs.

In leading out, and on all occasions when the trooper leads his horse
for short distances, the rifle is carried at the =left trail= (par.
108) unless otherwise prescribed.

=255.= In mounting, the rifle is inserted in the scabbard after the
trooper steps back opposite the girth and before he takes the reins in
his right hand (par. 191).

On dismounting, each trooper, after placing the bights of the reins on
the horse's neck, and before stepping forward to take the position of
stand to horse (par. 192), takes the rifle from the scabbard and
assumes the left trail. A modification of this provision applies when
the trooper dismounts for inspection. The rifle is never carried on
the saddle when the trooper is dismounted, except as specially
authorized at inspections, with the equipment corresponding to the
McClellan saddle (par. 262).

=256.= _Inspection of arms and equipment, mounted._--It is assumed
that the troopers before being formally inspected mounted and under
arms, will have advanced in elementary collective instruction to a
point when they can be formed and aligned: as a mounted squad (par.
350). Should this not be the case, the instructor will place the
troopers in line with intervals in advance of the inspection.
References to the guide and to alignment will then be disregarded and
the command =front= will be omitted.

The inspection is described below upon the assumption that all arms
are inspected. The inspection of pistols is explained for both the
mounted and dismounted execution. The necessary modification in case
the inspection of any weapon be omitted is indicated in par. 266.

=257.= When arms are inspected mounted they are always inspected in
the order: Saber, pistol. When inspected dismounted they are always
inspected in the order: Rifle, pistol. Sabers are not inspected
dismounted, nor are rifles inspected mounted. Pistols may be inspected
either mounted or dismounted.

=258.= The troopers being mounted and fully armed and in line: 1.
=Prepare for inspection=, 2. =MARCH=, 3. =FRONT.=

At the second command all align themselves on the guide: The
inspector, having verified the alignment, takes position 3 yards to
the right and front of the right trooper, facing to the left, and
commands: =FRONT=, followed by: 1. =Draw=, 2. =SABER= (par. 165).

=259.= If it is not intended to inspect the pistols mounted, the
inspector cautions =PISTOLS WILL NOT BE INSPECTED MOUNTED=, and
approaches the right of the rank.

=260.= As the inspector approaches, the first two troopers execute the
first motion of inspection saber (par. 170), the first trooper, as the
inspector comes in front of him, executes the second and third motions
of inspection saber; the second trooper, as the inspector comes in
front of him, executes the second and third motions of inspection
saber, the first trooper at this instant resuming the carry and the
third trooper executing the first motion of inspection saber. The
first trooper then returns saber. As the inspector comes in front of
the other troopers the movements are executed successively as just
explained.

=261.= The inspector, having completed the inspection of sabers,
passes in rear from the left to the right of the rank. As he
approaches the right of the rank the first two troopers (=in the
absence of indication to the contrary=) (par. 259) execute =inspection
pistol= (par. 148). Each of the other troopers, in order from right to
left, successively executes =inspection pistol= in time to complete
the execution just before the inspector arrives in front of him. Each
trooper executes =return pistol= as the inspector passes to the
trooper next on his left.

=262.= To inspect the rifles, to inspect the pistols dismounted, or to
inspect the dress and equipment of the squad more minutely, the
inspector dismounts the squad without forming rank.

Troopers when dismounted following the command =prepare for
inspection= take a special position; and a special exception is made
in this case to the rule requiring the rifle (if not slung) to be
taken from the scabbard upon dismounting (par. 255). Upon dismounting
while at =prepare for inspection= each trooper takes the snaffle reins
off the horse's neck, passes the right arm through the reins (the
bight of the reins resting on the shoulder) and takes a position
similar to =stand to horse=. The rifle is not unslung (or removed from
the scabbard) unless it has been specially designated for inspection;
it is then reslung or returned to the scabbard as soon as its
inspection is completed.

A trooper dismounted at =prepare for inspection=, if his right hand be
free, grasps the reins as in =stand to horse=. The snaffle reins once
taken from the neck as above are not replaced until the first command
for mounting.

The above position is habitually terminated by the first command for
mounting or by =stand to horse=.

=263.= If the inspector wishes to inspect the arms after dismounting,
he cautions, _immediately following the commands for dismounting_:
=RIFLES AND PISTOLS= (_or_ =RIFLES=, _or_ =PISTOLS=) =WILL BE
INSPECTED.=

Each trooper at once unslings his rifle (or takes it from the
scabbard) and resumes his position similar to =stand to horse=, his
rifle at the =order=, the reins as described in par. 262.

=264.= As the inspector approaches the right of the rank the trooper
on the right executes =inspection arms= (par. 112).

The inspector takes the piece, grasping it with his right hand just
above the rear sight, the man dropping his hands. The inspector
inspects the piece, and, with the hand and piece in the same position
as in receiving it, hands it back to the man, who takes it with the
left hand at the balance, executes =port arms=, and slings the rifle
or places it in the scabbard, according to his equipment.

As the inspector returns the piece the next man executes =inspection
arms=, and so on through the troop.

Should the piece be inspected without handling, each man proceeds as
above as soon as the captain passes to the next man.

=265.= As the inspector approaches the right of the rank of odd
numbers, after completing the inspection of the rifles of the even
numbers, the first two troopers of the rank execute =inspection
pistol=.

To inspect the pistol closely the inspector grasps it with his left
hand above the trooper's hand, makes such examination as is desired,
and hands the pistol back to the trooper in the same position as that
in which the inspector took the weapon. The trooper takes the pistol
with the right hand as in =inspection pistol= and executes =return
pistol=. Should the pistols be inspected without handling, each man
executes =return pistol= as the inspector passes to the next trooper.

=266.= If no indication be given for the inspection of rifles they
_remain slung or in the scabbard_, according to the equipment carried.
If only rifles are ordered inspected, pistols are not presented for
inspection and rifles are slung or returned to the scabbard as soon as
inspected.

If only pistols are ordered inspected, they are presented by the two
troopers on the right when the inspector approaches the rank the first
time after dismounting.

=267.= During the inspection of arms the inspector, observes the
appearance of the men, horses, equipment, and clothing.

After the inspection of arms is completed he makes such further
inspection of equipment, clothing, etc., as he may consider desirable.
During this part of the inspection the troopers may be permitted to
stand =at ease=.

=268.= If an inspection of arms of a detailed character be made in
connection with a _dismounted_ formation it is conducted by the above
commands and in accordance with the above methods in so far as
applicable. Rifles are presented for inspection as described without
special indication when the inspector approaches the rank after
commanding =FRONT= (par. 258). Except when rifles are slung as
provided in the next sentence, each trooper executes =order arms= as
soon as his rifle is returned to him. Should the troopers be armed
with both rifle and pistol, each trooper slings his rifle as soon as
inspected if the equipment in use so permits; otherwise the rifles are
stacked (par. 115) by command after being inspected. The pistols are
then inspected, after which =take arms= (par. 116) is executed before
the troopers are dismissed.




PART II--ELEMENTARY COLLECTIVE INSTRUCTION.


=Section 5. Elementary collective instruction.=

GENERAL PROVISIONS.

=321.= The elementary collective instruction of the trooper includes
the instruction in the =School of the Squad= and in the mechanism of
the movements prescribed in the =School of the Platoon=. This latter
instruction is given as prescribed in par. 444.


=Section 6. Basic principles of the drill.=

=322.= The following provisions apply generally to the =School of the
Squad and to all subsequent drill=. Previous provisions of a similar
general character are to be found in pars. 43-49.

=323.= =Leading=: A commander leading his unit marches in the
direction and at the gait desired. He is followed at a specified
distance by the base (Def.), which conforms to his gait and direction.
The commander thus controls the movements of the base, and may at any
time by his indication conveyed in the most convenient way (as by his
own movements, his commands, or signals) cause the base to change its
direction or to increase or decrease the pace or gait or to halt,
according to the object in view. Elements of the same kind as the base
regulate upon the latter conforming to its gait and direction.

=324.= =Directing leader=, =directing guide=: A commander who desires
to become temporarily free in his movements may leave his position as
leader, first indicating: =DISREGARD= (_see_ Signals) for the
information of the leader of the base unit, who then becomes the
=directing leader= (Def.). The latter then ceases to follow in the
trace of the commander and temporarily conducts the march. In the
absence of other indication from the leader he maintains the existing
direction and gait.

=When necessary= the conduct of the march of a group (e.g., a platoon)
having no subordinate leader may similarly be intrusted to the guide.
The latter then becomes the =directing guide= (Def.).

=325.= Whenever a change of formation involves a break in the
continuity of the leading the leader habitually moves at once to his
new position, so as to resume leadership with the least practicable
delay. He usually starts at the command of execution for the movement.
Should he start for his new position before the command of execution
he first cautions or Signals: =DISREGARD= for the information of the
base.

=326.= =Change of directing unit (base)=: Whenever a change of
formation results in a change of the base, the base of the formation
from which the movement is executed continues, in the absence of
specific indication to the contrary, to be the base until the new base
is indicated.

In movements from line by which column is formed directly to a flank,
the element of the column on the flank toward which the column is
formed is the base upon which other similar elements regulate during
the formation of the column as well as after the column is formed.

=327.= =Changes of direction=: Any movement may be executed either
from the halt or when marching, unless otherwise prescribed. If
executed from the halt the command =forward= need not be prefixed to
any other preparatory command that indicates a direction of march;
thus, being at a halt, 1. =Column right=, 2. =MARCH=; but, 1. =Forward
trot=, 2. =MARCH.=

=328.= To insure certainty of prompt execution, commands (and signals)
must be so given that their meaning is unmistakable. The preparatory
command must be given at such an interval of time before the command
of execution as will admit of the former being properly understood,
and should be followed by a distinct pause that properly varies in
length with the size of the body of troops that is to execute the
movement. The command of execution should be given the instant the
movement is to begin.

=329.= All changes of direction are simply applications of the
principle of leading as explained in pars. 323 and 367.

(_a_) The =turn= (par. 386) and =half turn= (par. 388) are _special_
cases of the change of direction =in line= in that they involve a
change of direction of _90 deg._ and _45 deg._, respectively; _as executed by
the platoon and squad_, they differ further from the general case of
the change of direction in that the leader follows a _specially
prescribed arc_ during the turn (par. 387); in the troop and larger
units, the leader in each case regulates the arc upon which he moves
during the turn in accordance with the length of the front and the
requirements of the special case.

(_b_) For a change of direction in any column formation, the elements
of the column successively change direction _on the same ground_, the
change in each successive element being made in accordance with the
principles that regulate the change of direction in line (_a_). In
each successive element the leader (if any) and the guide move over
the _same path that is followed by the leader at the head of the
column_.

=330.= The principles and methods laid down in the =School of the
Trooper= (dismounted and mounted) are, except as may otherwise be
indicated, or where clearly applicable only to individual instruction,
to be followed in corresponding instruction in the =School of the
Squad= and in all subsequent training. The same commands apply unless
otherwise stated.

Certain modifications in the execution of some of the movements,
incident to their use in collective instruction, are noted in
appropriate places in the =School of the Squad=.

=331.= =Column of twos and of troopers=: Movements, involving the use
of column of twos or troopers, although simple in principle, are not
adapted to execution as movements of precision, and the details of
their execution will be regulated accordingly (pars. 393-400).
Familiarity with the practical use of these formations must be
insisted upon, but they will be taken in the simplest manner
consistent with efficiency in their use.

=382.= To avoid repetition the detailed descriptions and explanations
of collective movements are, as a rule, based only upon the execution
of the mounted movements.

=383.= _Gaits for mounted movements._--All mounted movements not
specially excepted may be executed at the trot or gallop (par. 239).

For the execution of a movement at the =trot or gallop= the command
=trot= or =gallop= precedes the command =march= unless marching at the
gait desired or unless it be otherwise prescribed. When the indication
for the =trot= or =gallop= is included in the command for the movement
it precedes the command =march=; thus, 1. =Forward, trot=; 2. =MARCH.=

=334.= When the troopers of any element (Def.) move at different
gaits, if the gait of such =element= be referred to, the gait of its
=base= is to be understood.

=335.= A gait is said to be =correspondingly faster or correspondingly
slower= than another gait when there is a difference of one degree
between the two (par. 239).

=336.= In the rules included in pars. 333 to 337 the expression "other
elements" (Def.) means in each case elements of the _same kind as the
base_.

=337.= (_a_) In movements from the halt the base moves at the walk
unless another gait be stated in the command or indicated by the
leader's movements.

(_b_) =In forming line to the front from column= the other elements
(par. 336) take, without command, a correspondingly faster gait than
the base. =If gallop= be _commanded_ at any time, it applies only to
the other elements (_f_). The base (leading element) habitually
preserves the gait of march (_a_). The leader controls the movements
of the base according to the object in view. He may diminish its pace
or gait or halt it to hasten the formation. A command to decrease the
gait or to halt, given during the execution of the movement, applies
only to those elements that have already completed the movement. The
leader habitually so controls the base that elements in rear need not
move faster than a maneuver gallop in order to execute the movement.

(_c_) =Column to the front is formed from line= on the base at the
gait of march (_a_) or at the gait ordered (_e_). The other elements
(par. 336) take or maintain a correspondingly slower gait (or, if
halted, remain so) until they can move at the gait of the base to take
their places in the column. If an increased gait be _commanded_ at any
time, it is taken at first only by the leader and base or by the
leader and those elements that have already moved to enter the column
(_f_)

(_d_) In cases not covered by (_b_) or (_c_), if the base and other
elements have equal distances to go they move at the gait of march or
at that indicated in the command (e.g., 1. =Platoons right turn,
trot=; 2. =MARCH=).

(_e_) In cases not covered by (_b_), (_c_), or (_d_) (e.g., assemble
from =foragers=, par. 414), or by some special provision in the
description of the corresponding movement (e.g., =echelon=, par. 702)
the base maintains the gait of march (_a_) or takes that of the
leader; the other elements move at a correspondingly faster or slower
gait as may be necessary for the execution of the movement and on
arriving at their places take the gait of the base (par. 338). If a
special gait be commanded, it is taken by the base or by the other
elements, in accordance with the principle stated in (_f_).

(_f_) When the commander indicates a special gait, whether in the
preparatory command or during the execution of the movement, the
effect is always to, _hasten the completion of the movement_. This
principle will assist in applying the rules in (_b_), (_c_), and
(_e_).

(_g_) Changes of gait made by elements, without command, in accordance
with the above rules, are, except as specially indicated in the
commands, changes of one degree.

=338.= Any exceptions to the above rules are noted where they occur.

=339.= _Gaits for movements on foot._--(_a_) The general principles of
gaits for mounted movements apply to movements on foot with the
modifications noted in (_b_) to (_g_), below, and such others as are
to be readily inferred from the application of the principles of the
=School of the Trooper, Dismounted=.

(_b_) No element moves in =double time= unless the movement be
executed when marching in =double time= or =double time= be commanded
(par. 47) or otherwise indicated by the leader. No trooper increases
the length of the step or the cadence unless specially so prescribed.

(_c_) The leader so controls the movements of the base as to
facilitate the execution of the movement in accordance with (_b_),
above. This will involve halting the base whenever certain movements
(e.g., those from column into line) are executed in =quick time=.

(_d_) If =double time= be included in the preparatory command for a
movement, the indication is obeyed in accordance with the principles
of par. 337.

(_e_) In movements from line into column, and in other similar
movements, if executed at =attention=, the troopers while waiting to
take their places in the column do not =halt= unless halt be commanded
by a platoon (or troop) commander. They =mark time= instead if
necessary for the execution of the movement.

(_f_) In applying the rules for mounted movements to movements on foot
=quick time= will be understood where =walk= is referred to and
=double time= where any faster gait is referred to.

(_g_) Any exceptions to the above rules are stated where they occur.


=Section 7. The School of the Squad.=

=340.= As soon as the troopers are sufficiently advanced in their
instruction in the =School of the Trooper= they will be grouped into
temporary squads for elementary collective instruction. This
instruction will be conducted in accordance with the general
principles indicated in par. 42; progress therein should be so
regulated that no collective movement will be taken up until the
trooper, by previous individual instruction, has been properly
prepared for its execution.

=341.= Instruction in the =School of the Squad= is intended primarily
to teach recruits the elementary movements upon which the entire drill
is based. It may be recurred to whenever necessary in cases where
troopers evidence the need of further elementary work.

=342.= For elementary collective instruction groups of not to exceed
six or eight men can be used to best advantage. The actual instruction
of each group should be conducted by a noncommissioned officer, but
the instruction must be closely supervised by a commissioned officer
(par. 37).

=343.= The system of drill contained in these regulations is based
largely upon the actual leading of units by their respective chiefs or
commanders. During the elementary instruction of recruits, both
mounted and dismounted, leading will be emphasized as indicated in
par. 344. Thereafter the application of leading will conform to pars.
448 to 456.

=344.= The first collective instruction will, therefore, be in
conforming to the march of a leader, thus confirming and extending the
instruction given in the =School of the Trooper= (pars. 295, 298);
_and reasonable proficiency in this instruction must be secured before
any attempt is made to utilize either commands or signals in the
execution of collective movements_, except, as prescribed in par. 363.

=345.= It is difficult for a leader to lead the squad properly and at
the same time to supervise the march and correct the errors of
individual troopers. For this reason it is desirable, especially in
the earlier collective drills, that the instructor have as an
assistant another noncommissioned officer or a well-instructed
trooper. The instructor then leads the squad and requires his
assistant (who takes the positions best adapted for the purpose in
view) to supervise closely the movements of the troopers and to
correct errors by means of cautions _addressed quietly by name to the
individual man or men concerned_. Later the instructor similarly
supervises the execution of the march while requiring his assistant to
lead the squad. As the troopers advance in the instruction the
instructor should give each of them such practice in leading the squad
as the progress of the individual trooper concerned may appear to
justify.

=346.= When instruction in leading (par. 367) has advanced to the
point where the guide can preserve his proper distance from the leader
and conform promptly and smoothly to the latter's movements, the other
troopers meantime preserving their interval and alignment without
undue constraint or unnecessarily abrupt changes of gait or pace, the
instruction is extended progressively to include, in accordance with
the methods prescribed in par. 347, the execution of the movements
prescribed for the squad.

=347.= Throughout the instruction prescribed by par. 346 the squad
will continue as before to be _led_. In teaching each new movement the
example and movements of the instructor as leader will be supplemented
at first by oral commands only, then by oral commands accompanied by
the corresponding arm signals for those movements for which such
signals are provided (_see_ Signals, pars. 988-996), then by signals
alone. _The commands and signals will be given by the actual leader._
When the instructor is not actually leading (par. 345) he may either
indicate to the leader the movements to be executed or else leave to
him the selection of such movements.

=348.= After the oral commands and arm signals are thoroughly
understood the instructor will practice the squad in passing from one
formation to another, using oral commands for some movements, signals
for some, and causing some (e.g., changes of direction) to be executed
by conforming to the movements of the leader without the additional
indication of either oral commands or signals.

=349.= The troopers must be accustomed to conforming, _without the
assistance of any command or signal given to the squad as a whole_, to
simple movements (e.g., movements =front into line=) initiated at the
head of a column formation by a command so given as to be heard by
only the leading troopers.

With reasonable practice the more essential changes of formation that
are executed toward the direction of march can readily be taken by the
squad by conforming, without other indication, to the movements of the
troopers nearest the leader. As many movements in service must be
executed under conditions of noise, dust, etc., that will render it
difficult for the commands or signals of the leader to be understood
except by those near him, _practice, in conforming promptly and
intelligently to the movements of the elements nearest the leader is
important and must be given careful attention_.

The object ultimately to be sought in the instruction is the quiet,
rapid, and effective handling of the squad with a _minimum of either
oral commands or signals_. The squad is required to pass rapidly from
one formation to another, a new movement being occasionally initiated
before the execution of the one preceding it has been completed.


TO FORM THE SQUAD, MOUNTED.

=350.= To form the squad =in line= (par. 368-_a_), the leader
(instructor) designates a trooper to act as the base of the formation,
indicates to such trooper the point where the right of the squad is to
rest and the direction in which the line is to face, takes position at
a convenient distance in front of and facing the point where the
center of the squad is to rest, and commands: =LEAD INTO LINE=. The
base trooper =leads out= (par. 188) and takes position as indicated;
the other troopers lead out so as to approach the line _successively
directly from the rear_ and in single rank form on the line
established by the base trooper, in order from right to left. The
troopers form at stand to horse (par. 187) with intervals of 18 inches
between horses.

The line having thus formed, the leader calls the roll and commands,
=COUNT FOURS= (par. 84).

Where there is an incomplete four the troopers in it are cautioned as
to the numbers finally assigned them (par. 368-_b_).

When but a single trooper is available for an incomplete four the four
is habitually broken up and a trooper is placed as an extra file
closer. This rule may, however, be modified in connection with the
instruction of recruits.

The squad having counted fours, the leader causes the squad to mount
(par. 358).

=351.= =The formation in column of fours, twos, or troopers= (par.
368-_b_, _c_, _d_) is similarly executed. The leader commands: =LEAD
INTO COLUMN (COLUMN OF TWOS, COLUMN OF TROOPERS)=. The trooper upon
whom the formation is based (par. 350) becomes No. 1 of the leading
four. The elements of the column form, in order from front to rear,
with distances of 4 feet between successive, fours, twos, or troopers.
In column of fours or twos each four or two forms on its right trooper
as in line.

When the formation is in column of _fours_ the command =COUNT FOURS=
is omitted. The leader cautions: =NOTE YOUR NUMBERS=.

=352.= =The squad may also form in similar manner after the troopers
mount.= In this case the leader causes the troopers to mount
individually after saddling and commands: =RIDE INTO LINE (COLUMN,
COLUMN OF TWOS, COLUMN OF TROOPERS).= The interval between the mounted
troopers is 6 inches from knee to knee.


TO FORM THE SQUAD, DISMOUNTED.

=353.= For the dismounted formation of the squad, =in line=, when not
armed with the rifle, the leader designates the trooper to act as the
base, indicates the latter's position, and takes his own position as
described in par. 350, above. He then commands: =FALL IN=. The
troopers form as in pars. 57 and 58. The leader then calls the roll
and causes the squad to count fours.

If armed with the rifle, the troopers fall in with rifles at the
_order_. As soon as the line or column is formed the leader commands:
1. =Inspection=, 2. =ARMS=, 3. =Right shoulder=, 4. =ARMS= (par.
91-_2d_), and calls the roll. Each man, as his name is called, answers
=here= and executes =order arms=.

The formation in column of fours, twos, or troopers is conducted in
accordance with the modifications indicated. The commands of the
leader are: =FALL IN, IN COLUMN (COLUMN OF TWOS, COLUMN OF TROOPERS)=.
The distance between successive fours is 92 inches; between successive
twos, 40 inches; between successive troopers, 14 inches.


TO MOUNT AND DISMOUNT.

=354.= The squad being =in line=, at stand to horse, the habitual
commands for mounting are: 1. =Prepare to mount=, 2. =MOUNT=; 3.
=Form=, 4. =RANK.= At the first command the odd numbers lead out 4
yards directly to the front, and all execute the movements and take
the final positions prescribed in par. 191-_a_. At the second command
all the troopers complete, simultaneously, the movements of mounting
as prescribed in par. 191-_b_. At the fourth command the even numbers
move up into their intervals in the line. If the squad has dismounted
from line and has formed rank (par. 356), the odd numbers stand fast
at the command =Prepare to mount= and all mount in place.

If the squad be mounted in column of fours; the third and fourth
commands are omitted. At the first command the troopers of each four
open out fanwise, Nos. 1 and 2 to the right, Nos. 3 and 4 to the left.
Nos. 1 and 4 open out a little more than Nos. 2 and 3, all opening
only enough to permit the troopers to mount without interfering with
each other. The troopers habitually straighten their horses in the
column as soon as they have mounted, but this requirement may be
relaxed whenever mounting in unison is not required (par. 358). The
squad in =column of twos= is mounted by commands and methods
conforming to those used for mounting from column of fours.

=355.= The preparatory oral command for mounting may be omitted. The
squad then executes at the command =MOUNT= all the movements
prescribed in par. 354 for the commands, 1. =Prepare to mount=, 2.
=MOUNT.= The troopers mount promptly, but not =in unison=.

The preparatory _signal_ for mounting, when followed _immediately_ by
the signal of execution, will be understood as equivalent to the oral
command =MOUNT=, and will be executed accordingly.

=356.= The squad being in line, the habitual commands for dismounting
are: 1. =Prepare to dismount=, 2. =DISMOUNT=; 3. =Form=, 4. =RANK.= At
the first command the odd numbers ride 4 yards directly to the front,
regulating on the right, and all the troopers execute the movements
and take the final position prescribed in par. 192-_a_. At the second
command the troopers execute, simultaneously, the movements prescribed
in par. 192-_b_. At the fourth command the even numbers lead into
their intervals in the rank. The third and fourth commands are given
only in case it is desired to form rank. The squad may be dismounted
and, without forming rank, execute =rest= or =at ease= (par. 359), or
be inspected, mounted, or dismissed. The modifications indicated for
dismounting in column of fours and column of twos correspond to those
prescribed in par. 354 for mounting from the corresponding formation,
except that the horses are not habitually straightened in the column
after dismounting unless the dismounted squad moves forward (the
troopers leading their horses).

=357.= The preparatory oral command for dismounting, may be omitted.
The squad then executes at the command =DISMOUNT= all the movements
prescribed in par. 356 for the commands: 1. =Prepare to dismount=, 2.
=DISMOUNT.= The troopers dismount promptly but not in unison.

The preparatory _signal_ for dismounting, when followed _immediately_
by the signal of execution, will be understood as equivalent to the
oral command =DISMOUNT=, and will be executed accordingly.

=358.= Until the individual instruction of recruits has advanced to a
point where they have acquired reasonable proficiency in mounting and
dismounting, these movements will be executed at collective as well as
at individual instruction by the commands and methods indicated in
pars. 355 and 357. After such proficiency has been acquired, mounting
and dismounting at close-order drills, at ceremonies, and at all
occasions of a ceremonial nature will habitually be executed in unison
by the commands and methods prescribed in pars. 354 and 356,
respectively. The commands and methods prescribed in pars. 355 and
357, respectively, may, in the discretion of the commander, continue
to be employed on all other duty.


THE RESTS AND ROUTE ORDER.

=359.= The mounted squad executes the =rests= and =route order= as
prescribed in par. 221. After dismounting from line, =rest= or =at
ease= may be given either before or after forming rank.

The dismounted squad executes the =rests= and =route order= as
prescribed in pars. 60 and 61.


TO DISMISS THE SQUAD.

=360.= The squad, in =column of troopers=, is dismissed as prescribed
for that formation in par. 222. The squad in =column of fours= is
dismissed at the same command. The trooper on the right of the leading
four leads out as indicated in par. 222 and is followed, in turn, by
the other troopers of that four, then by the troopers of the next
four, and so on successively to the rear of the column. In each four
the troopers lead out in order from right to left. The dismissal from
=column of twos= is similarly executed. The squad being =in line= is
dismissed by the commands and methods prescribed in par. 222 for a
line with intervals, except that the troopers, in order to have their
proper distance, move out successively from right to left instead of
simultaneously. At the commands: 1. =By the right and left=, 2. =FALL
OUT=, the movement is executed in a similar manner from both flanks of
the line. After having dismounted from line the squad may be dismissed
without forming rank.

Dismounted, without horses and not under arms, the command is
=DISMISSED=.

Dismounted, without horses but armed with the rifle, the squad is
dismissed as in par. 114.


ALIGNMENTS.

=361.= At the preliminary instruction (conducted without formal
command) the instructor has two troopers on the right of the rank move
forward a convenient distance and halt. He then aligns these two
troopers carefully, with the proper interval as =in line= (par.
368-_a_), and causes the other troopers to note the details of the
alignment. The other troopers are then required to move up one at a
time and align themselves, with the correct interval, on the line thus
established. The troopers move forward, in order from right to left,
at successive repetitions by the instructor of the caution =NEXT=.
Each trooper, when on or near the line, executes =eyes right= (par.
64), aligns himself accurately on the line established by the trooper
or troopers on his right, and looks to the front as soon as he thinks
himself correctly aligned. The instructor explains and corrects any
errors. Similar instruction is given the troopers in aligning
themselves to the left. As soon as reasonable proficiency is attained
but a single trooper is moved forward, and the alignment is made in
the same manner upon the single trooper established as the base.

The instruction is similarly given with the center trooper moved to
the front as a base. Two troopers, one on the right, the other on the
left of the base, then move forward at each repetition of the caution
=NEXT=.

The instructor observes in the mounted instruction: That each trooper
moves his horse promptly and halts with his horse correctly disposed;
that he sits squarely on his horse without advancing either shoulder
or leaning his body to the front or rear; that he dresses promptly as
he arrives on the line; and that he makes proper use of the aids
(pars. 200 to 208).

In the first drills the basis of the alignment is established parallel
to the front of the section; afterwards in oblique directions.

=362.= When the troopers have acquired reasonable proficiency in
aligning themselves, as above, the alignment is executed at the
command =DRESS=, given by the instructor from his position as leader.
The trooper designated as the guide (par. 371) is always the base
trooper of the alignment and places himself accurately 3 yards in rear
of the leader. All the other troopers align themselves promptly on the
base trooper, continuing to look toward him until the command,
=FRONT=. At this last command, given when the alignment is completed,
all turn the head and eyes quickly to the front and take the position
of =attention= (pars. 59, 198). Movements in the rank then cease. The
instructor then habitually faces the squad or goes to either flank to
verify the accuracy of the dressing, first cautioning the guide to
remain in place.

=363.= The troopers and their mounts must be so trained as to enable
alignment and interval to be kept with sufficient accuracy to maintain
cohesion in the mounted charge and to, present a creditable appearance
at ceremonies and at other occasions of a formal or ceremonial
character. A disproportionate amount of time and energy will not be
devoted to this detail.

=364.= The use of dressing _by command_ is ordinarily confined to
elementary instruction (as preparation for the march in line) and to
formations of a distinctly ceremonial character. At all other times
the troopers are required habitually to align themselves on the base
trooper without special command and to look to the front as soon as
aligned.

Formal dressing is employed only when the squad is at a halt.

=365.= The caution: =DRESS=, may, if necessary, be given to the squad
when marching (par. 367); but it will not be employed when it is
practicable to use instead cautions addressed by name to the
individual trooper or troopers who are at fault.

=366.= Alignments, dismounted, are executed by the same general
methods as when mounted. At the command: =DRESS=, the hand is placed
upon the hip to verify the interval (par. 57). Each trooper in
dressing so places himself that his right arm rests lightly against
the arm of the man on his right and that his eyes and shoulders are in
line with those of the man on his right. The left hand is dropped to
the side at the command =FRONT=.


LEADING THE SQUAD.

(_See also_ pars. 322-332.)

=367.= The squad being in line at a halt, the instructor directs the
guide (par. 371) to maintain a position at a distance of 3 yards
(about one horse length) in rear of him and to follow accurately in
his path, whether such path be a straight line or a curve. He explains
to the other troopers that in marching they are so to regulate on the
guide as to preserve as nearly as practicable their alignment and
interval in the rank, individually increasing and decreasing the gait
or pace (Def.) as may be necessary to do this. All are cautioned that
they must learn to keep their proper positions in the rank without
unnecessary rigidity without making sudden changes in gait or pace and
without keeping their eyes constantly fixed on the guide. They are
instructed that while riding with the head and eyes habitually
directed as in par. 198 they will keep an alert lookout over the
ground in front, cast frequent glances toward the leader so as to
observe the latter's movements, and glance occasionally toward the
guide to assure that the alignment is being correctly maintained.
Having given these instructions, the leader places himself, facing to
the front, 3 yards in front of the guide, commands: =FOLLOW ME=, and
moves forward. The leader must be, careful to march steadily, so
regulating his direction and gait at first as to enable the guide to
conform without difficulty.

Each trooper keeps his horse straight in the rank, maintaining his
alignment with the guide and his proper interval (par. 368-_a_) from
the man next him on the side of the guide. The troopers yield to
pressure from the side of the guide and resist pressure from the
opposite direction. All adjustments are made gradually without
crowding or confusion.

In the beginning the leader moves at a walk and makes only slight
changes of direction. As the instructor completes each change of
direction he indicates the _new_ direction of march by extending his
arm as in signal =forward= (par. 990), dropping the hand to the side
when the guide's horse is _straightened in the new direction_. When
the troopers have become sufficiently practiced in adjusting
themselves to the movements of the instructor, the latter makes the
changes of direction more marked, and moves, during such changes, on
the arcs of smaller circles. Finally, he requires the squad to apply
the principles of leading in the manner indicated in pars. 346-349. As
each movement is taken up the principles of leading that apply are
explained in detail, so that all may understand clearly the identity
and position of the base. The base trooper (guide) must clearly
understand his duties. (Fig. 31.)

[Illustration: FIG. 37, par. 367.]


SQUAD FORMATIONS.

The formations of the squad for drill, march, or combat are as
follows:


CLOSE ORDER.

=368.= (_a_) =Line=: The troopers are abreast of each other with
intervals (Def.) of 6 inches (mounted) or 4 inches (dismounted)
between troopers.

(_b_) =Column of fours=: The troopers of each four are arranged as =in
line=. The fours follow successively one behind another with distances
(Def.) between Successive fours of 4 feet, mounted, or 92 inches,
dismounted. When a four includes less than four troopers it is an
=incomplete four=. Places in an incomplete four are habitually filled
in the following order: No. 2, No. 3, No. 4, No. 1 (par. 374).

(_c_) =Column of twos=: The troopers of each two are arranged as =in
line=, the twos following successively, one behind another, with
distances between successive twos of 4 feet, mounted, or 40 inches,
dismounted. If any two have but a single trooper the latter takes the
position corresponding to the right trooper of the incomplete two
(par. 374).

(_d_) =Column of troopers=: The troopers of each four follow
successively, one behind another, with distances between consecutive
troopers of 4 feet when mounted, or 14 inches when dismounted.


EXTENDED ORDER.

(_e_) =Foragers=: The troopers are abreast of each other, with
intervals of 3 yards between troopers, unless some other interval be
specially designated.

The dismounted formation corresponding to =foragers= is =skirmishers=.
The interval between troopers in line of skirmishers is one-half pace
unless some other interval be designated.

_In the employment of a squad or other small detachment the
designation of a greater interval than one-half pace is habitual
rather than exceptional (par. 408)._

In a line of skirmishers at one-half pace interval each man may be
considered as occupying, including his interval, about 1 yard of
front.

The squad may also be extended in depth as prescribed in par. 413.


ORDER IN THE SQUAD.

=369.= When it is said that a unit is =in order= in any formation it
is meant that the arrangement and condition of the component elements
is such that the unit is ready to execute, in the accustomed manner,
any movement that is intended to be executed from the formation in
question. The conditions essential to =order= in each formation of the
squad are stated in paragraph 370. The squad, =in line=, for example,
would not be =in order= if the troopers did not know their numbers,
for it could then execute no movement based upon the division into
fours, twos, or troopers.

=370.= The squad =in line=, =column of fours=, or =foragers= is =in
order= when the troopers of each four are arranged, from right to left
in the four, in the order of their respective numbers, and each knows
his number.

The squad =in column of twos= is =in order= when the twos of each four
are next to each other in the column, odd numbers on the right, and
each trooper knows his number.

When the two composed of 1 and 2 is in front, the column is said to be
=right in front=; when the two composed of 3 and 4 is in front, the
column is said to be =left in front=.

The squad =in column of troopers= is =in order= when the troopers of
each four are next to one another in the column, are arranged from
front to rear in the order 1, 2, 3, 4, or 4, 3, 2, 1, and each trooper
knows his number. When the order is 1, 2, 3, 4, the column is said to
be =right in front=; when the order is 4, 3, 2, 1, =left in front=.

It is not necessary to order in the squad, in any of the above
formations, that a particular trooper or troopers be in any designated
four, nor that the fours have any special relative order from right to
left or front to rear.


GUIDE OF THE SQUAD.

(_see also_ Def. =Base=, and par. 326.)

=371.= At the original formation of the squad =in line=, the leader
designates a trooper by name as =guide= of the squad. The guide of the
squad =in line= and =foragers= is habitually a trooper at or near the
center of the squad; any trooper may, however, be designated as guide.

=372.= A trooper having once been designated as guide of the squad in
line continues to act as such, =in line= or =foragers=, until another
trooper be specifically designated as guide. With a view, however, to
avoiding possible doubt as to the identity of the guide, the leader at
each change of formation that terminates in line or foragers
habitually indicates the guide of the new formation.

=373.= To designate the guide the leader cautions: (So-and-so) =THE
GUIDE=, and habitually places himself 3 yards in front of the trooper
named if not already in that position. A trooper designated as guide
will, at the time of the designation, raise his hand or weapon to a
position vertically above his head, hold the position for a moment,
and then lower his arm to his side without further command. The leader
or his assistant may at any time cause the guide thus to indicate his
identity to the other troopers by cautioning: =GUIDE=. The leader may
change the guide of the squad in line at any time by indicating
=disregard= (par. 990), placing himself in front of another trooper
and designating the latter as guide in the manner prescribed above.

=374.= The base of the squad in each of the column formations is the
leading element (four, two, or trooper, respectively).

The guide of the leading (base) element is also the guide of the
squad. In each four No. 2 is the guide; in each two the right trooper
(No. 1 or No. 3). In an incomplete four or two the position of the
guide is always filled. The guide of each element in rear of the base
follows in the trace of the guide of the base (leading) element at the
prescribed distance.

=375.= Whenever in the execution of any movement a four or two moves
to its new position by an oblique (or movement approximating an
oblique) the trooper on the side toward which the oblique is made acts
as guide of the element during the oblique. At all other times the
guide in a four or two is as indicated in par. 374 unless specially
otherwise stated.

=376.= The guide of the squad habitually follows the leader at 3 yards
distance, but the leader may designate a greater distance, in which
case the guide marches accordingly.

=377.= When a guide temporarily is =directing guide= (par. 324), it is
necessary that he continue accurately in the direction of march or in
the direction indicated for him by the leader. This is an application
of the marching upon fixed points prescribed in the =School of the
Trooper= (par. 232).


MOVEMENTS EXECUTED BY THE SQUAD.

=378.= Any formation (close or extended order) prescribed for the
squad may be taken directly from any other _close-order_ formation.
Being in extended order the squad, to pass directly to close order,
must execute the assembly or rally.

=379.= Subject to such modifications as are indicated under the
respective paragraphs describing the movements, the =dismounted squad=
executes, at the same commands as prescribed for the mounted squad,
such movements as are not obviously inapplicable to dismounted duty.
The execution of the dismounted movements will, where differences in
the mounted and dismounted methods necessarily exist, be in accord
with the principles explained in the =School of the Trooper,
Dismounted=, corresponding changes in the details of execution being
made.

=380.= The general principles regulating gait and pace for both
mounted and dismounted movements are stated in pars. 333-339.
Modifications of those principles, if any, are stated under the
corresponding paragraphs in the =School of the Squad=.


COMMANDS AND CORRESPONDING ARM SIGNALS.

=381.= Following is a list of the principal commands employed in the
=School of the Squad=, together with the corresponding arm signals, if
any. The list includes only a few of the commands also found in the
=School of the Trooper= (mounted or dismounted.) The commands are
arranged alphabetically for convenient reference. The description of
the signals will be found in par. 990.

  -------------------------------+-------+---------------------------
      COMMANDS.                  | PARS. | ARM SIGNALS.
  -------------------------------+-------+---------------------------
  =1. Assemble, 2. MARCH=        |  414  | =Assemble.=[7]
                                 |       |
  =1. Backward, 2. MARCH=        |  384  | None.
                                 |       |
  =1. By the right (left) flank, |       |
      2. MARCH=                  |  411  | =March to the flank.=[7]
                                 |       |
  =CIRCLE HORSES=                |  428  | None.
                                 |       |
  =1. Column, 2. MARCH=          |  399  | =Column.=[7]
                                 |       |
  =1. Column half right (left),  |       |
      2. MARCH=                  |  396  | Change direction.[7]
                                 |       |  (_See_ par. 386.)
                                 |       |
  =1. Column of twos, 2. MARCH=  |  399  | =Column--twos.=[8]
                                 |       |
  =1. Column right (left),       |       |
      2. MARCH=                  |  396  | =Change direction.=[7]
                                 |       |  (_See_ par. 386.)
                                 |       |
  =COUPLE HEAD AND TAIL=         |  427  | None.
                                 |       |
  =DISMOUNT=                     |  357  | =Prepare to  dismount.=[7]
                                 |       |  (Given as explained in par.
                                 |       |  357.)
                                 |       |
  =1. Foragers, 2. MARCH=        {  408  } =Foragers.=[7]
                                 {  410  }
                                 |       |
  =1. Forward, 2. MARCH=         {  382  } =Forward.=[7]
                                 {  412  }
                                 |       |
  =1. Fours right (left),        {  391  } =March to the flank.=[7]
      2. MARCH=                  {  400  }
                                 |       |
  =1. Fours right (left) about,  {  401  } =To the rear[7] (left about
      2. MARCH=                  {  402  }  only).=
                                 |       |
  =1. Fours right (left),        |403-_c_| None.
      column left (right)=;      |       |
      =2 MARCH.=                 |       |
                                 |       |
  =1. Fours (twos or troopers)   |  413  | None.
      at so many yards distance, |       |
      2. MARCH.=                 |       |
                                 |       |
  =1. Gallop, 2. MARCH=          |  382  | From the trot only:
                                 |       |  =Increase the gait.=[7][9]
                                 |       |
  =HORSES BACK=                  |  432  | None
                                 |       |
  =INCLINE TO THE RIGHT=         {  390  } None
                                 {  396  }
                                 |       |
  =1. Nos. 1, 2, and 4;          |  436  | None.
      2. FORM ON FOOT MOUNT=     |  355  |  =Prepare to mount.= (Given
                                 |       |  as explained in par. 355.)
                                 |       |
  =1. Prepare to dismount,       {  356  } =Prepare to dismount.=[7]
      2. DISMOUNT=               {  358  }
                                 |       |
  =1. Prepare to mount,          {  354  } =Prepare to mount.=[7]
       2. MOUNT=                 {  358  }
                                 |       |
  =RALLY=                        |  416  | =Rally= (no preparatory signal).
                                 |       |  Oral command habitually
                                 |       |  accompanies signal.
                                 |       |
  =1. Right (left) by fours,     |403-_a_| None.
      2. MARCH=                  |       |
                                 |       |
  =1. Right (left) by troopers,  {393-_b_} None.
       2. MARCH=                 {403-_b_}
                                 |       |
  =1. Right (left) by twos,      |393-_a_| None
      2. MARCH=                  |403-_b_|
                                 |       |
  =1. Right (left) forward,      |403-_d_| None.
      fours right (left)=;       |       |
      =2. MARCH.=                |       |
                                 |       |
  =1. Right (left) half turn,    |  388  | =Change direction.=[7] The
      2. MARCH; 3. Forward,      |       |  signal of execution for the
      4. MARCH=; or 3. =Squad=,  |       |  change of direction is
      4. =HALT.=                 |       |  followed by =forward or
                                 |       |  halt=[7] (par. 386).
                                 |       |
  =1. Right (left) front into    |  409  | None.
      foragers=                  |       |
      (or =skirmishers=),        |       |
      2. MARCH.=                 |       |
                                 |       |
  =1. Right (left) front into    |  397  | None.
      line, 2. MARCH=            |       |
                                 |       |
  =1. Right (left) turn,         |  386  | Change direction.[7] The
      2. MARCH; 3. Forward       |       |  signal of execution for the
      4. MARCH; or 3. Squad,     |       |  change of direction is
      4. HALT=                   |       |  followed by =forward=[7] or
                                 |       |  =halt=.[7]
                                 |       |
  =1. Skirmishers, 2. MARCH=     {  408  } =Skirmishers.=[7]
                                 {  410  }
                                 |       |
  =1. Squad, 2. HALT=            |  383  | =Halt.=[7]
                                 |       |
  =TO FIGHT ON FOOT.= When given |  430  | =To fight on foot.= (No
    orally the indication =ACTION|       |  preparatory signal.)
    RIGHT= (=LEFT, FRONT=) is    |       |
    habitually added to the above|       |
    command. =FIRE AT WILL= may  |       |
    also immediately follow the  |       |
    above command (par. 430).    |       |
                                 |       |
  =1. To the rear, 2. MARCH=     |  412  | =To the rear.=[7]
                                 |       |
  =1. Troopers right (left)      |  402  | To the rear[7] (left about
    about, 2. MARCH.= (Given     |       |  only).
    only from column of troopers.)       |
                                 |       |
  =1. Troopers right (left)      |  385  | None.
    oblique, 2. MARCH.=          |       |
                                 |       |
  =1. Trot, 2. MARCH=            |  239  | From the =walk=: =Increase
                                 |       |  the gait.=[7][9]
                                 |       |  From the =gallop=: =Decrease
                                 |       |  the gait.=[7][9]
                                 |       |
  =1. Twos right (left),         |  400  | =March to the flank.=[7]
    2. MARCH.= (Given only from  |       |
    column of twos and as an     |       |
    exceptional movement.)       |       |
                                 |       |
  =1. Twos right (left) about,   |  402  | To the =rear=[7] (left about
    2. MARCH.= (Given only from  |       |  only).
    column of twos.)             |       |
                                 |       |
  =1. Walk, 2. MARCH=            |  239  | From the trot only: =Decrease=
                                 |       |  =the gait.=[7][9]
  -------------------------------+-------+-------------------------------

         [Footnote 7: Signals marked thus are preparatory signals; the
         signal of execution in each case is made as prescribed in
         par. 990.]

         [Footnote 8: In signals marked thus (combination signals) the
         preparatory signal consists of more than one element; the
         signal of execution follows the last element of the
         preparatory signal.]

         [Footnote 9: See pars. 239, 333. When a gait signal is added
         to the preparatory command the resulting signal is given as a
         combination signal.]


DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF MOVEMENTS, CLOSE ORDER.

=382.= =Being in line at a halt, to march to the front:= 1. =Forward=,
2. =MARCH.=

The leader moves forward, followed at a distance of 3 yards by the
guide (par. 371). The other troopers conform to the march of the guide
as explained in par. 367.

=Being at a halt, to move forward at a trot or gallop=, the commands
are (par. 333): 1. =Forward, trot=, or 1. =Forward, gallop=; 2.
=MARCH.=

Increases of gait are habitually made progressively (par. 239).

The march of the squad in line, dismounted, is conducted in accordance
with the provisions of pars. 68-74.

=383.= =Marching in line, to halt=: 1. =Squad=, 2. =HALT.=

All halt at the second command.

The troopers, if not already aligned, align themselves without command
on the guide as they halt (par. 364). Movement in the rank then
ceases.

If marching at the trot or gallop, the gait is ordinarily decreased
progressively, the halt being executed from the walk (par. 239).

=384.= =Being in line at a halt, to march backward=: 1. =Backward=, 2.
=MARCH.=

All the troopers rein back (par. 280), regulating on the guide, who
maintains his distance from the leader. The execution of the march
backward as a _collective movement_ is habitually limited to cases
where the movement may be necessary; it is then executed for short
distances only. It is not executed at an increased gait.

=385.= =Being in line, to oblique and resume the original direction=:
1. =Troopers right (left) oblique=, 2. =MARCH.=

Executed by each trooper as in par. 230. During the oblique march the
right knee of each trooper should be just in rear of the left knee of
the trooper on his fight; the trooper on the flank toward which the
oblique is made acts temporarily without special indication as
directing guide (Def.) of the squad. The line during the oblique
march should be parallel to its original direction. The leader does
not take position in front of the flank trooper during the oblique.

Halting the mounted squad while at the oblique should be avoided. If
the squad has to be halted thus, the troopers upon halting turn their
horses to the original front in so far as practicable.

To resume the original direction by similar means, the commands are:
1. =Forward=, 2. =MARCH.=

In executing the oblique by trooper, dismounted, each trooper
preserves his relative position, keeping his shoulders parallel to
those of the directing guide and so regulating his step that the rank
may remain parallel to its original front. In resuming the original
direction, the troopers half face to the left in marching, then move
straight to the front. If at =half step= or =mark time= while
obliquing, the oblique march is resumed by the commands: 1 =Oblique=,
2. =MARCH.= Should the halt be commanded while the squad is obliquing,
the troopers halt faced to the front (fig. 32).

[Illustration: FIG. 38, par. 385.]

=386.= =Being in line, to turn to the right or left=: 1. =Right (left)
turn=, 2. =MARCH=; 3. =Forward=, 4. =MARCH=; or 3. =Squad=, 4. =HALT.=

The principle of the movement is explained in par. 329-a.

The form of the third and fourth commands is determined by whether the
turn is to terminate with the advance in line or with the halt.

In the turn the squad is led by its leader (par. 367) through a change
of direction of 90 deg.. The leader (and, therefore, the guide) are
restricted not only to this particular change of direction but also to
a particular arc or path during the turn (par. 387).

There is no special arm signal for the _turn_ as such; but, as the
turn is a change of direction, the signal for the latter movement is
applicable. The signal for the change of direction does not in itself
indicate the degree of the turn, but the leader's subsequent signal
forward or halt indicates when the change of direction is to cease.

In the turn, as in any case of the march in line, the leader, subject
to the restrictions just indicated, regulates the direction and gait
of march, the guide conforms to the movements of the leader, and all
the other troopers regulate their alignment and interval on the guide.
The rate of march of the leader and the guide should not be so rapid
as to make it impracticable for the troopers on the marching flank of
the squad to preserve their alignment on the guide during the turn.
The guide moves in the _trace of the leader during the turn_, as well
as before and after the turn. When the turn is executed by the
_marching squad_ the leader gives the command after he has begun to
change direction and at the moment when the guide arrives at the
_point where the leader straightened his horse in the new direction_
(par. 471). When executed from a _halt_ the second command can not be
given as above indicated. The leader in that case begins to turn at
the command of execution, while the guide, instead of beginning the
actual turn at once, moves forward so as to move, during the turn, _in
the trace of the leader_ (par. 367).

In executing the turn dismounted the leader so regulates the length of
step of the guide that the _trooper on the marching flank_ can keep
the regular step corresponding to the gait at which the turn is made.
The other troopers lengthen or shorten the step accordingly,
maintaining the cadence and their alignment and interval with respect
to the guide. If the turn be terminated by the commands: 3. =Forward=,
4. =MARCH=, all the troopers resume the regular step at the fourth
command.

=387.= In executing the turn in a _squad_ or _platoon_, the leader,
followed by the guide, so turns on the arc of a circle that the pivot
trooper, in _conforming to the guide's movements_, marches on the arc
of a circle whose radius varies with the gait of the guide, this
radius being 2 yards at a walk, 4 yards at a trot, and 6 yards at a
gallop. When the turn is executed dismounted the corresponding radius,
in either quick or double time, is 1 yard.

=388.= At the command: 1. =Right (left) half turn=, 2. =MARCH=; 3.
=Forward=, 4. =MARCH=; or 3. =Squad=, 4. =HALT=, a change of direction
of 45 deg. may be made in accordance with the principles explained in
pars. 386 and 387. The arm signal for the half turn follows the rule
indicated for the full turn (par. 386).

=389.= In all movements in these regulations in the course of which
=fours=, =twos=, or =troopers= execute a turn or half turn this last
movement is made by each element in accordance with the principles
explained in pars. 386 and 387, except that the commands 3. =Forward=,
4. =MARCH=, are omitted and each element continues the march in the
new direction, upon completion of the turn, unless the commands: 3.
=Squad=, 4. =HALT=, are given. The guide of a four in the turn is
always No. 2; the guide of a two the right trooper.

=390.= Where only a slight change in the direction of march is
desired; it is habitually accomplished by leading without any special
command or signal therefor. The leader may caution: =INCLINE TO THE
RIGHT (LEFT)=. The execution of this movement, like that of the turn,
is a special case of leading applied to the march in line. The leader
slightly alters the direction of march, the guide conforms to the
leader's movements, and the other troopers conform to the movements of
the guide.

=391.= =Being in line, to form column of fours to a flank=: 1. =Fours
right (left)=, 2. =MARCH.=

The fours move simultaneously, each executing right turn and taking up
the march in the new direction (par. 389). No. 2 of the four on the
flank toward which the movement is executed is the guide upon whom the
other Nos. 2 regulate during the movement (par. 326), as well as the
guide of the resulting column (par. 374). The leader promptly takes
position in front of the guide (par. 325). Gaits are regulated as in
par. 337-_d_.

=The movement dismounted= is executed on the same principles except
that No. 2 of each four regulates his step and path as indicated for
the dismounted turn (pars. 386, 387). (Fig. 33.)

[Illustration: FIG. 39, par. 391.]

=392.= =Column of twos= is not formed directly to a flank from line.
Column of twos may be formed to the _front_ as explained in pars. 393
and 403, and the head of the column be at once marched in any desired
direction. The same principle regulates the formation of =column of
troopers= to a flank.

=393.= =Being in column of fours, to form column of twos or troopers=:

(_a_) To form column of twos: 1. =Right (left) by twos=, 2. =MARCH.=

The right two of the leading four is the base. The other twos enter
the column successively, the right two of each four being followed
immediately by the left two of the same four, the left two obliquing
to enter the column (par. 331). All distances are 4 feet (par. 368).
Gaits are regulated as in movements from line into column (par. 337-a,
c).

(_b_) =Column of troopers= is formed on the same principles at the
commands: 1. =Right (left) by trooper=, 2. =MARCH.= The right trooper
of the leading four is the base.

Column of troopers from column of twos is formed by the same commands
as from column of fours and in accordance with the same principles.

_The movements described in this paragraph are among those referred to
in par. 468-b._

=394.= In executing any movement by which a column; of twos or
troopers is formed, a four composed of less than three troopers (par.
368-b) acts temporarily as a two--on the right of the four if the
column of twos is formed =right in front= (par. 370); on the left of
the four if the column of twos is formed =left in front=. When the
column of fours is re-formed the troopers take their proper places in
column as indicated in par. _368-b_.

=395.= The squad in column of =fours=, =twos=, or =troopers= is
marched to the front, halted, marched backward, marched in an oblique
direction, and marched again to the original front by the same
commands as the squad in line, each element of the column conforming
to the principles indicated for the squad in line (pars. 329, 374).

=396.= =Being in column of fours, twos, or troopers=, to change
direction.

The movement is executed as explained in par. 329, the fours (twos,
troopers) successively changing on the same ground, the guide of each
element moving in the trace of the leader.

In changing direction in column of fours, _mounted_, the guide of
each rear four slightly diminishes the _pace_ when 4 feet from the
turning point, correspondingly increasing the pace during the actual
change of direction so as to have the proper distance of 4 feet from
the four =next= in front when the turn is completed. This provision
does not apply to the corresponding dismounted movement, nor to the
column of twos, or troopers.

To indicate, for any column, a change of direction of 90 deg. or 45 deg., the
leader may command, respectively: 1. =Column, right (left)=, or 1.
=Column half right (left)=; 2. =MARCH.=

The leader may indicate a slight change of direction by the caution:
=INCLINE TO THE RIGHT=.

The dismounted execution of the change of direction conforms in each
element of the column to the modifications noted in pars. 386 and 387
for the execution of the turn dismounted. The leader regulates the
length of his own step accordingly during his actual change of
direction, and the guide of each successive element does the same when
he reaches the turning point.

=397.= =Being in column of fours, twos, or troopers, to form line to
the front=: 1. =Right (left) front into line=, 2. =MARCH.=

The leading element (four, two, or trooper) of the column is the base
of the movement and moves forward.

Each element in rear of the base, leaves the column by a movement
approximating a right oblique and proceeds (par. 375) to a place
abreast of the leading element, the elements taking successively, from
left to right in the new line, positions in the same order as that in
which they previously appeared from head to rear in the column.

The guide of the leading element, when the movement begins, acts as
directing guide (Def.) of the squad from the moment the leader starts
to his new position until he indicates the guide of the new line
(pars. 326, 373) when all regulate on the latter guide.

Gaits are regulated as in pars. 337-_a_, _b_. (Fig. 34.)

_This is one of the movements referred to in par. 468-b._

In the dismounted execution of the movement at quick time the leader
commands: 1. =Squad=, 2. =HALT=, as soon as the leading element has
advanced to the point where it is desired that the line shall form
(par. 339-_a_, _b_, _c_). Only the leading (base) element halts at the
command, each rear element halting as it arrives on the line (par.
337-_f_). If executed while marching in double time, the leader
similarly commands: 1. =Quick time=, 2. =MARCH=, the reduced gait
being taken successively by the elements as they reach their positions
(par. 337-_f_). If marching in quick time, and =double time= be
included in the command, the command for the increased gait applies
only to the rear elements (par. 337-_f_).

[Illustration: FIG. 40, par. 397.]

=398.= To prevent the inversion of twos or troopers in their
respective fours the squad in =column of twos or column of troopers=
should form line to the left front when the squad is right in front
(par. 370), and vice versa.

=399.= =Being in column of twos or troopers, to form column of fours=:
1. =Column=, 2. =MARCH.= (_See_ Def. =Column=.)

The leading element is the base and follows the leader.

=If in column of twos= the rear two of the leading four obliques at a
correspondingly faster gait (par. 335) and takes its proper place
abreast of, and to the _right or left_ of, the leading two of that
four, so that the troopers of the four shall appear from right to
left, in the order of their respective numbers. All the other twos
take up a correspondingly faster gait than the leading two, and the
fours form successively from head to rear in the column in the manner
indicated above (par. 331). The leading two of each four, other than
the leading four, takes the gait of the head of the column (or halts)
when at 4 feet from the corresponding two of the four next in front.
In each four the rear two begins to oblique as the leading two of that
four approaches the position where it decreases the gait (or halts).

The leader takes position in front of the guide of the column (No. 2).

Gaits are further regulated as in movements from column into line
(par. 337-_a_, _b_).

=Column of fours, from column of troopers= is formed by the same
commands and in accordance with the same principles.

=Column of twos from column of troopers= is formed in a similar manner
at the commands: 1. =Column of twos=, 2. =MARCH.= The column of twos
will be right in front or left in front (par. 370), according as the
column of troopers was right in front or left in front prior to the
movement.

In the dismounted execution of the above movements in quick time the
leader habitually commands: 1. =Squad=, 2. =HALT=, immediately
following the command of execution (par. 339-_b_, _c_). Only the
leading element halts (par. 339-_f_), each of the rear elements
halting when it reaches its prescribed position in the column. If
executed in =double time= the leader similarly follows the command of
execution by the command for =quick time= (par. 339-_b_, _c_), which
is successively taken by the elements, as above. If marching in =quick
time=, and =double time= be commanded, only the rear elements take the
increased gait, each taking =quick time= on arriving in its place.
(Fig. 41.)

[Illustration: FIG. 41, par. 399.]

=400.= =Being in column of fours, twos, or troopers, to form line to a
flank=: 1. =Fours right (left)=, 2. =MARCH.=

Each, four turns to the right (par. 389). Each rear four regulates on
the leading four until the fours unite in line (par. 326), when,
unless the leader halts the squad, all take up the march in the new
direction _without further command_, regulating on the new guide
(pars. 325, 372). If the squad is to form line without advancing in
the new direction, the leader gives the preparatory indication for the
halt immediately following the second command, so as to add the
command halt as the four unite in line.

=In an emergency= a similar movement may be executed from =columns of
twos= at the commands: 1. =Twos right (left)=, 2. =MARCH.= Loss of
=order= may result. In the absence of other indication, intervals are
closed toward the guide (par. 372). A similar movement executed from
column of troopers results in a line of foragers, which may be
assembled or rallied to form line (pars. 414, 416).

Gaits are regulated as in par. 337-_d._ (Fig. 36.)

[Illustration: FIG. 42, par. 400.]

=401.= =Being in line, to face or march the line to the rear=: 1.
=Fours right (left) about=, 2. =MARCH.=

When the movement is executed by =signal= the elements of the column
always turn to the _left_ about. The oral command =fours right about=
is not accompanied by an arm signal.

Each four turns 180 degrees in the direction indicated (par. 389). The
leader, passing around a flank of the squad, promptly takes position
in front of the guide so as to lead the squad in the new direction
(pars. 325, 372).

To face to the rear, the squad is halted as the fours unite in line.

The modifications incident to the execution of the dismounted movement
are indicated in par. 391.

Gaits are regulated as in par. 337-_d_.

A dismounted squad may also be marched a short distance to the rear by
the _oral_ command and methods indicated in par. 82.

=402.= =Being in column of fours, twos, or troopers, to face or march
the column to the rear=: 1. =Fours (twos, troopers), right (left)
about=, 2. =MARCH.=

The provision in the preceding paragraph regarding the execution of
the movement by signal applies equally to this paragraph. Each four
(two, trooper) turns 180 degrees in the direction indicated (par.
389). The leader promptly takes position in front of the guide of the
column (par. 325). (Fig. 37.)

[Illustration: FIG. 43, par. 402.]

=403.= =Being in line to form column of fours, twos, or troopers to
the front=: 1. =Right (left) by fours (twos, troopers)=, 2. =MARCH.=

The formation is a successive one. The right element (four, two, or
trooper, according to the command) is the base; it moves forward and
follows the leader, becoming the leading element of the column.

(_a_) In forming column of fours each four to the left of the base
successively obliques to the right (par. 385) at the gait of the base
as soon as it has sufficient space, and resumes the direct march so as
to enter the column at 4 feet distance. To avoid losing distance the
oblique must be begun in each four when the heads of its horses are
opposite the croups of the horses of the four on its right. Gaits are
regulated as in pars. 387-_a_, _c_. (Fig. 44.)

(_b_) In forming column of twos or troopers only the elements of the
right four move in the manner indicated above. Each of the other
elements successively turns to the right (par. 389) and then, after
advancing in the new direction, turns to the left so as to enter the
column at 4 feet distance (par. 331). Gaits are regulated as in pars.
337-_a_, _c_. The movements described in (_a_) and (_b_) are among
those referred to in par. 468-_b_. (Fig. 45.)

(_c_) =Right (left) by fours= is ordinarily unsuited to execution in
groups of any size. Should it be necessary to break to the front from
the _flank_ of such a unit, column of fours to the front may be formed
by executing =fours right (left)= and then changing the direction of
march of the head of the column. The oral commands: 1. =Fours right
(left), column left (right)=, 2. =MARCH=, and 1. =Fours right (left),
column half left (right)=, 2. =MARCH=, are authorized for this
purpose. Gaits are regulated as in par. 337-_d_.

(_d_) For cases that are _not suitably met by (a) or (c) of this
paragraph_ the commands: 1. =Right (left) forward, fours right
(left)=, 2. =MARCH=, are authorized. The right four is the base and
moves forward following the leader, who promptly takes position in
front of the guide of the column (pars. 325, 374). The second four
from the right starts to move as in fours right (par. 391), its guide
decreasing the pace until the right four has partly cleared the second
four, when the latter four, by a movement approximating an oblique,
enters the column so as to follow in the trace of the leading
(original right) four at 4 feet distance. The other fours execute
=fours right= (each slightly decreasing the pace during the turn), and
then =column left=, so as to follow the second four at the proper
distance. The fours move simultaneously and, except as noted above,
all at the same gait (par. 337-_d_).

In the execution of the movement dismounted the right four moves
forward; the remainder of the squad executes =fours right, column
left=, and follows the right (leading) four at 92 inches distance. The
right four takes four short steps just after it, clears the four next
on its left, then resumes the full step. (Fig. 46.)

[Illustration: FIG. 44, par. 403 (_a_).]

[Illustration: FIG. 45, par. 403 (_b_).]

[Illustration: FIG. 46, par. 403 (_d_).]


EXTENDED ORDER.

=404.= In extended-order drills the troopers habitually march =at
ease=, but keep on the alert so as promptly to conform to the
indications of the leader and the movements of the guide.

The rifles of dismounted troopers in extended order are carried as in
par. 61.

=405.= Foragers may be formed when the squad is in any authorized
formation (par. 468) or in disorder, when it is moving at any gait or
is halted. The extension is effected toward the direction of march.
When possible the deployment should be made upon ground protected from
hostile view and fire. Whatever the method employed for the extension,
the leader controls the movements of the base (par. 323). The other
troopers, moving at a _gallop_, form =foragers= in accordance with the
methods indicated.

The squad, deployed as =foragers=, is marched to the front and halted,
obliques, resumes the original direction, executes changes in gait and
changes of direction, by the commands and methods prescribed for the
squad in =line=.

=406.= The appropriate substitution of =skirmishers= for =foragers=,
is made in the commands for movements in extended order, dismounted
(par. 368-_c_). The skirmishers move at a run to their positions on
the line of foragers.

=407.= A greater or less interval than 3 yards between foragers may be
ordered, the words =at (so many) yards= being added to the preparatory
command so as immediately to follow the word =foragers= or
=skirmishers=.

=408.= =Being in line, to form foragers=: 1. =Foragers=, 2. =MARCH.=

The guide continues to be the base and advances (par. 405) at the
gait of march unless the leader indicates otherwise (pars. 337-_f_,
405). The troopers to the right of the guide move at a gallop
obliquely to the right front; those to the left obliquely to the left
front. The troopers take position abreast of the base in the same
order as in line and at intervals of 3 yards measured from the side of
the base. Should the right trooper be the guide, all oblique to the
left; should the left trooper be the guide, all oblique to the right.

In the execution of the corresponding dismounted movement (commands:
1. =Skirmishers=, 2. =MARCH=--par. 406) the troopers move to their
places at a run, taking intervals of one-half pace, unless some other
interval be indicated (pars. 368-_e_, 407.) (Fig. 37.)

=409.= =Being in column of fours, twos, or troopers, to form
foragers=: 1. =Right (left) front into foragers=, 2. =MARCH.=

The _left trooper_ of the leading element of the column as the base of
the deployment advances at the gait of march (par. 337-_a_) unless the
leader indicates otherwise (pars. 337-_f_, 405), the other troopers of
the leading element deploying as indicated in par. 408. The remaining
troopers move obliquely to the right front at a gallop and extend the
line in similar, manner, the order of the successive elements being
the same, from left to right in line, as it formerly was from head to
rear in the column.

The possibility of the inversion of troopers in the fours as a result
of forming foragers from column of _twos_ or _troopers_ should be kept
in mind. No such inversion can occur in movements executed from column
of fours. The movement described in this paragraph is one of those
referred to in par. 468-_b_. (Fig. 41.)

[Illustration: FIG. 47, par. 409.]

=410.= =Being in disorder, to form foragers=:

Foragers may be formed from any condition of dispersion or disorder by
methods similar to those indicated in pars. 408 and 409. At the
command: 1. =Foragers=, 2. =MARCH=, the troopers nearest the leader
ride toward him at a gallop. The leader indicates the guide (par.
373), who follows the leader; the other troopers, moving at a gallop,
take position, with the proper interval, on the right and left of the
guide, without regard to order.

Line of foragers from a condition of disorder may also be formed by
first rallying the squad (par. 416) and then forming foragers.

Dismounted, skirmishers may similarly be formed.

=411.= =Being deployed as foragers, to march to a flank=: 1. =By the
right (left) flank=, 2. =MARCH.=

Each trooper turns 90 deg. to the right and marches in the new direction
(par. 389). A column of troopers at 4 feet distance results. The line
of foragers may be resumed by again marching to the flank by the use
of corresponding commands and methods.

Gaits are regulated as in par. 337-_d_.

Dismounted, each trooper moves as in par. 81. If at a halt, the
movement of the foragers by the flank is executed by the same commands
as when marching.

=412.= =Being deployed as foragers, to march to the rear=: 1. =To the
rear=, 2. =MARCH.=

Each trooper executes an about to the _left_ (pars. 389, 486). To march
again to the front the commands: 1. =Forward=, 2. =MARCH=, are given.
Each trooper executes another about to the _left_. If a line of
foragers be halted while marching to the rear, each trooper turns to
the left about and halts, faced to the front (par. 474).

Gaits are regulated as in par. 337-_d_.

Dismounted, each trooper executes =to the rear= (par. 82). If at a
halt, the movement of the foragers to the rear is executed by the same
commands as when marching.

=413.= The squad may be extended in depth as well as in front. The
commands are: 1. =Fours (twos, or troopers) at so many yards
distance=, 2. =MARCH.= This movement may be used to cross a fire-swept
area when such a course is necessary. The leader indicates the point
where the squad is to be reassembled. The fours (twos or troopers)
move out successively from head to rear in column or right to left in
line. Each element may extend laterally on its guide. The gait is the
gallop.

=414.= =Being deployed as foragers and in order (par. 470) to
assemble=: 1. =Assemble=, 2. =MARCH.= The guide advances and follows
the leader. The other troopers close in on the guide and form in
=line= upon him in the same relative order in which they were at the
moment the assembly was commanded. The leader halts the guide at any
time if it is desired to assemble without gaining further ground in
the direction of march. The leader, by moving in any desired
direction, may regulate the direction toward which the assembly is
executed. Gaits are regulated as in par. 337-_e_, the elements other
than the base taking a correspondingly faster =gait=. The assembly in
each unit is explained for that unit (par. 468-_b_).

The leader may, by prior designation of any trooper (e.g., a flank
trooper) as guide (par. 373), cause the assembly to be executed on
that trooper by the commands and methods just indicated.

The troopers always start to assemble in line, but when an assembly in
column is desired it may virtually be accomplished, by the leader's
designation of a flank trooper as the guide before ordering the
assembly and cautioning: =COLUMN= as soon as the assembly begins. The
fours, as they successively assemble toward the base, then take their
places in column of fours instead of in line; the leader takes post in
front of No. 2 (par. 325).

If there be not space to advance in column of fours, the assembly in
=column of twos or troopers= may be accomplished by corresponding
commands and methods.

The _squad_ executes =assemble= only when deployed as foragers and =in
order=. Under other conditions the rally (par. 416), followed, by
=count fours=, more easily accomplishes the purposes of the =assembly=
(Def.).

In executing the assembly dismounted the troopers close in on the
guide in double time _without special command_ if the guide and leader
continue to advance (par. 339-_g_); otherwise they close in at quick
time unless double time be commanded (par. 339-_b_). (Fig. 42.)

[Illustration: FIG. 48, par. 414.]

=415.= If =to the rear= (par. 412) be executed by the squad, a
temporary loss of =order= occurs. If it be desired to pass to close
order without resuming the march to the front and assembling (par.
414), the squad may rally (par. 416) and count fours.

=416.= =Being in any formation, or not formed, or in disorder, to
rally=; =RALLY=. _When the rally is ordered the signal is habitually
accompanied by the oral command, both the signal and the oral command,
being repeated until understood and obeyed. The signal is obeyed at
once, there being no preparatory command for this movement._

The leader takes position at any point or moves in any desired
direction, and at any gait that will permit the movement to be
executed. The troopers ride toward the leader at an extended gallop
and, in the absence of other indication, form in rear of the leader in
line. The leader promptly designates the guide (pars. 371, 373), who
follows the leader. The other troopers form, as they come up, on the
right and left of the guide extending the line. The leader may
caution: =COLUMN=, as the leading troopers approach. The troopers then
form in =column of fours= instead of in =line=. The leading element
forms first; the other troopers, as they arrive, successively form
fours, extending the column to the rear. The leader designates the
guide (pars. 373, 374) and cautions: =NOTE YOUR NUMBERS=. The rally in
column is exceptional and is intended for use only on occasions when a
narrow road or other circumstances of the terrain prevent the rally in
line.

Should the route along which the leader is moving when the rally is
ordered be too narrow to permit the formation of column of fours, the
leader may caution: =COLUMN OF TWOS (COLUMN OF TROOPERS)= as the
leading troopers approach. The movement is executed as explained for
the rally in column of fours. =Fours= should be counted at once. The
rally in columns of twos or troopers is to be regarded as very
exceptional.

The squad being rallied in line, though ordinarily not =in order=
until fours are counted (par. 470), is available at once to charge or
to execute any movement that does not involve a knowledge of their
respective numbers on the part of the individual troopers. Unless the
charge is to be executed at once, fours should be counted without
delay after rallying, so that the squad, may be =in order= and ready
to execute any movements whatever that conditions may demand.

The rally dismounted, is always executed at a run. (Fig. 49.)

[Illustration: FIG. 49, par. 416.]


THE MOUNTED ATTACK.

=417.= The mounted attack is made with the pistol or saber in
accordance with the principles indicated in pars. 562-565. The typical
saber charge is executed in =line=. Under some circumstances, as in
the attack of a dispersed enemy, etc., a saber charge may be made by
troopers deployed as =foragers=. The pistol attack is usually made in
foragers. In exceptional circumstances (as in breaking out from an
ambush, attacking in a narrow road, etc.) it may be made =in line= or
=in column of fours, twos, or troopers=.

=418.= Cohesion in the line and vigor in the shock are essential to
the success of the _saber charge_. High speed is necessary for the
desired shock; and in the saber charge, as executed in combat, the
horses are, at the culmination of the charge, habitually "turned
loose" and urged to the highest speed. This, except with men and
horses that are highly trained, necessarily involves _loss of control_
over the horse on the part of the trooper. The saber charge, executed
with poorly trained horsemen, especially if on imperfectly trained or
excitable house's, is apt to be futile as regards the instruction of
the trooper and to result in more or less permanent loss of control
over the horses. _Control of the mount_ by the trooper is essential
during the execution of the _pistol attack_ (ordinarily made in line
of foragers), and is, of course, necessary during march and maneuver.
For these reasons it is considered advisable that the first
instruction of the recruit in the actual saber charge be deferred
until after platoon instruction and that it be given then only after
the troop commander is satisfied that the recruit's progress in
horsemanship and in the use of his weapon has advanced to a point when
the exercise will be of value.

=419.= The work in the squad, with a view to _preparing the recruit
for the mounted attack with the saber and pistol_, will therefore be
limited to those exercises in which the horse is _controlled_. It
should consist, in substance, of an extension to collective work of
the individual instruction described in par. 297, and should include
occasional practice in advancing as rapidly as can be done while
maintaining a close formation and control of the mount. The increase
in speed should be made quietly and progressively, be continued but a
short distance, and _invariably be terminated by the quiet resuming of
a slow gait_. As the recruit gets more skill and confidence the
exercise will be conducted with sabers drawn, the troopers taking the
charging position (par. 251) when the instructor does so and returning
to the _carry_ with him. Similar exercises will be conducted with the
pistol, with especial attention to directing the horses through lines
of silhouette targets and to drawing, returning, and manipulating the
pistol. The exercises with the pistol will usually be conducted in
=foragers= and may be extended to include the actual execution of the
pistol attack as described in the =School of the Platoon=.

In campaign any small group executes the mounted attack as explained
for the platoon.

=420.= In combat of every kind skill on the part of the individual
trooper in the use of the weapon or weapons employed is essential. So
important is this part of the training that where time for the
training of the troopers is limited all but the most essential
portions of close-order drill should be deferred or omitted in order
that the training of the trooper in the use of his weapons may be
thorough and efficient.


=Section 8. Tent pitching.=

TO PITCH ALL TYPES OF ARMY TENTS, EXCEPT SHELTER AND CONICAL WALL
TENTS.

To pitch all types of Army tents, except shelter and conical wall
tents: Mark line of tents by driving, a wall pin on the spot to be
occupied by the right (or left) corner of each tent. For pyramidal
tents the interval between adjacent pins should be about 30 feet,
which will give a passage of 2 feet between tents. Spread tripod on
the ground where the center of tent is to be, if tripod is used.
Spread the tent on the ground to be occupied, door to the front, and
place the right (or left) front wall loop over the pin. The door (or
doors, if more than one) being fastened and held together at the
bottom, the left (or right) corner wall loop is carried to the left
(or right) as far as it will go and a wall pin driven through it, the
pin being placed in line with the right (or left) corner pins already
driven. At the same time the rear corner wall loops are pulled to the
rear and outward so that the rear wall of the tent is stretched to
complete the rectangle. Wall pins are then driven through these loops.
Each corner pin should be directly in rear of the corresponding front
corner pin, making a rectangle. Unless the canvas be wet, a small
amount of slack should be allowed before the corner pins are driven.
According to the size of the tent, one or two men, crawling under the
tent if necessary, fit each pole or ridge or upright into the ring or
ridge-pole holes, and such accessories as hood, fly, and brace ropes
are adjusted. If a tripod be used an additional man will go under the
tent to adjust it. The tent, steadied by the remaining men, one at
each corner guy rope, will then be raised. If the tent is a ward or
storage type, corner poles will now be placed at the four corners. The
four corner guy ropes are then placed over the lower notches of the
large pins driven in prolongation of the diagonals at such distance as
to hold the walls and ends of the tent vertical and smooth when the
guy ropes are drawn taut. A wall pin is then driven through each
remaining wall loop and a large pin for each guy rope is driven in
line with the corner guy pins already driven. The guy ropes of the
tent are placed over the lower notches, while the guy ropes of the fly
are placed over the upper notches, and are then drawn taut. Brace
ropes, when used, are then secured to stakes or pins suitably placed.


CONICAL WALL TENT.

Drive the door pin and center pin 8 feet 3 inches apart. Using the
hood lines, with center pin as center, describe two concentric
circles with radii 8 feet 3 inches and 11 feet 3 inches. In the outer
circle drive two door guy pins 3 feet apart. At intervals of about 3
feet drive the other guy pins.

In other respects conical tents are erected practically as in the case
of pyramidal tents.


TO STRIKE COMMON, WALL, PYRAMIDAL, AND CONICAL WALL TENTS.

=STRIKE TENTS.=

The men first remove all pins except those of the four corner guy
ropes, or the four quadrant guy ropes in the case of the conical wall
tent. The pins are neatly piled or placed in their receptacle.

One man holds each guy, and when the ground is clear the tent is
lowered, folded, or rolled and tied, the poles or tripod and pole
fastened together, and the remaining pins collected.


TO FOLD TENTS.

For folding common, wall, hospital, and storage tents: Spread the tent
flat on the ground, folded at the ridge so that bottoms of side walls
are even, ends of tent forming triangles to the right and left; fold
the triangular ends of the tent in toward the middle, making it
rectangular in shape; fold the top over about 9 inches; fold the tent
in two by carrying the top fold over clear to the foot; fold again in
two from the top to the foot; throw all guys on tent except the second
from each end; fold the ends in so as to cover about two-thirds of the
second cloths; fold the left end over to meet the turned-in edge of
the right end, then fold the right end over the top, completing the
bundle; tie with the two exposed guys.


METHOD OF FOLDING PYRAMIDAL TENT.

The tent is thrown toward the rear and the back wall and roof canvas
pulled out smooth. This may be most easily accomplished by leaving the
rear-corner wall pins, in the ground with the wall loops attached, one
man at each rear-corner guy, and one holding the square iron in a
perpendicular position and pulling the canvas to its limit away from
the former front of the tent. This leaves the three remaining sides of
the tent on top of the rear side, with the door side in the middle.

Now carry the right-front corner over and lay it on the left-rear
corner. Pull all canvas smooth, throw guys toward square iron, and
pull bottom edges even. Then take the right-front corner and return to
the right, covering the right-rear corner. This folds the right side
of the tent on itself, with the crease in the middle and under the
front side of tent.

Next carry the left-front corner to the right and back as described,
above; this when completed will leave the front and rear sides of the
tent lying smooth and flat and the two side walls folded inward, each
on itself.

Place the hood in the square iron which has been folded downward
toward the bottom of the tent, and continue to fold around the square
iron as a core, pressing all folds down flat and smooth and parallel
with the bottom of the tent. If each fold is compactly made and the
canvas kept smooth, the last fold will exactly cover the lower edge of
the canvas. Lay all exposed guys along the folded canvas except the
two on the center width, which should be pulled out and away from
bottom edge to their extreme length for tying. Now, beginning at one
end, fold toward the center on the first seam (that joining the first
and second widths) and fold again toward the center, so that the
already folded canvas will come to within about 3 inches of the middle
width. Then fold over to the opposite edge of middle width of canvas.
Then begin folding from opposite end, folding the first width in half,
then making a second fold to come within about 4 or 5 inches of that
already folded; turn this fold entirely over that already folded. Take
the exposed guys and draw them taut across each other, turn bundle
over on the under guy, cross guys on top of bundle, drawing tight.
Turn bundle over on the crossed guys and tie lengthwise.

When properly tied and pressed together this will make a package 11 by
23 by 34 inches, requiring about 8,855 cubic inches to store or pack.

Stencil the organization designation on the lower half of the middle
width of canvas in the back wall.




CHAPTER VI.

FIELD SERVICE.


=Section 1. Principles of training.=

Inaction gives every advantage to the enemy.

The offensive alone gives decisive results.

A quick and energetic offensive minimizes losses.

An advance against the enemy's position once entered upon must be
continued. To go back under fire is to die.

The best way to hold down the fire of the enemy and to diminish his
power to inflict losses is to bring the position he occupies under
well-conducted and continued fire.

Present as small a target as possible to the enemy by utilizing every
bit of cover the ground affords.

Individual skill in marksmanship is an advantage in battle only when
united with fire discipline and control.

Constant movement to the front lessens the effect of the enemy's fire.
Modern battles fought in the open show that the heaviest losses are in
the mid and long ranges. When close range is reached the losses
diminish rapidly.

The best protection against artillery fire is a constant but irregular
movement to the front. When close to the enemy's position his fire is
least effective.

A knowledge of how to use the bayonet and the will to use it must
often be the deciding factors in battle.

Finally:

In training we can not go far wrong or fail to accomplish the best
results if we keep before our minds the spirit as well as the wording
of paragraph 352 of the Infantry Drill Regulations: "The duties of
infantry are many and difficult. All infantry must be fit to cope with
all conditions that may arise. Modern war requires but one kind of
infantry--good infantry." Cavalry, dismounted, should be as efficient
as infantry under all conditions of service.


=Section 2. Combat.=

The field of battle is the final test of the instruction, discipline,
and efficiency of the fighting force of any army.

The squadron is the =attack unit= or the =defense unit=, whether
operating alone or as part of a regiment. The troops constitute the
=firing line= and the =support=.

An individual soldier is concerned only with the enemy in his
immediate front, in obeying orders, and instinctively doing what he
has been trained to do.

=The one requisite necessary to win the battle is intelligent team
work.= The army is handled just like a football team. A part is on the
first line facing the enemy. Another part, like the half backs, is
held back as supports. Another part, like the full backs, is held as a
reserve. Each unit, like each player, has a certain duty to perform.
When the signal is given, all work together--all play the game--team
work. The players consist of all branches of the service.

The same rule holds true down to the smallest unit and even to the
individual enlisted man. Each regiment, is a team composed of three
players--each a squadron. Each squadron is a team of four
players--each a troop. In the same manner each troop is a team of two
or more platoons; each platoon a team of two sections; and last, but
not least, each section is a team of from 6 to 14 players.

The one question that always presents itself on the battle field every
minute of the time to every person, whether he be a general or a
private, is, "=What play has my team captain ordered, and how best may
I act so as to work in conjunction with the other players to bring
about the desired result?"--team play.=

To the trooper this means--

First. =Prompt and loyal obedience to the section leader.= Every
section always has a team captain. If the section leader and corporal
are killed or disabled, other players previously designated take their
places. If no one was designated, then the private with the longest
service takes command. When the section leader gives the command for a
certain play, don't stop to think if the play is a good one, but do
your very best to carry out the play as ordered. A poor play in which
every player enters with his whole heart (team work) will often win,
while, on the other hand, the best play in which some of the players
are skulkers and shirkers will probably fail.

Second. =Never lose touch with your section.= Every individual, as
well as every unit, should always be acting under the control of some
higher commander. This is necessary if there is to be any unity of
action. Therefore if you lose your section or it becomes broken up,
join the first section you can find and obey your new section leader
as loyally and as cheerfully as you did your own.

While yet several miles from the enemy's position the troops may come
under artillery fire. On green men entering upon their fight, the
sound of the projectile whistling through the air, the noise, flash,
and smoke on the burst of the shrapnel, and the hum of the various
pieces thereafter, all produce a very terrifying effect, but old
soldiers soon learn to pay little attention to this, as the danger is
not great.


THE MOUNTED ATTACK.

THE TROOP ACTING ALONE.

=639.= When the troop acting alone charges it is ordinarily divided
into two parts, viz, the =attacking line= and the =reserve=, but a
platoon is never kept in rear except when the captain so directs.

If the attacking line, or reserve, consists of only one platoon, it is
led by its chief; if it consists of two or more platoons, it is led by
the senior chief of platoon or by the captain.

When a chief of platoon takes post as leader of two or more platoons,
his place as platoon leader is taken by the corresponding file closer.
Whenever the =rally= or =assembly= is ordered, the captain may cause
the guidon to be displayed at the rallying or assembly point
indicated.

=640.= In instruction exercises the enemy must always be outlined or
represented by troopers, who may carry flags, under command of an
officer or noncommissioned officer. In the beginning of this
instruction these men will occupy fixed positions; later they will be
instructed to ride so as to represent the movements of an aggressive
enemy. The captain will explain to the commander the object of the
exercise and tell him what to do.

=641.= The platoons of the =attacking line= may attack in one line or
successively, as from column of platoons with extended distances. The
captain, in addition to designating a reserve, may direct one or more
platoons to execute any special mission. In the absence of special
instructions from the captain the leader of each platoon, or
combination of platoons, that is acting separately uses his
discretion, endeavoring so to employ his command as best to assist in
carrying out the general plan indicated by the captain's orders.

=642.= The reserve, in the absence of special instructions, follows
the attacking line at from 100 to 150 yards in readiness to support
the attacking line, meet a counter attack, or press the pursuit, as
occasion may require.

A platoon designated for a =flank attack= is so conducted by its
leader as to fall opportunely upon the enemy's flank.

If a flank platoon be so designated, it attacks from that flank unless
otherwise directed.

To guard against a flank attack or an enveloping attack the captain
may detach a platoon to move to the threatened flank so as to take an
enveloping attack in flank or meet a flank attack. If a flank platoon
be so designated, it acts on the corresponding flank unless otherwise
directed. When no platoon is specially designated for flank guard, the
corresponding duties fall upon the reserve.

=643.= The captain's commands should include an indication of the
objective, unless the latter is obvious, designate the elements of the
attack, and state any special mission that is assigned to any element.
The captain's orders also usually include an indication of the weapon
to be used by the several elements of the attack and may prescribe the
formations to be employed. All details not prescribed by the captain
are left to the discretion of the commanders of the several elements
into which the attack is divided.

Where the same weapon is to be used by all it is ordinarily drawn at
the captain's orders before the instructions for the attack are given.
Otherwise, each commander gives the proper orders for drawing saber
or raising pistol.

=644.= The troop being, for example, =in line=, marching at a gallop
with sabers drawn, the captain may command: =Objective, Cavalry in
front; Second and Third platoons, to the charge; First platoon, flank
attack; Fourth platoon, reserve.= Each element of the attack proceeds
at once to carry out its orders. The leader of the attacking line
(whether the captain or a lieutenant) directs the leader of the base
platoon to close on him before charge is ordered (par. 563). In other
respects, the charge is conducted as explained for the platoon (pars.
562-564).

The troop being, for example, in column of platoons, marching at a
gallop, no weapon drawn, the captain may command (the objective being
obvious): =First and Second platoons, pistol attack; Third platoon,
reserve; Fourth platoon, left flank guard.= The leader of the
attacking line commands: 1. =As foragers=, 2. =MARCH=, and attacks
with the pistol according to the principles explained for the platoon
(pars. 566-568) as soon as the second platoon completes its deployment
on the left of the first platoon. The commanders of the third and
fourth platoons move to their positions, drawing saber or raising
pistol in their discretion.

Should the captain command, for example: =First and Second platoons,
pistol attack in two lines; Third platoon, charge enemy's right flank;
Fourth platoon, reserve=, the third platoon may charge with the saber.

Should the captain cause pistols to be raised before ordering the
attack all use the pistol.

The above are only examples to indicate the character of the captain's
commands. The actual orders must meet the situation presented.

=645.= At the first indication for the charge the ground scouts move
out from the flanks of the attacking line (par. 569) unless otherwise
specially directed. The captain usually sends out any necessary combat
patrols; but each leader of a separate group is responsible that any
further steps necessary for the immediate protection of his own flanks
are taken.


THE TROOP IN THE SQUADRON.

=646.= The troop in squadron, in mounted attack, has no reserve, but
may have a support in the discretion of the major. If on the flank of
the squadron, its own flank defense must be provided by the captain in
the absence of instructions.


PASSING FROM MOUNTED ACTION TO DISMOUNTED ACTION.

=647.= The movements are executed by commands and methods
corresponding to those already explained for the squad and platoon,
with the following modifications and additions thereto:

The horses of the captain and of one bugler who accompanies the
captain are held by the other bugler or by a man specially designated
_in advance_ for that duty.

The horses of the first sergeant and other men out of ranks, and not
otherwise specially provided for, are secured in the same manner
indicated in the corresponding provisions for the squad and platoon.

=648.= The guidon, in the absence of instructions to the contrary,
takes general charge of the led horses and performs the duties
prescribed for the trooper in charge of the horse-holders and horses
(par. 431). Should one of the platoon file closers be senior to the
guidon, the first sergeant cautions such file closer and the guidon
_in advance_ that the senior will have general charge of the led
horses of the troop while such senior remains with the horses. In the
absence of other special instructions, the file closer of each platoon
reports the additional troopers of his platoon to the troop commander
after Nos. 2 dismount. The guidon remains in general charge of the
other horse-holders and the horses, a designated trooper having, under
the guidon, immediate charge of the horse-holders and horses of each
platoon.

=649.= The captain gives any desired special instructions to the
guidon and sees that proper measures for security are taken. On
dismounting, the first sergeant remains near the horses long enough to
see that the designated noncommissioned officer is in charge and is
making proper provision as regards the horses; he then joins the
captain. Any sergeants who may be extra file closers without special
assignment of duties join the captain; other extra file closers not
specially assigned join the platoons with which they were riding. The
captain, on dismounting, takes position at the point where he desires
the base platoon to form or otherwise indicates that position to the
leader of the base platoon. The platoon that was the base when the
troop dismounted remains the base of the dismounted formation in the
absence of other indication. Its leader takes position at once in rear
of the captain, or as indicated by the latter, and the dismounted
platoon forms in =double column= or as directed. The other platoons
form so as to extend the formation =in line of double columns=, or as
the captain orders, in accordance with the principles governing the
assembly of the troop. The captain may direct the platoon leaders to
proceed at once to designated positions without forming the troop as a
unit. _In all cases the measures taken must be such as to prevent
unnecessary exposure of men or horses to hostile view or fire._


DISMOUNTED COMBAT (THE TROOP).

GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS.

=650.= When the troop, acting alone, dismounts to engage in deliberate
fire action the captain makes provisions for the led horses (par. 649)
and at once sends out scouts (usually two experienced men detailed and
trained as such) to the front to reconnoiter. The captain reconnoiters
usually in rear of, but in touch with the scouts, and accompanied by
platoon commanders and the first sergeant; he explains to them the
purpose of the attack, gives them all the information he has about the
enemy and about our own troops in the vicinity, points out to them the
objective of each platoon if they are to advance, or indicates the
part of the line to be held by each if to take the defensive.

=651.= The advance of a troop after dismounting, in anticipation of
fire action either in attack or defense is made in close order,
preferably in columns of fours or twos, until the probability or the
actual encountering of hostile fire makes it advisable to deploy.
After such deployment the advance (now designated =the approach=) may
be continued in line of skirmishers or other suitable formation before
opening fire. The approach dismounted may often be facilitated, better
advantage taken of cover, and losses minimized by using formations
such as line of platoons each in column of twos or troopers, or a
succession of thin lines at varying distances, one directly behind the
other or echeloned. The choice of a formation would depend upon
conditions, such as the effectiveness of the enemy's fire, cover
afforded by folds of the ground, or by natural obstacles. If the
deployment is found to be premature, it will generally be better to
assemble the troop and resume the advance in close order.

The formations mentioned as facilitating the advance, viz, line of
platoons in column of twos or troopers, or a succession of thin lines
find application most frequently in the approach when the ground is so
difficult or the cover so limited as to make it desirable to take
advantage of the few favorable routes on which to move forward.

=652.= The approach in a succession of thin lines is, if possible,
made by sections under the immediate direction of platoon commanders
with wide intervals between skirmishers. By so advancing continuous
control of the line is assured. If that method is not practicable,
then the successive lines are made up of one or more men from each
four of a platoon on the skirmish line, the command being: 1. =Numbers
1 (or such number or numbers), first (or such) platoon, forward=; 2.
=MARCH.=

The captain having pointed out in advance the selected position in
front of the lines which are to be occupied, the designated numbers
move to the front. The line thus formed preserves the original
intervals as nearly as practicable; when this line has advanced to the
indicated position, a second line is sent forward by similar commands,
and so on at irregular distances until the whole line has advanced.
Upon arriving at the indicated position the first line is halted.
Successive lines upon arriving halt on line with the first, and the
men take their proper places in the skirmish line.

Ordinarily each line is made up of one man or more from each four of a
platoon, and the men of a four are sent forward in order from right to
left. The first line is led by the platoon leader of that platoon, the
second by its file closer, and so on. Under favorable conditions the
successive lines may be made up from all of the platoons which are
deployed as skirmishers.

The movement is conducted in quick time unless conditions make double
time necessary.

After the entire troop has reached the line a further advance in the
same manner may be found advisable.

The movement in a succession of thin lines is used to cross a wide
stretch swept or likely to be swept by artillery fire or heavy
long-range rifle fire which can not profitably be returned. Its
purpose is the building up of a strong skirmish line preparatory to
engaging in a fire fight. This method of advancing by thin lines
results in serious, though temporary, loss of control over the
successive platoons of the troop. Its advantages lie in the fact that
it offers a less definite target, hence is less likely to draw fire.

=653.= These are merely suggested methods of advancing preliminary to
opening the fire attack; other formations better adapted to particular
occasions or terrain may be devised. The best formation is that which
advances the line the farthest without drawing the enemy's fire, or,
if he does open fire, then with the least loss of men, time, and
control.


THE FIRE ATTACK.

=654.= The principles involved in the fire attack are discussed under
=Dismounted Fire Action, the Squadron= (par. 716), and necessary
modifications as to details made under =Dismounted Action, the
Regiment= (par. 760).

When the enemy's fire makes it impracticable for the troop to move
forward in one of the above-mentioned formations, it may advance by
rushes.

Being in skirmish line: 1. =By platoon (section) from the right
(left)=, 2. =RUSH.=

The platoon leader on the indicated flank arranges the details for a
prompt and vigorous execution of the rush and puts it into effect as
soon as practicable. If necessary he designates the leader for the
indicated unit. When about to rush he causes the men of the indicated
unit to suspend firing and to hold themselves flat on the ground but
in readiness to spring forward instantly. The leader of the rush (at
the signal of the platoon leader if the latter is not the leader of
the rush) commands, =Follow me=, and, running at top speed, leads the
fraction to the new line, where he halts it and causes it to open
fire. The leader of the rush selects the new line if it has not been
previously designated.

The first fraction having established itself on the new line, the next
like fraction is sent forward by its platoon leader without further
command from the captain, and so on, successively, until the entire
troop is on the line established by the first rush.

The men must be trained to lie perfectly still until the command
(since any movement might warn the enemy of the rush to follow), then
at command to spring instantly and together to their feet, run at top
speed, and drop together at command.

=655.= In an advance by rushes, leaders of platoons in firing
positions are responsible for the delivery of an effective fire to
cover the advance of each rushing fraction. Troops are cautioned so to
fire as not to endanger the flanks of advanced portions of the firing
line. The husbanding of ammunition for the final stages of the fire
attack must be constantly impressed on the men.

The rush of a troop as a whole is conducted by the captain on the same
principle as described for the platoon. The captain leads the rush,
platoon leaders lead their respective platoons, and file closers
follow the line to insure prompt and orderly execution of the advance.

When the foregoing method of rushing, by running, becomes
impracticable, any method of advance that carries the attack closer to
the enemy, such as =crawling=, should be employed.

The charge corresponds to that described =in the squadron=.

When a leader in command of a platoon or section receives an order or
signal to rush, he should cause his men to suspend firing and to hold
themselves flat but ready for a sprinter's start. He selects the
point, as far as possible with reference to cover, to which he intends
to carry his unit forward. He then gives the command "=RUSH=," springs
forward, and running at full speed about three paces ahead of his men,
leads them in the rush. Arriving at the position he has selected, he
throws himself prone, and the men drop on either side of him. All
crawl forward to good firing positions, considering the cover also,
and the leader gives the necessary orders for resuming the fire. The
latter will include giving the range again, the length of the rush
being subtracted from the sight setting ordered at the last position.

The original platoon and section divisions of the troop in the firing
line should be maintained, if possible, and should only be broken up
if the mingling of reinforcements renders it unavoidable.

Upon joining the firing line, officers and noncommissioned officers
accompanying a reinforcement take over the duties of others of like
grade who have been disabled, or they distribute themselves so as best
to exercise their normal functions. Conditions vary and no exact rules
can be prescribed. It is essential that all assist in mastering the
increased difficulties of control.


FIRE.

=657.= Ordinarily rifles are loaded and extra ammunition in bandoliers
is distributed before the troop deploys for combat. In close order the
troop executes the firings at the command of the captain, who posts
himself in rear of the center.

Firings in close order are exceptional.

=658.= =Signals during fire action=: The voice is generally inadequate
for giving commands during firing, and must be replaced by signals of
such character that proper fire direction and control are assured
(par. 989). To attract attention signals must usually be preceded by
the whistle signal (short blast). A fraction of the firing line about
to rush should avoid using the long blast signal as an indication to
=suspend firing=. Officers and men behind the firing line can not
ordinarily move freely along the line, but each must depend on the
other's watchfulness, in addition to his own, and make use of
prescribed signals (par. 997, Cav. Drill Reg., 1916). All should place
themselves so as to see their immediate superiors and subordinates.

The bugler with the captain assists by observing the enemy, the
target, and the fire effect, and by watching for and transmitting
commands.

The effect of fire and the influence of the ground in relation
thereto, and the individual and collective instruction in marksmanship
are treated in the =Small-Arms Firing Manual=.

=659.= =Volley fire= has limited application. It has a moral effect
both on the troops employing it and on those subjected to it. It may
be employed to restore control. In defense it may be used in the early
stages of the action if the enemy presents a large compact target. It
may be used by troops especially posted on the flank or in a dominant
position in rear of an attacking force for the purpose of aiding the
advance by so-called _fire of position_. When the ground near the
target is such that the strike of bullets can be seen from the firing
line, ranging volleys may be used to correct the sight setting.

In combat, volley firing, if used, is executed habitually by platoon.

=660.= =Fire at will= is the class of fire normally employed in attack
or defense.

=661.= =Clip fire= has limited application. It is principally used
(_a_) in the early stages of combat to steady the men by habituating
them to brief pauses in firing; (_b_) to produce a short burst of
fire.


FIRE DIRECTION.

=662.= When the troop is large enough to be divided into platoons, it
is impracticable for the captain to command it in combat. His
efficiency in managing the firing line is measured by his ability to
enforce his will through the platoon leaders. Having indicated clearly
what he desires them to do, he avoids interfering except to correct
serious errors or omissions.

The captain directs the fire of his troop or of designated platoons.
He designates the target and, when practicable, allots a part of the
target to each platoon. Before beginning the fire action he determines
the range, announces the sight setting, and indicates the class of
fire to be employed and the time to open fire. Thereafter he observes
the fire effect, corrects material errors in sight setting, prevents
exhaustion of the ammunition supply, and causes the distribution of
such extra ammunition as may be received.


FIRE CONTROL.

=663.= In combat the platoon is the _fire unit_. From 20 to 35 rifles
are as many as one leader can control effectively.

Each platoon leader puts into execution the commands or directions of
the captain, having first taken such precautions to insure correct
sight setting and clear description of the target or aiming point as
the situation permits or requires (par. 141); thereafter he gives such
additional commands or directions as are necessary to exact compliance
with the captain's will. He corrects the sight setting when necessary.
When the target can not be seen with the naked eye, he designates an
aiming point (by one of the methods described in par. 141 if
necessary) and orders fire upon it, first announcing the proper sight
setting to correct the error of aim.

In general, =platoon leaders= observe the target and the effect of the
fire and are on the alert for the captain's commands; they observe and
regulate the rate of fire. The =file closers= watch the firing line
and check every breach of fire discipline. =Chiefs of section=
transmit commands when necessary, observe the conduct of their
sections and abate excitement, assist in enforcing fire discipline,
and participate in the firing unless otherwise directed by the
=platoon commanders=.

The best troops are those that submit longest to fire control. To
avoid or delay such loss of control should be the constant aim of all.

Fire control implies the ability of the commander to stop the firing,
change the sight setting and target, and resume a well-directed fire.


FIRE DISCIPLINE.

=664.= Fire discipline implies, besides an unquestioning habit of
obedience to commands, a control of the rifle by the soldier (the
result of training), which will enable him in action to make hits
instead of misses. It embraces taking advantage of the ground; proper
understanding of orders as to target designation; care in setting the
sight and delivery of fire; constant attention to the orders of the
leaders, and careful observation of the enemy; an increase of fire
when the target is favorable, and a cessation of fire when the enemy
disappears; economy of ammunition. Orderly and regular methods on the
part of leaders aid fire discipline. Self possession and a confident
tone in giving commands and instructions are indispensable.

In combat, shots which graze the enemy's trench or position, and thus
reduce the effectiveness of his fire, have the approximate value of
hits; such shots only, or actual hits, contribute toward fire
superiority.

Fire discipline implies that, in a firing line without leaders, each
man retains his presence of mind and directs effective fire upon the
proper target.

=665.= To create a correct appreciation of the requirements of fire
discipline, men are taught that the rate of fire, having constantly in
view the available ammunition supply, should be as rapid as is
consistent with accurate aiming; that the rate will depend upon the
visibility, proximity, and size of the target; and that the proper
rate will ordinarily suggest itself to each trained man usually
rendering cautions or commands unnecessary.

=666.= In attack, ammunition must be used with extreme caution in
order that the highest rate of fire may be employed at the halt
preceding the assault and in pursuing fire.

=667.= In defense, when the target disappears behind cover, platoon
leaders suspend fire, prepare their platoons to fire upon the point
where it is expected to reappear, and greet its reappearance instantly
with a vigorous burst of fire. In defense the available ammunition
supply is not ordinarily so limited as in the attack.

=668.= For communication between the firing line and the reserve or
commander in rear certain signals are prescribed (par. 997). In
transmission their concealment from the enemy's view should be
insured. In the absence of signal flags the headdress or other
substitute may be used.


RANGES.

=669.= For convenience of reference, ranges are classified as follows:

      0 to 600 yards, close range.
    600 to 1,200 yards, effective range.
  1,200 to 2,000 yards, long range.
  Over 2,000 yards, distant range.

The distance to the target must be determined as accurately as
possible and the sights set accordingly.

Aside from training and morale, this is the most important single
factor in securing effective fire at the longer ranges.

Except in a deliberately prepared defensive position, the most
accurate and only practicable method of determining the range, in
absence of a suitable mechanical range finder, will generally be to
take the mean of several estimates made independently.

_Estimation of ranges._--Five or six officers and men, selected from
the most accurate estimators in the troop and designated as _range
estimators_, should be specially trained in estimating distances.

Whenever necessary and practicable, the captain assembles the range
estimators, points out the target to them, and adopts the mean of
their estimates. The range estimators then take their customary posts.

When a range is announced, the men at once set their sights to
correspond, and whenever practicable an examination of the pieces is
made in order to verify the sight setting.

(_C. C. D. R., No. 1, Apr. 26, 1917._)

Firing is delayed as long as possible for three reasons, viz: (_a_) At
the extreme ranges little damage can be done on the enemy, and
ineffective firing always encourages him; (_b_) halting to fire delays
the advance, and the great object to be accomplished is to close in on
the enemy where you can meet him on better terms; (_c_) plenty of
ammunition will be required at the decisive stage of the fight, and it
is very difficult to send extra ammunition up to the firing line.
=Therefore never fire until ordered to do so, and then never fire more
than the number of rounds designated. Never fire after the command
"cease firing" is given.=

Ammunition in the bandoleers will ordinarily be expended first. Thirty
rounds in the right pocket section of the belt will be held as a
reserve, to be expended only when ordered by an officer.

Soon, however, it will be necessary to halt and open fire on the enemy
in order to cause him some loss, to make his riflemen keep down in
their trenches, and to make them fire wildly. It is probable that at
this time and until you arrive much closer you will not see any of the
enemy to fire at. You may not even see any trenches nor know just
where the enemy is. Your higher officers, however, with their field
glasses and the messages they receive, will know. Each troop will be
assigned a certain front to cover with its fire. =Therefore be careful
to fix your sights at the designated range and fire only at the
designated target.= This means team work in firing, which is one of
the most important elements of success.

The firing line advances from position to position by means of rushes.
At long range the entire line may rush forward at the same time, but
as the range decreases one part of the line rushes forward while the
remainder keeps up a hot fire on the enemy. The number taking part in
each rush decreases as the fire of the enemy becomes warmer, until
perhaps only one squad, or even less, rushes or crawls forward at a
time, protected by the fire of the rest of the company. The distance
covered by each rush also becomes less and less. After any rush no
part of the line again advances until the rest of the line is up. =In
making a rush, the leader of the unit gives the signal and leads the
way. The rest follow. No attempt is made to keep a line, but each man
rushes forward at a run, seeking only to reach the new halting
position as quickly and with as little exposure as possible.= When
halted, the skirmishers need not be in a perfect line, but every
advantage should be taken of the ground for concealment and
protection. It is necessary only that no man or group of men should
interfere with the fire of other parts of the firing line.

The noise on the firing line will be great. Leaders will be disabled
and new men will take their places. Reinforcements coming up will
cause units to become mixed. To the green man everything may appear to
be in confusion, but this is not so. This is war as it really is. =If
you have lost your section or your section leader, join the leader
nearest to you.= This is the way the game is played.

As long as the fight lasts every available rifleman must be kept in
the firing line. The first and last consideration is to win the
battle. =Therefore, under no circumstances will any soldier be
permitted to go to the rear, either for ammunition or to assist the
wounded.=

If the attacking force can no longer advance, it is much safer to
throw up hasty intrenchments and await the arrival of reinforcements
or darkness than it is to retreat. Retreating troops are the ones that
suffer the greatest. This lesson is taught by every great war.
=Therefore, always remember that the safest thing to do is to stick to
the firing line.=

Troops on the firing line, when not actually engaged in firing at the
enemy, busy themselves throwing up shelter trenches. It only requires
a few minutes to construct a trench that gives great protection.
=Therefore, never get separated from your intrenching tool.=

Concealment is no less important than protection. Therefore, when
conditions permit, as is generally the case when on the defensive,
every effort should be made to hide intrenchments by the use of sod,
grass, weeds, bushes, etc.

In making an attack the infantry is always supported when possible by
its own artillery, which continues to fire over its head until the
infantry arrives very close to the enemy's trenches. This fire is
helping you a great deal by keeping down the fire of the enemy's
infantry and artillery. Therefore, don't think you are being fired
into by your own artillery because you hear their shells and shrapnel
singing through the air or bursting a short distance in your front,
but rather be thankful you are receiving their help up to the very
last minute.

In the last rush which carries the enemy's position there is always
much mixing of units. The firing line does not continue rushing madly
as individuals after the enemy, but halts and fires on him until he
gets out of good range. The pursuit is taken up by formed troops held
in reserve or by the firing line only after its units are again gotten
together.

As the fighting often lasts all day, and great suffering is caused
from thirst, =don't throw away your canteen when the fight commences=.
It may also be impossible to get rations up to the line during the
night. =Therefore, it is advisable to hold onto at least one ration.=

As the recent war has shown the possibility of hand-to-hand fighting,
especially at night, each soldier should be schooled in the use of the
bayonet.

The following has particular reference to the duties of platoon and
section leaders and to the teamwork of the platoon in combat:

Attacking troops must first gain =fire superiority= in order to reach
the hostile position. By gaining fire superiority is meant making
one's fire superior to that of the enemy in volume and accuracy, and
it depends upon the number of rifles employed, the rate of fire, the
character of the target, training and discipline, and fire direction
and control. When the fire of the attackers becomes effective and
superior to that of the defenders the latter are no longer able to
effectively and coolly aim and fire at the former, and, as a
consequence, the attackers are able to inaugurate a successful rush or
advance which carries them nearer to the enemy's position.

When a trained organization has been committed to the attack, the
gaining of fire superiority depends upon the way in which =fire
direction= and =fire control= are exercised.

The captain =directs= the fire of the troop. He indicates to the
platoon commanders the target (enemy) which the troop is to fire and
advance upon, and tells each upon which part of this target he is to
direct the fire of his platoon. When he desires the fire to be opened,
he gives the necessary commands or signals, including the range at
which the sights are to be set.

When the fire fight has once started, it becomes to a great extent a
fight of a number of platoons. The platoon is the largest organization
which can be controlled by a single leader in action. The platoon
commander (lieutenant or sergeant) =controls= its fire in order to
gain the maximum fire effect and to avoid wasting ammunition. He must
try his best to make the fire of his platoon effective, to get it
forward, and to support neighboring platoons in their effort to
advance. At the same time he must hold himself subject to his
captain's directions. He should take advantage of every chance to
carry his platoon forward unless otherwise ordered. In all this he is
assisted by his section chiefs (sergeants) and by his corporals.

At the commencement of an engagement the platoon commander will give
the objective (part of the enemy's line or aiming target) at which his
platoon is to direct its fire. Noncommissioned officers must be sure
that they see and understand the objective, and that all the men in
their squads do likewise. Fire is then directed at this objective
without further command until the platoon commander gives a new
objective.

Men should be instructed to aim at that part of the target assigned to
their platoon which corresponds with their own position in their own
platoon, so that there will be no portion of the target which is not
covered by fire. A portion of the enemy's line not covered by fire
means that that portion is able to coolly aim and fire at their
opponents.

In an engagement the voice can seldom be heard over a few feet, and
the platoon commander will generally have to convey his orders by
signals. A sergeant may be able to shout orders to his section, and
orders may be repeated along a skirmish line by shouting. Care should
be taken that orders intended for one platoon only are not thus
conveyed to another platoon.

A short blast on the whistle, given by the platoon commander, means
"Attention to Orders." All noncommissioned officers at once suspend
firing and glance toward the platoon commander to see if the latter
has any signals or orders for them. If not, they resume firing. A long
blast on the whistle means "Suspend Firing." When a noncommissioned
officer hears this signal from his platoon commander, he should at
once shout "Suspend Firing." Upon receiving a signal, the
noncommissioned officer for whom it is intended should at once repeat
it back, to be sure that it is correctly understood.

As a rule, rushes should be started by a unit on one flank and should
be followed in succession by the other units to the opposite flank.
Each succeeding unit should halt on the line established by the unit
which first rushed. When a unit is about to rush, leaders in charge of
adjacent units should caution their men to be careful not to fire into
the rushing unit as it bounds forward.

When one unit suspends fire for the purpose of rushing, adjacent
leaders should arrange to have a portion of their men turn their fire
on the target of the rushing unit, to the end that there may be no
portion of the enemy's line not under fire and able to fire coolly on
the rushing unit.

Rushes should be made for as long a distance as possible, due regard
being had for the wind of the men and not to get beyond supporting
distance of the other units. Long rushes facilitate an advance, and
quickly place a skirmish line close to the enemy's position, where
its fire will have more effect. An attacking line suffers less from
casualties at short ranges than it does at mid range.

Every advantage should be taken to utilize the cover available. The
best kind of cover is that which, while it masks the skirmishers from
the sight and fire of the enemy, affords favorable conditions for
firing and for readily advancing. In order to allow men to regain
their wind, or should the fire of the enemy be so effective as to
prevent a further advance without reinforcement, advantage may be
taken to lie close in cover, or hasty fire trenches may be thrown up
in order to allow the line to maintain its position. "=To go back
under fire is to die.="

When a platoon is firing, all noncommissioned officers watch every
opportunity to make the fire more effective. The section chiefs and
corporals should constantly watch the men to see that they do not
become excited, fire too hastily or without aim, that their sights are
set at the correct range, that they are obviously firing at the
designated target, and that they assume steady firing positions and
take advantage of cover. In performing these duties it may be
necessary for the section chiefs to be constantly crawling along the
line. A substitute chief assists the chief of his section by
supervising the fire of the men near him, firing when not actively
engaged in that duty.

Bayonets are fixed preparatory to a charge when armed with that
weapon. This command is usually given by the bugle. Only two or three
men in each section should fix their bayonets at the same time, in
order that there may be no marked pause or diminution in the fire at
this critical stage of the engagement.

In order to be effective in combat, the platoon must be thoroughly
trained to work as a team. Each noncommissioned officer must be
conversant with the signals and commands and the proper methods for
instantly putting into effect the orders of his platoon commander.
Each private must be trained until he instinctively does the right
thing in each phase of the action.


=Section 3. Patrolling.=

The designation of a patrol indicates the nature of the duty for which
it is detailed, as, for example, visiting, reconnoitering, exploring,
flanking, combat, harassing, pursuing, etc. An Infantry patrol
consists, as a rule, of from 3 to 16 men, a Cavalry patrol generally
of from 4 to 10 men.

Reconnoitering patrols are habitually small and seek safety in
concealment or flight, fighting only when their mission demands it.
The most skillful reconnoissance is where patrols accomplish their
mission and return without being discovered by the enemy. When
resistance is expected stronger detachments are required. These cover
themselves with small patrols of two to four men, the remainder acting
as support.

The commander determines the number and strength of patrols and when
they are to be sent out. It is a cardinal principle to send out
patrols of such strength only as will accomplish the object.

The officer sending out the patrol verifies the details, designates a
second in command, and gives the necessary instruction. The orders or
instructions for a patrol, or for any detachment going on
reconnoissance, must state clearly where the enemy is or is supposed
to be, what information is desired, what features are of special
importance, the general direction to be followed, whether friendly
patrols are liable to be encountered, and where messages are to be
sent or the patrol is to report. Important and comprehensive
instructions should be in writing, but precautions against capture of
papers must be taken. An officer sending out a patrol must be certain
that his orders are understood. Detailed instructions are, as a rule,
avoided. When necessary the time of return is stated.

The patrol leader should be selected with care. He should be an
excellent horseman, have good judgment, courage, be able to read maps,
make sketches, and send clear and concise messages. In addition to his
ordinary equipment, he should have a map of the country, a watch,
field glass, compass, whistle, message blanks, and pencils.

The leader of a patrol should carefully inspect the men and horses
before starting out. He should see that the horses are well shod and
in good working condition. Nervous horses or those that neigh when
left alone should not be taken. The equipment of each man should be
complete and so arranged as to prevent rattling. Articles that are
liable to glitter in the sunlight should be covered. Nothing should be
taken along that would be of information to the enemy if any members
of the patrol were captured, for example, copies of orders, maps with
positions of troops marked thereon, letters, newspapers, or collar
ornaments.

The leader then gives his patrol information and instructions. These
embrace instructions from higher authority; his detailed plans;
information of the country and enemy; the countersign, if any; the
point where the patrol will assemble if scattered. He will see that
the men understand the prescribed signals.

=It must always be remembered that it makes no difference, how
valuable may be the information that the patrol gets, it is worthless
if not sent back in time to be of service.= Herein is where most
patrols fail. This applies particularly to the information obtained by
patrols acting as a point or flankers of advance, rear, and flank
guards. Whenever the patrol gets any information, the leader must
think whether the commanding officer would change his plans or issue
new orders if he had the information. If he would, the information
should be sent back at once. If the distance is great or the
inhabitants are hostile, it is well to send two men with the message.
These men should not travel side by side, but as a patrol of two men.
If the information is very important, and the danger of capture is
considerable, the message should be sent by two parties, each
traveling by a different route. The gaits should be specified.

A message from a patrol should always show (_a_) the place from which
it is sent; (_b_) the time it is sent (date, hour, and minute); (_c_)
to whom it is sent; (_d_) the message itself; (_e_) what the patrol
intends doing after sending the message; (_f_) the name of the sender.
Under (_d_) care must be taken to separate what has actually been seen
by the patrol from information received from other sources. Care must
also be taken not to exaggerate what is seen, but to report only the
exact facts.

Whether moving or halted, patrols exercise the greatest vigilance to
prevent discovery. No formal formation is or should be prescribed.
Under the leader's guidance it moves so as to guard against surprise,
usually with point and flankers. To extend the sphere of its
observation, still smaller patrols (one or two men) may be sent out
for short distances, communication with the leader being maintained by
signals. Whatever the formation adopted, it should favor the escape of
at least one man in case of surprise.

In patrols of two to five men the commander generally leads. In this
formation few signals are necessary, the men simply regulating their
movements by his.

In questioning civilians caution is observed not to disclose
information that may be of value to the enemy. Strangers are not
allowed to precede the patrol. Patrol leaders are authorized to seize
telegrams and mail matter, and to arrest individuals, reporting the
facts as soon as possible.

Patrols should observe everything for signs of the enemy. Even
apparent trifles may be of great value. The finding of a collar
ornament showing a man's regiment may enable the chief of staff to
determine that the enemy has been reenforced.

Patrols should not travel on the main roads if they can observe them
and at the same time make the necessary progress by moving some
distance to the side of the roads.

Except in case of attack or of great personal danger, no member of the
patrol should fire on hostile troops without orders from the patrol
leader. When sent out to gain information, patrols should avoid
fighting unless it is absolutely necessary in order to carry out their
orders. If the leader determines to fight, he should quickly decide
whether he will attack mounted with the saber and thus dispose pf the
enemy without the noise of fire action. Cases will arise where a quick
mounted pistol attack will obtain the best results. If discovered, the
patrol would dismount only as a last resort. The leader should always
have in mind, as he rides long, what he will do if he meets the enemy.

Villages and inclosures involving danger of surprise are entered with
precaution, and for brief periods only. Halts are made at points
affording good view, and the country is studied in all directions,
landmarks to the rear being impressed on the minds of the men so that
the way back can be readily found; the leader consults his map and
locates himself thereon.

When a patrol is scattered it reassembles at some place previously
selected; if checked in one direction, it takes another; if cut off it
returns by a detour or forces its way through. As a last resort it
scatters so that at least one man may return with information. Patrols
nearing their own lines should march at a walk unless pressed by the
enemy.

Occasionally it is advisable for the leader to conceal his patrol and
continue the reconnaissance with one or two companions.

Patrols far from their commands or in contact with the enemy often
remain out overnight. In such cases they seek a place of concealment,
proceeding thereto after nightfall or under cover.

When the enemy is encountered it is very necessary to locate his main
force. Information is particularly desired of his strength, whether he
has infantry, cavalry, and artillery, the route and direction of his
march, or the location of his camp and line of outposts.

Dust clouds indicate moving bodies. Infantry raises a low, thick
cloud; cavalry a high, thin cloud; artillery and wagons a broken
cloud. The kind of troops, direction of march, and approximate
strength may thus sometimes be roughly estimated. If from some
position a body of troops can be seen marching along in column, the
exact time in minutes and seconds it requires for them to pass a
certain point should be noted, together with the formation they are
in, thus: Infantry, column of squads, three minutes and twelve
seconds; cavalry, columns of twos at a trot, one minute and twenty
seconds; wagons, four-mule, five minutes. From this information the
strength can be determined by the following rule:

Assuming that infantry in column of squads occupy half a yard per man,
cavalry in column of fours 1 yard per man, and artillery and wagons in
single column 20 yards per gun, caisson, or wagon, a given point would
be passed in one minute by about--

  175 infantry.
  110 cavalry at a walk.
  200 cavalry at a trot.
    5 guns, caissons, or wagons.

For troops in column of twos, take one-half of the above estimate.

Patrols should always observe the country marched over, with a view to
making a report on the same. The following information is always of
value:

=Roads.=--Direction; kind, whether dirt, gravel, macadam, etc.;
width, whether suitable for column of squads, etc.; border, whether
fenced with stone, barbed wire, rails, etc.; steepness in crossing
hills and valleys; where they pass through defiles and along
commanding heights, etc.; crossroads.

=Surrounding country.=--Whether generally open and passable for
infantry, cavalry, and artillery, or whether broken and impassable,
due to fences, woods, crops, ravines; whether good grazing is
available, etc.

=Railroads.=--Single or double track, narrow or broad gauge, tunnels,
bridges, cuts, direction, stations, etc.

=Bridges.=--Material, wood, stone, steel, etc.; length and breadth;
number and kind of piers or supports.

=Rivers.=--Direction; width, depth; kind of bottom, such as mud, sand,
rocky, etc.; banks, steep or gentle, open or wooded; rapidity of
current; variations in depth at different times as indicated by
driftwood and high-water marks; islands; heights in vicinity
commanding streams.

=Woods.=--Extent and shape; kind of trees; free from underbrush or
not; clearings, roads, swamps, ravines, etc.

=Telegraph lines.=--Number of wires, along roads or railroads,
stations, etc.

=Villages.=--Size, kind of houses, nature of streets, means of
defense, etc.

=Hills and ridges.=--Whether scopes are gentle or steep; whether top
is narrow or wide; whether ground is broken or smooth, wooded or
clear; whether difficult or easy to cross, etc.; whether commanded by
other hills.

=Defiles.=--Their direction, length, and width; whether surrounding
heights are passable for infantry and artillery: kind of country at
each opening of the defile, etc.

=Ravines, ditches, etc.=--Width and depth; banks, whether passable for
infantry, cavalry, and wagons; whether suitable for trenches, or for
movement of troops therein, etc.

In general, every soldier should be constantly on the lookout to
obtain information that might be of some military value. Remember that
information of the enemy and of the country is worthless unless made
known to the proper officials in time to be of use.

Every soldier should be able to find his way in a strange country;
should know how to use a compass; should know how to locate the North
Star; should be able to travel across country, keeping a given
direction, both by day and by night, and by observing landmarks he
should be able to return to the starting point either over the same
route or by a more circuitous one. This can easily be learned =by a
little practice=.

It adds a great deal to the value of a soldier if he knows how to use
a map to find his way. If he knows how to =make= a rough sketch of the
country showing the position of roads, streams, woods, railroads,
bridges, houses, villages, fields, fences, hills, etc., he has added
to his value as a soldier very much, indeed, because a rough sketch of
a country will give more and better information at a glance than can
be obtained by reading many pages of written description.

=Patrolling= is one of the most important duties a soldier can learn.
Any enlisted man who understands thoroughly his duties as a member of
a patrol will understand also most of his duties when with advance or
rear guards or when on outpost duty. Patrolling can not be learned
merely by reading books nor by work indoors. Thoroughness comes only
by actually going out in the country and acting as a patrol.

In carrying out this idea the following scheme is recommended:

Let four or more men and a noncommissioned officer act as a patrol.
They assemble at a certain time, at a convenient point on some country
road. An officer, whom we will call Captain A, acts as the director;
the noncommissioned officer, whom we will call Sergeant B, acts as
patrol leader; and the others (Privates C, D, E, etc.) act as members
of Sergeant B's patrol.

Assume that the troop (squadron, etc.) has just made camp in this
vicinity and that the inhabitants are friendly (or hostile).

Captain A indicates to the rest of the men where the camp is situated
and points out where the various sentinels are posted. (This in itself
affords an opportunity for much discussion and for teaching many
valuable lessons.)

Captain A then calls up Sergeant B and tells him--

(_a_) Just what information Captain A has of the enemy, and also any
information of the country or of friendly troops in the vicinity that
might be of service to Sergeant B.

(_b_) How many men he shall take for the patrol (this is another
problem for Captain A to solve). Any men present not used as part of
the patrol ride along with Captain A as observers.

(_c_) How far he shall go and what country he shall cover with the
patrol.

(_d_) Just what information it is particularly desired he shall
obtain.

(_e_) Where he shall send his messages and when he shall return.

=Example 1=:

"Sergeant B, it has just been reported to me that a company of hostile
infantry was in camp last night at X, about 5 miles from here on this
road. Take 5 men and proceed toward X and find out whether the enemy
is still there, and if not, when he left and where he went. Send
messages to me here, and return by 8 o'clock this evening."

=Example 2=:

"Sergeant B, I think I heard the firing of field guns over in that
direction a short while ago. Take 6 men and proceed to that high hill
you see over there about 4 miles away. Send a message to me here when
you reach there. You may go farther if you then think it advisable,
but return before daylight. I desire particularly to know if there are
any hostile troops in this vicinity, especially artillery. I shall
send Sergeant X with 3 men to observe the country from that hill you
see over there farther to the south. He will remain there till dark.
Send messages to me here. If the troop is not here on your return you
will find a note for you underneath this rail."

=Example 3=:

"Sergeant B, this friendly country boy has just reported that four
hostile cavalrymen stopped about half an hour ago at his father's
house, which he says is about 2 miles up this road. One of the men
seemed to be very sick. You will select eight men from your section
and endeavor to capture these men. If they have disappeared you will
reconnoiter in that vicinity until dark. This boy will accompany you
as a guide. He will ride Private X's horse. I desire particularly to
learn the position, strength, and composition of any hostile troops in
this vicinity. Send reports to me here. Return before daylight."

=Example 4=:

"Sergeant B, here is a map of the country in this vicinity on a scale
of 1 inch to the mile. Here is where we are camped [indicating
position on the map]. I have just learned that foraging parties of the
enemy are collecting supplies over here at X [indicating point on
map], which is 10 miles off in that direction [pointing across country
toward X]. It is reported that this bridge over this stream
[indicating same on the map], which is about 3 miles down this road
[indicating road and direction on the ground], has been destroyed. You
will take three men from your platoon and verify this report. You will
also reconnoiter the stream for a distance of 3 miles both above and
below the bridge for fords suitable for infantry. Messages will reach
me here. Return by 8 o'clock to-night."

Sergeant B then inspects his horses and men and gives them their
instructions. The patrol is then formed and moves out exactly as it
would under actual war conditions.

Captain A may halt (and assemble if desirable) the patrol at intervals
in order to discuss the formation used and the movement of any members
of the patrol, their route, use of cover, etc., with the reasons
therefor, and compare the same with suggested modifications of the
formations, etc. After the discussion, the patrol is again set in
motion. Captain A may accompany any part of the patrol. From time to
time he presents certain situations to some member of the patrol,
being very careful to assume only such situations as might naturally
occur.

Thus, take Example 1:

Captain A is with Sergeant B, who, with Private C, is marching along
the road as the point of the patrol. The other members of the patrol
are distributed to suit the nature of the country over which the
patrol is marching. The point has just reached a ridge beyond which
the country is open and cultivated for about half a mile. Beyond this
the road enters a woods. Captain A now says: "Sergeant B, from this
point you see two soldiers in khaki on the road there at the beginning
of that cornfield about 200 yards from the woods [points out same].
They are moving in this direction. About 200 yards to the right of
these and somewhat farther to their rear you see two more men moving
along that rail fence."

Sergeant B now does exactly as he would do in actual war. How does he
signal to his patrol? Does he assemble his men? If so, how and where?
Does he send a message back to camp; and if so, by whom, and is it
written or verbal? (If written, Sergeant B actually writes it and
delivers it to Private ----, with the necessary instructions. If
verbal, it is actually given to Private ---- with instructions.)
Captain A must in this case make notes of what the message was. In
either case, Private ---- ceases to be a member of the patrol and
joins Captain A as an observer. He should, however, at some later time
be required to repeat his message to Captain A, on the assumption that
he had reached camp with the same. The message, whether oral or
written, should be thoroughly analyzed and discussed. Was it proper to
send a message at this time? Does Sergeant B intend to remain in
observation; if so, how long? (Captain A can give such information
from time to time concerning the hostile patrol as Sergeant B might
reasonably be supposed to learn in view of his dispositions. In order
that Captain A may present natural assumptions, it is very essential
that in his own mind he should, at the outset, assume a situation for
the hostile forces and that he should consider himself as in command
of all hostile troops. In this particular case he should assume
himself to be in command of the hostile patrol, acting under certain
specified orders similar to examples given, and he should conduct this
patrol in his own mind in accordance with these orders, giving
Sergeant B only such information as he might reasonably be expected to
obtain in view of whatever action Sergeant B takes.) Will Sergeant B
attempt to capture this patrol? If so, how? Will he avoid fighting and
attempt to pass it unobserved; and if so, how and why?

In this manner the exercise is continued. Care must be taken not to
have the patrol leader or members state what they would do, but they
must actually do it. Explanations and discussions may take place
later.

In a similar manner the director may inform Sergeant B (or any member
of the patrol) that this hostile patrol is followed by a squad (on the
assumption that it is the leading unit of an advance guard), and the
exercise is then continued along these lines.

The following are examples of assumption that might be made and
carried out:

(_a_) That the patrol is unexpectedly fired upon.

(_b_) That one or more of the patrol is wounded.

(_c_) That a prisoner is captured (let an observer act as prisoner).

(_d_) That a friendly inhabitant gives certain information.

(_e_) That a dust cloud is seen in the distance over the trees.

(_f_) That a column of troops can be seen marching along a distant
road.

(_g_) That an abandoned camp is discovered and certain signs noted.

(_h_) That the patrol is attacked by a superior force and compelled to
scatter.

There is practically no end to the number of reasonable assumptions
that may be made.

Troop officers may use this method of instructing noncommissioned
officers in patrolling, advance and rear guard duty, outposts, and in
squad leading, in writing messages, in selecting positions for
trenches, and in constructing and concealing same. This form of
instruction is called "a tactical ride or, if dismounted, a tactical
walk." It is very greatly used by all foreign armies. Exercises along
the same general lines are conducted for field and staff officers and
even general officers, and are called "tactical rides" and
"strategical rides," depending upon their object.

After some proficiency has been attained as a result of these tactical
rides, the greatest interest and enthusiasm can be awakened in this
work by sending out two patrols the same day, one to operate against
the other. Each should wear a distinctive uniform. The strength of
each patrol, its starting point, route to be followed, and its orders
should all be unknown to the other patrol. If blank ammunition is
used, an officer should supervise its issue and carefully inspect to
see that no man carries any ball cartridges. One umpire should
accompany the commander of each party. Each umpire should be fully
informed of the strength, orders, and route of both patrols. He must,
however, carefully avoid giving suggestions or offering any
information to the commander. Observers in these small maneuver
problems are generally in the way and none should be permitted to be
along.

These small maneuvers may be gradually developed by having one side
establish an outpost or fight a delaying action, etc.

It should always be remembered that there is no hard and fast rule
prescribing how a patrol of three, five, or any number of men should
march. The same is equally true of advance guards, and applies also to
the establishment of outposts. It is simply a question of common sense
based on military knowledge. Don't try to remember any diagrams in a
book. Think only of what you have been ordered to do and how best you
can handle your men to accomplish your mission, and at the same time
save the men and horses from any unnecessary hardships. Never use two
or more men to do what one can do just as well, and don't let your men
get beyond your control.

In addition to the signals prescribed in the Cavalry Drill
Regulations, the following should be clearly understood by the members
of a patrol:

Enemy in sight in small numbers, hold rifle above the head
horizontally; enemy in force, same proceeding, raising and lowering
the rifle several times; take cover, a downward motion of the hand.

Other signals may be agreed upon, but they must be familiar to the
men; complicated signals are avoided. Signals must be used cautiously
so as not to convey information to the enemy.


=Section 4. Advance guards.=

The advance guard is a detachment of the main body which precedes and
covers it on the march. The primary duty of an advance guard is to
insure the safe and uninterrupted march of the main body. Specifically
its duties are:

1. To guard against surprise and furnish information by
reconnoitering.

2. To push back small parties of the enemy and prevent their
observing, firing upon, or delaying the main body.

3. To check the enemy's advance in force long enough to permit the
main body to prepare for action.

4. When the enemy is encountered on the defensive, to seize a good
position and locate his lines, care being taken not to bring on a
general engagement unless the advance guard commander is empowered to
do so.

5. To remove obstacles, repair the road, and favor in every way the
steady, march of the column.

The strength of the advance guard will vary with the proximity of the
enemy and character of the country; for a regiment it will generally
consist of from two troops to a squadron, for a squadron of one troop;
for a troop of from a section to a platoon. The advance guard
commander is responsible for the proper performance of the duties with
which it is charged and for its conduct and formation.

The advance guard provides for its security and gains information by
throwing out to the front and flanks smaller bodies: Each part must
keep in touch with the unit from which it is sent out. An advance
guard is generally divided into a reserve and a support; where it
consists of less than a squadron, the reserve is generally omitted.

The support sends forward an advance party, which, in turn, sends
forward a point. In small advance guards the point precedes the
advance party about 350 yards, the advance party the support about 500
yards, and the support the main body about 600 yards. Where advance
guards are large enough to require a reserve these distances are
increased about one-fourth, the reserve following the support, the
main body following the reserve at a distance varying from 500 to 800
yards.

Unless the country to the flanks is distinctly visible from the roads
for a distance of what may be said to be effective rifle fire,
approximately 1,000 yards, flanking patrols of two or three men each
should be sent out from the advance party, and, when in proximity of
the enemy, in addition from the support. When the nature of the
country is such that patrols may move across country, without unduly
delaying the march these patrols should march at a distance of from
500 to 600 yards from the flank of the body from which detached. For
the examination of any object, such as a wood, buildings, etc.,
examining patrols should be sent out from the main body. The usual
method of protecting the flanks, particularly when the country is at
all cut up or difficult, is to send out patrols from time to time to
some point from which a good outlook can be obtained, or which will
afford protection to the enemy. These patrols remain in observation,
observer being dismounted, his horse held by another trooper until the
advance guard has passed, when they rejoin the nearest subdivision, as
quickly as possible working their way to that to which they belong
during the halts or by riding up the side of the road. By sending out
a succession of small patrols in this manner the flanks are protected.
Should the advance party become depleted, it must be reenforced from
the support.

A squadron acting as advance guard would have two or three troops in
reserve and one or two in support. The support would send forward as
advance party two platoons, the advance party in turn sending forward
as point one section. A troop acting as advance guard would have no
reserve and would send forward as advance party one platoon. All Of
the above may be changed as circumstances warrant.

Cases may arise when the best means of covering the head and flanks of
the column will be by a line of skirmishers extended at intervals of
from 5 to 50 yards, as, for instance, when passing through high corn,
underbrush, etc.

It must always be remembered that the principal duty of the advance
guard is to secure the uninterrupted march of the main body. If the
point is fired upon, it should at once deploy and endeavor to advance
fighting. The flankers should assist in this and endeavor to locate
the enemy's flank should there be such resistance that advance was
impossible. Each succeeding body should march promptly forward, and in
turn be placed in action, with the idea of clearing the way for the
advance of the main body. Should this be impossible, the commander of
the entire body must determine what measures he will take.


=Section 5. Rear guards.=

A rear guard is a detachment detailed to protect the main body from
attack in rear. Cavalry is an excellent arm for rear guard duty on
account of its mobility. While part of the cavalry is using dismounted
fire action, the other part may gallop back and take up a new
position. In a retreat it checks pursuit and enables the main body to
increase the distance between it and the enemy and to re-form if
disorganized. The general formation is that of an advance guard
reversed.

Its commander should take advantage of every favorable opportunity to
delay the pursuers by obstructing the road, or by taking up specially
favorable positions from which to force the enemy to deploy. In this
latter case care must be taken not to become so closely engaged as to
render withdrawal unnecessarily difficult. The position taken should
be selected with reference to ease of withdrawal and ability to bring
the enemy under fire at long range.


=Section 6. Flank guards.=

A flank guard is a detachment detailed to cover the flank of a column
marching past, or across the front of, an enemy. It may be placed in
position to protect the passage, or it may be so marched as to cover
the passage. The object of the flank guard is to hold the enemy in
check long enough to enable the main body to pass, or, like the
advance guard, to enable the main body to deploy. Like all other
detachments, it should be no larger than is necessary, and should not
be detailed except when its protection is required.

When a flank guard consists of a regiment or less, its distance from
the main body should not be much over 5 miles. Practicable
communication must exist between it and the main body. The flank guard
is marched as a separate command; that is, with advance or rear
guards, or both, as circumstances demand, and with patrolling on the
exposed flank.


=Section 7. Outposts.=

Troops not on the march provide for their security by outposts. The
general duties of an outpost are reconnoissance, observation, and
resistance.

The specific duties are:

1. To protect the main body, so that the troops may rest undisturbed.

2. In case of attack, to check the enemy long enough to enable the
main body to make the necessary dispositions.

During an advance the outposts are usually detailed from the advance
guard. During the retreat the outposts for the night usually forms
the rear guard the next day. If the command remains in bivouac, the
new outpost generally goes on duty at daybreak.

The vigilance of outpost troops must be unceasing, but they should
avoid bringing on combats or unnecessarily alarming the command.
Firing disturbs the rest of troops and, if frequently indulged in,
ceases to be a warning.

No trumpet signals except "to arms" or "to horse" are sounded, and all
unnecessary noises must be avoided.

As a rule an outpost will not exceed one-sixth the strength Of a
command. For a single troop a few sentinels and patrols will suffice;
for a larger command a more elaborate system must be devised. The
troops composing the outpost are generally divided into a reserve and
several supports.

At a proper distance in front of the camp of the main body a line
which offers a good defensive position is selected. This is called
=the line of resistance=, and should be so located that an advancing
enemy will be held in check beyond effective rifle range in case of a
small force, artillery range in case of a large force, of the main
body until the latter can deploy. The reserve is stationed at some
point in rear of this line, where it can be moved quickly to reinforce
any point as needed. The line of resistance is divided into sections,
the limits of each of which are clearly defined. A support is assigned
to each section, which are numbered from right to left, and occupies a
position on or near the line, having special regard to covering
avenues of approach. The position occupied should always be
intrenched. The reserve and supports proceed to their respective
positions by the shortest routes, providing for their own protection
by sending out covering detachments.

Generally speaking, about one-half the Infantry of the advance guard
should be in the supports. As each support arrives at its position it
sends out observation groups, varying in size from four men to a
platoon, to watch the country in the direction of the enemy. These
groups are called outguards. For convenience they are classified as
pickets, sentry squads, and cossack posts, and should be sufficient in
number to cover the front of the section occupied by the support and
connect with the neighboring supports. The horses of the outguards
may be left at the position of the support.

A picket is a group consisting of one or two sections, ordinarily not
exceeding half a company, posted in the line of outposts to cover a
given sector. It furnishes patrols and one or more sentinels, sentry
squads, or cossack posts for observation. Pickets are placed at the
more important points in the line of outguards, such as road forks.
The strength of each depends upon the number of small groups required
to observe properly its sector.

A sentry squad is a squad (eight men) posted in observation at an
indicated point. It posts a double sentinel in observation, the
remaining men resting near by and furnishing the reliefs of sentinels.
In some cases it may be required to furnish a patrol.

A cossack post consists of four men. It is an observation group
similar to a sentry squad, but employs a single sentinel.

As a rule not more than one-third of the support should be on outguard
duty. As soon as they are sent out to their positions the support
commander selects a defensive position on the line of resistance;
gives instruction for intrenching same; establishes a sentinel to
watch for and transmit signals from outguards; sends out patrols to
reconnoiter the country to the front of his section and, if on the
flank of the line, the flank; and then proceeds to make a careful
reconnoissance of the section assigned him, rectifying the position of
outguards if necessary, seeing that they understand their instructions
in case of attack or when strangers approach their posts, and pointing
out their lines of retreat in case they are compelled to fall back on
the support.

When the outguards are established, the members of the support may
stack arms and remove equipment except cartridge belts. Part of the
horses may be unsaddled and groomed and fed at one time. All girths
should be loosened. No fires will be built or smoking permitted unless
specially authorized, or no loud talking or other noise. All
patrolling to the front will be done, as a rule, from the support. The
support commander should locate the position of the adjacent supports
and make arrangements with the commanders for the joint defense of the
line of resistance. At nights all roads and trails should be carefully
covered and the country to the front and between adjacent outguards
well patrolled. Horses should, as far as possible, be permitted to
rest, unsaddled, at night.

The line occupied by the outguards is called the line of observation.
Outguards move to their positions providing for their own protection
and so as to conceal the movement from the enemy. These positions are
intrenched and are numbered from right to left in each support.

The duties of the outguard are to observe the enemy, to guard the
outpost from surprise, and to make a preliminary resistance to the
enemy's advance. The strength of the outguard will vary according to
its object. When an important road, which at night will afford a line
of advance, or a bridge is to be covered, or when several posts are
established from an outguard it should be of considerable strength, a
section or a platoon. When mere observation and alarm are all that is
required four men will suffice. One corporal and seven privates are a
good number to use as an outguard; this will allow one double sentry
post of three reliefs and one man in addition to the commander, who
may be used for messenger service. The outguard should be carefully
concealed.

The utmost quiet should be observed, and there should be no cooking or
smoking. The intervals between outguards will depend upon the
situation and the terrain. The line of observation is not necessarily
continuous, but all avenues of approach must be carefully guarded. The
distance of the outguard from the support likewise is governed by the
terrain, but in general may be said to be from 300 to 400 yards. In
thick country or at night outguards patrol along the line of
observation between posts. Communication between outguards and the
support is by signal and messenger, in special cases by wire. Members
of the outguard retain possession of their weapons and do not remove
their equipment.

Sentinels from the outguard are posted so as to avoid observation, but
so that they may have a clear lookout and be able to see, if possible,
by day, the sentinels of the adjacent outguards. Double sentinels are
always posted near enough to each other to communicate easily in
ordinary voice. Sentinels are generally on post two hours out of six.
For every sentinel and every patrol there should be three reliefs, and
outguards should be of a strength sufficient to allow this. The
position of a sentinel should be selected with reference to
observation. It may be advantageous to place a sentinel in a tree.
Sentinels furnished by cossack posts or sentry squads are kept near
their group. Those furnished by their pickets may be kept as far as
100 yards away.

Reliefs, visiting patrols, and inspecting officers approach sentinels
from the rear.

A sentinel on the line of observation should always have the following
instructions: The names of villages, streams, and prominent features
in sight and where the roads lead. The number (if any) of his post,
and the number of his and of the adjoining outguards; the position of
the support; the line of retreat to be followed if the outguard is
compelled to fall back; the position of advance detachments and
whether friendly patrols are operating in front; to watch to the front
and flanks without intermission and devote special attention to
unusual or suspicious occurrences; if he sees indications of the
enemy, to at once notify his immediate superior; in case of imminent
danger, or when an attack is made, to give the alarm by firing
rapidly; by day to pass in or out officers, noncommissioned officers,
and detachments recognized as part of the outposts, and officers known
to have authority to do so; to detain all others and notify the
outguard commander; at night, when persons approach his post, to come
to a ready, halt them, and notify the outguard commander; the latter
challenges, ascertains their identity, and acts accordingly. When
individuals fail to halt, or otherwise disobey, to fire upon them
after a second warning, or sooner if they attempt to attack or escape;
to require deserters to lay down their arms, and remain until a patrol
is sent out to bring them in; to order deserters pursued by the enemy
to drop their arms and to give an alarm; if they fail to obey they are
fired upon; to require bearers of flags of truce and their escorts to
halt and to face outward; to permit them to hold no conversation and
to see that they are then blindfolded and disposed of in accordance
with instructions from the support commander; if they fail to obey to
fire upon them; at night, to remain practically stationary, moving
about for purposes of observation only; not to sit or lie down unless
authorized to do so; in the daytime, to make use of natural or
artificial cover and assume such positions as to give him the best
field of view; to inform passing patrols of what he has seen; to carry
his weapon habitually loaded and locked and at will.

Outpost patrols are divided into those which operate beyond the lines
and those whose duty lies principally within the lines. The former,
called reconnoitering patrols, scout in the direction of the enemy;
the latter, called visiting patrols, maintain communication between
the parts of the outpost and supervise the performance of duty on the
line of observation. Reconnoissance should be continuous. Though
scouts and detachments of cavalry remain in contact with the enemy, or
at least push forward to a considerable distance, more detailed
reconnoissance by infantry patrols in the foreground must not be
neglected. Reconnoitering patrols are composed of at least two men and
a skillful leader, who, in important cases, would be an officer. They
obtain information, ascertain the presence of the enemy, or discover
his approach. All patrols, when they cross the line of observation,
inform the nearest sentinel of the direction in which they are to
advance; on their return they similarly report what they have seen of
the enemy; signals are agreed upon so that they can be recognized when
returning. Any ground near the line of observation which might afford
cover for troops, or for scouts or spies, and the approach to which
can not be observed by sentinels, is searched frequently by patrols.
Definite information concerning the enemy is reported at once. Patrols
fire only in self-defense or to give the alarm. Supports on the flank
of an outpost position patrol the country on the exposed flank.
Visiting patrols and reliefs should not march in the open and thereby
expose the position of sentinels.

During a march in the vicinity of the enemy when halts are made,
special measures for protection are taken. When the halt is for a
short period, less than half an hour, the advance party and support
remain at ease, the point and flankers move to positions from which
they can obtain a good lookout, and additional patrols may be sent out
from advance parties and supports. Where the halt is for a period
exceeding half an hour a =march outpost= should be formed.

With an advance guard consisting of a squadron, one troop as support
and three as reserve, a suggested form of march outpost might be
formed as follows: The leading platoon moving to the front at a trot
for 400 yards would be outguard No. 2; the next platoon in rear,
moving to the right at a trot for about 600 to 800 yards would be
outguard No. 1; the next platoon, moving to the left in the same
manner would be outguard No. 3; and the 4th platoon would be the
support of the march outpost. The reserve (3 troops) would be the
reserve of the march outpost. On signal being given to resume the
march, the various units would close in at a trot or gallop, and as
soon as the support had assembled the march would be resumed.


=Section 8. Rifle trenches.=

Soldiers should remember that only by acting vigorously on the
offensive can an army hope to gain the victory. The defensive may
delay or stop the enemy, but it can never destroy him. "Troops dig
because they are forced to halt; they do not halt to dig."

Trenches will frequently be constructed, without being used, and
soldiers must expect this as a feature of campaigning and accept
cheerfully what at times may appear as unnecessary labor.

When intrenching under fire cover is first secured in the lying
position, each man scooping but a depression for his body and throwing
the earth to the front. In this position no excavation can be
conveniently made for the legs, but if time permits the original
excavation is enlarged and deepened until it is possible to assume a
sitting position, with the legs crossed and the shoulder to the
parapet. In such apposition a man presents a smaller target to
shrapnel bullets than in the lying trench and can fire more
comfortably and with less exposure than in the kneeling trench. From
the sitting position the excavation may be continued until a standing
trench is secured.

The accompanying plate shows some of the more common forms of trenches
in profile. Figure 1 is the simplest form of standing trench. Figure 2
shows the same trench deepened in rear, so as to allow men to walk
along in the rear (deeper) portion of the trench without exposing
their heads above the parapet. Figure 3 shows a cover and firing
trench, with a chamber in which men can find shelter when under heavy
artillery fire. When the excavated earth is easily removed figure 4
shows a good profile. The enemy's infantry, as well as his artillery,
will generally have great difficulty in seeing this type of trench.

The mound or bank of earth thrown up for shelter in front of a trench
is called the =parapet=. It should be at least 30 inches thick on top,
and the front should slope gradually, as shown in the plate, so that
shells will tend to glance from it, rather than penetrate and explode.
The top should be covered with sod, grass, or leaves, so as to hide
the newly turned earth, which could be easily seen and aimed at by the
enemy. There should be no rocks, loose stones, or pebbles on top,
which might be struck by the bullets, splintering and flying, thus
adding greatly to the number of dangerous projectiles, and often
deflecting bullets downward into the trench. A stone wall is a very
dangerous thing to be behind in a fight.

The portion of the ground in rear of the parapet and between the
parapet and the trench not covered by the parapet is to rest the
elbows on when firing, the rifle being rested on top of the parapet.

To obtain head cover in a trench fill a gunny sack or other bag with
sand or soil and place it on top of the parapet, aiming around the
right-hand side of it, or dig a small lateral trench in the parapet,
large enough to hold the rifle. Roof it over with boards, small logs,
or brush, and heap dirt on top, aiming through the small trench or
resulting loophole.

Figure 5 shows the plan of a section of a rifle trench.[10] Between
the portions occupied by each squad there is often placed a mound of
earth as high as the top of the parapet and projecting back into the
trench. This is called a =traverse= and protects the occupants of the
trench from fire from a flank. Bullets from this direction hit a
traverse, instead of flying down into the trench and wounding several
men.

         [Footnote 10: The traverse should be at least 6 feet wide
         instead of 3 feet, as shown in figure 5.]

Trenches are seldom continuous, but are made in sections placed at the
most advantageous points, as shown in figure 6. A company or battalion
may occupy a single section. The firing trenches have cover trenches
in rear of them, where the supports can rest undisturbed by the
hostile fire until they are needed in the firing trench to repel a
serious assault or to take part in a counter attack. Passages
consisting of deep communicating trenches facilitate passage from the
cover trenches to the firing trenches when under fire. These
communicating trenches are usually zigzag or traversed to prevent
their being swept by hostile fire.

When troops are likely to remain in trenches for a considerable time
drainage should be arranged for, and latrines and dressing stations
should be constructed in trenches. Water should be brought into the
trenches and holes excavated in the front wall of the trench for extra
ammunition.

In digging trenches men usually work in reliefs, one relief digging
while the others rest, the proportion of shovelers to pickmen being
about 3 to 1. If a plow can be obtained to turn the sod, it will
greatly facilitate the initial work of digging.

[Illustration: Fig. 1, Fig. 2, Fig. 3, Fig. 4, Fig. 5, Fig. 6, Plate
V.]




CHAPTER VII.

MARCHING AND CAMPING.


=Section 1. Breaking camp and preparation for a march.=

THE EVENING BEFORE THE MARCH.

When a command learns that it is to make a march on the following day,
presumably starting early in the morning, certain details should be
attended to the evening before.

All men should fill their canteens, as there will probably be no time
for this in the morning.

The mess sergeant should find out whether lunch or the reserve ration
will be carried on the march, and should attend to these details in
the evening in order that the issue can be made promptly in the
morning.

The stable sergeant will have the stable detail fill all of the feed
bags for the morning's feed, and the section leaders will see that
each of their men has filled his grain bag with the noon feed for the
following day.

The commander of the guard should be given a memorandum as to what
time to awaken the cooks and where their tent is. The member of the
guard who does this should awaken them without noise, so as not to
disturb the rest of the remainder of the command.

The cooks should be instructed as to what time breakfast is to be
served and what time to awaken the first sergeant.

The cooks or cooks' police must cut and split all firewood for the
morning before 9 p. m. There must be no chopping, talking, or rattling
of pans before reveille which will disturb the rest of the command.
This applies to every morning in camp.


THE MORNING OF THE MARCH.

Cooks arise when called by the guard and start the preparation of
breakfast without noise. The first sergeant and stable sergeant are
usually awakened by one of the cooks about half an hour before
reveille in order that they may complete their toilets and breakfast
early and be able to devote all their time to supervising the details
of the morning's work. If the officers desire to be awakened before
reveille they will notify the first sergeant accordingly.

At first call the men turn out, perform their toilets, strike their
shelter tents (unless it has been directed to await the sounding of
the general for this), and make up their packs. The stable detail
feeds the horses.

At the sounding of assembly immediately after reveille each man must
be in his proper place in ranks, except the kitchen and stable details
who are actually at work. This assembly is under arms. The first
sergeant starts to call the roll or commands "Report" at the last note
of assembly. Arms are stacked before the troop is dismissed.

Breakfast is served to the troop immediately after roll call.
Immediately after breakfast each man will wash his mess kit in the hot
water provided for that purpose at the kitchen and will at once pack
the mess kit in his saddlebags.

The cooks will provide hot water for washing mess kits at the same
time that breakfast is served.

Immediately after breakfast the troop proceeds to the work of breaking
camp and packing in accordance with a prearranged system similar to
the following:

One section assists the cooks in packing the kitchen.

One section strikes and folds the officers' tents and brings them to
the kitchen.

One section fills in the sink. The sink should not be filled in
earlier than is absolutely necessary.

The stable detail police the picket line and vicinity.

One section polices the camp within the company police limits.

One section is available for possible details from regimental
headquarters.

Officers and first sergeant supervise the work.

A permanent assignment of squads to these duties lightens the labor
and decreases the time necessary for breaking camp.

=Boots and saddles= should not be sounded before all of the above work
has been completed, and without confusion. Don't begin the day by
nagging your men, thereby making them "grouchy" during the march.

Always be most careful to groom all parts of your horse that will be
touched by the equipment before you begin to saddle up.

Men should not start from camp thirsty, but should drink all the water
they want immediately after breakfast. All canteens should be filled
before marching.


=Section 2. Marches, camps.=

GENERAL PROVISIONS.

=977.= The successful conduct of a march is one of the surest tests of
the ability and good judgment, not only of the commander, but of all
subordinate officers as well. Certain general principles and some
exact rules are laid down to fit the case of a normal march, but
tactical considerations as well as the condition of roads and weather,
the necessary forage, water and shelter, sanitation, and other
circumstances render a march of any considerable body of mounted
troops one requiring the most unremitting attention to details on the
part of the commander and his subordinates. A successful Cavalry march
whether in peace or war is one that places the men and horses at the
time and place needed in the best possible condition for the service
required. Failure of mounted troops to successfully carry out a
mission is due as a rule to exhaustion or injuries to the horses
rather than to the men.

The training of officers of all grades must be such that solicitude
for the condition of horses on the march is second nature; constant
effort should be made, however severe the work, to stimulate the pride
of the trooper in having and in keeping his mount in fit condition; if
such stimulus is ineffective then the remedy, if the trooper is at
fault, lies in other directions. Under favorable conditions field
service offers the best opportunity for conditioning the horses and
hardening the men.

=978.= =Preparation=: Responsibility for the timely ordering of
necessary preparations preliminary to leaving a permanent camp or
station rests with the commander. All probable needs of the command
for the service on which ordered should be anticipated, instructions
prepared, verified, and issued once in complete form, and no departure
therefrom permitted. The =march order= proper for the actual movement
of the command conforms to the requirements of Field Service
Regulations. =An order or memorandum of service calls= will be issued
and distributed in ample time the night before beginning a march
stating the hour for reville, stables, and breakfast and such other
duties as can reasonably be anticipated.

Except on account of imperative military reasons, Cavalry should not
leave camp for an hour or more after daylight. If grazing is depended
upon, this is especially necessary, since horses as a rule graze more
freely in the early morning when rested. Ample time should be allowed
after reville for grooming and feeding and thereafter for the men to
breakfast. All stable duties should be done quietly and without hurry
or confusion under the immediate supervision of troop and squadron
commanders. In each troop a man is detailed to walk the picket line
while grain is being fed, to look out for the horses generally and to
take off the feed or the nose bag of a horse as soon as he has
finished feeding.

The signals for striking tents (=the general=), for policing,
saddling, and beginning the march should be ordered personally by the
commanding officer and only when the duties pertaining to the previous
signal are completed.

=979.= =The march, its length and rate=: The average daily march of a
Cavalry column of the size of a squadron, or larger, is about 25 miles
when horses are in condition; when starting on long-distance marches
the rate per day for the first few days should be less than 20 miles
and gradually increased. These rules may necessarily be modified, even
when horses are not in fit condition, by reason of emergencies,
character of roads or weather, proximity of water, grazing, etc., but,
with these exceptions, the question of the =length= of the daily march
is one of good judgment and experience on the part of the commander.
The =gait= and =pace= of the daily march are influenced by both the
time the horse is to carry the load and the distance to be covered.
The quicker a march can be completed without forcing the less the
fatigue to both horse and man. Where the footing is good, the road
level, and other considerations do not hamper the column, after the
first or a subsequent halt, may advance first by leading dismounted,
then mount and walk, then trot, a short gallop (exceptional), then the
trot, followed by the walk to the next halt. No gait is to be
maintained continuously long enough to weary either horse or man,
neither must it be changed too frequently in long columns; but
whatever pace or gait is taken it should conform to the standards
(par. 279). The officer setting the pace should occasionally drop back
to observe its effect on the column, and veterinarians, if present,
should be habitually utilized for this purpose.

The walk, if the footing is good, should be at the rate of 4 miles per
hour, exclusive of halts; the trot at 8 miles per hour, so as to
facilitate posting; the gallop, a very exceptional gait even for small
commands, should be not faster than the maneuvering gallop (par. 236),
and its practicability will depend upon the training and condition of
the horses, since on long marches, unless accustomed to this gait with
packed saddles, the horses will soon break down.

Very rarely, however, will the conditions allow the regular
arrangement of gaits indicated above. Rolling country, with ascents
and descents, stretches of hard or stony road or of mud, dust, or
sand, crossings of streams, etc., will ordinarily impose corresponding
changes of gait or pace on each of the small elements of the column as
it reaches them. To provide for this the troops in route column, when
so directed, take greater distances than prescribed in order to allow
for closing up at checks.

The commander must give this matter unremitting attention, since
normal route-order distances in column frequently entail discomfort to
the men and sometimes injuries to the horses which might have been
avoided.

Unless under exceptional circumstances, the commander of a marching
column will authorize each troop commander to so regulate the gait and
pace of his troop as to conform to that next in front, the gait and
pace of the leading troop being regulated by the commander himself.
This results in each troop changing to the trot, walk, leading
dismounted, etc., at the same place at which the leading troop did,
and although regulation distances, are frequently exceeded, the
tendency on all stretches of good road is to close on the leading
troop of the column. With care this method of marching should result
in enabling each troop in the column to move with almost the same
regularity and freedom from checks as though it were in the lead.

The fast rate of march that can be expected of small detachments and
of single riders can not be demanded of a long Cavalry column, and as
the command increases in size the rate of march will decrease. The
regulation gaits being, at the walk, 4 miles, the trot, 8 miles,
Cavalry should be able to make, including halts, 5 miles per hour or
better. This rate can be maintained for daily marches of 25 miles
under ordinary conditions for a week at a time, after which a day of
rest should be allowed before continuing the march.

=980.= =Formations=: The habitual formation for marches is route order
in column of fours (par. 754). When the roads are unsuitable or the
command is small, column of twos or troopers is permissible. To
economize road space in large commands =double column= or parallel
columns should be used if practicable. Squadrons in regiment and
troops in squadrons alternate in leading, the rule being that the one
in front one day automatically follows in rear the next day.

=981.= =Halts=: The first half hour of a march should be made at a
walk and the first halt of 10 or 15 minutes toward the end of the
first hour after starting; it should, if possible, be preceded by a
short trot in order to make apparent any faulty adjustment of
equipment. This halt gives an opportunity for the horses to stale and
for the troopers to attend to the calls of nature, to tighten girths,
and to adjust saddles, equipment, and clothing.

Other halts of 5 to 10 minutes should be made at hourly intervals,
and, if the march is to be prolonged into the afternoon, a longer halt
should be made at noon, when girths are loosened, bridles removed,
horses fed, and the men eat their lunches.

=An invariable rule on the march and in camp is to have all troopers
dismount promptly on halting; in other words, never to permit a man
to sit a moment in the saddle while his horse is standing still, and
under no circumstances to lounge in the saddle.=

=982.= =Watering=: On the march horses should be watered whenever
opportunity occurs, conforming as far as practicable to the rule of
watering before feeding and of removing the bit when by so doing the
horse can drink more freely, as when the stream or watering place is
shallow. Public watering troughs should ordinarily be avoided on
account of danger from infection. The use of buckets or of portable,
collapsible canvas watering troughs (articles of issue) will often
make watering places otherwise insufficient thoroughly satisfactory.
On the march and in camp watering is always done under supervision of
an officer.

=983.= =Feeding=: In time of peace when a regular supply of grain and
long forage can be counted on, effort should be made to follow, as far
as practicable, the routine to which horses have been accustomed in
garrison. In time of war regularity of supply of forage, and
especially of the long forage, can not be expected, and officers must
neglect no opportunity of anticipating the needs of their animals when
passing grain fields, pastures, or stacks of hay and other fodder. A
supply for the night can often be gathered and carried along on the
wagons or it may be tied up compactly with the lariat and carried on
the horse.

The trooper with habitual solicitude for his mount will, if permitted,
be prompt to remove the bits to let his horse graze (facing the wind
in hot weather) at every delay or check, and he will miss no chance to
pick up an extra feed of grain.

=984.= =Camps= (_see also_ =Care of Troops=, F. S. R.): The ground
being suitable, a troop encamps in line, with first sergeant's cook
and officers' tents on one flank, the men's sink on the other, and
with picket line 15 yards in front of and parallel to the men's tents,
the open ends of the tents toward the picket line. A squadron or
regiment encamps in column of troops as above, but with picket lines
on the flank of the column on the side opposite the cook and officers'
tents, each in prolongation of its own company street. Intervals and
distances should approximate those of the normal semipermanent camps
(F. S. R.), if space is available. For a shelter-tent camp in column
of troops with picket lines stretched between the rows of tents the
guidons which mark first sergeants' tents should not be less than 15
yards apart. The squadron or regiment may encamp in line similarly to
the troop if the ground is more favorable for such form of camp, but
ordinarily they encamp in column of troops with picket lines between
the rows of tents.

=985.= =On nearing the end of a day's march, the regimental commander
will send his adjutant and supply officer ahead to locate the camp and
provide for the arrival of the column=: On approaching the camping
place, squadron adjutants and the guidon of each troop will be
summoned by the colonel's bugler sounding =adjutant's call= followed
by guidons (or otherwise according to circumstances). At these calls
each squadron adjutant followed by the guidons of his squadron will
move rapidly to the front and will join the regimental adjutant, who
indicates to each the ground which his squadron is to occupy. If the
available ground is sufficient to encamp the entire regiment as
prescribed in the Field Service Regulations, the regimental adjutant
causes the guidons to be aligned and planted at the prescribed
intervals, thereby marking the first sergeant's tent on the flank of
each troop, otherwise each squadron adjutant has the guidons of his
squadron so placed on the ground allotted to his squadron as to
conform, as nearly as conditions will permit, to the normal camp,
having in view the comfort of horses and men and convenience to
supplies. The object in marking off the camp as prescribed, by
establishing the guidons before the arrival of the column, is to
relieve the horse of his rider and pack as soon as possible. To
further minimize delay, commanding officers, =unless under exceptional
circumstances=, will, immediately on reaching the ground, direct
majors to dismiss their squadrons and have their troop commanders
proceed directly to their guidons, dismount at once, and pitch camp.

The foregoing principles will also, in so far as applicable, be
enforced by commanders of all units smaller than the regiment.

The regimental supply officer has the drivers of the baggage section
of the regimental train go direct to their proper troops and unhitch.
Ordinarily, for convenience in a one-night camp or bivouac the wagons
of the baggage section are left between the cook tents and the troop
officers' tents, the supply section being parked outside by itself.
After arrival at the camping place a guard is at once placed over the
source of supply of drinking water.

Before pitching tents the rifles are stacked, sabers, rolls, saddle
bags, and lariats removed from the saddles, girths loosened (the
saddles being left on until backs are cooled), and the horses either
linked by section, in circle (par. 428), or coupled head and tail
(par. 427), and a man detailed to watch them until tents are pitched.

After pitching tents, stacks are broken, rifles placed in the tents,
horses unsaddled, unbridled, and tied on the line or herded, saddles
placed in a row in front of the tents and saddle blankets spread on
them to dry, fuel secured, sinks dug, and other necessary preparations
made for the night. The use of saddle blankets as bedding by the men
will be permitted only under very exceptional conditions, and special
care must be exercised to keep them free from dirt and burs. During
evening stables, troop commanders, accompanied, if practicable, by a
veterinarian, inspect the backs and feet of their horses, and in the
morning they permit no trooper who is not specially authorized, to
saddle his horse before the call =boots and saddles=, or to mount
before the command for so doing.

=986.= =Herding=: In a hostile country camps should be selected, if
possible, where grazing is good and beyond rifle range of cover for an
enemy. Orders are issued as to places of assembly, and in each troop
men are detailed beforehand to go among the horses and quiet them in
case of a night alarm. In the event of a stampede, men should mount
the fastest animals within reach, ride ahead of the herd, and lead it
back to camp. Sometimes the sounding of stable and water call will
prevent or check a stampede.

In case it is necessary to graze the horses in an enemy's country,
they are sent out to herd under charge of an officer as soon as
possible after making camp, they being taken during daylight as far
away as is safe so as to keep the grass nearer camp for the night.

=987.= =Forced and night marches=: To conduct a rapid march of a
command of any magnitude successfully, horses must be =in condition=
(pars. 950, 959) and men must have been trained (par. 175); if either
is lacking, the daily marches at first must be short.

A night march, being slow and fatiguing to horses and men, is seldom
undertaken unless as a forced march to seize a position or to surprise
an enemy by attacking him at dawn. In a forced march frequently the
gait, if the footing is favorable, and always the number of hours in
the saddle, are increased. Under favorable conditions a rate of 50
miles in 24 hours for three or four days can be maintained. During
such a march, in addition to the usual hourly halts, a halt of 2 hours
is made toward the end of the first half of each day's march, during
which bits are removed, horses unsaddled, watered, fed, and their legs
hand rubbed; the rate should be about 5 miles an hour, exclusive of
halts.

Under very favorable conditions a single march of 100 miles can be
made in from 24 to 30 hours. During a march of this character, in
addition to the usual hourly halts, halts of 2 hours are made toward
the end of the first and second thirds of the march, during which bits
are removed, the horses unsaddled, watered, fed, and their legs hand
rubbed; the rate of march should be from 5 to 6 miles an hour,
exclusive of halts.




CHAPTER VIII.

TARGET PRACTICE.


=Section 1. Preliminary training in marksmanship.=

Effective rifle fire is generally what counts most in battle. To have
effective rifle fire, the men on the firing line must be able to HIT
what they are ordered to shoot at. There is no man who can not be
taught how to shoot. It is not necessary or even desirable to begin
instruction by firing on a rifle range. A perfectly green recruit who
has never fired a rifle may be made into a good shot by a little
instruction and some preliminary drills and exercises.

Before a man goes on the range to fire it is absolutely necessary that
he should know--

  1. How to set the rear sight.
  2. How to sight or aim.
  3. How to squeeze the trigger.
  4. How to hold the rifle in all positions.

If he does not know these things it is worse than useless for him to
fire. He will not improve; the more he shoots the worse he will shoot,
and it will become more difficult to teach him.


=Section 2. Sight adjustment.=

Men must be able to adjust their sights correctly and quickly. An
error in adjustment so small that one can scarcely see it on the sight
leaf is sufficient to cause a miss at an enemy at 500 yards and over.

Notice your rear sight. When the leaf is laid down the =battle sight=
appears on top. This sight is set for 547 yards and is not adjustable.
When the leaf is raised four sights come into view. The extreme range
sight for 2,850 yards at the top of the leaf is seldom used. The open
sight at the upper edge of the drift slide is adjustable from 1,400 to
2,750 yards. To set it the upper edge of the slide is made to
correspond with the range reading on the leaf, and the slide is then
clamped with the slide screw. This sight also is seldom used. The open
sight at the bottom of the triangular opening in the drift slide is
adjustable from 100 to 2,450 yards. To set it the index line at the
lower corners of the triangle is set opposite the range graduation on
the leaf and the slide clamped. This and the peep sight just below it
are the sights most commonly used. To set the peep sight, the index
lines on either side of the peephole are set opposite the range
desired and the slide clamped.

Notice the scales for the various ranges on either side of the face of
the leaf. The odd-numbered hundreds of yards are on the right and the
even on the left. =The line below the number is the index line for
that range.= Thus to set the sight for 500 yards the index line of the
slide is brought in exact line with the line on the leaf below the
figure 5 and the slide clamped. To set for 550 yards the index lines
of the slide are set halfway between the index lines on the leaf below
the figure 5 on the right side and the figure 6 on the left side. Look
at your sight carefully when setting it and take great pains to get it
exact. An error in setting the width of one of the lines on the leaf
will cause an error of about 8 inches in where your bullet will strike
at 500 yards.

The =wind gauge= is adjusted by means of the windage screw at the
right front end of the base of the sight. Each graduation on the
wind-gauge scale is called a "point." For convenience in adjusting the
line of each third point on the scale is longer than the others. If
you turn the windage screw so that the movable base moves to the
right, you are taking right windage, which will cause your rifle to
shoot more to the right.

It is seldom that a rifle will shoot correctly to the point aimed at
at a given range with the sights adjusted exactly to the scale
graduations for that range. If your sight is not correctly adjusted
for your shooting and you wish to move it slightly to make it correct,
remember to =move it in the direction you wish your shot to hit=. If
you wish to shoot higher raise your sight. If to the right, move the
wind gauge to the right. Always move your sight the correct amount in
accordance with the following table:


=Section 3. Table of sight corrections.=

_Showing to what extent the point of impact is moved by a change of 25
yards in elevation or 1 point in windage._

  +--------+--------------+-------------+
  |        | Correction   | Correction  |
  | Range. | by a change  | by a change |
  |        | in elevation | in windage  |
  |        | of 25 yards. | of 1 point. |
  +--------+--------------+-------------+
  |        |              |             |
  |_Yards._|   _Inches._  |  _Inches._  |
  |   100  |     0.72     |      4      |
  |   200  |     1.62     |      8      |
  |   300  |     2.79     |     12      |
  |   400  |     4.29     |     16      |
  |   500  |     6.22     |     20      |
  |   600  |     8.59     |     24      |
  |   800  |    15.43     |     32      |
  | 1,000  |    25.08     |     40      |
  +--------+--------------+-------------+

An easy rule to remember the windage correction by is: "A change of 1
point of wind changes the point of impact 4 inches for every 100 yards
of range."

Copy this table and take it to the range with you.

Example of sight adjustment: Suppose you are firing at 500 yards. The
first two or three shots show you that your shots are hitting about a
foot below and a foot to the right of the center of the bull's-eye.
From the above table you will see that if you will raise your sight 50
yards and move the wind gauge half a point to the left the rifle will
be sighted so that if you aim correctly the bullets will hit well
inside the bull's-eye.


=Section 4. Aiming.=

=Open sight=: Always align your sights with the front sight squarely
in the middle of the "U" or notch of the rear sight, and the top of
the front sight even with the upper corners of the "U." (See fig. 1.)
All the sights on the rifle except the peep sight are open sights.

[Illustration: FIGURE 1.]

=Peep sight=: Always center the tip of the front sight in the center
of the peephole when aiming with this sight. (See fig. 2.)

[Illustration: FIGURE 2.]

Always aim below the bull's-eye. Never let your front sight appear to
touch the bull's eye in aiming. Try to see the same amount of white
target between the top of the front sight and the bottom of the
bull's-eye each time. The eye must be focused on the bull's-eye or
mark and not on the front or rear sight.

Look at figures 1 and 2 until your eye retains the memory of them,
then try to duplicate the picture every time you aim. Aim
consistently, always the same. Never change your aim; change your
sight adjustment if your shots are not hitting in the right place.
Many shots have been wasted when the point of aim has been moved to
what the firer thought was the necessary change on the target, instead
of changing the sights according to the table on page 191.


=Section 5. Battle sight.=

The battle sight is the open sight seen when the leaf is laid flat. It
is adjusted for a range of 547 yards. It is intended to be used in
battle when you get nearer to the enemy than 600 yards. Always aim at
the belt of a standing enemy, or just below him if he is kneeling,
sitting, or lying. On the target range this sight is used for rapid
fire. With it the rifle shoots about 2 feet high at ranges between 200
and 400 yards, so you must aim below the figure on the target "D."
Find out in your instruction practice just how much you must aim below
to hit the figure.


=Section 6. Trigger squeeze.=

Use the first joint of the forefinger to squeeze the trigger. It is
the most sensitive and best controlled portion of the body. As you
place the rifle to your shoulder, squeeze the trigger so as to pull it
back about one-eighth of an inch, thus taking up the safety portion or
slack of the pull. Then contract the trigger finger gradually, slowly
and steadily increasing the pressure on the trigger while the aim is
being perfected. Continue the gradual increase of pressure so that
when the aim has become exact the additional pressure required to
release the point of the sear can be given almost insensibly and
without causing any deflection of the rifle. Put absolutely all your
mind and will power into holding the rifle steady and squeezing the
trigger off without disturbing the aim. Practice squeezing the trigger
in this way every time you have your rifle in your hand until you can
surely and quickly do it without a suspicion of a jerk.

By practice the soldier becomes familiar with the trigger squeeze of
his rifle, and knowing this he is able to judge at any time, within
limits, what additional pressure is required for its discharge. By
constant repetition of this exercise he should be able finally to
squeeze the trigger to a certain point beyond which the slightest
movement will release the sear. Having squeezed the trigger to this
point the aim is corrected, and when true the additional pressure is
applied and the discharge follows and the bullet flies true to the
mark.


=Section 7. Firing positions.=

When in ranks at close order the positions are those described in the
Cavalry Drill Regulations. When in extended order or when firing alone
these positions may be modified somewhat to better suit the
individual. The following remarks on the various positions are offered
as suggestions whereby steady positions may be learned by the soldier.

=Standing position=: Face the target, then execute right half face.
Plant the feet about 12 inches apart. As you raise the rifle to the
shoulder lean very slightly backward just enough to preserve the
perfect balance on both feet which the raising of the rifle has
somewhat disturbed. Do not lean far back and do not lean forward at
all. If your body is out of balance, it will be under strain and you
will tremble. The right elbow should be at about the height of the
shoulder. The left hand should grasp well around the stock and
handguard in front of the rear sight, and the left elbow should be
almost directly under the rifle. The right hand should do more than
half the work of holding the rifle up and against the shoulder, the
left hand only steadying and guiding the piece. Do not try to meet the
recoil; let the whole body move back with it. Do not be afraid to
press the jaw hard against the stock; this steadies the position, and
the head goes back with the recoil and insures that your face is not
hurt.

=Kneeling position=: Assume the position very much as described in the
Cavalry Drill Regulations. Sit on the right heel. The right knee
should point directly to the right; that is, along the firing line.
The point of the left elbow should rest over the left knee. There is a
flat place under the elbow which fits a flat place on the knee and
makes a solid rest. Lean the body well forward. This position is
uncomfortable until practiced, when it quickly ceases to be
uncomfortable.

=Sitting position=: Sit down half faced to the right, feet from 6 to 8
inches apart, knees bent, right knee slightly higher than the left,
left leg pointed toward the target. Rest both elbows on the knees,
hands grasping the piece the same as in the prone position. This is a
very steady position, particularly if holes can be found or made in
the ground for the heels.

=Prone position and use of the gun sling=: To adjust the sling for
firing, unhook the straight strap of the sling and let it out as far
as it will go. Adjust the loop so that when stretched along the bottom
of the stock its rear end (bight) comes about opposite the comb of the
stock. A small man needs a longer loop than a tall man. Lie down
facing at an angle of about 60 deg. to the right of the direction of the
target. Spread the legs as wide apart as they will go with comfort.
Thrust the left arm through between the rifle and the sling, and then
back through the loop of the sling, securing the loop, by means of the
keeper, around the upper left arm as high up as it will go. Pass the
hand under and then over the sling from the left side, and grasp the
stock and handguard just in rear of the lower band. Raise the right
elbow off the ground, rolling slightly over on the left side. Place
the butt to the shoulder and roll back into position, clamping the
rifle hard and steady in the firing position. The rifle should rest
deep down in the palm of the left hand with fingers almost around the
handguard. Shift the left palm a little to the right or left until the
rifle stands perfectly upright (no cant) without effort. The left
elbow should rest on the ground directly under the rifle, and right
elbow on the ground about 5 inches to the right of a point directly
under the stock. In this position the loop of the sling, starting at
the lower band, passes to the right of the left wrist, and thence
around the left upper arm. The loop should be so tight that about 50
pounds tension is placed on it when the position is assumed. This
position is uncomfortable until practiced, when it quickly ceases to
be uncomfortable. It will be steadier if small holes can be found or
dug in the ground for the elbows. In this position the sling binds the
left forearm to the rifle and to the ground so that it forms a dead
rest for the rifle, with a universal joint, the wrist, at its upper
end. Also the rifle is so bound to the shoulder that the recoil is not
felt at all. This is the steadiest of all firing positions.

The gun sling can also be used in this manner with advantage in the
other positions.


=Section 8. Calling the shot.=

It is evident that the sights should be so adjusted at each range that
the rifle will hit where you aim. In order to determine that the
sights are so adjusted, it is necessary that you shall know each time
just where you were aiming on the target at the instant your rifle was
discharged. If you know this and your rifle hits this point, your
rifle is correctly sighted. If your shot does not hit near this point,
you should change your sight adjustment in accordance with the table
of sight corrections on page 191.

No man can hold absolutely steady. The rifle trembles slightly, and
the sights seem to wabble and move over the target. You try to squeeze
off the last ounce of the trigger squeeze just as the sights move to
the desired alignment under the bull's-eye. At this instant, just
before the recoil blots out a view of the sights and target, you
should catch with your eye a picture, as it were, of just where on the
target your sights were aligned, and call to yourself or to the coach
this point. This point is where your shot should strike if your sights
are correctly adjusted and if you have squeezed the trigger without
disturbing your aim. Until a man can call his shots he is not a good
shot, for he can never tell if his rifle is sighted right or not, or
if a certain shot is a good one or only the result of luck.


=Section 9. Coordination.=

Good marksmanship consists in learning thoroughly the details of--

  Holding the rifle in the various positions.
  Aiming.
  Squeezing the trigger.
  Calling the shot.
  Adjusting the sights.

And when these have been mastered in detail then the coordination of
them in the act of firing. This coordination consists in putting
absolutely all of one's will power into an effort to hold the rifle
steadily, especially in getting it to steady down when the aim is
perfected; in getting the trigger squeezed off easily at the instant
the rifle is steadiest and the aim perfected; in calling the shot at
this instant; and if the shot does not hit near the point called, then
in adjusting the sights the correct amount so that the rifle will be
sighted to hit where you aim.


=Section 10. Advice to riflemen.=

Before going to the range clean the rifle carefully, removing every
trace of oil from the bore. This can best be done with a rag saturated
with gasoline. Put a light coat of oil on the bolt and cams. Blacken
the front and rear sights with smoke from a burning candle or camphor
or with liquid sight black.

Look through the bore and see that there is no obstruction in it.

Keep the rifle off the ground; the stock may absorb dampness, the
sights may be injured, or the muzzle filled with dirt.

Watch your hold carefully and be sure to know where the line of sight
is at discharge. It is only in this way that the habit of calling
shots, which is essential to good shooting, can be acquired.

Study the conditions, adjust the sling, and set the sight before going
to the firing point.

Look at the sight adjustment before each shot and see that it has not
changed.

If sure of your hold and if the hit is not as called, determine and
make FULL correction in elevation and windage to put the next shot in
the bull's-eye.

Keep a written record of the weather conditions and the corresponding
elevation and windage for each day's firing.

Less elevation will generally be required on hot days; on wet days; in
a bright sunlight; with a 6 o'clock wind; or with a cold barrel.

More elevation will generally be required on cold days; on very dry
days; with a 12 o'clock wind; with a hot barrel; in a dull or cloudy
light.

The upper band should not be tight enough to bind the barrel.

Do not put a cartridge into the chamber until ready to fire. Do not
place cartridges in the sun. They will get hot and shoot high.

Do not rub the eyes--especially the sighting eye.

In cold weather warm the trigger hand before shooting.

After shooting, clean the rifle carefully and then oil it to prevent
rust.

Have a strong, clean cloth that will not tear and jam, properly cut to
size, for use in cleaning.

Always clean the rifle from the breech, using a brass cleaning rod
when available. An injury to the rifling at the muzzle causes the
piece to shoot very irregularly.

Regular physical exercise, taken systematically, will cause a marked
improvement in shooting.

Frequent practice of the "Position and aiming drills" and gallery
practice are of the greatest help in preparing for shooting on the
range.

=Rapid firing=: Success in rapid firing depends upon catching a quick
and accurate aim, holding the piece firmly and evenly, and in
squeezing the trigger without a jerk.

In order to give as much time as possible for aiming accurately, the
soldier must practice taking position, loading with the clip, and
working the bolt, so that no time will be lost in these operations.
With constant practice all these movements may be made quickly and
without false motions.

When the bolt handle is raised, it must be done with enough force to
start the shell from the chamber; and when the bolt is pulled back it
must be with sufficient force to throw the empty shell well away from
the chamber and far enough to engage the next cartridge.

In loading, use force enough to load each cartridge with one motion.

The aim must be caught quickly, and, once caught, must be held and the
trigger squeezed steadily. Rapid firing, as far as holding, aim, and
squeezing the trigger are concerned, should be done with all the
precision of slow fire. The gain in time should be in getting ready to
fire, loading, and working the bolt.

=Firing with rests=: In order that the shooting may be uniform the
piece should always be rested at the same point.


=Section 11. The course in small-arms firing.=

The course in small-arms firing consists of--

  (_a_) Nomenclature and care of rifle.
  (_b_) Sighting drills.
  (_c_) Position and aiming drills.
  (_d_) Deflection and elevation correction drills.
  (_e_) Gallery practice.
  (_f_) Estimating distance drill.
  (_g_) Individual known-distance firing, instruction practice.
  (_h_) Individual known-distance firing, record practice.
  (_i_) Long-distance practice.
  (_j_) Practice with telescopic sights.
  (_k_) Instruction combat practice.
  (_l_) Combat practice.
  (_m_) Proficiency test.

The regulations governing these are found in Small Arms Firing Manual,
1913. There should be several copies of this manual in every troop.


=Section 12. Targets.=

The accompanying plates show the details and size of the targets:

[Illustration: TARGET A, TARGET B, TARGET C, TARGET D.]


=Section 13. Pistol and revolver practice.[11]=

         [Footnote 11: Whenever in these regulations the word "pistol"
         appears the regulation applies with equal force to the
         revolver, if applicable to that weapon.]

=135.=[12] =Nomenclature and care of the weapon; handling and
precautions against accidents.=--The soldier will first be taught the
nomenclature of those parts of the weapon necessary to an
understanding of its action and use and the proper measures for its
care and preservation. Ordnance pamphlets Nos. 1866 (description of
the Colt's automatic pistol), 1919, and 1927 (descriptions of the
Colt's revolver, calibers .38 and .45, respectively), contain full
information on this subject, and are furnished to organizations armed
with these weapons.

         [Footnote 12: The numbers refer to paragraphs in the Small
         Arms Firing Manual, 1913.]

Careless handling of the pistol or revolver is the cause of many
accidents and results in broken parts of the mechanism. The following
rules will, if followed, prevent much trouble of this character:

(_a_) On taking the =pistol= from the armrack or holster, take out the
magazine and see that it is empty before replacing it; then draw back
the slide and make sure that the piece is unloaded. Observe the same
precaution after practice on the target range, and again before
replacing the pistol in the holster or in the armrack. When taking the
=revolver= from the armrack or holster and before returning it to the
same, open the cylinder and eject empty shells and cartridges. Before
beginning a drill and upon arriving on the range observe the same
precaution.

(_b_) Neither load nor unlock the weapon until the moment of firing,
nor until a run in the mounted course is started.

(_c_) Always keep the pistol or revolver in the position of "Raise
pistol" (par. 147, Cavalry Drill Regulations, 1916), except when it is
pointed at the target. (The position of "Lower pistol" is authorized
for mounted firing only.)

(_d_) Do not place the weapon on the ground where sand or earth can
enter the bore or mechanism.

(_e_) Before loading the =pistol=, draw back the slide and look
through the bore to see that it is free from obstruction. Before
loading the =revolver=, open the cylinder and look through the bore to
see that it is free from obstruction. When loading the =pistol= for
target practice place five cartridges in the magazine and insert the
magazine in the handle; draw back the slide and insert the first
cartridge in the chamber and carefully lock the hammer.

In loading the =revolver= place five cartridges in the cylinder and
let the hammer down on the =empty chamber=.

(_f_) Whenever the pistol is being =loaded= or =unloaded=, the muzzle
=must be kept up=.

(_g_) Do not point the weapon in any direction where an accidental
discharge might do harm.

(_h_) After loading do not cock the revolver or unlock the pistol
until ready to fire.

(_i_) Keep the working parts properly lubricated.

=136.= =Position, dismounted=: Stand firmly on both feet, body
perfectly balanced and erect and turned at such an angle as is most
comfortable when the arm is extended toward the target; the feet far
enough apart to insure firmness and steadiness of position (about 8 to
10 inches); weight of body borne equally upon both feet; right arm
fully extended, left arm hanging naturally.

REMARKS.--The right arm may be slightly bent, although the difficulty
of holding the pistol uniformly and of keeping it as well as the
forearm in the same vertical plane makes this objectionable.

=137.= =The grip=: Grasp the stock as high as possible with the thumb
and last three fingers, the forefinger alongside the trigger guard,
the thumb extended along the stock. The barrel, hand, and forearm
should be as nearly in one line as possible when the weapon is pointed
toward the target. The grasp should not be so tight as to cause
tremors of the hand or arm to be communicated to the weapon, but
should be firm enough to avoid losing the grip when the recoil takes
place.

REMARKS.--The force of recoil of the pistol or revolver is exerted in
a line above the hand which grasps the stock. The lower the stock is
grasped the greater will be the movement or "jump" of the muzzle
caused by the recoil. This not only results in a severe strain upon
the wrist but in loss of accuracy.

If the hand be placed so that the grasp is on one side of the stock,
the recoil will cause a rotary movement of the weapon toward the
opposite side.

The releasing of the sear causes a slight movement of the muzzle,
generally to the left. The position of the thumb along the stock
overcomes much of this movement. The soldier should be encouraged to
practice this method of holding until it becomes natural.

To do uniform shooting the weapon must be held with exactly the same
grip for each shot. Not only must the hand grasp the stock at the same
point for each shot, but the tension of the grip must be uniform.

=138.= (_a_) =The trigger squeeze=: The trigger must be squeezed in
the same manner as in rifle firing. (See p. 193.) The pressure of the
forefinger on the trigger should be steadily increased and should be
straight back, not sideways. The pressure should continue to that
point beyond which the slightest movement will release the sear. Then,
when the aim is true, the additional pressure is applied and the
pistol fired.

Only by much practice can the soldier become familiar with the trigger
squeeze. This is essential to accurate shooting. It is the most
important detail to master in pistol or revolver shooting.

(_b_) =Self-cocking action.=--The force required to squeeze the
trigger of the revolver when the self-cocking device is used is
considerably greater than with the single action. To accustom a
soldier to the use of the self-cocking mechanism, and also to
strengthen and develop the muscles of the hand, a few minutes'
practice daily in holding the unloaded revolver on a mark and snapping
it, using the self-cocking mechanism, is recommended. The use of the
self-cocking device in firing is not recommended except in emergency.
By practice in cocking the revolver the soldier can become
sufficiently expert to fire very rapidly, using single action, while
his accuracy will be greater than when using double action.

=139.= =Aiming.=--Except when delivering rapid or quick fire, the rear
and front sights of the pistol are used in the same manner as the
rifle sights. The normal sight is habitually used (see Pl. VI), and
the line of sight is directed upon a point just under the bull's-eye
at "6 o'clock." The front sight must be seen through the middle of the
rear-sight notch, the top being on a line with the top of the notch.
Care must be taken not to cant the pistol to either side.[13]

         [Footnote 13: The instructor should take cognizance of the
         fact that the proper aiming point is often affected by the
         personal and fixed peculiarities of the firer, and if unable
         to correct such abnormalities permit firer to direct sight at
         such point as promises effective results.]

If the principles of aiming have not been taught, the soldier's
instruction will begin with sighting drills as prescribed for the
rifle so far as they may be applicable. The sighting bar with open
sight will be used to teach the normal sight and to demonstrate errors
likely to be committed.

To construct a sighting rest for the pistol (see Pl. VI) take a piece
of wood about 10 inches long, 1-1/4 inches wide, and 9/16 inch thick.
Shape one end so that it will fit snugly in the handle of the pistol
when the magazine has been removed. Screw or nail this stick to the
top of a post or other object at such an angle that the pistol when
placed on the stick will be approximately horizontal. A suitable
sighting rest for the revolver may be easily improvised.

=140.= (_a_) =How to cock the pistol.=--The pistol should be cocked by
the thumb of the right hand and with the least possible derangement of
the grip. The forefinger should be clear of the trigger when cocking
the pistol. Some men have difficulty at first in cocking the pistol
with the right thumb. This can be overcome by a little practice.
Jerking the pistol forward while holding the thumb on the hammer will
not be permitted.

(_b_) =How to cock the revolver=: The revolver should be cocked by
putting the thumb on the hammer at as nearly a right angle to the
hammer as possible, and by the action of the thumb muscles alone
bringing the hammer back to the position of full cock. Some men with
large hands are able to cock the revolver with the thumb while holding
it in the position of aim or raise pistol. Where the soldier's hand is
small this can not be done, and in this case it assists the operation
to give the revolver a slight tilt to the right and upward (to the
right). Particular care should be taken that the forefinger is clear
of the trigger or the cylinder will not revolve. Jerking the revolver
forward while holding the thumb on the hammer will not be permitted.

=141.= =Position, and aiming drills, dismounted=: For this instruction
the squad will be formed with an interval of 1 pace between files.
Black pasters to simulate bull's-eyes will be pasted opposite each man
on the barrack or other wall, from which the squad is 10 paces
distant.

The squad being formed as described above, the instructor gives the
command: 1. =Raise=, 2. =Pistol= (par. 147, Cavalry Drill
Regulations), and cautions, "=Position and aiming drill, dismounted.="
The men take the positions described in paragraph 136, except that
the pistol is held at "Raise pistol."

[Illustration: PLATE VI.]

The instructor cautions, "Trigger squeeze exercise." At the command
=READY=, cock the weapon as described in paragraph 140. At the
command, 1. =Squad=, 2. =FIRE=, slowly extend the arm till it is
nearly horizontal, the pistol directed at a point about 6 inches below
the bull's-eye. At the same time put the forefinger inside the trigger
guard and gradually "feel" the trigger. Inhale enough air to
comfortably fill the lungs and gradually raise the piece until the
line of sight is directed at the point of aim, i. e., just below the
bull's-eye at 6 o'clock. While the sights are directed upon the mark,
gradually increase the pressure on the trigger until it reaches that
point where the slightest additional pressure will release the sear.
Then, when the aim is true, the additional pressure necessary to fire
the piece is given so smoothly as not to derange the alignment of the
sights. The weapon will be held on the mark for an instant after the
hammer falls and the soldier will observe what effect, if any, the
squeezing of the trigger has had on his aim.

It is impossible to hold the arm perfectly still, but each time the
line of sight is directed on the point of aim a slight additional
pressure is applied to the trigger until the piece is finally
discharged at one of the moments when the sights are correctly aligned
upon the mark.

When the soldier has become proficient in taking the proper position,
the trigger squeeze should be executed at will. The instructor
prefaces the preparatory command by "At will" and give the command
=HALT= at the conclusion of the exercise, when the soldier will return
to the position of "Raise pistol."

At first this exercise should be executed with deliberation, but
gradually the soldier will be taught to catch the aim quickly and to
lose no time in beginning the trigger squeeze and bringing it to the
point where the slightest additional pressure will release the sear.

REMARKS.--In service few opportunities will be offered for slow aimed
fire with the pistol or revolver, although use will be made of the
weapon under circumstances when accurate pointing and rapid
manipulation are of vital importance.

In delivering a rapid fire, the soldier must keep his eyes fixed upon
the mark and, after each shot, begin a steadily increasing pressure on
the trigger, trying at the same time to get the sights as nearly on
the mark as possible before the hammer again falls. The great
difficulty in quick firing with the pistol lies in the fact that when
the front sight is brought upon the mark the rear sight is often found
to be outside the line joining the eye with the mark. This tendency to
hold the pistol obliquely can be overcome only by a uniform manner of
holding and pointing. This uniformity is to be attained only by
acquiring a grip which can be taken with certainty each time the
weapon is fired. It is this circumstance which makes the position and
aiming drills so important. The soldier should constantly practice
pointing the pistol until he acquires the ability to direct it on the
mark in the briefest interval of time and practically without the aid
of sights.

The soldier then repeats the exercises with the pistol in the left
hand, the left side being turned toward the target.

=142.= =To draw and fire quickly--Snap shooting.=--With the squad
formed as described in paragraph 141 except that the pistol is in the
holster and the flap, if any, buttoned, the instructor cautions
"Quick-fire exercise." And gives the command, 1. =SQUAD=, 2. =FIRE.=
At this command each soldier, keeping his eye on the target, quickly
draws his pistol, unlocks it, thrusts it toward the target, squeezes
the trigger, and at the instant the weapon is brought in line with the
eye and the objective increases the pressure, releasing the sear. To
enable the soldier to note errors in pointing, the weapon will be
momentarily held in position after the fall of the hammer. Efforts at
deliberate aiming in this exercise must be discouraged.

Remarks under paragraph 141 are specially applicable also to this type
of fire. When the soldier has become proficient in the details of this
exercise, it should be repeated at will; the instructor cautions, "At
will; quick-fire exercise." The exercise should be practiced until the
mind, the eye, and trigger finger act in unison.

To simulate this type of fire mounted, the instructor places the squad
so that the simulated bull's-eyes are in turn, to the =RIGHT=, to the
=LEFT=, to the =RIGHT FRONT=, to the =LEFT FRONT=, to the =RIGHT
REAR=. With the squad in one of these positions, the instructor
cautions, "Position and aiming drill, mounted." At this caution the
right foot is carried 20 inches to the right and the left hand to the
position of the bridle hand (par. 145, Cavalry Drill Regulations).
The exercise is carried out as described for the exercise dismounted,
using the commands and means laid down in paragraph 141 for firing in
the several directions. The exercise is to be executed at will when
the squad has been sufficiently well instructed in detail.

When firing to the left the pistol hand will be about opposite the
left shoulder and the shoulders turned about 45 deg. to the left; when
firing to the right rear the shoulders are turned about 45 deg. to the
right.

When the soldier is proficient in these exercises with the pistol in
the right hand, they are repeated with the pistol in the left hand.

=Revolver or pistol range practice.=--The courses in range practice
are given in paragraphs 147 to 199, Small Arms Firing Manual, 1913.




CHAPTER IX.

EXTRACTS FROM MANUAL OF INTERIOR GUARD DUTY.

UNITED STATES ARMY, 1914.

[The numbers refer to paragraphs in the Manual.]


=Section 1. Introduction.=

=1.= Guards may be divided into four classes: Exterior guards,
interior guards, military police, and provost guards.

=2.= Exterior guards are used only in time of war. They belong to the
domain of tactics and are treated of in the Field Service Regulations
and in the drill regulations of the different arms of the service.

The purpose of exterior guards is to prevent surprise, to delay
attack, and otherwise to provide for the security of the main body.

On the march they take the form of advance guards, rear guards, and
flank guards. At a halt they consist of outposts.

=3.= Interior guards are used in camp or garrison to preserve order,
protect property, and to enforce police regulations. In time of war
such sentinels of an interior guard as may be necessary are placed
close in or about a camp, and normally there is an exterior guard
further out consisting of outposts. In time of peace the interior
guard is the only guard in a camp or garrison.

=4.= Military police differ somewhat from either of these classes.
(See Field Service Regulations.) They are used in time of war to guard
prisoners, to arrest stragglers and deserters, and to maintain order
and enforce police regulations in the rear of armies, along lines of
communication, and in the vicinity of large camps.

=5.= Provost guards are used in the absence of military police,
generally in conjunction with the civil authorities at or near large
posts or encampments, to preserve order among soldiers beyond the
interior guard.


=Section 2. Classification of interior guards.=

=6.= The various elements of an interior guard classified according to
their particular purposes and the manner in which they perform their
duties are as follows:

(_a_) The main guard.

(_b_) Special guards: Stable guards, park guards, prisoner guards,
herd guards, train guards, boat guards, watchmen, etc.


=Section 3. Details and rosters.=

=7.= At every military post, and in every regiment or separate command
in the field, an interior guard will be detailed and duly mounted.

It will consist of such number of officers and enlisted men as the
commanding officer may deem necessary, and will be commanded by the
senior officer or noncommissioned officer therewith, under the
supervision of the officer of the day or other officer detailed by the
commanding officer.

=8.= The system of sentinels on fixed posts is of value in discipline
and training because of the direct individual responsibility which is
imposed and required to be discharged in a definite and precise
manner. While the desirability of this type of duty is recognized, it
should only be put in practice to an extent sufficient to insure
thorough instruction in this method of performing guard duty, and
should not be the routine method of its performance. The usual guard
duty will be performed by watchmen, patrols, or such method as in the
opinion of the commanding officer may best secure results under the
particular local conditions.

=9.= At posts where there are less than three companies the main guard
and special guards may all be furnished by one company or by details
from each company. It is directed that whenever possible such guards
shall be furnished by a single company, for the reason that if guard
details are taken from each organization at a post of two companies,
troops, or batteries it will result in both being so reduced as to
seriously interfere with drill and instruction, whereas if details are
taken from only one the other is available for instruction at full
strength.

Where there are three or more companies, the main guard will, if
practicable, be furnished by a single company, and, as far as
practicable, the same organization will supply all details for that
day for special guard, overseer, and fatigue duty. In this case the
officer of the day and the officers of the guard, if there are any,
will, if practicable, be from the company furnishing the guard.

=10.= At a post or camp where the headquarters of more than one
regiment are stationed, or in the case of a small brigade in the
field, if but one guard be necessary for the whole command, the
details will be made from the headquarters of the command.

If formal guard mounting is to be held, the adjutant, sergeant major,
and band to attend guard mounting will be designated by the commanding
officer.

=11.= When a single organization furnishes the guard, a roster of
organizations will be kept by the sergeant major under the supervision
of the adjutant. (See Appendix B.)

=12.= When the guard is detailed from several organizations, rosters
will be kept by the adjutant, of officers of the day and officers of
the guard by name; by the sergeant major under the supervision of the
adjutant, of sergeants, corporals, musicians, and privates of the
guard by number per organization; and by first sergeants, of
sergeants, corporals, musicians, and privates by name. (See Appendix
A.)

=13.= When organizations furnish their own stable, or stable and park
guards, credit will be given each for the number of enlisted men so
furnished as though they had been detailed for main guard.

=14.= Special guards, other than stable or park guards, will be
credited the same as for main guard, credited with fatigue duty,
carried on special duty, or credited as the commanding officer may
direct. (Pars. 6, 221, 247, and 300.)

=15.= Captains will supervise the keeping of company rosters and see
that all duties performed are duly credited. (See pars. 355-364, A.
R., for rules governing rosters, and Form 342, A. G. O., for
instructions as to how rosters should be kept.)

=16.= There will be an officer of the day with each guard, unless in
the opinion of the commanding officer the guard is so small that his
services are not needed. In this case an officer will be detailed to
supervise the command and instruction of the guard for such period as
the commanding officer may direct.

=17.= When more than one guard is required for a command, a field
officer of the day will be detailed, who will receive his orders from
the brigade or division commander, as the latter may direct. When
necessary captains may be placed on the roster for field officer of
the day.

=18.= The detail of officers of the guard will be limited to the
necessities of the service and efficient instruction; inexperienced
officers may be detailed as supernumerary officers of the guard for
purposes of instruction.

=19.= Officers serving on staff departments are, in the discretion of
the commanding officer, exempt from guard duty.

=20.= Guard details will, if practicable, be posted or published the
day preceding the beginning of the tour and officers notified
personally by a written order at the same time.

=21.= The strength of guards and the number of consecutive days for
which an organization furnishes the guard will be so regulated as to
insure privates of the main guard an interval of not less than five
days between tours.

When this is not otherwise practicable, extra and special duty men
will be detailed for night guard duty, still performing their daily
duties. When so detailed a roster will be kept by the adjutant showing
the duty performed by them.

=22.= The members of main guards and stable and park guards will
habitually be relieved every 24 hours. The length of the tour of
enlisted men detailed as special guards, other than stable or park
guards, will be so regulated as to permit of these men being held
accountable for a strict performance of their duty.

=23.= Should the officer of the day be notified that men are required
to fill vacancies in the guard, he will cause them to be supplied from
the organization to which the guard belongs. If none are available in
that organization, the adjutant will be notified and will cause them
to be supplied from the organization that is next for guard. (Par.
63.)

=24.= The adjutant will have posted on the bulletin board at his
office all data needed by company commanders in making details from
their companies.

At first sergeant's call first sergeants will go to headquarters and
take from the bulletin board all data necessary for making the details
required from their companies; these details will be made from their
company rosters.

=25.= In order to give ample notice, first sergeants will, when
practicable, publish at retreat and post on the company bulletin board
all details made from the company for duties to be performed.

=26.= Where rosters are required to be kept by this manual, all
details will be made by roster.


=Section 4. Commander of the guard.=

=41.= The commander of the guard is responsible for the instruction
and discipline of the guard. He will see that all of its members are
correctly instructed in their orders and duties and that they
understand and properly perform them. He will visit each relief at
least once while it is on post, and at least one of these visits will
be made between 12 o'clock midnight and daylight.

=42.= He receives and obeys the orders of the commanding officer and
the officer of the day, and reports to the latter without delay all
orders to the guard not received from the officer of the day; he
transmits to his successor all material instructions and information
relating to his duties.

=43.= He is responsible under the officer of the day for the general
safety of the post or camp as soon as the old guard marches away from
the guardhouse. In case of emergency, while both guards are at the
guardhouse, the senior commander of the two guards will be responsible
that the proper action is taken.

=44.= Officers of the guard will remain constantly with their guards,
except while visiting patrols or necessarily engaged elsewhere in the
performance of their duties. The commanding officer will allow a
reasonable time for meals.

=45.= A commander of a guard leaving his post for any purpose will
inform the next in command of his destination and probable time of
return.

=46.= Except in emergencies, the commander of the guard may divide the
night with the next in command, but retains his responsibility; the
one on watch must be constantly on the alert.

=47.= When any alarm is raised in camp or garrison, the guard will be
informed immediately. (Par. 234.) If the case be serious, the proper
call will be sounded, and the commander of the guard will cause the
commanding officer and the officer of the day to be at once notified.

=48.= If a sentinel calls: "The guard," the commander of the guard
will at once send a patrol to the sentinel's post. If the danger be
great, in which case the sentinel will discharge his piece, the patrol
will be as strong as possible.

=49.= When practicable, there should always be an officer or
noncommissioned officer and two privates of the guard at the
guardhouse in addition to the sentinels there on post.

=50.= Between reveille and retreat, when the guard has been turned out
for any person entitled to the compliment (see pars. 222 and 224), the
commander of the guard, if an officer, will receive the report of the
sergeant, returning the salute of the latter with the right hand. He
will then draw his saber and place himself two paces in front of the
center of the guard. When the person for whom the guard has been
turned out approaches he faces his guard and commands: 1. =Present=,
2. =ARMS=; faces to the front and salutes. When his salute is
acknowledged he resumes the carry, faces about, and commands: 1.
=Order=, 2. =ARMS=; and faces to the front.

If it be an officer entitled to inspect the guard, after saluting and
before bringing his guard to an order, the officer of the guard
reports: "=Sir, all present or accounted for="; or "=Sir, (so-and-so)
is absent="; or, if the roll call has been omitted: "=Sir, the guard
is formed=," except that at guard mounting the commanders of the
guards present their guards and salute without making any report.

Between retreat and reveille the commander of the guard salutes and
reports, but does not bring the guard to a present.

=51.= To those entitled to have the guard turned out but not entitled
to inspect it no report will be made; nor will a report be made to any
officer unless he halts in front of the guard.

=52.= When a guard commanded by a noncommissioned officer is turned
out as a compliment or for inspection the noncommissioned officer,
standing at a right shoulder on the right of the right guide,
commands: 1. =Present=, 2. =ARMS.= He then executes the rifle salute.
If a report be also required, he will, after saluting and before
bringing his guard to an order, report as prescribed for the officer
of the guard. (Par. 50.)

=53.= When a guard is in line, not under inspection, and commanded by
an officer; the commander of the guard salutes his regimental,
battalion, and company commander by bringing the guard to attention
and saluting in person.

For all other officers, excepting those entitled to the compliment
from a guard (par. 224), the commander of the guard salutes in person,
but does not bring the guard to attention.

When commanded by a noncommissioned officer, the guard is brought to
attention in either case, and the noncommissioned officer salutes.

The commander of a guard exchanges salutes with the commanders of all
other bodies of troops; the guard is brought to attention during the
exchange.

"Present arms" is executed by a guard only when it has turned out for
inspection or as a compliment, and at the ceremonies of guard mounting
and relieving the old guard.

=54.= In marching a guard or a detachment of a guard the principles of
paragraph 53 apply. "Eyes right" is executed only in the ceremonies of
guard mounting and relieving the old guard.

=55.= If a person entitled to the compliment, or the regimental,
battalion, or company commander, passes in rear of a guard, neither
the compliment nor the salute is given, but the guard is brought to
attention while such person is opposite the post of the commander.

After any person has received or declined the compliment, or received
the salute from the commander of the guard, official recognition of
his presence thereafter while he remains in the vicinity will be taken
by bringing the guard to attention.

=56.= The commander of the guard will inspect the guard at reveille
and retreat, and at such other times as may be necessary, to assure
himself that the men are in proper condition to perform their duties
and that their arms and equipments are in proper condition. For
inspection by other officers, he prepares the guard in each case as
directed by the inspecting officer.

=57.= The guard will not be paraded during ceremonies unless directed
by the commanding officer.

=58.= At all formations members of the guard or reliefs will execute
inspection arms as prescribed in the drill regulations of their arm.

=59.= The commander of the guard will see that all sentinels are
habitually relieved every two hours, unless the weather or other
causes makes it necessary that it be done at shorter or longer
intervals, as directed by the commanding officer.

=60.= He will question his noncommissioned officers and sentinels
relative to the instructions they may have received from the old
guard; he will see that patrols and visits of inspection are made as
directed by the officer of the day.

=61.= He will see that the special orders for each post and member of
the guard, either written or printed, are posted in the guardhouse
and, if practicable, in the sentry box or other sheltered place to
which the member of the guard has constant access.

=62.= He will see that the proper calls are sounded at the hours
appointed by the commanding officer.

=63.= Should a member of the guard be taken sick, or be arrested, or
desert, or leave his guard, he will at once notify the officer of the
day. (Par. 23.)

=64.= He will, when the countersign is used (pars. 210 to 216),
communicate it to the noncommissioned officers of the guard and see
that it is duly communicated to the sentinels before the hour of
challenging; the countersign will not be given to sentinels posted at
the guardhouse.

=65.= He will have the details for hoisting the flag at reveille and
lowering it at retreat, and for firing the reveille and retreat gun,
made in time for the proper performance of these duties. (See pars.
338, 344, 345, and 346.) He will see that the flags are kept in the
best condition possible, and that they are never handled except in the
proper performance of duty.

=66.= He may permit members of the guard while at the guardhouse to
remove their headdress, overcoats, and gloves; if they leave the
guardhouse for any purpose whatever, he will require that they be
properly equipped and armed according to the character of the service
in which engaged, or as directed by the commanding officer.

=67.= He will enter in the guard report a report of his tour of duty
and, on the completion of his tour, will present it to the officer of
the day. He will transmit with his report all passes turned in at the
post of the guard.

=68.= Whenever a prisoner is sent to the guardhouse or guard tent for
confinement he will cause him to be searched, and will, without
unnecessary delay, report the case to the officer of the day.

=69.= Under war conditions, if anyone is to be passed out of camp at
night, he will be sent to the commander of the guard, who will have
him passed beyond the sentinels.

=70.= The commander of the guard will detain at the guardhouse all
suspicious characters or parties attempting to pass a sentinel's post
without authority, reporting his action to the officer of the day, to
whom persons so arrested will be sent, if necessary.

=71.= He will inspect the guardrooms and cells, and the irons of such
prisoners as may be ironed, at least once during his tour, and at such
other times as he may deem necessary.

=72.= He will cause the corporals of the old and new reliefs to verify
together, immediately before each relief goes on post, the number of
prisoners who should then properly be at the guardhouse.

=73.= He will see that the sentences of prisoners under his charge are
executed strictly in accordance with the action of the reviewing
authority.

=74.= When no special prisoner guard has been detailed (par. 300), he
will, as far as practicable, assign as guards over working parties of
prisoners sentinels from posts guarded at night only.

=75.= The commander of the guard will inspect all meals sent to the
guardhouse and see that the quantity and quality of food are in
accordance with regulations.

=76.= At guard mounting he will report to the old officer of the day
all cases of prisoners whose terms of sentence expire on that day, and
also all cases of prisoners concerning whom no statement of charges
has been received. (See par. 241.)

=77.= The commander of the guard is responsible for the security of
the prisoners under the charge of his guard; he becomes responsible
for them after their number has been verified and they have been
turned over to the custody of his guard by the old guard or by the
prisoner guard or overseers.

=78.= The prisoners will be verified and turned over to the new guard
without parading them, unless the commanding officer or the officer of
the day shall direct otherwise.

=79.= To receive the prisoners at the guardhouse when they have been
paraded and after they have been verified by the officers of the day,
the commander of the new guard directs his sergeant to form his guard
with an interval, and commands: 1. =Prisoners=, 2. =Right=, 3. =FACE=,
4. =Forward=, 5. =MARCH=. The prisoners having arrived opposite the
interval in the new guard, he commands: 1. =Prisoners=, 2. =HALT=, 3.
=Left=, 4. =FACE=, 5. =Right= (or =left=), 6. =DRESS=, 7. =FRONT=.

The prisoners dress on the line of the new guard.


=Section 5. Sergeant of the guard.=

=80.= The senior noncommissioned officer of the guard always acts as
sergeant of the guard and if there be no officer of the guard will
perform the duties prescribed for the commander of the guard.

=81.= The sergeant of the guard has general supervision over the other
noncommissioned officers and the musicians and privates of the guard,
and must be thoroughly familiar with all of their orders and duties.

=82.= He is directly responsible for the property under charge of the
guard and will see that it is properly cared for. He will make lists
of articles taken out by working parties and see that all such
articles are duly returned. If they are not, he will immediately
report the fact to the commander of the guard.

=83.= Immediately after guard mounting he will prepare duplicate lists
of the names of all noncommissioned officers, musicians, and privates
of the guard, showing the relief and post or duties of each. One list
will be handed as soon as possible to the commander of the guard; the
other will be retained by the sergeant.

=84.= He will see that all reliefs are turned out at the proper time,
and that the corporals thoroughly understand, and are prompt and
efficient in the discharge of their duties.

=85.= During the temporary absence from the guardhouse of the sergeant
of the guard, the next in rank of the noncommissioned officers will
perform his duties.

=86.= Should the corporal whose relief is on post be called away from
the guardhouse, the sergeant of the guard will designate a
noncommissioned officer to take the corporal's place until his return.

=87.= The sergeant of the guard is responsible at all times for the
proper police of the guardhouse or guard tent, including the ground
about them and the prison cells.

=88.= At =first sergeant's call= he will proceed to the adjutant's
office and obtain the guard report book.

=89.= When the national or regimental colors are taken from the stacks
of the color line, the color bearer and guard, or the sergeant of the
guard, unarmed, and two armed privates as a guard, will escort the
colors to the colonel's quarters, as prescribed for the color guard in
the drill regulations of the arm of the service to which the guard
belongs.

=90.= He will report to the commander of the guard any suspicious or
unusual occurrence that comes under his notice, will warn him of the
approach of any armed body, and will send to him all persons arrested
by the guard.

=91.= When the guard is turned out its formation will be as follows:
The senior noncommissioned officer, if commander of the guard, is on
the right of the right guide; if not commander of the guard, he is in
the line of file closers, in rear of the right four of the guard; the
next in rank is right guide; the next left guide; the others in the
line of file closers, usually each in rear of his relief; the field
music, with its left three paces to the right of the right guide. The
reliefs form in the same order as when the guard was first divided,
except that if the guard consists of dismounted Cavalry and Infantry,
the Cavalry forms on the left.

=92.= The sergeant forms the guard, calls the roll, and, if not in
command of the guard, reports to the commander of the guard as
prescribed in drill regulations for a first sergeant forming a troop
or company; the guard is not divided into platoons or sections, and,
except when the whole guard is formed prior to marching off, fours are
not counted.

=93.= The sergeant reports as follows: "=Sir, all present or
accounted for=," or "=Sir, (so-and-so) is absent="; or if the roll
call has been omitted, "=Sir, the guard is formed.=" Only men absent
without proper authority are reported absent. He then takes his place
without command.

=94.= At night the roll may be called by reliefs and numbers instead
of names; thus, the first relief being on post: =Second relief; No. 1;
No. 2; etc.; Third relief, Corporal; No. 1, etc.=

=95.= Calling the roll will be dispensed with in forming the guard
when it is turned out as a compliment, on the approach of an armed
body, or in any sudden emergency; but in such cases the roll may be
called before dismissing the guard. If the guard be turned out for an
officer entitled to inspect it, the roll will, unless he directs
otherwise, always be called before a report is made.

=96.= The sergeant of the guard has direct charge of the prisoners,
except during such time as they may be under the charge of the
prisoner guard or overseers, and is responsible to the commander of
the guard for their security.

=97.= He will carry the keys of the guardroom and cells, and will not
suffer them to leave his personal possession while he is at the
guardhouse, except as hereinafter provided. (Par. 99.) Should he leave
the guardhouse for any purpose he will turn the keys over to the
noncommissioned officer who takes his place. (Par. 85.)

=98.= He will count the knives, forks, etc., given to the prisoners
with their food, and see that none of these articles remain in their
possession. He will see that no forbidden articles of any kind are
conveyed to the prisoners.

=99.= Prisoners when paraded with the guard are placed in line, in its
center. The sergeant, immediately before forming the guard, will turn
over his keys to the noncommissioned officer at the guardhouse. Having
formed the guard he will divide it into two nearly equal parts.
Indicating the point of division with his hand, he commands: 1. =Right
(or left)=, 2. =FACE=, 3. =Forward=, 4. =MARCH=, 5. =Guard=, 6.
=HALT=, 7. =Left (or right)=, 8. =FACE=.

If the first command be =right face=, the right half of the guard only
will execute the movements; if =left face=, the left half only will
execute them. The command =halt= is given when sufficient interval is
obtained to admit the prisoners. The doors of the guardroom and cells
are then opened by the noncommissioned officer having the keys. The
prisoners will file out under the supervision of the sergeant, the
noncommissioned officer, and sentinel on duty at the guardhouse, and
such other sentinels as may be necessary; they will form in line in
the interval between the two parts of the guard.

=100.= To return the prisoners to the guardroom and cells, the
sergeant commands: 1. =Prisoners=, 2. =Right (or left)=, 3. =FACE=, 4.
=Column right (or left)=, 5. =MARCH.=

The prisoners, under the same supervision as before, return to their
proper rooms or cells.

=101.= To close the guard, the sergeant commands: 1. =Left (or
right)=, 2. =FACE=, 3. =Forward=, 4. =MARCH=, 5. =Guard=, 6. =HALT=,
7. =Right= (or =left=), 8. =FACE.=

The left or right half only of the guard, as indicated, executes the
movement.

=102.= If there be but few prisoners, the sergeant may indicate the
point of division as above, and form the necessary interval by the
commands: 1. =Right= (or =left=) =step=, 2. =MARCH=, 3. =Guard=, 4.
=HALT=, and close the intervals by the commands: 1. =Left= (or
=right=) =step=, 2. =MARCH=, 3. =Guard=, 4. =HALT.=

=103.= If sentinels are numerous, reliefs may, at the discretion of
the commanding officer, be posted in detachments, and sergeants as
well as corporals required to relieve and post them.


=Section 6. Corporal of the Guard.=

=104.= A corporal of the guard receives and obeys orders from none but
noncommissioned officers of the guard senior to himself, the officers
of the guard, the officer of the day, and the commanding officer.

=105.= It is the duty of the corporal of the guard to post and relieve
sentinels and to instruct the members of his relief in their orders
and duties.

=106.= Immediately after the division of the guard into reliefs the
corporals will assign the members of their respective reliefs to posts
by number, and a soldier so assigned to his post will not be changed
to another during the same tour of guard duty unless by direction of
the commander of the guard or higher authority. Usually experienced
soldiers are placed over the arms of the guard and at remote and
responsible posts.

=107.= Each corporal will then make a list of the members of his
relief, including himself. This list will contain the number of the
relief, the name, the company, and the regiment of every member
thereof and the post to which each is assigned. The list will be made
in duplicate, one copy to be given to the sergeant of the guard as
soon as completed, the other to be retained by the corporal.

=108.= When directed by the commander of the guard, the corporal of
the first relief forms his relief, and then commands: =CALL OFF=.

Commencing on the right, the men call off alternately =rear= and
=front rank=, "one," "two," "three," "four," and so on; if in single
rank, they call off from right to left. The corporal then commands: 1.
=Right=, 2. =FACE=, 3. =Forward=, 4. =MARCH.=

The corporal marches on the left and near the rear file in order to
observe the march. The corporal of the old guard marches on the right
of the leading file, and takes command when the last one of the old
sentinels is relieved, changing places with the corporal of the new
guard.

=109.= When the relief arrives at six paces from a sentinel (see par.
168), the corporal halts it and commands, according to the number of
the post: =No. (----)=.

Both sentinels execute port arms or saber; the new sentinel approaches
the old, halting about one pace from him. (See par. 172.)

=110.= The corporals advance and place themselves, facing each other,
a little in advance of the new sentinel, the old corporal on his
right, the new corporal on his left, both at a right shoulder, and
observe that the old sentinel transmits correctly his instructions.

The following diagram will illustrate the positions taken:

[Illustration:

                        A
        R               -
    | | | | |         C| |D
    |   | | |           -
                        B]

R is the relief; A, the new corporal; B, the old; C, the new sentinel;
D, the old.

=111.= The instructions relative to the post having been communicated,
the new corporal commands, =Post=; both sentinels then resume the
right shoulder, face toward the new corporal, and step back so as to
allow the relief to pass in front of them. The new corporal then
commands: "1. =Forward=, 2. =MARCH="; the old sentinel takes his place
in rear of the relief as it passes him, his piece in the same position
an those of the relief. The new sentinel stands fast at a right
shoulder until the relief has passed six paces beyond him, when he
walks his post. The corporals take their places as the relief passes
them.

=112.= Mounted sentinels are posted and relieved in accordance with
the same principles.

=113.= On the return of the old relief, the corporal of the new guard
falls out when the relief halts; the corporal of the old guard forms
his relief on the left of the old guard, salutes, and reports to the
commander of his guard: "=Sir, the relief is present="; or "=Sir,
(so-and-so) is absent=," and takes his place in the guard.

=114.= To post a relief other than that which is posted when the old
guard is relieved, its corporal commands:

1. =(Such) relief=, 2. =FALL IN=; and if arms are stacked, they are
taken at the proper commands.

The relief is formed facing to the front, with arms at an order, the
men place themselves according to the numbers of their respective
posts, viz, =two=, =four=, =six=, and so on, in the =front rank=, and
=one=, =three=, =five=, and so on, in the =rear rank=. The corporal,
standing about two paces in front of the center of his relief, then
commands: CALL OFF.

The men call off as prescribed. The corporal then commands: 1.
=Inspection=, 2. =ARMS=, 3. =Order=, 4. =ARMS=; faces the commander of
the guard, executes the rifle salute, reports: "=Sir, the relief is
present="; or "=Sir, (so-and-so) is absent="; he then takes his place
on the right at order arms.

=115.= When the commander of the guard directs the corporal, =Post
your relief=, the corporal salutes and posts his relief as prescribed
(Pars. 108 to 111); the corporal of the relief on post does not go
with the new relief, except when necessary to show the way.

=116.= To dismiss the old relief, it is halted and faced to the front
at the guardhouse by the corporal of the new relief, who then falls
out; the corporal of the old relief then steps in front of the relief
and dismisses it by the proper commands.

=117.= Should the pieces have been loaded before the relief was
posted, the corporal will, before dismissing the relief, see that no
cartridges are left in the chambers or magazines. The same rule
applies to sentinels over prisoners.

=118.= Each corporal will thoroughly acquaint himself with all the
special orders of every sentinel on his relief, and see that each
understands and correctly transmits such orders =in detail= to his
successor.

=119.= There should be at least one noncommissioned officer constantly
on the alert at the guardhouse, usually the corporal whose relief is
on post. This noncommissioned officer takes post near the entrance of
the guardhouse, and does not fall in with the guard when it is formed.
He will have his rifle constantly with him.

=120.= Whenever it becomes necessary for the corporal to leave his
post near the entrance of the guardhouse, he will notify the sergeant
of the guard, who will at once take his place, or designate another
noncommissioned officer to do so.

=121.= He will see that no person enters the guardhouse or guard tent,
or crosses the posts of the sentinels there posted without proper
authority.

=122.= Should any sentinel call for the corporal of the guard, the
corporal will, in every case, at once and quickly proceed to such
sentinel. He will notify the sergeant of the guard before leaving the
guardhouse.

=123.= He will at once report to the commander of the guard any
violation of regulations or any unusual occurrence which is reported
to him by a sentinel, or which comes to his notice in any other way.

=124.= Should a sentinel call "=The Guard=," the corporal will
promptly notify the commander of the guard.

=125.= Should a sentinel call "=Relief=," the corporal will at once
proceed to the post of such sentinel, taking with him the man next for
duty on that post. If the sentinel is relieved for a short time only,
the corporal will again post him as soon as the necessity for his
relief ceases.

=126.= When the countersign is used, the corporal at the posting of
the relief during whose tour challenging is to begin gives the
countersign to the members of the relief, excepting those posted at
the guardhouse.

=127.= He will wake the corporal whose relief is next on post in time
for the latter to verify the prisoners, form his relief, and post it
at the proper hour.

=128.= Should the guard be turned out, each corporal will call his own
relief, and cause its members to fall in promptly.

=129.= Tents or bunks in the same vicinity will be designated for the
reliefs so that all the members of each relief may, if necessary, be
found and turned out by the corporal in the least time and with the
least confusion.

=130.= When challenged by a sentinel while posting his relief, the
corporal commands: 1. =Relief=, 2. =HALT=; to the sentinel's challenge
he answers "=Relief=," and at the order of the sentinel he advances
alone to give the countersign, or to be recognized. When the sentinel
says, "=Advance relief=," the corporal commands: 1. =Forward=, 2.
=MARCH.=

If to be relieved, the sentinel is then relieved as prescribed.

=131.= Between retreat and reveille, the corporal of the guard will
challenge all suspicious looking persons or parties he may observe,
first halting his patrol or relief, if either be with him. He will
advance them in the same manner that sentinels on post advance like
parties (Pars. 191 to 197), but if the route of a patrol is on a
continuous chain of sentinels, he should not challenge persons coming
near him unless he has reason to believe that they have eluded the
vigilance of sentinels.

=132.= Between retreat and reveille, whenever so ordered by an officer
entitled to inspect the guard, the corporal will call: "=Turn out the
guard=," announcing the title of the officer, and then, if not
otherwise ordered, he will salute and return to his post.

=133.= As a general rule he will advance parties approaching the guard
at night in the same manner that sentinels on post advance like
parties. Thus, the sentinel at the guardhouse challenges and repeats
the answer to the corporal, as prescribed hereafter (Par. 200); the
corporal, advancing at port arms, says: "=Advance (so-and-so) with the
countersign=," or "=to be recognized=," if there be no countersign
used; the countersign being correctly given, or the party being duly
recognized, the corporal says: "=Advance (so-and-so)=," repeating the
answer to the challenge of the sentinel.

=134.= When officers of different rank approach the guardhouse from
different directions at the same time, the senior will be advanced
first, and will not be made to wait for his junior.

=135.= Out of ranks and under arms, the corporal salutes with the
rifle salute. He will salute all officers, whether by day or night.

=136.= The corporal will examine parties halted and detained by
sentinels, and, if he have reason to believe the parties have no
authority to cross sentinel's posts, will conduct them to the
commander of the guard.

=137.= The corporal of the guard will arrest all suspicious looking
characters prowling about the post or camp, all persons of a
disorderly character disturbing the peace, and all persons taken in
the act of committing crime against the Government on a military
reservation or post. All persons arrested by corporals of the guard or
by sentinels will at once be conducted to the commander of the guard
by the corporal.


=Section 7. Musicians of the guard.=

=138.= The musicians of the guard will sound calls as prescribed by
the commanding officer.

=139.= Should the guard be turned out for national or regimental
colors or standards, uncased, the field music of the guard will, when
the guard present arms, sound, "=To the color=" or "=To the
standard="; or, if for any person entitled thereto, the march,
flourishes, or ruffles, prescribed in paragraphs 375, 376, and 377, A.
R.


=Section 8. Orderlies and color sentinels.=

=140.= When so directed by the commanding officer, the officer who
inspects the guard at guard mounting will select from the members of
the new guard an orderly for the commanding officer and such number of
other orderlies and color sentinels as may be required.

=141.= For these positions the soldiers will be chosen who are most
correct in the performance of duty and in military bearing, neatest in
person and clothing, and whose arms and accouterments are in the best
condition. Clothing, arms, and equipments must conform to regulations.
If there is any doubt as to the relative qualifications of two or
more soldiers, the inspecting officer will cause them to fall out at
the guardhouse and to form in line in single rank. He will then, by
testing them in drill regulations, select the most proficient. The
commander of the guard will be notified of the selection.

=142.= When directed by the commander of the guard to fall out and
report an orderly will give his name, company, and regiment to the
sergeant of the guard, and, leaving his rifle in the arm rack in his
company quarters, will proceed at once to the officer to whom he is
assigned, reporting: "=Sir, Private ----, Company ----, reports as
orderly.="

=143.= If the orderly selected be a cavalryman, he will leave his
rifle in the arm rack of his troop quarters and report with his belt
on, but without side arms unless specially otherwise ordered.

=144.= Orderlies, while on duty as such, are subject only to the
orders of the commanding officer and of the officers to whom they are
ordered to report.

=145.= When an orderly is ordered to carry a message, he will be
careful to deliver it exactly as it was given to him.

=146.= His tour of duty ends when he is relieved by the orderly
selected from the guard relieving his own.

=147.= Orderlies are members of the guard, and their name, company,
and regiment are entered on the guard report and lists of the guard.

=148.= If a color line is established, sufficient sentinels are placed
on the color line to guard the colors and stacks.

=149.= Color sentinels are posted only so long as the stacks are
formed. The commander of the guard will divide the time equally among
them.

=150.= When stacks are broken, the color sentinels may be permitted to
return to their respective companies. They are required to report in
person to the commander of the guard at reveille and retreat. They
will fall in with the guard, under arms, at guard mounting.

=151.= Color sentinels are not placed on the regular reliefs, nor are
their posts numbered. In calling for the corporal of the guard, they
call: "=Corporal of the guard. Color line.="

=152.= Officers or enlisted men passing the uncased colors will render
the prescribed salute. If the colors are on the stacks, the salute
will be made on crossing the color line or on passing the colors.

=153.= A sentinel placed over the colors will not permit them to be
moved except in the presence of an armed escort. Unless otherwise
ordered by the commanding officer, he will allow no one to touch them
but the color bearer.

He will not permit any soldier to take arms from the stacks or to
touch them except by order of an officer or noncommissioned officer of
the guard.

If any person passing the colors or crossing the color line fails to
salute the colors, the sentinel will caution him to do so, and if the
caution be not heeded he will call the corporal of the guard and
report the facts.


=Section 9. Privates of the Guard.=

=154.= Privates are assigned to reliefs by the commander of the guard,
and to posts usually by the corporal of their relief. They will not
change from one relief or post to another during the same tour of
guard duty unless by proper authority.


=Section 10. Orders for Sentinels.=

=155.= Orders for sentinels are of two classes: General orders and
special orders. General orders apply to all sentinels. Special orders
relate to particular posts and duties.

=156.= Sentinels will be required to memorize the following:

My general orders are:

=1. To take charge of this post and all Government property in view.=

=2. To walk my post in a military manner keeping always on the alert
and observing everything that takes place within sight or hearing.=

=3. To report all violations of orders I am instructed to enforce.=

=4. To repeat all calls from posts more distant from the guardhouse
than my own.=

=5. To quit my post only when properly relieved.=

=6. To receive, obey, and pass on to the sentinel who relieves me all
orders from the commanding officer, officer of the day, and officers
and noncommissioned officers of the guard only.=

=7. To talk to no one except in line of duty.=

=8. In case of fire or disorder to give the alarm.=

=9. To allow no one to commit a nuisance on or near my post.=

=10. In any case not covered by instructions to call the corporal of
the guard.=

=11. To salute all officers, and all colors and standards not cased.=

=12. To be especially watchful at night, and, during the time for
challenging, to challenge all persons on or near my port and to allow
no one to pass without proper authority.=


REGULATIONS RELATING TO THE GENERAL ORDERS FOR SENTINELS.

No. 1: =To take charge of this post and all Government property in
view.=

=157.= All persons, of whatever rank in the service, are required to
observe respect toward sentinels and members of the guard when such
are in the performance of their duties.

=158.= A sentinel will at once report to the corporal of the guard
every unusual or suspicious occurrence noted.

=159.= He will arrest suspicious persons prowling about the post or
camp at any time, all parties to a disorder occurring on or near his
post, and all, except authorized persons, who attempt to enter the
camp at night, and will turn over to the corporal of the guard all
persons arrested.

=160.= The number, limits, and extent of his post will invariably
constitute part of the special orders of a sentinel on post. The
limits of his post should be so defined as to include every place to
which he is required to go in the performance of his duties.


No. 2: =To walk my post in a military manner, keeping always on the
alert and observing everything that takes place within sight or
hearing.=

=161.= A sentinel is not required to halt and change the position of
his rifle on arriving at the end of his post, nor to execute =to the
rear, march=, precisely as prescribed in the drill regulations, but
faces about while walking in the manner most convenient to him and at
any part of his post as may be best suited to the proper performance
of his duties. He carries his rifle on either shoulder, and in wet or
severe weather, when not in a sentry box, may carry it at a secure.

=162.= Sentinels when in sentry boxes stand at ease. Sentry boxes will
be used in wet weather only, or at other times when specially
authorized by the commanding officer.

=163.= In very hot weather, sentinels may be authorized to stand at
ease on their posts, provided they can effectively discharge their
duties in this position; but they will take advantage of this
privilege only on the express authority of the officer of the day or
the commander of the guard.

164. A mounted sentinel may dismount occasionally and lead the horse,
but will not relax his vigilance.


No. 3: =To report all violations of orders I am instructed to
enforce.=

=165.= A sentinel will ordinarily report a violation of orders when he
is inspected or relieved, but if the case be urgent, he will call the
corporal of the guard, and also, if necessary, will arrest the
offender.


No. 4: =To repeat all calls from posts more distant from the
guardhouse than my own.=

=166.= To call the corporal of the guard for any purpose other than
relief, fire, or disorder (pars. 167 and 178), a sentinel will call,
"=Corporal of the guard, No. (--)=," adding the number of his post. In
no case will any sentinel call, "=Never mind the corporal="; nor will
the corporal heed such call if given.


No. 5: =To quit my post only when properly relieved.=

=167.= If relief becomes necessary, by reason of sickness or other
cause, a sentinel will call, "=Corporal of the guard, No. (----),
Relief=," giving the number of his post.

=168.= Whenever a sentinel is to be relieved, he will halt, and with
arms at a right shoulder, will face toward the relief, when it is 30
paces from him. He will come to a port arms with the new sentinel, and
in a low tone will transmit to him all the special orders relating to
the post and any other information which will assist him to better
perform his duties.


No. 6: =To receive, obey, and pass on to the sentinel who relieves me,
all orders from the commanding officer, officer of the day, and
officers and noncommissioned officers of the guard only.=

=169.= During his tour of duty a soldier is subject to the orders of
the commanding officer, officer of the day, and officers and
noncommissioned officers of the guard only; but any officer is
competent to investigate apparent violations of regulations by members
of the guard.

=170.= A sentinel will quit his piece on an explicit order from any
person from whom he lawfully receives orders while on post; under no
circumstances will he yield it to any other person. Unless necessity
therefor exists, no person will require a sentinel to quit his piece,
even to allow it to be inspected.

=171.= A sentinel will not divulge the countersign (Pars. 209 to 217)
to anyone except the sentinel who relieves him, or to a person from
whom he properly receives orders, on such person's verbal order given
personally. Privates of the guard will not use the countersign except
in the performance of their duties while posted as sentinels.


No. 7: =To talk to no one except in line of duty.=

=172.= When calling for any purpose, challenging, or holding
communication with any person a dismounted sentinel armed with a rifle
or saber will take the position of port arms or saber. At night a
dismounted sentinel armed with a pistol takes the position of raised
pistol in challenging or holding communication. A mounted sentinel
does not ordinarily draw his weapon in the daytime when challenging or
holding conversation; but if drawn he holds it at advance rifle, raise
pistol, or port saber, according as he is armed with a rifle, pistol,
or saber. At night in challenging and holding conversation his weapon
is drawn and held as just prescribed, depending on whether he is armed
with a rifle, pistol, or saber.


No. 8: =In case of fire or disorder to give the alarm.=

=173.= In case of fire, a sentinel will call, "=Fire, No. (----)=,"
adding the number of his post; if possible, he will extinguish the
fire himself. In case of disorder he will call, "=The Guard, No.
(----)=," adding the number of his post. If the danger be great, he
will in either case discharge his piece before calling.


No. 11: =To salute all officers and all colors and standards not
cased.=

=174.= When not engaged in the performance of a specific duty, the
proper execution of which would prevent it, a member of the guard will
salute all officers who pass him. This rule applies at all hours of
the day or night, except in the case of mounted sentinels armed with a
rifle or pistol, or dismounted sentinels armed with a pistol, after
challenging. (See par. 181.)

=175.= Sentinels will salute as follows: A dismounted sentinel armed
with a rifle or saber salutes by presenting arms; if otherwise armed,
he salutes with the right hand.

A mounted sentinel, if armed with a saber and the saber be drawn,
salutes by presenting saber; otherwise he salutes in all cases with
the right hand.

=176.= To salute, a dismounted sentinel, with piece at a right
shoulder or saber at a carry, halts and faces toward the person to be
saluted when the latter arrives within 30 paces.

The limit within which individuals and insignia of rank can be readily
recognized is assumed to be about 30 paces, and therefore at this
distance cognizance is taken of the person or party to be saluted.

=177.= The salute is rendered at six paces; if the person to be
saluted does not arrive within that distance, then when he is nearest.

=178.= A sentinel in a sentry box, armed with a rifle, stands at
attention in the doorway on the approach of a person or party entitled
to salute, and salutes by presenting arms according to the foregoing
rules.

If armed with a saber, he stands at a carry and salutes as before.

=179.= A mounted sentinel on a regular post, halts, faces, and salutes
in accordance with the foregoing rules. If doing patrol duty, he
salutes, but does not halt unless spoken to.

=180.= Sentinels salute, in accordance with the foregoing rules, all
persons and parties entitled to compliments from the guards (Pars.
224, 227, and 228); officers of the Army, Navy, and Marine Corps;
military and naval officers of foreign powers; officers of volunteers
and militia officers when in uniform.

=181.= A sentinel salutes as just prescribed when an officer comes on
his post; if the officer holds communication with the sentinel, the
sentinel again salutes when the officer leaves him.

During the hours when challenging is prescribed, the first salute is
given as soon as the officer has been duly recognized and advanced. A
mounted sentinel armed with a rifle or pistol, or a dismounted
sentinel armed with a pistol, does not salute after challenging.

He stands at advance rifle or raise pistol until the officer passes.

=182.= In case of the approach of an armed party of the guard, the
sentinel will halt when it is about 30 paces from him, facing toward
the party with his piece at the right shoulder. If not himself
relieved, he will, as the party passes, place himself so that the
party will pass in front of him; he resumes walking his post when the
party has reached six paces beyond him.

=183.= An officer is entitled to the compliments prescribed, whether
in uniform or not.

=184.= A sentinel in communication with an officer will not interrupt
the conversation to salute. In the case of seniors the officer will
salute, whereupon the sentinel will salute.

=185.= When the flag is being lowered at retreat, a sentinel on post
and in view of the flag will face the flag, and, at the first note of
the Star-Spangled Banner or =to the color= will come to a present
arms. At the sounding of the last note he will resume walking his
post.


No. 12: =To be especially watchful at night and during the time for
challenging, to challenge all persons on or near my post, and to allow
no one to pass without proper authority.=

=186.= During challenging hours, if a sentinel sees any person or
party on or near his post, he will advance rapidly along his post
toward such person or party and when within about 30 yards will
challenge sharply, "=Halt, who is there?=" He will place himself in
the best possible position to receive or, if necessary, to arrest the
person or party.

=187.= In case a mounted party be challenged, the sentinel will call,
"=Halt, Dismount. Who is there?="

=188.= The sentinel will permit only one of any party to approach him
for the purpose of giving the countersign (Pars. 200 to 217), or, if
no countersign be used, of being duly recognized. When this is done
the whole party is advanced, i. e., allowed to pass.

=189.= In all cases the sentinel must satisfy himself beyond a
reasonable doubt that the parties are what they represent themselves
to be and have a right to pass. If he is not satisfied, he must cause
them to stand and call the corporal of the guard. So, likewise, if he
have no authority to pass persons with the countersign, or when the
party has not the countersign, or gives an incorrect one.

=190.= A sentinel will not permit any person to approach so close as
to prevent the proper use of his own weapon before recognizing the
person or receiving the countersign.

=191.= When two or more persons approach in one party, the sentinel,
on receiving an answer that indicates that some one in the party has
the countersign, will say, "=Advance one with the countersign=," and
if the countersign is given correctly, will then say, "=Advance
(so-and-so)=," repeating the answer to his challenge. Thus if the
answer be "=Relief (friend with the countersign, patrol, etc.)=," the
sentinel will say, "=Advance one with the countersign="; then
"=Advance, relief (friends, patrol, etc.).="

=192.= If a person having the countersign approach alone, he is
advanced to give the countersign. Thus if the answer be "=Friend with
the countersign (or officer of the day, or etc.)=," the sentinel will
say, "=Advance, friend (or officer of the day, or etc.) with the
countersign="; then "=Advance, friend (or officer of the day, or
etc.).="

=193.= If two or more persons approach a sentinel's post from
different directions at the same time, all such persons are challenged
in turn and required to halt and to remain halted until advanced.

The senior is first advanced, in accordance with the foregoing rules.

=194.= If a party is already advanced and in communication with a
sentinel, the latter will challenge any other party that may approach;
if the party challenged be senior to the one already on his post, the
sentinel will advance the new party at once. The senior may allow him
to advance any or all of the other parties; otherwise the sentinel
will not advance any of them until the senior leaves him. He will then
advance the senior only of the remaining parties, and so on.

=195.= The following order of rank will govern a sentinel in advancing
different persons or parties approaching his post: Commanding
officers, officer of the day, officer of the guard, officers, patrols,
reliefs, noncommissioned officers of the guard in order of rank,
friends.

=196.= A sentinel will never allow himself to be surprised, nor permit
two parties to advance upon him at the same time.

=197.= If no countersign be used, the rules for challenging are the
same. The rules for advancing parties are modified only as follows:
Instead of saying "=Advance (so-and-so) with the countersign=," the
sentinel will say "=Advance (so-and-so) to be recognized.=" Upon
recognition he will say, "=Advance (so-and-so.)="

=198.= Answers to a sentinel's challenge intended to confuse or
mislead him are prohibited, but the use of such an answer as "=Friends
with the countersign=," is not to be understood as misleading, but as
the usual answer made by officers, patrols, etc., when the purpose of
their visit makes it desirable that their official capacity should not
be announced.


SPECIAL ORDERS FOR SENTINELS AT THE POST OF THE GUARD.

=199.= Sentinels posted at the guard will be required to memorize the
following:

=Between reveille and retreat to turn out the guard for all persons
designated by the commanding officer, for all colors or standards not
cased, and in time of war for all armed parties approaching my post,
except troops at drill and reliefs and detachments of the guard.=

=At night, after challenging any person or party, to advance no one
but call the corporal of the guard, repeating the answer to the
challenge.=

=200.= After receiving an answer to his challenge, the sentinel calls,
"=Corporal of the guard (so-and-so)=," repeating the answer to the
challenge.

He does not in such cases repeat the number of his post.

=201.= He remains in the position assumed in challenging until the
corporal has recognized or advanced the person or party challenged,
when he resumes walking his post, or, if the person or party be
entitled thereto, he salutes and, as soon as the salute has been
acknowledged, resumes walking his post.

=202.= The sentinel at the post of the guard will be notified by
direction of the commanding officer of the presence in camp or
garrison of persons entitled to the compliment. (Par. 224.)

=203.= The following examples illustrate the manner in which the
sentinel at the post of the guard will turn out the guard upon the
approach of persons or parties entitled to the compliment (Pars. 224,
227, and 228), "=Turn out the guard, commanding officer="; "=Turn out
the guard, governor of a Territory="; "=Turn out the guard, national
colors="; "=Turn out the guard, armed party="; etc.

At the approach of the new guard at guard mounting the sentinel will
call, "=Turn out the guard, armed party.="

=204.= Should the person named by the sentinel not desire the guard
formed, he will salute, whereupon the sentinel will call "=Never mind
the guard.="

=205.= After having called "=Turn out the guard=," the sentinel will
never call "=Never mind the guard=," on the approach of an armed
party.

=206.= Though the guard be already formed he will not fail to call,
"=Turn out the guard=," as required in his special orders, except that
the guard will not be turned out for any person while his senior is at
or coming to the post of the guard.

=207.= The sentinels at the post of the guard will warn the commander
of the approach of any armed body and of the presence in the vicinity
of all suspicious or disorderly persons.

=208.= In case of fire or disorder in sight or hearing, the sentinel
at the guardhouse will call the corporal of the guard and report the
facts to him.


=Section 11. Countersigns and Paroles.=

=209.= _Seventy-seventh article of war._--Any person subject to
military law who makes known the parole or countersign to any person
not entitled to receive it according to the rules and discipline of
war, or gives a parole or countersign different from that which he
received, shall, if the offense be committed in time of war, suffer
death or such other punishment as a court-martial may direct. (See
Par. 171.)

=210.= The =countersign= is a word given daily from the principal
headquarters of a command to aid guards and sentinels in identifying
persons who may be authorized to pass at night.

It is given to such persons as may be authorized to pass and repass
sentinels' posts during the night, and to officers, noncommissioned
officers, and sentinels of the guard.

=211.= The =parole= is a word used as a check on the countersign in
order to obtain more accurate identification of persons. It is
imparted only to those who are entitled to inspect guards and to
commanders of guards.

The parole or countersign, or both, are sent sealed in the form of an
order to those entitled to them.

=212.= When the commander of the guard demands the parole, he will
advance and receive it as the corporal receives the countersign. (See
Par. 133.)

=213.= As the communications containing the parole and countersign
must at times be distributed by many orderlies, the parole intrusted
to many officers, and the countersign and parole to many officers and
sentinels, and as both the countersign and parole must, for large
commands, be prepared several days in advance, there is always danger
of their being lost or becoming known to persons who would make
improper use of them; moreover, a sentinel is too apt to take it for
granted that any person who gives the right countersign is what he
represents himself to be; hence for outpost duty there is greater
security in omitting the use of the countersign and parole, or in
using them with great caution. The chief reliance should be upon
personal recognition or identification of all persons claiming
authority to pass.

Persons whose sole means of identification is the countersign, or
concerning whose authority to pass there is a reasonable doubt, should
not be allowed to pass without the authority of the corporal of the
guard after proper investigation; the corporal will take to his next
superior any person about whom he is not competent to decide.

=214.= The =countersign= is usually the name of a battle; the parole,
that of a general or other distinguished person.

=215.= When they can not be communicated daily, a series of words for
some days in advance may be sent to posts or detachments that are to
use the same parole or countersign as the main body.

=216.= If the countersign be lost, or if a member of the guard deserts
with it, the commander on the spot will substitute another for it and
report the case at once to headquarters.

=217.= In addition to the countersign, use may be made of preconcerted
signals, such as striking the rifle with the hand or striking the
hands together a certain number of times as agreed upon. Such signals
may be used only by guards that occupy exposed points.

They are used before the countersign is given and must not be
communicated to anyone not entitled to know the countersign. Their use
is intended to prevent the surprise of a sentinel.

In the daytime signals such as raising a cap or a handkerchief in a
prearranged manner may be used by sentinels to communicate with the
guard or with each other.


=Section 12. Guard Patrols.=

=218.= A guard patrol consists of one or more men detailed for the
performance of some special service connected with guard duty.

=219.= If the patrol be required to go beyond the chain of sentinels,
the officer or noncommissioned officer in charge will be furnished
with the countersign and the outposts and sentinels warned.

=220.= If challenged by a sentinel, the patrol is halted by its
commander, and the noncommissioned officer accompanying it advances
alone and gives the countersign.


=Section 13. Watchmen.=

=221.= Enlisted men may be detailed as watchmen or as overseers over
prisoners, and as such will receive their orders and perform their
duties as the commanding officer may direct.


=Section 14. Compliments from Guards.=

=222.= The compliment from a guard consists in the guard turning out
and presenting arms. (See Par. 50.) No compliments will be paid
between retreat and reveille except as provided in paragraphs 361 and
362, nor will any person other than those named in paragraph 224
receive the compliment.

=223.= Though a guard does not turn out between retreat and reveille
as a matter of compliment, it may be turned out for inspection at any
time by a person entitled to inspect it.

=224.= Between reveille and retreat, the following persons are
entitled to the compliment: The President; sovereign or chief
magistrate of a foreign country and members of a royal family; Vice
President; President and President pro tempore of the Senate; American
and foreign ambassadors; members of the Cabinet; Chief Justice;
Speaker of the House of Representatives; committees of Congress
officially visiting a military post; governors within their respective
States and Territories; governors general; Assistant Secretary of War
officially visiting a military post; all general officers of the Army;
general officers of foreign services visiting a post; naval, marine,
volunteer, and militia officers in the service of the United States
and holding the rank of general officer; American or foreign envoys or
ministers; ministers accredited to the United States; charges
d'affaires accredited to the United States; consuls general accredited
to the United States; commanding officer of the post or camp; officer
of the day.

=225.= The relative rank between officers of the Army and Navy is as
follows: General with admiral, lieutenant general with vice admiral,
major general with rear admiral, brigadier general with commodore,[14]
colonel with captain, lieutenant colonel with commander, major with
lieutenant commander, captain with lieutenant, first lieutenant with
lieutenant (junior grade), second lieutenant with ensign. (A. R. 12.)

         [Footnote 14: The grade of commodore ceased to exist as a
         grade on the active list of the Navy of the United States on
         Mar. 3, 1899. By section 7 of the act of Mar. 3, 1899, the
         nine junior rear admirals are authorized to receive the pay
         and allowances of a brigadier general of the Army.]

=226.= Sentinels will not be required to memorize paragraph 224, and,
except in the cases of general officers of the Army, the commanding
officer and the officer of the day will be advised in each case of the
presence in camp or garrison of persons entitled to the compliment.

=227.= Guards will turn out and present arms when the national or
regimental colors or standards, not cased, are carried past by a guard
or an armed party. This rule also applies when the party carrying the
colors is at drill. If the drill is conducted in the vicinity of the
guardhouse, the guard will be turned out when the colors first pass,
and not thereafter.

=228.= In case the remains of a deceased officer or soldier are
carried past, the guard will turn out and present arms.

=229.= In time of war all guards will turn out under arms when armed
parties, except troops at drill and reliefs or detachments of the
guard, approach their post. (See Par. 53.)

=230.= The commander of the guard will be notified of the presence in
camp or garrison of all persons entitled to the compliment except
general officers of the Army, the commanding officer, and the officer
of the day. Members of the guard will salute all persons entitled to
the compliment and all officers in the military or naval service of
foreign powers, officers of the Army, Navy, and Marine Corps, officers
of volunteers, and officers of militia when in uniform.


GENERAL RULES CONCERNING GUARD DUTY.

=232.= _Eighty-fifth article of war._--* * * Any person subject to
military law, except an officer, who is found drunk on duty shall be
punished as a court-martial may direct.

=233.= All material instructions given to a member of the guard by an
officer having authority will be promptly communicated to the
commander of the guard by the officer giving them.

=234.= Should the guard be formed, soldiers will fall in ranks under
arms. At roll call each man, as his name or number and relief are
called, will answer "Here," and come to an order arms.

=235.= Whenever the guard or a relief is dismissed, each member not
at once required for duty will place his rifle in the arm racks, if
they be provided, and will not remove it therefrom unless he requires
it in the performance of some duty.

=236.= Without permission from the commander of the guard, members of
the main guard, except orderlies, will not leave the immediate
vicinity of the guardhouse. Permission to leave will not be granted
except in cases of necessity.

=237.= Members of the main guard, except orderlies, will not remove
their accouterments or clothing without permission from the commander
of the guard. (Par. 66.)


=Section 15. Prisoners.=

=238.= Articles of war 69, 70, 71, 72, and 73 have special reference
to the confinement of prisoners and should be carefully borne in mind.

=239.= The commander of the guard will place a civilian in confinement
on an order from higher authority only, unless such civilian is
arrested while in the act of committing some crime within the limits
of the military jurisdiction, in which case the commanding officer
will be immediately notified.

=240.= Except as provided in the sixty-eighth article of war, or when
restraint is necessary, no soldier will be confined without the order
of an officer, who shall previously inquire into his offense. (=A. R.
930.=)

=241.= An officer ordering a soldier into confinement will send, as
soon as practicable, a written statement, signed by himself, to the
commander of the guard, setting forth the name, company, and regiment
of such soldier, and a brief statement of the alleged offense. It is a
sufficient statement of the offense to give the number and article of
war under which the soldier is charged.

=242.= A prisoner, after his first day of confinement, and until his
sentence has been duly promulgated, is considered as held in
confinement by the commanding officer. After due promulgation of his
sentence, the prisoner is held in confinement by authority of the
officer who reviews the proceedings of the court awarding sentence.
The commander of the guard will state in his report, in the proper
place, the name of the officer by whom the prisoner was originally
confined.

=243.= Enlisted men against whom charges have been preferred will be
designated as "awaiting trial"; enlisted men who have been tried will,
prior to the promulgation of the result be designated as "awaiting
result of trial"; enlisted men serving sentences of confinement not
involving dishonorable discharge will be designated as "garrison
prisoners." Persons sentenced to dismissal or dishonorable discharge
and to terms of confinement at military posts or elsewhere will be
designated as "general prisoners." (=A. R. 928.=)

=244.= The sentences of prisoners will be read to them when the order
promulgating the same is received. The officer of the guard, or the
officer of the day if there be no officer of the guard, will read them
unless the commanding officer shall direct otherwise.

=245.= When the date for the commencement of a term of confinement
imposed by sentence of a court-martial is not expressly fixed by
sentence, the term of confinement begins on the date of the order
promulgating it. The sentence is continuous until the term expires,
except when the person sentenced is absent without authority. (=A. R.
969.=)

=246.= When soldiers awaiting trial or the result of trial, or
undergoing sentence commit offenses for which they are tried, the
second sentence will be executed upon the expiration of the first.

=247.= Prisoners awaiting trial by, or undergoing sentence of, a
general court-martial and those confined for serious offenses will be
kept apart, when practicable, from those confined by sentence of an
inferior court or for minor offenses. Enlisted men in confinement for
minor offenses, or awaiting trial or the result of trial for the same,
will ordinarily be sent to work under charge of unarmed overseers
instead of armed sentinels and will be required to attend drills
unless the commanding officer shall direct otherwise.

=248.= Prisoners, other than general prisoners, will be furnished with
food from their respective companies or from the organizations to
which they may be temporarily attached.

The food of prisoners will, when practicable, be sent to their places
of confinement, but post commanders may arrange to send the prisoners,
under proper guard, to their messes for meals.

When there is no special mess for general prisoners, they will be
attached for rations to companies.

Enlisted men bringing meals for the prisoners will not be allowed to
enter the prison room. (See Par. 289.)

=249.= With the exception of those specially designated by the
commanding officer, no prisoners will be allowed to leave the
guardhouse unless under charge of a sentinel and passed by an officer
or noncommissioned officer of the guard. The commanding officer may
authorize certain garrison prisoners and paroled general prisoners to
leave the guardhouse, not under the charge of a sentinel, for the
purpose of working outside under such surveillance and restrictions as
he may impose.

=250.= Prisoners reporting themselves sick at sick call, or at the
time designated by the commanding officer, will be sent to the
hospital under charge of proper guard, with a sick report kept for the
purpose. The recommendation of the surgeon will be entered in the
guard report.

=251.= The security of sick prisoners in the hospital devolves upon
the post surgeon, who will, if necessary, apply to the post commander
for a guard.

=252.= Prisoners will be paraded with the guard only when directed by
the commanding officer or the officer of the day.

=253.= A prisoner under charge of a sentinel will not salute an
officer.

=254.= All serviceable clothing which belongs to a prisoner, and his
blankets, will accompany him to the post designated for his
confinement, and will be fully itemized on the clothing list sent to
that post. The guard in charge of the prisoner during transfer will be
furnished with a duplicate of this list, and will be held responsible
for the delivery of all articles itemized therein with the prisoner.
At least one serviceable woolen blanket will be sent with every such
prisoner so transferred. (=A. R. 939.=)

=255.= When mattresses are not supplied, each prisoner in the
guardhouse will be allowed a bed sack and 30 pounds of straw per month
for bedding. So far as practicable iron bunks will be furnished to all
prisoners in post guardhouses and prison rooms. (=A. R. 1084.=)

If the number of prisoners, including general prisoners, confined at a
post justifies it, the commanding officer will detail a commissioned
officer as "officer in charge of prisoners". At posts where the
average number of prisoners continually in confinement is less than
12, the detail of an officer in charge of prisoners will not be made.


=Section 16. Guarding Prisoners.=

=299.= The sentinel at the post of the guard has charge of the
prisoners except when they have been turned over to the prisoner guard
or overseers. (Pars. 247 and 300 to 304.)

=(a) He will allow none to escape.=

=(b) He will allow none to cross his post leaving the guardhouse
except when passed by an officer or noncommissioned officer of the
guard.=

=(c) He will allow no one to communicate with prisoners without
permission from proper authority.=

=(d) He will promptly report to the corporal of the guard any
suspicious noise made by the prisoners.=

=(e) He will be prepared to tell, whenever asked, how many prisoners
are in the guardhouse and how many are out at work or elsewhere.=

Whenever prisoners are brought to his post returning from work or
elsewhere, he will halt them and call the corporal of the guard,
notifying him of the number of prisoners returning. Thus: "=Corporal
of the guard, (so many) prisoners.="

He will not allow prisoners to pass into the guardhouse until the
corporal of the guard has responded to the call and ordered him to do
so.

=300.= Whenever practicable, special guards will be detailed for the
particular duty of guarding working parties composed of such prisoners
as can not be placed under overseers. (Par. 247.)

=301.= The prisoner guard and overseers will be commanded by the
police officer; if there be no police officer, then by the officer of
the day.

=302.= The provost sergeant is sergeant of the prisoner guard and
overseers, and as such receives orders from the commanding officer and
the commander of the prisoner guard only.

=303.= Details for prisoner guard are marched to the guardhouse and
mounted by being inspected by the commander of the main guard, who
determines whether all of the men are in proper condition to perform
their duties and whether their arms and equipments are in proper
condition, and rejects any men found unfit.

=304.= When prisoners have been turned over to the prisoner guard or
overseers, such guards or overseers are responsible for them under
their commander, and all responsibility and control of the main guard
ceases until they are returned to the main guard. (Par. 306.)

=305.= If a prisoner attempts to escape, the sentinel will call
"=Halt.=" If he fails to halt when the sentinel has once repeated his
call, and if there be no other possible means of preventing his
escape, the sentinel will fire upon him.

The following will more fully explain the important duties of a
sentinel in this connection:

  (Circular.)                                WAR DEPARTMENT,
                                       ADJUTANT GENERAL'S OFFICE,
                                       _Washington, November 1, 1887_.

  By direction of the Secretary of War, the following is published
  for the information of the Army:

  UNITED STATES CIRCUIT COURT, EASTERN DISTRICT OF MICHIGAN,
  AUGUST 1, 1887.

  THE UNITED STATES V. JAMES CLARK.

     The circuit court has jurisdiction of a homicide committed by one
     soldier upon another within a military reservation of the United
     States.

     If a homicide be committed by a military guard without malice and
     in the performance of his supposed duty as a soldier, such
     homicide is excusable, unless it was manifestly beyond the scope
     of his authority or was such that a man of ordinary sense and
     understanding would know that it was illegal.

     It seems that the sergeant of the guard has a right to shoot a
     military convict if there be no other possible means of
     preventing his escape.

     The common-law distinction between felonies and misdemeanors has
     no application to military offenses.

     While the finding of a court of inquiry acquitting the prisoner
     of all blame is not a legal bar to a prosecution, it is entitled
     to weight as an expression of the views of the military court of
     the necessity of using a musket to prevent the escape of the
     deceased.

       *       *       *       *       *

  By order of the Secretary of War:
                                       R. C. DRUM, _Adjutant General_.

  The following is taken from Circular No. 3, of 1883, from Headquarters
  Department of the Columbia:

                          VANCOUVER BARRACKS, W. T., _April 20, 1883_.
  To the ASSISTANT ADJUTANT GENERAL,
  _Department of the Columbia_.

     Sir:

       *       *       *       *       *

     A sentinel is placed as guard over prisoners to prevent their
     escape, and, for this purpose, he is furnished a musket, with
     ammunition. To prevent escape is his first and most important
     duty.

       *       *       *       *       *

     I suppose the law to be this: That a sentinel shall not use more
     force or violence to prevent the escape of a prisoner than is
     necessary to effect that object, but if the prisoner, after being
     ordered to halt, continues his flight the sentinel may maim or
     even kill him, and it is his duty to do so.

     A sentinel who allows a prisoner to escape without firing upon
     him, and firing to hit him, is, in my judgment, guilty of a most
     serious military offense, for which he should and would be
     severely punished by a general court-martial.

       *       *       *       *       *

                                      (Signed)   HENRY A. MORROW,
                     _Colonel Twenty-first Infantry, Commanding Post_.


     [Third indorsement.]

                                      OFFICE JUDGE ADVOCATE,
                                MILITARY DIVISION OF THE PACIFIC,
                                                       _May 11, 1883_.

     Respectfully returned to the assistant adjutant general, Military
     Division of the Pacific, concurring fully in the views expressed
     by Col. Morrow. I was not aware that such a view had ever been
     questioned. That the period is a time of peace does not affect
     the authority and duty of the sentinel or guard to fire upon the
     escaping prisoner, if this escape can not otherwise be
     prevented. He should, of course, attempt to stop the prisoner
     before firing by ordering him to halt, and will properly warn him
     by the words "Halt, or I fire," or words to such effect.

     W. WINTHROP, _Judge Advocate_.


     [Fourth indorsement.]

  HEADQUARTERS MILITARY DIVISION OF THE PACIFIC,
                                                       _May 11, 1883_,

     Respectfully returned to the commanding general, Department of
     the Columbia, approving the opinion of the commanding officer,
     Twenty-first Infantry, and of the judge advocate of the division,
     in respect to the duty of and method to be adopted by sentinels
     in preventing prisoners from escaping.

       *       *       *       *       *

  By command of Maj. Gen. Schofield:
                                                    J. C. KELTON,
                                         _Assistant Adjutant General_.

See also Circular No. 53, A. G. O., December 22, 1900.

=306.= On approaching the post of the sentinel at the guardhouse, a
sentinel of the prisoner guard or an overseer in charge of prisoners
will halt them and call, "=No. 1, (so many) prisoners.=" He will not
allow them to cross the post of the sentinel until so directed by the
corporal of the guard.

=307.= Members of the prisoner guard and overseers placed over
prisoners for work will receive specific and explicit instructions
covering the required work; they will be held strictly responsible
that the prisoners under their charge properly and satisfactorily
perform the designated work.


=Section 17. Stable guards.=

STABLE GUARDS.

=308.= Under the head of stable guards will be included guards for
cavalry stables, artillery stables and parks, mounted infantry
stables, machine-gun organization stables and parks, and
quartermaster stables and parks. Where the words "troop" and "cavalry"
are used, they will be held to include all of these organizations.

=309.= When troop stable guards are mounted they will guard the
stables of the cavalry (see Par. 13). When no stable guards are
mounted the stables will be guarded by sentinels posted from the main
guard under the control of the officer of the day.

The instructions given for troop stable guard will be observed as far
as applicable by the noncommissioned officers and sentinels of the
main guard when in charge of the stables.


TROOP STABLE GUARDS.

=310.= Troop stable guards will not be used except in the field, or
when it is impracticable to guard the stables by sentinels from the
main guard.

=311.= Troop stable guards will be under the immediate control of
their respective troop commanders; they will be posted in each cavalry
stable or near the picket line, and will consist of not less than one
noncommissioned officer and three privates.

Stable guards are for the protection of the horses, stables, forage,
equipments, and public property generally. They will, in addition,
enforce the special regulations in regard to stables, horses, and
parks.

=312.= Sentinels of stable guards will be posted at the stables or at
the picket lines when the horses are kept outside. The troop stable
guard may be used as a herd guard during the day time or when grazing
is practicable.

=313.= The troop stable guard, when authorized by the post commander,
will be mounted under the supervision of the troop commander. It will
be armed, at the discretion of the troop commander, with either rifle
or pistol.

=314.= The tour continues for 24 hours, or until the guard is relieved
by a new guard.

=315.= The employment of stable guards for police and fatigue duties
at the stables is forbidden; but this will not prohibit them from
being required to assist in feeding grain before reveille.

=316.= The troop stable guard will attend stables with the rest of the
troop and groom their own horses, the sentinels being taken off post
for the purpose.

=317.= Neither the noncommissioned officer nor the members of the
stable guard will absent themselves from the immediate vicinity of the
stables except in case of urgent necessity, and then for no longer
time than is absolutely necessary. No member of the guard will leave
for any purpose without the authority of the noncommissioned officer
of the guard.

=318.= The noncommissioned officer and one member of the stable guard
will go for meals at the proper hour; upon their return the other
members of the guard will be directed to go by the noncommissioned
officer.

=319.= When the horses are herded each troop will furnish its own herd
guard. (Par. 14.)

=320.= Smoking in the stables or their immediate vicinity is
prohibited. No fire or light, other than electric light or stable
lanterns, will be permitted in the stables. A special place will be
designated for trimming, filling, and lighting lanterns.


NONCOMMISSIONED OFFICER OF THE TROOP STABLE GUARD.

=321.= The noncommissioned officer receives his orders from his troop
commander, to whom he will report immediately after posting his first
relief, and when relieved will turn over all his orders to his
successor. He instructs his sentinels in their general and special
duties; exercises general supervision over his entire guard; exacts
order and cleanliness about the guardroom; prevents the introduction
of intoxicants into the guardhouse and stables; receives, by count,
from his predecessor, the animals, horse equipments, and all property
(both private and public) pertaining thereto; examines, before
relieving his predecessor, all locks, windows, and doors, and should
any be found insecure he will report the fact to his troop commander
when he reports for orders. He will personally post and relieve each
sentinel, taking care to verify the property responsibility of the
sentinel who comes off post, and see that the sentinel who goes on
post is aware of the property responsibility that he assumes.

=322.= That the noncommissioned officer may be more thoroughly
informed of his responsibility, all horses returning, except those
from a regular formation, will be reported to him. He will then notify
the sentinel on post, and, in the absence of the stable sergeant, will
see that the horses are promptly cared for.

In case of abuse, he will promptly report to the troop commander.
Should the horse be the private property of an officer, he will report
such abuse to the owner.

=323.= The noncommissioned officer will report any unusual occurrence
during his tour direct to his troop commander.

=324.= Horses and other property for which the noncommissioned officer
is responsible will not be taken from the stables without the
authority of the post or troop commander.

=325.= The noncommissioned officer must answer the sentinel's calls
promptly.

=326.= In case of fire, the noncommissioned officer will see that the
requirements of paragraph 334 are promptly carried out.

=327.= Whenever it becomes necessary for the noncommissioned officer
to leave his guard, he will designate a member of it to take charge
and assume his responsibility during his absence.


SENTINELS OF THE TROOP STABLE GUARD.

=328.= The sentinel in the discharge of his duties will be governed by
the regulations for sentinels of the main guard whenever they are
applicable--such as courtesies to officers, walking post in a
soldierly manner, challenging, etc.; he will not turn out the guard
except when ordered by proper authority.

=329.= The sentinel will receive orders from the commanding officer,
the troop commander, and the noncommissioned officers of the stable
guard only, except when the commanding officer directs the officer of
the day to inspect the stable guard.

=330.= In the field and elsewhere when directed by the commanding
officer the sentinel when posted will verify the number of horses for
which he is responsible, and when relieved will give the number to
his successor.

=331.= The sentinel will not permit any horse or equipments to be
taken from the stables, except in the presence of the noncommissioned
officer.

=332.= Should a horse get loose, the sentinel will catch him and tie
him up. If he be unable to catch the horse, the noncommissioned
officer will at once be notified. In case a horse be cast, or in any
way entangled, he will relieve him, if possible; if unable to relieve
him, he will call the noncommissioned officer. Sentinels are forbidden
to punish or maltreat a horse.

=333.= When a horse is taken sick, the sentinel will notify the
noncommissioned officer, who in turn will call the farrier and see
that the horse is properly attended to.

=334.= In case of fire the sentinel will give the alarm by stepping
outside the stable and firing his pistol or piece repeatedly, and
calling out at the same time, "=Fire, stables, Troop (----).="

As soon as the guard is alarmed, he will take the necessary
precautions in opening or closing the doors so as to prevent the
spreading of the fire and make it possible to remove the horses; he
will drop the chains and bars, and, with the other members of the
guard, proceed to lead out the horses and secure them at the picket
line or such other place as may have been previously designated.

=335.= Sentinels over horses, or in charge of prisoners, receive
orders from the stable sergeant, so far as the care of the horses and
the labor of prisoners are concerned.

=336.= In field artillery and machine-gun organizations, the guard for
the stables has charge of the guns, caissons, etc., with their
ammunition and stores, as well as the horses, harness, and forage.


=Section 18. Flags.=

=337.= The garrison, post, and storm flags are national flags and
shall be of bunting. The union of each is as described in paragraph
216, Army Regulations, and shall be of the following proportions:
Width, seven-thirteenths of the hoist of the flag; length, seventy-six
one-hundredths of the hoist of the flag.

The garrison flag will have 38 feet fly and 20 feet hoist. It will be
furnished only to posts designated in orders from time to time from
the War Department, and will be hoisted only on holidays and important
occasions.

The post flag will have 19 feet fly and 10 feet hoist. It will be
furnished for all garrison posts and will be hoisted in pleasant
weather.

The storm flag will have 9 feet 6 inches fly and 5 feet hoist. It will
be furnished for all occupied posts for use in stormy and windy
weather. It will also be furnished to national cemeteries. (A. R.
223.)

=338.= At every military post or station the flag will be hoisted at
the sounding of the first note of the reveille, or of the first note
of the march, if a march be played before the reveille. The flag will
be lowered at the sounding of the last note of the retreat, while the
flag is being lowered the band will play "The Star-Spangled Banner,"
or, if there be no band present, the field music will sound "to the
color." When "to the color" is sounded by the field music while the
flag is being lowered the same respect will be observed as when "The
Star-Spangled Banner" is played by the band, and in either case
officers and enlisted men out of ranks will face toward the flag,
stand at attention, and render the prescribed salute at the last note
of the music. (A. R. 437.)

The lowering of the flag will be so regulated as to be completed at
the last note of "The Star-Spangled Banner" or "to the color."

=339.= The national flag will be displayed at a seacoast or lake fort
at the beginning of and during an action in which a fort may be
engaged, whether by day or by night. (A. R. 437.)

=340.= The national flag will always be displayed at the time of
firing a salute. (A. R. 397.)

=341.= The flag of a military post will not be dipped by way of salute
or compliment. (A. R. 405.)

=342.= On the death of an officer at a military post the flag is
displayed at halfstaff and so remains between reveille and retreat
until the last salvo or volley is fired over the grave; or if the
remains are not interred at the post until they are removed therefrom.
(A. R. 422.)

=343.= During the funeral of an enlisted man at a military post the
flag is displayed at halfstaff. It is hoisted to the top after the
final volley or gun is fired or after the remains are taken from the
post. The same honors are paid on the occasion of the funeral of a
retired enlisted man. (A. R. 423.)

=344.= When practicable, a detail consisting of a noncommissioned
officer and two privates of the guard will raise or lower the flag.
This detail wears side arms or if the special equipments do not
include side arms then belts only.

The noncommissioned officer, carrying the flag, forms the detail in
line, takes his post in the center and marches it to the staff. The
flag is then securely attached to the halyards and rapidly hoisted.
The halyards are then securely fastened to the cleat on the staff and
the detail marched to the guardhouse.

=345.= When the flag is to be lowered, the halyards are loosened from
the staff and made perfectly free. At retreat the flag is lowered at
the last note of retreat. It is then neatly folded and the halyards
made fast. The detail is then re-formed and marched to the guardhouse,
where the flag is turned over to the commander of the guard.

The flag should never be allowed to touch the ground and should always
be hoisted or lowered from the leeward side of the staff, the halyards
being held by two persons.


=Section 19. Reveille and Retreat Gun.=

=346.= The morning and evening gun will be fired by a detachment of
the guard, consisting, when practicable, of a corporal and two
privates. The morning gun is fired at the first note of reveille, or,
if marches be played before the reveille, it is fired at the beginning
of the first march. The retreat gun is fired at the last note of
retreat.

The corporal marches the detachment to and from the piece, which is
fired, sponged out, and secured under his direction.


=Section 20. Guard Mounting.=

=347.= Guard mounting will be formal or informal as the commanding
officer may direct. It will be held as prescribed in the drill
regulations of the arm of the service to which the guard belongs. If
none is prescribed, then as for infantry. In case the guard is
composed wholly of mounted organizations, guard mounting may be held
mounted.

=348.= When Infantry and mounted troops dismounted are united for
guard mounting, all details form as prescribed for Infantry.


FORMAL GUARD MOUNTING--MOUNTED.

(Extract Cavalry Drill Regulations, 1916.)

=857.= Formal guard mounting will ordinarily be held only in posts or
camps where a band is present. At the _assembly_ the men of each troop
designated for guard form at stand to horse on their troop parade
grounds, the noncommissioned officers falling in as file closers; the
supernumeraries do not fall in; each first sergeant verifies his
detail and inspects the dress and general appearance, replaces any man
unfit to go on guard, turns the detail over to the senior
noncommissioned officer, and retires. The senior noncommissioned
officer then mounts, draws saber, and causes the detail to mount. The
band, accompanied by the buglers, takes its place on the parade ground
so that the left of its front rank shall be 12 yards to the right of
the rank when the guard is formed.

=858.= At _adjutant's call_ the adjutant takes post so as to be 12
yards in front of and facing the center of the guard when formed; the
sergeant major takes post facing to the left 12 yards to the left of
the front rank of the band; the band plays in appropriate time, the
details are marched to the parade ground by their senior
noncommissioned officers; the detail that arrives first is marched to
the line so that upon halting the head of the horse of the man on the
right shall be on line with and near to the sergeant major's horse,
the noncommissioned officer, having halted his detail, places himself
facing the sergeant major at a distance from him a little greater than
the front of his detail, and commands: =DRESS.= The detail dresses on
its right trooper; the noncommissioned officers of the detail in the
line of file closers rein back so as to be 6 yards in rear of the
rank; the noncommissioned officer in command of the detail then
commands, =Front=, salutes, and reports, _The detail is correct_, or
_(so many) sergeants, corporals, or privates are absent_; the sergeant
major returns the salute; the noncommissioned officer in charge of the
detail then passes by the right of the guard and takes post on the
line of noncommissioned officers in rear of the right trooper of his
detail. Should there be more than one detail, it is formed in like
manner on the left of the one preceding; the privates, noncommissioned
officers, and commander of each detail dress on those of the preceding
details in the same rank or line.

Should the detail from a troop not include a noncommissioned officer,
one will be detailed to perform the duties of commander of the detail.
In this case such noncommissioned officer, after reporting to the
sergeant major, passes around the right flank between the guard and
the band and retires.

The troops detailed alternate in taking the right of the line.

=859.= When the last detail has formed the sergeant major draws saber,
verifies the details, causes the guard to count fours, and, if there
be more than five fours, divides the guard into two or more platoons;
he designates the center guide or guides and then commands, =DRESS=
(Par. 362), verifies the alignment of rank and the line of
noncommissioned officers, and then returns to the right of the rank,
turns to the left, commands, =FRONT=, passes to a point midway between
the adjutant and center of the guard, halts facing the adjutant,
salutes, and reports: _Sir, the details are correct_; or, _Sir, (so
many) sergeants, corporals, or privates are absent_; the adjutant
returns the salute, directs the sergeant major: _Take your post_, and
then draws saber; the sergeant major turns to the left about and takes
post 3 yards to the left of and on a line with the rank. When the
sergeant major has completed his report the officer of the guard takes
post facing to the front 8 yards in front of the center of the guard
and draws saber. The adjutant then directs, _Inspect your guard, Sir_,
at which the commander of the guard turns about, commands: 1. =Draw=,
2. =SABER=, 3. =Prepare for inspection=, 4. =MARCH=, moves toward and
inspects the guard, as in troop inspection. During the inspection the
band plays.

The adjutant returns saber, observes the general condition of the
guard, and falls out any man who is unfit for guard duty or does not
present a creditable appearance. Substitutes will report to the
commander of the guard at the guard house.

The adjutant, when so directed, selects orderlies and color sentinels
as prescribed in the Manual of Interior Guard Duty and notifies the
commander of the guard of his selection. He may require a trooper to
move out of the rank and to dismount for a more minute inspection. He
also notifies the two senior noncommissioned officers to act as
platoon leaders if there has been a division into platoons. If there
be a junior officer of the guard, he takes post at the same time as
the senior, facing to the front 3 yards in front of the guide of the
first platoon, and the senior of the two noncommissioned officers acts
and takes post as chief of the second platoon. The junior officer of
the guard may be directed by the commander of the guard to assist in
inspecting the guard.

=860.= If there be no officer of the guard the adjutant inspects the
guard and during the inspection notifies the senior noncommissioned
officer to command the guard and the next two senior noncommissioned
officers to serve as platoon leaders. A noncommissioned officer
commanding the guard takes the post of the officer of the guard, the
next senior noncommissioned officer the post of the junior officer of
the guard.

The inspection ended, the adjutant places himself about 30 yards in
front of and facing the center of the guard and draws saber. The new
officer of the day takes post in front of and facing the guard about
30 yards from the adjutant. The old officer of the day takes post 3
yards to the right of and 1 yard less advanced than the new officer of
the day. The commander of the guard takes post 8 yards in front of the
right trooper, facing to the front, and draws saber.

The adjutant then commands: 1. =Draw=, 2. =SABER=, 3. =SOUND OFF.=

The band, playing, passes in front of the commander of the guard to
the left of the line and back to its post on the right, when it ceases
playing.

The adjutant then commands =POSTS=, at which platoon leaders take
their posts 3 yards in front of the guides of their platoons, facing
to the front, and the commander of the guard takes post 6 yards in
front of the leader of the center (right) platoon, facing to the
front, and the file closers resume their places 3 yards in rear of the
rank. If there be no junior officer of the guard, the commander of the
guard takes post 3 yards in front of the center guide.

The commander of the guard and the chiefs of platoon and file closers
having taken their posts, the adjutant commands: 1. =Present=, 2.
=SABER=, faces toward the officer of the day, salutes, and then
reports, _Sir, the guard is formed_.

The new officer of the day, after the adjutant has reported, salutes
with the hand and directs the adjutant, _March the guard in review,
Sir._

=861.= The adjutant turns about, brings the guard to a carry, and
commands: 1. =Platoons right turn=, 2. =MARCH=; 3. =Guard=, 4. =HALT.=
The platoons execute the movement as in the troop, the band takes post
in front of the column (Par 806). The adjutant places himself abreast
of the first platoon and 6 yards from its left flank; the sergeant
major abreast of the second platoon and 6 yards from its left flank.
The adjutant then commands: 1. =Pass in review=, 2. =FORWARD=, 3.
=MARCH.=

The guard marches at the walk past the officer of the day, according
to the principles of squadron review, the adjutant, commander of the
guard, chiefs of platoon, sergeant major, and drum major saluting. The
new officer of the day returns the salute of the commander of the
guard and the adjutant only, making one salute with the hand.

=862.= The band, having passed the officer of the day, turns to the
left out of the column, places itself opposite to and facing him, and
continues to play until the guard leaves the parade ground. The
buglers detach themselves from the band when the latter turns out of
the column and remain in front of the guard, commencing to play when
the band ceases. In the absence of the band the buglers do not turn
out of the column, but continue to play in front of the guard.

=863.= The guard having passed 12 yards beyond the officer of the day,
the adjutant halts; the sergeant major halts alongside of the adjutant
and 1 yard to his left; they then return saber, salute, and retire.
The commander of the guard then, without halting, breaks the guard
into column of fours and marches it to its post.

=864.= The officers of the day turn toward each other and salute, the
old officer of the day turning over the orders to the new officer of
the day.

While the band is sounding off and while the guard is passing in
review the officers of the day remain at attention.

=865.= If the guard be not divided into platoons the adjutant
commands: 1. =Guard right turn=, 2. =MARCH=; 3. =Guard=, 4: =HALT=,
and it passes in review as explained; the commander of the guard is 3
yards in front of its center guide, the adjutant is 6 yards from the
rank and abreast of the commander, the sergeant major covers the
adjutant and marches abreast of the rank.


RELIEVING THE OLD GUARD--(FORMAL GUARD MOUNTING, MOUNTED.)

=866.= As the new guard approaches the guardhouse the old guard is
formed in line at the carry saber, its buglers 3 yards to its right;
when the buglers at the head of the new guard arrive opposite the left
of the old guard its commander commands: 1. =Present=, 2. =SABER=;
both commanders salute and, when the new guard has passed the
commander of the old guard, the latter commands: 1. =Carry=, 2.
=SABER.= The buglers and guard continue marching without changing
direction until the rear of the column has passed 9 yards beyond the
buglers of the old guard, when the commander of the new guard
commands: 1. =Fours right=, 2. =MARCH.=

=867.= The buglers and guard are marched 3 yards in rear of the line
of the old guard, when the commander of the new guard commands: 1.
=Fours right about=, 2. =MARCH=; 3. =Guard=, 4. =HALT=; 5. =DRESS=; he
then, facing to the front, aligns his guard so as to be on a line with
the old guard and commands, =Front=; the buglers of the new guard are
3 yards to the right of the rank.

=868.= The new guard being dressed, the commander of each guard, in
front of and facing its center, commands: 1. =Present=, 2. =SABER=,
resumes his front, salutes, resumes the carry, faces his guard, and
commands: 1. =Carry=, 2. =SABER.=

Each guard is then presented by its commander to its officer of the
day; if there be but one officer of the day present, or if an officer
acts in the capacity of old and new officer of the day, each guard is
presented to him by its commander.

=869.= If another person entitled to a salute approaches, each
commander of the guard brings his own guard to attention if not
already at attention. The senior commander of the two guards then
commands: 1. =Old and new guards=, 2. =Present=, 3. =SABER.= The
junior will salute at the command "Present, Saber," given by the
senior. After the salute has been acknowledged the senior brings both
guards to the "Carry, Saber."

=870.= After the salutes have been acknowledged by the officers of the
day, each guard returns saber by command of its own officer of the
guard; the commander of the new guard then directs the orderly or
orderlies to fall out and report.

=871.= The commander of the new guard then falls out members of the
guard for detached posts, placing them under charge of the proper
noncommissioned officer, divides the guard into three reliefs,
_first_, _second_, and _third_, from right to left, and directs a list
of the guard to be made by reliefs. The sentinels and detachments of
the old guard are at once relieved by members of the new guard, the
two guards standing at ease or dismounted while these changes are
being made. The commander of the old transmits to the commander of the
new guard all his orders, instructions, and information concerning the
guard and its duties.

=872.= The commander of the new guard then has his own guard fall out,
takes possession of the guardhouse and verifies the articles in charge
of the guard.

=873.= If considerable time is required to bring in that portion of
the old guard still on post, the commanding officer may direct that as
soon as the orders and property are turned over to the new guard the
portion of the old guard at the guardhouse may be marched off and
dismissed. In such case the remaining detachments of the old guard
will be inspected by the commander of the new guard when they reach
the guardhouse. He will direct the senior noncommissioned officer
present to march these detachments off and dismiss them in the
prescribed manner.

=874.= In bad weather, at night, or after long marches the music may
be omitted, or the buglers may take the place of the band and sound
off standing on the right of the guard and the march in review be
omitted.

In cases in which an organization, entire or in part, is detailed for
guard, it is marched to the parade ground as a single detail (Par.
858.)

=875.= For detailed instructions for guards and sentinels see Manual
of Interior Guard Duty.


FORMAL GUARD MOUNTING, DISMOUNTED.

=876.= Guard mounting, dismounted, and relieving the old guard are
conducted on the same principles as when mounted, with the following
modifications:

(_a_) The men designated for guard fall in, dismounted, on their troop
parade grounds; noncommissioned officers not commanding detail, 2
paces in rear of rank.

(_b_) The detail that is to be on the right is marched to the line so
that upon halting the breast of the man on the right shall be near to
and opposite the left arm of the sergeant major. At the command
=DRESS=, the detail dresses up to the line of the sergeant major and
its commander, the man on the right placing his breast against the
left arm of the sergeant major.

(_c_) When the last detail has formed, the sergeant major takes a side
step to the right, draws saber if armed with one, verifies the detail,
takes post 2 paces to the right and 2 paces to the front of the guard,
facing to the left and causes the guard to count fours.

(_d_) When the sergeant major has reported, the officer of the guard
takes post 3 paces in front of the center of the guard, _draws saber_
and _orders saber_, the guard being at order arms.

The inspection which corresponds to that of par. 882 being ended, and
the officers of the day, the adjutant, and the commander of the guard
having taken their posts, the commander of the guard draws saber with
the adjutant and comes to the order.

The adjutant then commands: 1. =Parade=, 2. =Rest=, 3. =SOUND OFF=,
and comes to the _order_ and _parade rest_.

(_e_) After the band has sounded off, the adjutant, commander of the
guard, and platoon leaders come to attention, and the adjutant
commands: 1. =Present=, 2. =ARMS=, faces toward the officer of the day
and reports: _Sir, the guard is formed._ The new officer of the day,
after the adjutant has reported, returns the salute with the hand and
directs the adjutant: _March the guard in review, Sir._ The adjutant
carries saber, faces about, brings the guard to an order and
commands: 1. =At trail, platoons (or guard) right turn=, 2. =MARCH=;
3. =Guard=, 4. =HALT.=

The guard marches in quick time past the officer of the day, according
to the principles as when mounted.

While the band is sounding off and while the guard is marching in
review, the officers of the day stand at parade rest with arms folded.
They take this position when the adjutant comes to parade rest, resume
the attention with him, again take the parade rest at the first note
of the march in review, and resume attention as the head of the column
approaches.

(_f_) If the guard be not divided into platoons, the adjutant
commands: 1. =At trail, guard right turn=, 2. =MARCH=, 3. =Guard=, 4.
=HALT=, and it passes in review as explained; the commander of the
guard is 3 paces in front of its center guide.


=Section 21. Relieving the Old Guard.=

=360.= As the new guard approaches the guardhouse, the old guard is
formed in line, with its field music three paces to its right; and,
when the field music at the head of the new guard arrives opposite its
left, the commander of the new guard commands: 1. =Eyes, RIGHT=; the
commander of the old guard commands: 1. =Present=, 2. =ARMS=;
commanders of both guards salute. The new guard marches in quick time
past the old guard.

When the commander of the new guard is opposite the field music of the
old guard, he commands: =FRONT=; the commander of the old guard
commands: 1. =Order=, 2. =ARMS=, as soon as the new guard shall have
cleared the old guard.

The field music having marched three paces beyond the field music of
the old guard, changes direction to the right, and, followed by the
guard, changes direction to the left when on a line with the old
guard; the changes of direction are without command. The commander of
the guard halts on the line of the front rank of the old guard, allows
his guard to march past him, and, when its rear approaches, forms it
in line to the left, establishes the left guide three paces to the
right of the field music of the old guard, and on a line with the
front rank, and then dresses his guard to the left; the field music of
the new guard is three paces to the right of its front rank.

=361.= The new guard being dressed the commander of each guard, in
front of and facing its center, commands: 1. =Present=, 2. =ARMS=,
resumes his front, salutes, carries saber, faces his guard, and
commands: 1. =Order=, 2. =ARMS=.

Should a guard be commanded by a noncommissioned officer, he stands on
the right or left of the front rank, according as he commands the old
or new guard, and executes the rifle salute.

=362.= After the new guard arrives at its post and has saluted the old
guard, each guard is presented by its commander to its officer of the
day; if there be but one officer of the day present, or if one officer
acts in the capacity of old and new officer of the day, each guard is
presented to him by its commander.

=363.= If other persons entitled to a salute approach, each commander
of the guard will bring his own guard to attention if not already at
attention. The senior commander of the two guards will then command:
"1. =Old and new guards=, 2. =Present=, 3. =Arms=."

The junior will salute at the command "=Present Arms=" given by the
senior. After the salute has been acknowledged, the senior brings both
guards to the order.

=364.= After the salutes have been acknowledged by the officers of the
day, each guard is brought to an order by its commander; the commander
of the new guard then directs the orderly or orderlies to fall out and
report and causes bayonets to be fixed if so ordered by the commanding
officer; bayonets will not then be unfixed during the tour except in
route marches while the guard is actually marching or when specially
directed by the commanding officer.

The commander of the new guard then falls out members of the guard for
detached posts, placing them under charge of the proper
noncommissioned officers, divides the guard into three reliefs,
=first=, =second=, and =third=, from right, to left, and directs a
list of the guard to be made by reliefs. When the guard consists of
troops of different arms combined, the men are assigned to reliefs so
as to insure a fair division of duty under rules prescribed by the
commanding officer.

=365.= The sentinels and detachments of the old guard are at once
relieved by members of the new guard, the two guards standing at ease
or at rest while these changes are being made. The commander of the
old transmits to the commander of the new guard all his orders,
instructions, and information concerning the guard and its duties. The
commander of the new guard then takes possession of the guardhouse and
verifies the articles in charge of the guard.

=366.= If considerable time is required to bring in that portion of
the old guard still on post, the commanding officer may direct that as
soon as the orders and property are turned over to the new guard the
portion of the old guard at the guardhouse may be marched off and
dismissed. In such a case the remaining detachment or detachments of
the old guard will be inspected by the commander of the new guard when
they reach the guardhouse. He will direct the senior noncommissioned
officer present to march these detachments off and dismiss them in the
prescribed manner.

=367.= In bad weather, at night, after long marches, or when the
guard is very small, the field music may be dispensed with.




CHAPTER X.

MAP READING AND SKETCHING.


=Section 1. Military map reading.=

When you pick up a map, the first question is, Where is the north?
This can usually be told by an arrow (see fig. 1, p. 259) which will
be found in one of the corners of the map, and which points to the
true north--the north of the north star.

On some maps no arrow is to be found. The chances are a hundred to one
that the north is at the top of the map, as it is on almost all
printed maps. But you can only assure yourself of that fact by
checking the map with the ground it represents. For instance, if you
ascertain that the city of Philadelphia is due east of the city of
Columbus, then the Philadelphia-Columbus line on the map is a due
east-and-west line, and establishes at once all the other map
directions.

Now, the map represents the ground as nearly as it can be represented
on a flat piece of paper. If you are standing up, facing the north,
your right hand will be in the east, your left in the west, and your
back to the south. It is the same with a map; if you look across it in
the direction of the arrow--that is, toward its north--your right hand
will be toward what is east on the map; your left hand to the west;
the south will be at the bottom of the map.

[Illustration: Fig. 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 and scale.]

There is another kind of an arrow that sometimes appears on a map. It
is like the one in figure 2, page 259, and points not to the true
north but to the magnetic north, which is the north of the compass.
Though the compass needle, and therefore the arrow that represents it
on the map, does not point exactly north, the deviation is, from a
military point of view, slight, and appreciable error will rarely
result through the use of the magnetic instead of the true north in
the solution of any military problems.

Should you be curious to know the exact deviation, consult your local
surveyor or any civil engineer.

Both arrows may appear on your map. In that case disregard the
magnetic arrow unless you are using the map in connection with a
compass.

If a map is being used on the ground, the first thing to be done is to
put the lines of the map parallel to the real outlines of the ground
forms, and roads, fences, railroads, etc., that the map shows; for the
making of a map is no more than the drawing on paper of lines parallel
to and proportional in length to real directions and distances on the
ground.

For instance, the road between two places runs due north and south.
Then on the map a line representing the road will be parallel to the
arrow showing the north and will be proportional in length to the real
road. In this way a map is a picture, or better, a bare outline
sketch; and, as we can make out a picture, though it be upside down,
or crooked on the wall, so we can use a map that is upside down or not
parallel to the real ground forms. But it is easier to make out both
the picture and the map if their lines are parallel to what they
represent. So in using a map on the ground we always put the lines
parallel to the actual features they show. This is easy if the map has
an arrow.

If the map has no arrow, you must locate objects or features on the
ground, and on the map, their representations. Draw on the map a line
connecting any two of the features; place this line parallel to an
imaginary line through the two actual features located, and your map
will be correctly placed. Look to it that you do not reverse on the
map the positions of the two objects or features, or your map will be
exactly upside down.

When the map has been turned into the proper position--that is to say,
"oriented"--the next thing is to locate on the map your position. If
you are in the village of Easton and there is a place on the map
labeled Easton, the answer is apparent. But if you are out in the
country, at an unlabeled point that looks like any one of a dozen
other similar points, the task is more complicated. In this latter
case you must locate and identify, both on the map and on the ground,
other points--hills, villages, peculiar bends in rivers, forests--any
ground features that have some easily recognizable peculiarity and
that you can see from your position.

Suppose, for instance, you were near Leavenworth and wanted to locate
your exact position, of which you are uncertain. You have the map
shown in this manual, and, looking about, you see southwest from where
you stand the United States Penitentiary; also, halfway between the
south and the southeast--south-southeast a sailor would say--the
reservoir (rectangle west of "O" in "Missouri"). Having oriented your
map, draw on it a line from the map position of the reservoir toward
its actual position on the ground. Similarly draw a line from the map
position of penitentiary toward its actual position. Prolong the two
lines until they intersect. The intersection of the lines will mark
the place where you stand--south Merritt Hill.

This method consists merely in drawing on the map lines that represent
the lines of sight to known and visible places. The lines pass through
the map position of the places you see and are parallel to the actual
lines of sight; therefore they are the map representations of the
lines of sight, and their intersection is the map position of the eye
of the observer.

After this orientation and location of position, one can deduce from
the map everything there is to know in regard to directions. In this
respect, study of the ground itself will show no more than will study
of the map.

After "What direction?" comes "How far?" To answer this, one must
understand that the map distance between any two points shown bears a
fixed and definite relation or proportion to the real distance between
the two points.

For instance: We measure on a map and find the distance between two
points to be 1 inch. Then we measure the real distance on the ground
and find it to be 10,000 inches; hence the relation between the map
distance and the real distance is 1 to 10,000, or 1/10000. Now, if the
map is properly drawn, the same relation will hold good for all
distances, and we can obtain any ground distance by multiplying by
10,000 the corresponding map distance.

This relation need not be 1/10000, but may be anything from 1/100 that
an architect might use in making a map or plan of a house up to one
over a billion and a half, which is about the proportion between map
and real distances in a pocket-atlas representation of the whole world
on a 6-inch page. Map makers call this relation the "scale" of the map
and put it down in a corner in one of three ways.

For the sake of an illustration, say the relation between map and
ground distances is 1 to 100; that is, 1 inch on the map is equal to
100 on the ground. The scale may be written:

First. 1 inch equals 100.

Second. 1/100.

Third. As shown by figure 3 (p. 259).

These expressions mean one and the same thing. A variation of the
first method on a map of different scale might be: 1 inch equals 1
mile. Since a mile contains 63,360 inches, then the real distance
between any two points shown on the map is 63,360 times the map
distance.

To find the ground distance by the third kind of scale, copy it on the
edge of a slip of paper, apply the slip directly to the map, and read
off the distance; and so we answer the question, "How far?"

After direction and distance comes the interpretation of the signs,
symbols, and abbreviations on the map. Those authorized are given on
pages 272 and 273 (a reprint of Appendix 4, Field Service Regulations,
1914); but there are a good many other conventional signs in common
use. A key to them is published by the War Department and is called
"Conventional Signs, United States Army." From these you read at once
the natural and artificial features of the country shown on your map.
It should be borne in mind that these conventional signs are not
necessarily drawn to scale, as are the distances. They show the
position and outline of the features rather than the size. This for
the reason that many of the features shown, if drawn to scale, would
be so small that one could not make them out except with a magnifying
glass. If the exact dimensions are of any importance, they will be
written in figures on the map. For instance, bridges.

In addition to the above conventional signs, we have contours to show
the elevations, depressions, slope, and shape of the ground. Abroad,
hachures are much used, but they serve only to indicate elevation,
and, as compared to contours, are of little value. Contours resemble
the lines shown in figure 4 (p. 259).

Hachures are shown in figure 5 (p. 259), and may be found on any
European map. They simply show slopes, and, when carefully drawn, show
steeper slopes by heavier shading and gentler slopes by the fainter
hachures. The crest of the mountain is within the hachures. (See fig.
5, p. 259.)

_Contours._--A certain student, when asked by his instructor to define
"space," said: "I have it, sir, in my head, but can not put it into
words." The instructor replied: "I suppose that under those
circumstances, Mr. ----, the definition really would not help much."
And so it is with contours--the definition does not help much if you
know a contour when you meet it on a map. For examples of contours,
turn to the map facing page 274, and, starting at the United States
penitentiary, note the smooth, flowing, irregular curved lines marked
880, 860, 840, 840, 860, etc.

The only other lines on the map that at all resemble contours are
stream lines, like "Corral Creek," but the stream lines are readily
distinguished from contours by the fact that they cross the contours
squarely, while the contours run approximately parallel to each other.
Note the stream line just to the west of South Merritt Hill.

The contours represent lines on the ground that are horizontal and
whose meanderings follow the surface, just as the edge of a flood
would follow the irregularities of the hills about it. Those lines
that contours stand for are just as level as the water's edge of a
lake, but horizontally they wander back and forth to just as great a
degree.

The line marked 880, at the penitentiary, passes through on that
particular piece of ground every point that is 880 feet above sea
level. Should the Missouri River rise in flood to 880 feet, the
penitentiary would be on an island, the edge of which is marked by the
880 contour.

Contours show several things; among them the height of the ground they
cross. Usually the contour has labeled on it in figures the height
above some starting point, called the =datum plane=--generally sea
level. If, with a surveying instrument, you put in on a piece of
ground a lot of stakes, each one of which is exactly the same height
above sea level--that is, run a line of levels--then make a map
showing the location of the stakes, a line drawn on the map through
all the stake positions is a contour, and shows the position of all
points of that particular height.

On any given map all contours are equally spaced in a vertical
direction, and the map shows the location of a great number of points
at certain fixed levels. If you know the vertical interval between any
two adjacent contours, you know the vertical interval for all the
contours on that map, for these intervals on a given map are all the
same.

With reference to a point through which no contour passes, we can only
say that the point in question is not higher than the next contour up
the hill, nor lower than the next one down the hill. For the purposes
of any problem, it is usual to assume that the ground slopes evenly
between the two adjacent contours and that the vertical height of the
point above the lower contour is proportional to its horizontal
distance from the contour, as compared to the whole distance between
the two contours. For instance, on the map, find the height of point
A. The horizontal measurements are as shown on the map. The vertical
distance between the contours is 20 feet. A is about one-quarter of
the distance between the 800 and the 820 contours, and we assume its
height to be one-quarter of 20 feet (5 feet) higher than 800 feet. So
the height of A is 805 feet.

The vertical interval is usually indicated in the corner of the map by
the letters "V. I." For instance: V. I.=20 feet.

On maps of very small pieces of ground, the V. I. is usually
small--perhaps as small as 1 foot; on maps of large areas on a small
scale it may be very great--even 1,000 feet.

Contours also show =slopes=. It has already been explained that from
any contour to the next one above it the ground rises a fixed number
of feet, according to the vertical interval of that map. From the
scale of distances on the map the horizontal distance between any two
contours can be found. For example: On the map the horizontal distance
between D and E is 90 yards, or 270 feet. The vertical distance is 20
feet, the V. I. of the map. The slope then is 20/270 = 1/13.5 = 7-1/2%
= 4-1/2 deg., in all of which different ways the slope can be expressed.

[Illustration: Slope.]

On a good many contoured maps a figure like this will be found in one
of the corners:

[Illustration: Scale.]

On that particular map contours separated by the distance

[Illustration: Scale.]

on the vertical scale show a slope of 1 deg.; if separated by the distance
[Illustration: |__2 deg.__| ] they show a 2 deg. slope, etc. A slope of 1 deg. is
a rise of 1 foot in 57. To use this scale of slopes, copy it on the
edge of a piece of paper just as you did the scale of distances and
apply it directly to the map.

You will notice that where the contours lie closest the slope is
steepest; where they are farthest apart, the ground is most nearly
flat.

It has already been set forth how contours show height and slope; in
addition to this they show the shape of the ground, or GROUND FORMS.
Each single contour shows the shape at its particular level of the
hill or valley it outlines; for instance, the 880 contour about the
penitentiary shows that the hill at that level has a shape somewhat
like a horse's head. Similarly, every contour on the map gives us the
form of the ground at its particular level, and knowing these ground
forms for many levels we can form a fair conception of what the whole
surface is like.

A round contour like the letter O outlines a round ground feature; a
long, narrow one indicates a long, narrow ground feature.

Different hills and depressions have different shapes. A good many of
them have one shape at one level and another shape at another level,
all of which information will be given you by the contours on the map.

One of the ways to see how contours show the shape of the ground is to
pour half a bucket of water into a small depression in the ground. The
water's edge will be exactly level, and if the depression is
approximately round the water's edge will also be approximately round.
The outline will look something like figure 6.

Draw roughly on a piece of paper a figure of the same shape and you
will have a contour showing the shape of the bit of ground where you
poured your water.

Next, with your heel gouge out on one edge of your little pond a
small, round bay. The water will rush in and the watermark on the soil
will now be shaped something like figure 7.

Alter your drawing accordingly, and the new contour will show the new
ground shape.

Again do violence to the face of nature by digging with a stick a
narrow inlet opening out of your miniature ocean, and the watermark
will now look something like figure 8.

Alter your drawing once more and your contour shows again the hew
ground form. Drop into your main pond a round clod and you will have a
new watermark, like figure 9, to add to your drawing. This new
contour, of the same level with the one showing the limit of the
depression, shows on the drawing the round island.

Drop in a second clod, this time long and narrow, the watermark will
be like figure 10, and the drawing of it, properly placed, will show
another island of another shape. Your drawing now will look like
figure 11.

It shows a depression approximately round, off which open a round bay
and a long, narrow bay. There is also a round elevation and a long,
narrow one; a long, narrow ridge, jutting out between the two bays,
and a short, broad one across the neck of the round bay.

[Illustration: Fig. 6 to 11.]

Now flood your lake deeply enough to cover up the features you have
introduced. The new water line, about as shown by the dotted line in
figure 11, shows the oblong shape of the depression at a higher level;
the solid lines show the shape farther down; the horizontal distance
between the two contours at different points shows where the bank is
steep and where the slope is gentler.

Put together the information each of these contours gives you, and you
will see how contours show the shape of the ground. On the little map
you have drawn you have introduced all the varieties of ground forms
there are; therefore all contour forms.

The contours on an ordinary map seem much more complicated, but this
is due only to the number of them, their length, and many turns before
they finally close on themselves. Or they may close off the paper. But
trace each one out, and it will resolve itself into one of the forms
shown in figure 11.

Just as the high-tide line around the continents of North and South
America runs a long and tortuous course, but finally closes back on
itself, so will every contour do likewise. And just as truly as every
bend in that high-tide mark turns out around a promontory, or in
around a bay, so will every bend in a contour stand for a hill or a
valley, pointing to the lowlands if it be a hill, and to the height if
it mark a valley.

If the map embrace a whole continent or an island, all the contours
will be of closed form, as in figure 11, but if it embrace only a part
of the continent or island, some of the contours will be chopped off
at the edge of the map, and we have the open form of contours, as we
would have if figure 11 were cut into two parts.

The closed form may indicate a hill or a basin; the open form, a ridge
or a valley; sometimes a casual glance does not indicate which.

Take up, first, the contour of the open type. If the map shows a
stream running down the inside of the contour, there is no difficulty
in saying at once that the ground feature is a valley; for instance,
V, V, V, and the valley of Corral Creek on the map. But if there is no
stream line, does the contour bend show a valley or a ridge?

First of all, there is a radical difference between the bend of a
contour round the head of a valley and its bend round the nose of a
ridge.

Compare on the map the valleys V and the ridges R. The bend of the
contour round the head of the valley is much sharper than the bend of
the contour round the nose of the ridge. This is a general truth, not
only in regard to maps, but also in regard to ground forms. Study any
piece of open ground and note how much wider are the ridges than the
valleys. Where you find a "hog back" or "devil's backbone," you have
an exception to the rule, but the exceptions are not frequent enough
to worry over.

To tell whether a given point is on a ridge or in a valley, start from
the nearest stream shown on the map and work across the map to the
undetermined point, keeping in mind that in a real trip across the
country you start from the stream, go up the hill to the top of a
ridge, down the other side of the hill to a watercourse, then up a
hill to the top of a ridge, down again, up again, etc. That is all
traveling is--valley, hill, valley, hill, valley, etc., though you
wander till the crack o' doom. And so your map travels must
go--valley, hill, valley, hill--till you run off the map or come back
to the starting point.

On the map, follow the R-V line, V indicating valley and R ridge or
hill. Note first the difference in sharpness in the contour bends;
also how the valley contours point to the highland and the ridge
contours to the lowland.

The contours go thus:

[Illustration: Sketch Low / High land.]

The streams flow down the valleys, and the sharp angle of the contour
points always _up_ stream. Note also how the junction of a stream and
its tributary usually makes an angle that points _down_ stream.

"Which way does this stream run?"

Water flows down hill. If you are in the bed of a stream, contours
representing higher ground must be to your right and to your left. Get
the elevations of these contours. Generally the nearest contour to the
bank of the stream will cross the stream, and there will be an angle
or sharp turn in the contour at this crossing. If the point of the
angle or sharp turn is toward you, you are going downstream; if away
from you, you are going upstream.

If the contours are numbered, you have only to look at the numbers to
say where the low and where the high places are; but to read a map
with any speed one must be quite independent of these numbers. In
ordinary map reading look, first of all, for the stream lines. The
streams are the skeleton upon which the whole map is hung. Then pick
out the hilltops and ridges, and you have a body to clothe with all
the details that will be revealed by a close and careful study of what
the map maker has recorded.

As to closed contours, they may outline a depression or a hill On the
map "881" or "885" might be hills or ponds, as far as their shape is
concerned. But, clearly, they are hills, for on either side are small
streams running _away_ from them. If they were ponds, the stream lines
would run _toward_ the closed contours. The test of "hill, valley,
hill," will always solve the problem when there are not enough stream
lines shown to make evident at once whether a closed contour marks a
pond or a hill. Look in the beginning for the stream lines and
valleys, and, by contrast, if for no other reason, the hills and
ridges at once loom up.

To illustrate the subject of contours to aid those who have difficulty
in reading contoured maps the following is suggested:

1. Secure modeling clay and build a mound.

2. Use wire and slice this mound horizontally at equal vertical
intervals into zones; then insert vertical dowels through the mound of
clay.

3. Remove the top zone, place on paper, and draw outline of the bottom
edge. Trim your paper roughly to the outline drawn. Indicate where the
holes made by the dowels pierce the paper.

4. Do the above with each zone of your mound.

5. Place these papers in proper order on dowels similarly placed to
ones in original mound at, say, 1 inch vertical interval apart. A
skeleton mound results.

6. Replace the zones of the clay mound and form the original clay
mound along the side of skeleton mound.

7. Now force all the paper sheets down the dowels onto the bottom
sheet, and we have a map of clay mound with contours.

NOTE.--One-inch or 2-inch planks can be made into any desired form by
the use of dowels and similar procedure followed.

People frequently ask, "What should I see when I read a map?" and the
answer is given, "The ground as it is." This is not true any more than
it is true that the words "The valley of the Meuse," bring to your
mind vine-clad hills, a noble river, and green fields where cattle
graze. Nor can any picture ever put into your thought what the Grand
Canyon really is. What printed word or painted picture can not do, a
map will not. A map says to you, "Here stands a hill," "Here is a
valley," "This stream runs so," and gives you a good many facts in
regard to them. But you do not have to "see" anything, any more than
you have to visualize Liege in order to learn the facts of its
geography. A map sets forth cold facts in an alphabet all its own, but
an easy alphabet, and one that tells with a few curving lines more
than many thousand words could tell.


=Section 2. Sketching.=

Noncommissioned officers and selected privates should be able to make
simple route sketches. This is particularly useful in patrolling, as
thereby a patrol leader is able to give his commander a good idea of
the country his patrol has traversed. Sketches should be made on a
certain scale, which should be indicated on the sketch, such as 3
inches on the sketch equals 1 mile on the ground. The north should be
indicated on the sketch by means of an arrow pointing in that
direction. Any piece of paper may be used to make the sketch on. The
back of the field-message blank is ruled and prepared for this
purpose. The abbreviations and conventional signs shown on the
following pages should be used in making such simple sketches.


Field Maps and Sketches.

The following abbreviations and signs are authorized for use on field
maps and sketches. For more elaborate map work the authorized
conventional signs as given in the manual of "Conventional Signs,
United States Army Maps,"; are used.

Abbreviations other than those given should not be used.

ABBREVIATIONS.

  A.      Arroyo.
  abut.   Abutment.
  Ar.     Arch.
  b.      Brick.
  B.S.    Blacksmith Shop.
  bot.    Bottom.
  Br.     Branch.
  br.     Bridge.
  C.      Cape.
  cem.    Cemetery.
  con.    Concrete.
  cov.    Covered.
  Cr.     Creek.
  d.      Deep.
  cul.    Culvert.
  D.S.    Drug Store.
  E.      East.
  Est.    Estuary.
  f.      Fordable.
  Ft.     Fort.
  G.S.    General Store.
  gir.    Girder.
  G.M.    Gristmill.
  I.      Iron.
  I.      Island.
  Jc.     Junction.
  k.p.    King-post.
  L.      Lake.
  Lat.    Latitude.
  Ldg.    Landing.
  L.S.S.  Life-Saving Station.
  L.H.    Lighthouse
  Long.   Longitude.
  Mt.     Mountain.
  Mts.    Mountains.
  N.      North.
  n.f.    Not fordable.
  P.      Pier.
  pk.     Plank.
  P.O.    Post Office
  Pt.     Point.
  q.p.    Queen-post.
  R.      River.
  R.H.    Roundhouse.
  R.R.    Railroad.
  S.      South.
  s.      Steel.
  S.H.    Schoolhouse.
  S.M.    Sawmill.
  Sta.    Station.
  st.     Stone.
  str.    Stream.
  T.G.    Tollgate.
  Tres.   Trestle.
  tr.     Truss.
  W.T.    Water Tank.
  W.W.    Water Works.
  W.      West.
  w.      Wood.
  wd.     Wide.


SIGNS--FIELD MAPS AND SKETCHES.

  Telegraph Line {Symbol (modified below)
                 {Along improved road
                 {Along unimproved road
                 {Along trail

  Railroads  {Single track
             {Double track
             {Trolley

  Roads   {Improved
          {Unimproved
          {Trail

  Fences   {barbed wire
           {smooth wire
           {wood
           {stone
           {hedge

[Page with sketch examples of bridge, streams, house, church, school
house, woods, orchards, cultivated land, brush, crops or grass,
cemetery, trees, cut and fill.]

[Illustration: Map.]




CHAPTER XI.

MESSAGE BLANKS.


  ------------------------+-----+------+-------+-------+-------+--------
                          | No. | Sent | Time. | Rec'd | Time. | Check.
  U. S. ARMY FIELD        |     | by.  |       | by.   |       |
  MESSAGE.                |  (These spaces for Signal Operators only.)
  ------------------------+---------------------------------------------
  Communicated by         |               [Name of sending detachment.]
  Buzzer, Phone,          |
  Telegraph, Wireless,    |_From_ ______________________________________
  Lantern, Helio, Flag,   |
  Cyclist, Foot Messenger,|_At_ ________________________________________
  Mounted Messenger, Motor|
  Car, Flying Machine.    |
  Underscore means used.  |_Date_ _________ _Hour_ _______ _No_ ________
  ------------------------+
  _To_ _________________________________________________________________
  ______________________________________________________________________
  ______________________________________________________________________
  ______________________________________________________________________

  _Received_ ___________________________________________________________

  ----------------------------------------------------------------------

The heading "From" is filled in with the _name_ of the detachment
sending the information: as "Officer's Patrol, 7th Cav." Messages sent
on the same day from the same source to the same person are numbered
consecutively. The address is written briefly, thus: "Commanding
officer, Outpost, 1st Brigade." In the signature the writer's surname
only and rank are given.

This blank is four and a half by six and three-quarters inches,
including the margin on the left for binding. The back is ruled in
squares, the side of each square representing 100 yards on a scale of
3 inches to one mile, for use in making simple sketches explanatory,
of the message. It is issued by the Signal Corps in blocks of forty
with duplicating sheets. The regulation envelope is three by five and
one-fourth inches and is printed as follows:

UNITED STATES ARMY FIELD MESSAGE.

  _To_ ___________________________________________ _No_ ________________
                                             (For signal operator only.)
  ----------------------------------------------------------------------
  _When sent_ __________________________________________ _No_ __________
  _Rate of speed_ ______________________________________________________
  _Name of messenger_ __________________________________________________
  _When and by whom rec'd_ _____________________________________________
                  =This Envelope will be Returned to Bearer.=




CHAPTER XII.

SIGNALS AND CODES.

(Extracts from Signal Book, United States Army, 1916.)


=General Instructions for Army Signaling.=

=1.= Each signal station will have its call, consisting of one or two
letters, as Washington, "W"; and each operator or signalist will also
have his personal signal of one or two letters, as Jones, "Jo." These
being once adopted will not be changed without due authority.

=2.= To lessen liability of error, numerals which occur in the body of
a message should be spelled out.

=3.= In receiving a message the man at the telescope should call out
each letter as received, and not wait for the completion of a word.

=4.= A record of the date and time of the receipt or transmission of
every message must be kept.

=5.= The duplicate manuscript of messages received at, or the original
sent from, a station should be carefully filed.

=6.= In receiving messages nothing should be taken for granted, and
nothing considered as seen until it has been positively and clearly in
view. Do not anticipate what will follow from signals already given.
Watch the communicating station until the last signals are made, and
be very certain that the signal for the end of the message has been
given.

=7.= Every address must contain at least two words and should be
sufficient to secure delivery.

=8.= All that the sender writes for transmission after the word "To"
is counted.

=9.= Whenever more than one signature is attached to a message count
all initials and names as a part of the message.

=10.= Dictionary words, initial letters, surnames of persons, names of
cities, towns, villages, States, and Territories, or names of the
Canadian Provinces will be counted each as one word; e.g., New York,
District of Columbia, East St. Louis should each be counted as one
word. The abbreviation of the names of cities, towns, villages,
States, Territories, and provinces will be counted the same as if
written in full.

=11.= Abbreviations of weights and measures in common use, figures,
decimal points, bars of division, and in ordinal numbers the affixes
"st," "d," "nd," "rd," and "th" will be each counted as one word.
Letters and groups of letters, when such groups do not form dictionary
words and are not combinations of dictionary words, will be counted at
the rate of five letters or fraction of five letters to a word. When
such groups are made up of combinations of dictionary words, each
dictionary word so used will be counted.

=12.= The following are exceptions to paragraph 55, and are counted as
shown:

  A. M      1 word
  P. M      1 word
  O. K      1 word
  Per cent  1 word

=13.= No message will be considered sent until its receipt has been
acknowledged by the receiving station.


=The International Morse or General Service Code.=

=18.= The International Morse Code is the General Service Code and is
prescribed for use by the Army of the United States and between the
Army and the Navy of the United States. It will be used on radio
systems, submarine cables using siphon recorders, and with the
heliograph, flash-lanterns, and all visual signaling apparatus using
the wigwag.

  _Alphabet._
  A . --
  B -- . . .
  C -- . -- .
  D -- . .
  E .
  F . . -- .
  G -- -- .
  H . . . .
  I . .
  J . -- -- --
  K -- . --
  L . -- . .
  M -- --
  N -- .
  O -- -- --
  P . -- -- .
  Q -- -- . --
  R . -- .
  S . . .
  T --
  U . . --
  V . . . --
  W . -- --
  X -- . . --
  Y -- . -- --
  Z -- -- . .


  _Numerals._
  1 . -- -- -- --
  2 . . -- -- --
  3 . . . -- --
  4 . . . . --
  5 . . . . .
  6 -- . . . .
  7 -- -- . . .
  8 -- -- -- . .
  9 -- -- -- -- .
  0 -- -- -- -- --


  _Punctuation._

  Period                                               . .  . .  . .
  Comma                                                . -- . -- . --
  Interrogation                                        . . -- -- . .
  Hyphen or dash                                       -- . . . . --
  Parenthesis (before and after the words)             -- . -- -- . --
  Quotation mark (beginning and ending)                . -- . . -- .
  Exclamation                                          -- -- . . -- --
  Apostrophe                                           . -- -- -- .
  Semicolon                                            -- . -- . -- .
  Colon                                                -- -- -- . . .
  Bar indicating fraction                              -- . . -- .
  Underline (before and after the word or words it is
    wished to underline)                               . . -- -- . --
  Double dash (between preamble and address, between
  address and body of message, between body of message
  and signature, and immediately before a fraction)     -- . . . --
  Cross                                                 . -- . -- .


=Visual Signaling: in General.=

=21.= Methods of visual signaling are divided as follows:

(_a_) By flag, torch, hand lantern, or beam of searchlight (without
shutter.) (General Service Code.)

(_b_) By heliograph, flash lantern, or searchlight (with shutter.)
(General Service Code.)

(_c_) By Ardois. (General Service Code.)

(_d_) By hand flags or by stationary semaphore. (Two-arm semaphore
Code.)

(_e_) By preconcerted signals with Coston lights, rockets, bombs, Very
pistols, small arms, guns, etc.

(_f_) By flag signals by permanent hoists. (International Code.)

=22.= The following conventional signals, with exceptions noted, will
be used in the first four classes.

                                                  _Exceptions._
                                                  Ardois and semaphore.

  End of word.                Interval.
  End of sentence.            Double interval.
  End of message.             Triple interval.
  Signal separating preamble
    from address; address
    from text;
    text from signature.      -- . . . --         Double interval,
                                                   signature preceded
                                                    also by "Sig" interval.
  Acknowledgement.            R.
  Error.                      . . . . . . . .     A.
  Negative.                   K.
  Preparatory.                L.
  Annulling.                  N.
  Affirmative.                P.
  Interrogatory.              . . -- -- . .       O.
  Repeat after word.          Interrogatory. A (word).
  Repeat last message.        Interrogatory three times.
  Send faster.                QRQ
  Send slower.                QRS
  Cease sending.              QRT
  Wait a moment.              . -- . . .          None.
  Execute.                    IX, IX
  Move to your right.         MR
  Move to your left.          ML
  Move up.                    MU
  Move down.                  MD
  Finished (end of work).     . . . -- . --       None.


=Visual Signaling: By Flag (Wig-Wag), Torch, Hand Lantern, or Beam or
Searchlight (Without Shutter).=

GENERAL SERVICE CODE.

=23.= For the flag used with the General Service Code there are three
motions and one position. The position is with the flag held
vertically, the signalman facing directly toward the station with
which it is desired to communicate. The first motion (the dot) is to
the right of the sender, and will embrace an arc of 90 deg., starting with
the vertical and returning to it, and will be made in a plane at
right-angles to the line connecting the two stations. The second
motion (the dash) is a similar motion to the left of the sender. The
third motion (front) is downward directly in front of the sender and
instantly returned upward to the first position. Front is used to
indicate an interval.

=24.= The beam of the searchlight, though ordinarily used with the
shutter like the heliograph, may be used for long-distance signaling,
when no shutter is suitable or available, in a similar manner to the
flag or torch, the first position being a vertical one. A movement of
the beam 90 deg. to the right of the sender indicates a dot, a similar
movement to the left indicates a dash; the beam is lowered vertically
for front.

=25.= To use the torch or hand lantern, a footlight must be employed
as a point of reference to the motion. The lantern is most
conveniently swung out upward to the right of the footlight for a dot,
to the left for a dash, and raised vertically for front.

NOTE.--To call a station, make the call letter until acknowledged, at
intervals giving the call or signal of the calling station. If the
call letter of a station is unknown, wave flag until acknowledged. In
using the searchlight without shutter throw the beam in a vertical
position and move it through an arc of 180 deg. in a plane at right angles
to the line connecting the two stations until acknowledged. To
acknowledge a call, signal "Acknowledgment" followed by the call
letter of the acknowledging station.


=Signaling with Heliograph, Flash lantern, and Searchlight (With
Shutter.)=

GENERAL SERVICE CODE.

=26.= The first position is to turn a steady flash on the receiving
station. The signals are made by short and long flashes. Use a short
flash for dot and a long steady flash for dash. The elements of a
letter should be slightly longer than in sound signals.

=27.= To call a station, make its call letter until acknowledged.

=28.= If the call letter of a station be unknown, signal A until
acknowledged. Each station will then turn on a steady flash and
adjust. When adjustment is satisfactory to the called station, it will
cut off its flash and the calling station will proceed with its
message.

=29.= If the receiver sees that the sender's mirror or light needs
adjustment, he will turn on a steady flash until answered by a steady
flash. When the adjustment is satisfactory the receiver will cut off
his flash and the sender will resume his message.

=30.= To break the sending station for other purposes, turn on a
steady flash.

SOUND SIGNALS.

=56.= Sound signals made by the whistle, foghorn, bugle, trumpet, and
drum may well be used in a fog, mist, falling snow, or at night. They
may be used with the dot and dash code.

In applying the General Service Code to whistle, foghorn, bugle, or
trumpet, one short blast indicates a dot and one long blast a dash.
With the drum, one tap indicates a dot and two taps in rapid
succession a dash. Although these signals can be used with a dot and
dash code, they should be so used in connection with a preconcerted or
conventional code.


=Signaling by Two-Arm Semaphore.=

HAND FLAGS.

=43.= Signaling by the two-arm semaphore is the most rapid method of
sending spelled-out messages. It is, however, very liable to error if
the motions are slurred over or run together in an attempt to make
speed. Both arms should move rapidly and simultaneously, but there
should be a perceptible pause at the end of each letter before making
the movements for the next letter. Rapidity is secondary to accuracy.
For alphabet see pages following.

[Illustration: Hand-signal.]

[Illustration: Hand-signal.]

NOTE.--In making the interval the flags are crossed downward in front
of the body (just above the knees); the double interval is the
"chop-chop" signal made twice; the triple interval is "chop-chop"
signal made three times. In calling a station face it squarely and
make its call. If there is no immediate reply wave the flags over the
head to attract attention, making the call at frequent intervals. When
the sender makes "end of message" the receiver, if message is
understood, extends the flags horizontally and waves them until the
sender does the same, when both leave their stations. Care must be
taken with hand flags to hold the staffs so as to form a prolongation
of the arms.


LETTER CODES.

INFANTRY.

=47.= For use with General Service Code or semaphore hand flags.

  -----------------+---------------------------+-----------------------------
   Letter of       | If signaled from the      | If signaled from the
   alphabet.       | rear to the firing        | firing line to the rear.
                   | line.                     |
  -----------------+---------------------------+-----------------------------
  AM               | Ammunition going forward. | Ammunition required.
  CCC              | Charge (mandatory at all  | Am about to charge if no
                   |  times).                  | instructions to the contrary.
  CF               | Cease  firing.            | Cease firing.
  DT               | Double time or "rush."    | Double time or "rush."
  F                | Commence firing           |
  FB               | Fix bayonets.             |
  FL               | Artillery fire is causing |
                   |  us losses.               |
  G                | Move forward.             | Preparing to move forward.
  HHH              | Halt.                     |
  K                | Negative.                 | Negative.
  LT               | Left.                     | Left.
  O                | What is the (R. N., etc.)?| What is the (R. N., etc.)?
  (Ardois and      |                           |
  semaphore only.) | Interrogatory.            | Interrogatory.
  . . -- -- . .    | What is the (R. N., etc.)?| What is the (R. N.. etc.)?
  (All methods but | Interrogatory.            | Interrogatory.
  ardois and       |                           |
  semaphore.)      |                           |
  P                | Affirmative.              | Affirmative.
  RN               | Range.                    | Range.
  RT               | Right.                    | Right.
  SSS              | Support going forward.    | Support needed.
  SUF              | Suspend firing.           | Suspend firing.
  T                | Target.                   | Target.
  -----------------+---------------------------+-----------------------------


CAVALRY.

=48.= For use with General Service Code or semaphore hand flags.

  AM--Ammunition going forward (if signaled from the rear to the
        front).
      Ammunition required (if signaled from the front).

  CCC--Charge (if signaled from the rear to the front).
       About to charge if no instructions to the contrary.(if signaled
       from the front).

  CF--Cease firing.

  DT--Double time, rush, or hurry.

  F--Commence firing.

  FL--Artillery fire is causing us losses.

  G--Move forward (if signaled from the rear to the front).
     Preparing to move forward (if signaled from the front).

  HHH--Halt.

  K--Negative.

  LT--Left.

  M--Bring up the horses (if signaled from front to rear).
     Horses going forward (if signaled from rear to front).

  O--What is the (R. N., etc.) Interrogatory. (Ardois and semaphore
      only.)
  ..--..--What is the (R, N., etc.)? Interrogatory. (All methods but
           Ardois and semaphore).
  P--Affirmative.
  R--Acknowledgment.
  RN--Range.
  RT--Right.
  SSS--Support going forward (if signaled from the rear to the front).
       Support needed (if signaled from the front.)

  SUF--Suspend firing.

  T--Target.


FIELD ARTILLERY.

=49.= For use with General Service Code or semaphore hand flags.

        ........--Error. (All methods but Ardois and semaphore.)
               A--Error. (Ardois and semaphore only.)
              AD--Additional.
             AKT--Draw ammunition from combat train.
              AL--Draw ammunition from limbers.
              AM--Ammunition going forward.
             AMC--At my command.
              AP--Aiming point.
    B (numerals)--Battery (so many) rounds.
   BS (numerals)--(Such.) Battalion station.
              BL--Battery from the left.
              BR--Battery from the right.
             CCC--Charge (mandatory at all times). Am about to charge
                  if not instructed to contrary.
              CF--Cease firing.
              CS--Close station.
              CT--Change target.
               D--Down.
              DF--Deflection.
              DT--Double time. Rush. Hurry.
               F--Commence firing.
  FCL (numerals)--On 1st piece close by (so much).
              FL--Artillery fire is causing us losses.
  FOP (numerals)--On 1st piece open by (so much).
               G--Move forward. Preparing to move forward.
             HHH--Halt. Action suspended.
              IX--Execute. Go ahead. Transmit.
              JI--Report firing data.
               K--Negative. No.
              KR--Corrector.
               L--Preparatory. Attention.
  LCL (numerals)--On 4th piece close by (so much).
  LOP (numerals)--On 4th piece open by (so much).
              LT--Left.
              LL--Left from the left.
              LR--Left from the right.
   LE (numerals)--Less (so much).
              MD--Move down.
              ML--Move deg. to your left.
              MR--Move deg. to your right.
              MU--Move up.
              MO (numerals)--Move (so much).
               N--Annul, cancel.
               O--What is the (R. N., etc.)? Interrogatory. (Ardois and
                  semaphore only.)
     . . -- -- . . -- What is the (R. N., etc.)? Interrogatory. (All
                      methods but Ardois and semaphore.)
                 P--Affirmative. Yes.
                PS--Percussion. Shrapnel.
               QRQ--Send faster.
               QRS--Send slower.
               QRT--Cease sending.
                 R--Acknowledgment. Received.
                RS--Regimental station.
                RL--Right from the left.
                RR--Right from the right.
                RN--Range.
                RT--Right.
                 S--Subtract.
    SCL (numerals)--On 2d piece close by (so much).
    SOP (numerals)--On 2d piece open by (so much).
                SH--Shell.
                SI--Site.
               SSS--Support needed.
                 T--Target.
  TCL (numericals)--On 3d piece close by (so much).
    TOP (numerals)--On 3d piece open by (so much).
                 U--Up.
        Y (letter)--Such battery station.




CHAPTER XIII.

FIRST-AID RULES.


The bandages and dressings contained in the first-aid packet have been
so treated as to destroy any germs thereon. Therefore, when dressing a
wound, be careful not to touch or handle that part of the dressing
which is to be applied to the wound.

A sick or injured person should always be made to lie down on his
back, if practicable, as this is the most comfortable position, and
all muscles may be relaxed.

All tight articles of clothing and equipment should be loosened, so as
not to interfere with breathing or the circulation of the blood.
Belts, collars, and the trousers at the waist should be opened.

Don't let mere onlookers crowd about the patient. They prevent him
from getting fresh air and also make him nervous and excited.

In case of injury the heart action is generally weak from shock, and
the body, therefore, grows somewhat cold. So don't remove any more
clothing than is necessary to expose the injury.

Cut or rip the clothing, but don't pull it. Try to disturb the patient
as little as possible.

Don't touch a wound with your fingers or a handkerchief, or with
anything else but the first-aid dressing. Don't wash the wound with
water, as you may infect it.

Don't administer stimulants (whisky, brandy, wine, etc.) unless
ordered to do so by a doctor. While in a few cases stimulants are of
benefit, in a great many cases they do positive harm, especially where
there has been any bleeding.

The heart may be considered as a pump and the arteries as a rubber
hose, which carry the blood from the heart to every part of the body.
The veins are the hose which carry the blood back to the heart. Every
wound bleeds some, but, unless a large artery or a large vein is cut,
the bleeding will stop after a short while if the patient is kept
quiet and the first-aid dressing is bound over the wound so as to make
pressure on it.

When a large artery is cut the blood gushes out in spurts every time
the heart beats. In this case it is necessary to stop the flow of
blood by pressing upon the hose somewhere between the heart and the
leak.

If the leak is in the arm or hand, apply pressure as in figure 1.

[Illustration: FIG. 1.]

If the leak is in the leg, apply pressure as in figure 2.

[Illustration: FIG. 2.]

If the leak is in the shoulder or armpit, apply pressure as in figure
3.

[Illustration: FIG. 3.]

The reason for this is that at the places indicated the arteries may
be pressed against a bone more easily than at any other places.

Another way of applying pressure (by means of a tourniquet) is shown
in figure 4. Place a pad of tightly rolled cloth or paper, or any
suitable object, over the artery. Tie a bandage loosely about the
limb and then insert your bayonet, or a stick, and twist up the
bandage until the pressure of the pad on the artery stops the leak.
Twist the bandage slowly and stop as soon as the blood ceases to flow,
in order not to bruise the flesh or muscles unnecessarily.

[Illustration: FIG. 4.--Improvised tourniquet.]

A tourniquet may cause pain and swelling of the limb, and if left on
too long may cause the limb to die. Therefore, about every half hour
or so loosen the bandage very carefully, but if the bleeding continues
pressure must be applied again. In this case apply the pressure with
the thumb for five or ten minutes, as this cuts off only the main
artery and leaves some of the smaller arteries and the veins free to
restore some of the circulation. When a tourniquet is painful it is
too tight and should be carefully loosened a little.

If the leg or arm is held upright, this also helps to reduce the
bleeding in these parts, because the heart then has to pump the blood
uphill.

A broken bone is called a fracture. The great danger in the case of a
fracture is that the sharp, jagged edges of the bones may stick
through the flesh and skin, or tear and bruise the arteries, veins,
and muscles. If the skin is not broken, a fracture is not so serious,
as no germs can get in. =Therefore never move a person with a broken
bone until the fracture has been so fixed that the broken ends of the
bone can not move.=

If the leg or arm is broken, straighten the limb gently and if
necessary pull upon the end firmly to get the bones in place. Then
bind the limb firmly to a splint to hold it in place. A splint may be
made of any straight, stiff material--a shingle or piece of board, a
bayonet, a rifle, a straight branch of a tree, etc. Whatever material
you use must be well padded on the side next to the limb. Be careful
never to place the bandages over the fracture, but always above and
below. (Figs. 5, 6, 7, 8.)

[Illustration: FIG. 5.]

[Illustration: FIG. 6.]

[Illustration: FIG. 7.]

[Illustration: FIG. 8.]

Many surgeons think that the method of binding a broken leg to the
well one, and of binding the arm to the body, is the best plan in the
field as being the quickest and one that serves the immediate purpose.

With wounds about the body, the chest, and abdomen you must not meddle
except to protect them when possible, without much handling, with the
materials of the packet.


FAINTING, SHOCK, HEAT EXHAUSTION.

The symptoms of fainting, shock, and heat exhaustion are very
similar. The face is pale, the skin cool and moist, the pulse is weak,
and generally the patient is unconscious. Keep the patient quiet,
resting on his back, with his head low. Loosen the clothing, but keep
the patient warm, and give stimulants (whisky, hot coffee, tea, etc.).


SUNSTROKE.

In the case of sunstroke the face is flushed, the skin is dry and very
hot, and the pulse is full and strong. In this case place the patient
in a cool spot, remove the clothing, and make every effort to lessen
the heat in the body by cold applications to the head and surface
generally. Do not, under any circumstances, give any stimulants or hot
drinks.


FREEZING AND FROSTBITE.

The part frozen, which looks white or bluish white, and is cold,
should be very slowly raised in temperature by brisk but careful
rubbing in a cool place, and never near a fire. Stimulants are to be
given cautiously when the patient can swallow, and followed by small
amounts of warm liquid nourishment. The object is to restore the
circulation of the blood and the natural warmth gradually and not
violently. Care and patience are necessary to do this.


RESUSCITATION OF THE APPARENTLY DROWNED.

In the instruction of the Army in First Aid the method of
resuscitation of the apparently drowned, as described by "Schaefer,"
will be taught instead of the "Sylvester Method," heretofore used. The
Schaefer method of artificial respiration is also applicable in cases
of electric shock, asphyxiation by gas, and of the failure of
respiration following concussion of the brain.

Being under water for four or five minutes is generally fatal, but an
effort to revive the apparently drowned should always be made, unless
it is known that the body has been under water for a very long time.
The attempt to revive the patient should not be delayed for the
purpose of removing his clothes or placing him in the ambulance. Begin
the procedure as soon as he is out of the water, on the shore or in
the boat. The first and most important thing is to start artificial
respiration without delay.

The Schaefer method is preferred because it can be carried out by one
person without assistance, and because its procedure is not exhausting
to the operator, thus permitting him, if required, to continue it for
one or two hours. When it is known that a person has been under water
for but a few minutes continue the artificial respiration for at least
one and a half to two hours before considering the case hopeless. Once
the patient has begun to breathe watch carefully to see that he does
not stop again. Should the breathing be very faint, or should he stop
breathing, assist him again with artificial respiration. After he
starts breathing do not lift him nor permit him to stand until the
breathing has become full and regular.


SCHAEFER METHOD.

As soon as the patient is removed from the water, turn him face to the
ground, clasp your hands under his waist, and raise the body so any
water may drain out of the air passages while the head remains low.
(Figure 9.)

[Illustration: FIG. 9.--Schaefer method of artificial respiration.
Inspiration.]

The patient is laid on his stomach, arms extended from his body beyond
his head, face turned to one side so that the mouth and nose do not
touch the ground. This position causes the tongue to fall forward of
its own weight and so prevents its falling back into the air passages.
Turning the head to one side prevents the face coming into contact
with mud or water during the operation. This position also
facilitates the removal from the mouth of foreign bodies, such as
tobacco, chewing gum, false teeth, etc., and favors the expulsion of
mucus, blood, vomitus, serum, or any liquid that may be in the air
passages.

[Illustration: FIG. 10--Schaefer method of artificial respiration.
Expiration.]

The operator kneels, straddles one or both of the patient's thighs,
and faces his head. Locating the lowest rib, the operator, with his
thumbs nearly parallel to his fingers, places his hands so that the
little finger curls over the twelfth rib. If the hands are on the
pelvic bones, the object of the work is defeated; hence the bones of
the pelvis are first located in order to avoid them. The hands must be
free from the pelvis and resting on the lowest rib. By operating on
the bare back it is easier to locate the lower ribs and avoid the
pelvis. The nearer the ends of the ribs the hands are placed without
sliding off the better. The hands are thus removed from the spine, the
fingers being nearly out of sight.

The fingers help some, but the chief pressure is exerted by the heels
(thenar and hypothenar eminences) of the hands, with the weight coming
straight from the shoulders. It is a waste of energy to bend the arms
at the elbows and shove in from the sides, because the muscles of the
back are stronger than the muscles of the arms.

The operator's arms are held straight, and his weight is brought from
his shoulders by bringing his body and shoulders forward. This weight
is gradually increased until at the end of the three seconds of
vertical pressure upon the lower ribs of the patient the force is felt
to be heavy enough to compress the parts; then the weight is suddenly
removed. If there is danger of not returning the hands to the right
position again, they can remain lightly in place; but it is usually
better to remove the hands entirely. If the operator is light and the
patient an overweight adult, he can utilize over 80 per cent of his
weight by raising his knees from the ground and supporting himself
entirely on his toes and the heels of his hands, the latter properly
placed on the ends of the floating ribs of the patient. In this manner
he can work as effectively as a heavy man.

A light feather or a piece of absorbent cotton drawn out thin and held
near the nose by some one will indicate by its movements whether or
not there is a current of air going and coming with each forced
expiration and spontaneous inspiration.

The natural rate of breathing is 12 to 15 times per minute. The rate
of operation should not exceed this. The lungs must be thoroughly
emptied by three seconds of pressure, then refilling takes care of
itself. Pressure and release of pressure--one complete
respiration--occupies about five seconds. If the operator is alone, he
can be guided in each act by his own deep, regular respiration or by
counting or by his watch lying by his side. If comrades are present,
he can be advised by them.

The duration of the efforts as artificial respiration should
ordinarily exceed an hour; indefinitely longer if there are any
evidences of returning animation, by way of breathing, speaking, or
movements. There are liable to be evidences of life within 25 minutes
in patients who will recover from electric shock, but where there is
doubt the patient should be given the benefit of the doubt. In
drowning, especially, recoveries are on record after two hours or more
of unconsciousness; hence, the Schaefer method, being easy of
operation, is more likely to be persisted in.

Aromatic spirits of ammonia may be poured on a handkerchief and held
continuously within 3 inches of the face and nose. If other ammonia
preparations are used, they should be diluted or held farther away.
Try it on your own nose first.

When the operator is a heavy man it is necessary to caution him not to
bring force too violently upon the ribs, as one of them might be
broken.

Do not attempt to give liquids of any kind to the patient while
unconscious. Apply warm blankets and hot-water bottles as soon as
they can be obtained.




CHAPTER XIV.

LAWS AND REGULATIONS.


=Section 1. General provisions.=

The Army of the United States is governed by certain laws called "The
Articles of War" and certain regulations called "Army Regulations."

The following list includes the offenses most often committed by
soldiers, generally through ignorance or carelessness rather than
viciousness. Violations of any rule or regulation should be carefully
guarded against, since they not only subject the offender to
punishment, but also bring discredit on his comrades, his
organization, and on the military profession:

1. Selling, pawning, or, through neglect, losing or spoiling any
Government property, such as uniforms, blankets, equipment,
ammunition, etc.

2. Disobedience of the orders of any officer or noncommissioned
officer.

3. Disrespect to an officer or noncommissioned officer.

4. Absence from camp without leave.

5. Absence from any drill, formation, or other duty without authority.

6. Drunkenness on duty or off duty, whether in camp or when absent
either with or without leave.

7. Bringing liquor into camp.

8. Noisy or disorderly conduct in camp or when absent either with or
without leave.

9. Entering on private property, generally for the purpose of
stealing fruit, etc.

10. Negligence or carelessness at drill or on other duty, particularly
while on guard or as a sentinel over prisoners.

11. Wearing an unauthorized uniform or wearing the uniform in an
improper manner.

12. Urinating in or around camp.

13. Failing to salute properly.

14. Disrespect or affront to a sentinel.

15. Abuse or neglect of his horse.

"The basic principles of the combat tactics of the different arms are
set forth in the Drill Regulations of those arms for units as high as
brigades." (_Preface, Field Service Regulations._)

"The Drill Regulations are furnished as a guide. They provide the
principles for training and for increasing the probability of success
in battle. In the interpretation of the regulations the spirit must be
sought. Quibbling over the minutiae of form is indicative of failure to
grasp the spirit." (_Paragraph 4, Infantry Drill Regulations._)

Field Service Regulations govern all arms of the Army of the United
States.


=Section 2. The Army of the United States.=

The Army of the United States shall consist of the Regular Army, the
Volunteer Army, the Officers' Reserve Corps, the Enlisted Reserve
Corps, the National Guard while in the service of the United States,
and such other land forces as are now or may hereafter be authorized
by law. (Sec. 1, act of June 3, 1916.)


=Section 3. Rank and precedence of officers and noncommissioned
officers.=

The following are the grades of rank of officers and noncommissioned
officers:

1. Lieutenant general.

2. Major general.

3. Brigadier general.

4. Colonel.

5. Lieutenant colonel.

6. Major.

7. Captain.

8. First Lieutenant.

9. Second lieutenant.

10. Aviator, Signal Corps.

11. Cadet.

12. (_a_) Sergeant major, regimental; sergeant major, senior grade,
Coast Artillery Corps; (_b_) quartermaster sergeant, senior grade,
Quartermaster Corps; master hospital sergeant, Medical Department;
master engineer, senior grade, Corps of Engineers; master electrician,
Coast Artillery Corps; master signal electrician; band leader; (_c_)
hospital sergeant, Medical Department; master engineer, junior grade,
Corps of Engineers; engineer, Coast Artillery Corps.

13. Ordnance sergeant; quartermaster sergeant, Quartermaster Corps;
supply sergeant, regimental.

14. Sergeant major, squadron and battalion; sergeant major, junior
grade, Coast Artillery Corps; supply sergeant, battalion, Corps of
Engineers.

15. (_a_) First sergeant; (_b_) sergeant, first class, Medical
Department; sergeant, first class, Quartermaster Corps; sergeant,
first class, Corps of Engineers; sergeant, first class, Signal Corps;
electrician sergeant, first class, Coast Artillery Corps; electrician
sergeant, Artillery Detachment, United States Military Academy;
assistant engineer, Coast Artillery Corps; (_c_) master gunner, Coast
Artillery Corps; master gunner, Artillery Detachment, United States
Military Academy; band sergeant and assistant leader, United States
Military Academy band; assistant band leader; sergeant bugler;
electrician sergeant, second class, Coast Artillery Corps; electrician
sergeant, second class, Artillery Detachment, United States Military
Academy; radio sergeant.

16. Color sergeant.

17. Sergeant; supply sergeant, company; mess sergeant; stable
sergeant; fireman, Coast Artillery Corps.

18. Corporal.

In each grade and subgrade date of commission, appointment, or warrant
determines the order of precedence. (Paragraph 9, Army Regulations,
1913.)


=Section 4. Insignia of officers and noncommissioned officers.=

The insignia of rank appearing on the shoulder straps, shoulder loops,
or collar of shirt (when shirt is worn without coat) of officers are
as follows:

  General: Coat of arms and two stars.
  Lieutenant general: One large star and two smaller ones.
  Major general: Two silver stars.
  Brigadier general: One silver star.
  Colonel: One silver spread eagle.
  Lieutenant colonel: One silver leaf.
  Major: One gold leaf.
  Captain: Two silver bars.
  First lieutenant: One silver bar.

The grade of noncommissioned officers is indicated by chevrons worn on
the sleeve.


=Section 5. Extracts from the Articles of War.=

(Relating to enlisted men.)

CERTAIN ARTICLES TO BE READ AND EXPLAINED.

ART. 110. Articles 1, 2, and 29, 54 to 96, inclusive, and 104 to 109,
inclusive, shall be read and explained to every soldier at the time of
his enlistment or muster in, or within six days thereafter, and shall
be read and explained once every six months to the soldiers of every
garrison, regiment, or company in the service of the United States.


DEFINITIONS.

ARTICLE 1. The following words when used in these articles shall be
construed in the sense indicated in this article, unless the context
shows that a different sense is intended, namely:

(_a_) The word "officer" shall be construed to refer to a commissioned
officer;

(_b_) The word "soldier" shall be construed as including a
noncommissioned officer, a private, or any other enlisted man;

(_c_) The word "company" shall be understood as including a troop or
battery; and

(_d_) The word "battalion" shall be understood as including a
squadron.


PERSONS SUBJECT TO MILITARY LAW.

ART. 2. The following persons are subject to these articles and shall
be understood as included in the term "any person subject to military
law" or "persons subject to military law" whenever used in these
articles: _Provided_, That nothing contained in this act, except as
specifically provided in article 2, subparagraph (_c_), shall be
construed to apply to any person under the United States naval
jurisdiction, unless otherwise specifically provided by law;

(_a_) All officers and soldiers belonging to the Regular Army of the
United States; all volunteers, from the dates of their muster or
acceptance into the military service of the United States; and all
other persons lawfully called, drafted, or ordered into or to duty or
for training in the said service, from the dates they are required by
the terms of the call, draft, or order to obey the same.

(_b_) Cadets.

(_c_) Officers and soldiers of the Marine Corps when detached for
service with the armies of the United States by order of the
President: _Provided_, That an officer or soldier of the Marine Corps
when so detached may be tried by military court-martial for an offense
committed against the laws for the government of the naval service
prior to his detachment, and for an offense committed against these
articles he may be tried by a naval court-martial after such
detachment ceases.

(_d_) All retainers to the camp and all persons accompanying or
serving with the armies of the United States without the territorial
jurisdiction of the United States, and in times of war all such
retainers and persons accompanying or serving with the armies of the
United States in the field, both within and without the territorial
jurisdiction of the United States, though not otherwise subject to
these articles.

(_e_) All persons under sentence adjudged by courts-martial.

(_f_) All persons admitted into the Regular Army Soldiers' Home at
Washington, D. C.


ENLISTMENT WITHOUT DISCHARGE.

ART. 29. Any soldier who, without having first received a regular
discharge, again enlists in the Army, or in the militia when in the
service of the United States, or in the Navy or Marine Corps of the
United States, or in any foreign army, shall be deemed to have
deserted the service of the United States, and, where enlistment is in
one of the forces of the United States mentioned above, to have
fraudulently enlisted therein.


FRAUDULENT ENLISTMENT.

ART. 54. Any person who shall procure himself to be enlisted in the
military service of the United States by means of willful
misrepresentation or concealment as to his qualifications for
enlistment, and shall receive pay or allowances under such enlistment,
shall be punished as a court-martial may direct.


OFFICER MAKING UNLAWFUL ENLISTMENT.

ART. 55. Any officer who knowingly enlists or musters into the
military service any person whose enlistment or muster in is
prohibited by law, regulations, or orders shall be dismissed from the
service or suffer such other punishment as a court-martial may direct.


MUSTER ROLLS--FALSE MUSTER.

ART. 56. At every muster of a regiment, troop, battery, or company the
commanding officer thereof shall give to the mustering officer
certificates, signed by himself, stating how long absent officers have
been absent and the reasons of their absence. And the commanding
officer of every troop, battery, or company shall give like
certificates, stating how long absent noncommissioned officers and
private soldiers have been absent and the reasons of their absence.
Such reasons and time of absence shall be inserted in the muster rolls
opposite the names of the respective absent officers and soldiers, and
the certificates, together with the muster rolls, shall be transmitted
by the mustering officer to the Department of War as speedily as the
distance of the place and muster will admit. Any officer who knowingly
makes a false muster of man or animal, or who signs or directs or
allows the signing of any muster roll knowing the same to contain
false muster or false statement as to the absence or pay of an officer
or soldier, or who wrongfully takes money or other consideration on
mustering in a regiment, company, or other organization, or on signing
muster rolls, or who knowingly musters as an officer or soldier a
person who is not such officer or soldier, shall be dismissed from the
service and suffer such other punishment as a court-martial may
direct.


FALSE RETURNS--OMISSION TO RENDER RETURNS.

ART. 57. Every officer commanding a regiment, an independent troop,
battery, or company, or a garrison shall, in the beginning of every
month, transmit, through the proper channels, to the War Department an
exact return of the same, specifying the names of the officers then
absent from their posts, with the reasons for and the time of their
absence. Every officer whose duty it is to render to the War
Department or other superior authority a return of the state of the
troops under his command, or of the arms, ammunition, clothing, funds,
or other property thereunto belonging, who knowingly makes a false
return thereof shall be dismissed from the service and suffer such
other punishment as a court-martial may direct. And any officer who,
through neglect or design, omits to render such return shall be
punished as a court-martial may direct.


DESERTION.

ART. 58. Any person subject to military law who deserts or attempts to
desert the service of the United States shall, if the offense be
committed in time of war, suffer death or such other punishment as a
court-martial may direct, and, if the offense be committed at any
other time, any punishment, excepting death, that, a court-martial
may direct.


ADVISING OR AIDING ANOTHER TO DESERT.

ART. 59. Any person subject to military law who advises or persuades
or knowingly assists another to desert the service of the United
States shall, if the offense be committed in time of war, suffer
death, or such other punishment as a court-martial may direct, and if
the offense be committed at any other time any punishment, excepting
death, that a court-martial may direct.


ENTERTAINING A DESERTER.

ART. 60. Any officer who, after having discovered that a soldier in
his command is a deserter from the military or naval service or from
the Marine Corps, retains such deserter in his command without
informing superior authority or the commander of the organization to
which the deserter belongs, shall be punished as a court-martial may
direct.


ABSENCE WITHOUT LEAVE.

ART. 61. Any person subject to military law who fails to repair at the
fixed time to the properly appointed place of duty, or goes from the
same without proper leave, or absents himself from his command, guard,
quarters, station, or camp without proper leave, shall be punished as
a court-martial may direct.


DISRESPECT TOWARD THE PRESIDENT, VICE PRESIDENT, CONGRESS, SECRETARY
OF WAR, GOVERNORS, LEGISLATURES.

ART. 62. Any officer who uses contemptuous or disrespectful words
against the President, Vice President, the Congress of the United
States, the Secretary of War, or the governor or legislature of any
State, Territory, or other possession of the United States in which he
is quartered shall be dismissed from the service or suffer such other
punishment as a court-martial may direct. Any other person subject to
military law who so offends shall be punished as a court-martial may
direct.


DISRESPECT TOWARD SUPERIOR OFFICERS.

ART. 63. Any person subject to military law who behaves himself with
disrespect toward his superior officer shall be punished as a
court-martial may direct.


ASSAULTING OR WILLFULLY DISOBEYING SUPERIOR OFFICER.

ART. 64. Any person subject to military law who, on any pretense
whatsoever, strikes his superior officer, or draws or lifts up any
weapon or offers any violence against him, being in the execution of
his office, or willfully disobeys any lawful command of his superior
officer, shall suffer death or such other punishment as a
court-martial may direct.


INSUBORDINATE CONDUCT TOWARD NONCOMMISSIONED OFFICER.

ART. 65. Any soldier who strikes or assaults, or who attempts or
threatens to strike or assault, or willfully disobeys the lawful order
of a noncommissioned officer while in the execution of his office, or
uses threatening or insulting language, or behaves in an insubordinate
or disrespectful manner toward a noncommissioned officer while in the
execution of his office, shall be punished as a court-martial may
direct.


MUTINY OR SEDITION.

ART. 66. Any person subject to military law who attempts, to create or
who begins, excites, causes, or joins in any mutiny or sedition in any
company, party, post, camp, detachment, guard, or other command shall
suffer death or such other punishment as a court-martial may direct.


FAILURE TO SUPPRESS MUTINY OR SEDITION.

ART. 67. Any officer or soldier who, being present at any mutiny or
sedition, does not use his utmost endeavor to suppress the same, or
knowing or having reason to believe that a mutiny or sedition is to
take place, does not without delay give information thereof to his
commanding officer shall suffer death or such other punishment as a
court-martial may direct.


QUARRELS, FRAYS, DISORDERS.

ART. 68. All officers and noncommissioned officers have power to part
and quell all quarrels, frays, and disorders among persons subject to
military law and to order officers who take part In the same into
arrest, and other persons subject to military law who take part in the
same into arrest or confinement, as circumstances may require, until
their proper superior officer is acquainted therewith. And whosoever,
being so ordered, refuses to obey such officer or noncommissioned
officer or draws a weapon upon or otherwise threatens or does violence
to him shall be punished as a court-martial may direct.


ARREST OR CONFINEMENT OF ACCUSED PERSONS.

ART. 69. An officer charged with crime or with a serious offense under
these articles shall be placed in arrest by the commanding officer,
and in exceptional cases an officer so charged may be placed in
confinement by the same authority. A soldier charged with crime or
with a serious offense under these articles shall be placed in
confinement, and when charged with a minor offense he may be placed in
arrest. Any other person subject to military law charged with crime or
with a serious offense under these articles shall be placed in
confinement or in arrest, as circumstances may require; and when
charged with a minor offense such person may be placed in arrest. Any
person placed in arrest under the provisions of this article shall
thereby be restricted to his barracks, quarters, or tent, unless such
limits shall be enlarged by proper authority. Any officer who breaks
his arrest or who escapes from confinement before he is set at liberty
by proper authority shall be dismissed from the service or suffer such
other punishment as a court-martial may direct; and any other person
subject to military law who escapes from confinement or who breaks his
arrest before he is set at liberty by proper authority shall be
punished as a court-martial may direct.


INVESTIGATION OF AND ACTION UPON CHARGES.

ART 70. No person put in arrest shall be continued in confinement more
than eight days, or until such time as a court-martial can be
assembled. When any person is put in arrest for the purpose of trial,
except at remote military posts or stations, the officer by whose
order he is arrested shall see that a copy of the charges on which he
is to be tried is served upon him within eight days after his arrest,
and that he is brought to trial within 10 days thereafter, unless the
necessities of the service prevent such trial; and then he shall be
brought to trial within 30 days after the expiration of said 10 days.
If a copy of the charges be not served, or the arrested person be not
brought to trial, as herein required, the arrest shall cease. But
persons released from arrest, under the provisions of this article,
may be tried, whenever the exigencies of the service shall permit,
within 12 months after such release from arrest: _Provided_, That in
time of peace no person shall, against his objection, be brought to
trial before a general court-martial within a period of five days
subsequent to the service of charges upon him.


REFUSAL TO RECEIVE AND KEEP PRISONERS.

ART. 71. No provost marshal or commander of a guard shall refuse to
receive or keep any prisoner committed to his charge by an officer
belonging to the forces of the United States, provided the officer
committing shall, at the time, deliver an account in writing, signed
by himself, of the crime or offense charged against the prisoner. Any
officer or soldier so refusing shall be punished as a court-martial
may direct.


REPORT OF PRISONERS RECEIVED.

ART. 72. Every commander of a guard to whose charge a prisoner is
committed shall, within 24 hours after such confinement, or as soon as
he is relieved from his guard, report in writing to the commanding
officer the name of such prisoner, the offense charged against him,
and the name of the officer committing him; and if he fails to make
such report he shall be punished as a court-martial may direct.


RELEASING PRISONER WITHOUT PROPER AUTHORITY.

ART. 73. Any person subject to military law who, without proper
authority, releases any prisoner duly committed to his charge, or who,
through neglect or design, suffers any prisoner so committed to
escape, shall be punished as a court-martial may direct.


DELIVERY OF OFFENDERS TO CIVIL AUTHORITIES.

ART. 74. When any person subject to military law, except one who is
held by the military authorities to answer, or who is awaiting trial
or result of trial, or who is undergoing sentence for a crime or
offense punishable under these articles, is accused of a crime or
offense committed within the geographical limits of the States of the
Union and the District of Columbia, and punishable by the laws of the
land, the commanding officer is required, except in time of war, upon
application duly made, to use his utmost endeavor to deliver over such
accused person to the civil authorities, or to aid the officers of
justice in apprehending and securing him, in order that he may be
brought to trial. Any commanding officer who upon such application
refuses or willfully neglects, except in time of war, to deliver over
such accused person to the civil authorities or to aid the officers of
justice in apprehending and securing him shall be dismissed from the
service or suffer such other punishment as a court-martial may direct.

When under the provisions of this article delivery is made to the
civil authorities of an offender undergoing sentence of a
court-martial, such delivery, if followed by conviction, shall be held
to interrupt the execution of the sentence of the court-martial, and
the offender shall be returned to military custody, after having
answered to the civil authorities for his offense, for the completion
of the said court-martial sentence.


MISBEHAVIOR BEFORE THE ENEMY.

ART. 75. Any officer or soldier who misbehaves himself before the
enemy, runs away, or shamefully abandons or delivers up any fort,
post, camp, guard, or other command which it is his duty to defend, or
speaks words inducing others to do the like, or casts away his arms or
ammunition, or quits his post or colors to plunder or pillage, or by
any means whatsoever occasions false alarms in camp, garrison, or
quarters, shall suffer death or such other punishment as a
court-martial may direct.


SUBORDINATES COMPELLING COMMANDER TO SURRENDER.

ART. 76. If any commander of any garrison, fort, post, camp, guard, or
other command is compelled by the officers or soldiers under his
command to give it up to the enemy or to abandon it, the officers or
soldiers so offending shall suffer death or such other punishment as a
court-martial may direct.


IMPROPER USE OF COUNTERSIGN.

ART. 77. Any person subject to military law who makes known the parole
or countersign to any person not entitled to receive it according to
the rules and discipline of war, or gives a parole or countersign
different from that which he receives, shall, if the offense be
committed in time of war, suffer death or such other punishment as a
court-martial may direct.


FORCING A SAFEGUARD.

ART. 78. Any person subject to military law who, in time of war,
forces a safeguard shall suffer death or such other punishment as a
court-martial may direct.


CAPTURED PROPERTY TO BE SECURED FOR PUBLIC SERVICE.

ART. 79. All public property taken from the enemy is the property of
the United States and shall be secured for the service of the United
States, and any person subject to military law who neglects to secure
such property or is guilty of wrongful appropriation thereof shall be
punished as a court-martial may direct.


DEALING IN CAPTURED OR ABANDONED PROPERTY.

ART. 80. Any person subject to military law who buys, sells, trades,
or in any way deals in or disposes of captured or abandoned property,
whereby he shall receive or expect any profit, benefit, or advantage
to himself or to any other person directly or indirectly connected
with himself, or who fails whenever such property comes into his
possession or custody or within his control to give notice thereof to
the proper authority and to turn over such property to the proper
authority without delay, shall, on conviction thereof, be punished by
fine or imprisonment, or by such other punishment as a court-martial,
military commission, or other military tribunal may adjudge, or by any
or all of said penalties.


RELIEVING, CORRESPONDING WITH, OR AIDING THE ENEMY.

ART. 81. Whosoever relieves the enemy with arms, ammunition, supplies,
money, or other thing, or knowingly harbors or protects or holds
correspondence with or gives intelligence to the enemy, either
directly or indirectly, shall suffer death, or such other punishment
as a court-martial or military commission may direct.


SPIES.

ART. 82. Any person who in time of war shall be found lurking or
acting as a spy in or about any of the fortifications, posts,
quarters, or encampments of any of the armies of the United States, or
elsewhere, shall be tried by a general court-martial or by a military
commission, and shall, on conviction thereof, suffer death.


MILITARY PROPERTY--WILLFUL OR NEGLIGENT LOSS, DAMAGE, OR WRONGFUL
DISPOSITION OF.

ART. 83. Any person subject to military law who willfully or through
neglect suffers to be lost, spoiled, damaged, or wrongfully disposed
of any military property belonging to the United States shall make
good the loss or damage and suffer such punishment as a court-martial
may direct.


WASTE OR UNLAWFUL DISPOSITION OF MILITARY PROPERTY ISSUED TO SOLDIERS.

ART. 84. Any soldier who sells or wrongfully disposes of or willfully
or through neglect injures or loses any horse, arms, ammunition,
accouterments, equipments, clothing, or other property issued for use
in the military service shall be punished as a court-martial may
direct.


DRUNK ON DUTY.

ART. 85. Any officer who is found drunk on duty shall, if the offense
be committed in time of war, be dismissed from the service and suffer
such other punishment as a court-martial may direct; and if the
offense be committed in time of peace he shall be punished as a
court-martial may direct. Any person subject to military law, except
an officer, who is found drunk on duty shall be punished as a
court-martial may direct.


MISBEHAVIOR OF SENTINEL.

ART. 86. Any sentinel who is found drunk or sleeping upon his post, or
who leaves it before he is regularly relieved, shall, if the offense
be committed in time of war, suffer death or such other punishment as
a court-martial may direct; and if the offense be committed in time of
peace he shall suffer any punishment, except death, that a
court-martial may direct.


PERSONAL INTEREST IN SALE OF PROVISIONS.

ART. 87. Any officer commanding in any garrison, fort, barracks, camp,
or other place where troops of the United States may be serving who,
for his private advantage, lays any duty or imposition upon or is
interested in the sale of any victuals or other necessaries of life
brought into such garrison, fort, barracks, camp, or other place for
the use of the troops, shall be dismissed from the service and suffer
such other punishment as a court-martial may direct.


INTIMIDATION OF PERSONS BRINGING PROVISIONS.

ART. 88. Any person subject to military law who abuses, intimidates,
does violence to, or wrongfully interferes with any person bringing
provisions, supplies, or other necessaries to the camp, garrison, or
quarters of the forces of the United States shall suffer such
punishment as a court-martial may direct.


GOOD ORDER TO BE MAINTAINED AND WRONGS REDRESSED.

ART. 89. All persons subject to military law are to behave themselves
orderly in quarters, garrison, camp, and on the march; and any person
subject to military law who commits any waste or spoil, or willfully
destroys any property whatsoever (unless by order of his commanding
officer), or commits any kind of depredation or riot, shall be
punished as a court-martial may direct. Any commanding officer who,
upon complaint made to him, refuses or omits to see reparation made to
the party injured, in so far as the offender's pay shall go toward
such reparation, as provided for in article 105, shall be dismissed
from the service or otherwise punished as a court-martial may direct.


PROVOKING SPEECHES OR GESTURES.

ART. 90. No person subject to military law shall use any reproachful
or provoking speeches or gestures to another; and any person subject
to military law who offends against the provisions of this article
shall be punished as a court-martial may direct.


DUELING.

ART. 91. Any person subject to military law who fights or promotes or
is concerned in or connives at fighting a duel, or who having
knowledge of a challenge sent or about to be sent, fails to report the
fact promptly to the proper authority, shall, if an officer, be
dismissed from the service or suffer such other punishment as a
court-martial may direct; and if any other person subject to military
law shall suffer such punishment as a court-martial may direct.


MURDER--RAPE.

ART. 92. Any person subject to military law who commits murder or rape
shall suffer death or imprisonment for life, as a court-martial may
direct; but no person shall be tried by court-martial for murder or
rape committed within the geographical limits of the States of the
Union and the District of Columbia in time of peace.


VARIOUS CRIMES.

ART. 93. Any person subject to military law who commits manslaughter,
mayhem, arson, burglary, robbery, larceny, embezzlement, perjury,
assault with intent to commit any felony, or assault with intent to do
bodily harm, shall be punished as a court-martial may direct.


FRAUDS AGAINST THE GOVERNMENT.

ART. 94. Any person subject to military law who makes or causes to be
made any claim against the United States or any officer thereof,
knowing such claim to be false or fraudulent; or

Who presents or causes to be presented to any person in the civil or
military service thereof, for approval or payment, any claim against
the United States or any officer thereof, knowing such claim to be
false or fraudulent; or

Who enters into any agreement or conspiracy to defraud the United
States by obtaining, or aiding others to obtain, the allowance or
payment of any false or fraudulent claim; or

Who, for the purpose of obtaining, or aiding others to obtain, the
approval, allowance, or payment of any claim against the United States
or against any officer thereof, makes or uses, or procures, or advises
the making or use of, any writing or other paper, knowing the same to
contain any false or fraudulent statements; or

Who, for the purpose of obtaining, or aiding others to obtain, the
approval, allowance, or payment of any claim against the United States
or any officer thereof, makes, or procures, or advises the making of,
any oath to any fact or to any writing or other paper, knowing such
oath to be false; or

Who, for the purpose of obtaining, or aiding others to obtain, the
approval, allowance, or payment of any claim against the United States
or any officer thereof, forges or counterfeits, or procures, or
advises the forging or counterfeiting of any signature upon any
writing or other paper, or uses, or procures, or advises the use of
any such signature, knowing the same to be forged or counterfeited; or

Who, having charge, possession, custody, or control of any money or
other property of the United States, furnished or intended for the
military service thereof, knowingly delivers, or causes to be
delivered, to any person having authority to receive the same, any
amount thereof less than that for which he receives a certificate or
receipt; or

Who, being authorized to make or deliver any paper certifying the
receipt of any property of the United States furnished or intended for
the military service thereof, makes or delivers to any person such
writing, without having full knowledge of the truth of the statements
therein contained and with intent to defraud the United States; or

Who steals, embezzles, knowingly and willfully misappropriates,
applies to his own use or benefit, or wrongfully or knowingly sells or
disposes of any ordnance, arms, equipments, ammunition, clothing,
subsistence stores, money, or other property of the United States
furnished or intended for the military service thereof; or

Who knowingly purchases or receives in pledge for any obligation or
indebtedness from any soldier, officer, or other person who is a part
of or employed in said forces or service, any ordnance, arms,
equipment, ammunition, clothing, subsistence stores, or other property
of the United States, such soldier, officer, or other person not
having lawful right to sell or pledge the same;

Shall, on conviction thereof, be punished by fine or imprisonment, or
by such other punishment as a court-martial may adjudge, or by any or
all of said penalties. And if any person, being guilty of any of the
offenses aforesaid while in the military service of the United States,
receives his discharge or is dismissed from the service, he shall
continue to be liable to be arrested and held for trial and sentence
by a court-martial in the same manner and to the same extent as if he
had not received such discharge nor been dismissed.


CONDUCT UNBECOMING AN OFFICER AND GENTLEMAN.

ART. 95. Any officer or cadet who is convicted of conduct unbecoming
an officer and a gentleman shall be dismissed from the service.


GENERAL ARTICLE.

ART. 96. Though not mentioned in these articles, all disorders and
neglects to the prejudice of good order and military discipline, all
conduct of a nature to bring discredit upon the military service, and
all crimes or offenses not capital of which persons subject to
military law may be guilty shall be taken cognizance of by a general
or special or summary court-martial, according to the nature and
degree of the offense, and punished at the discretion of such court.


DISCIPLINARY POWERS OF COMMANDING OFFICERS.

ART. 104. Under such regulations as the President may prescribe, and
which he may from time to time revoke, alter, or add to, the
commanding officer of any detachment, company, or higher command may,
for minor offenses not denied by the accused, impose disciplinary
punishments upon persons of his command without the intervention of a
court-martial, unless the accused demands trial by court-martial.

The disciplinary punishments authorized by this article may include
admonition, reprimand, withholding of privileges, extra fatigue, and
restriction to certain specified limits, but shall not include
forfeiture of pay or confinement under guard. A person punished under
authority of this article who deems his punishment unjust or
disproportionate to the offense may, through the proper channel,
appeal to the next superior authority, but, may in the meantime be
required to undergo the punishment adjudged. The commanding officer
who imposes the punishment, his successor in command, and superior
authority shall have power to mitigate or remit any unexecuted portion
of the punishment. The imposition and enforcement of disciplinary
punishment under authority of this article for any act or omission
shall not be a bar to trial by court-martial for a crime or offense
growing out of the same act or omission; but the fact that a
disciplinary punishment has been enforced may be shown by the accused
upon trial, and when so shown shall be considered in determining the
measure of punishment to be adjudged in the event of a finding of
guilty.


REDRESS OF INJURIES TO PERSON OR PROPERTY.

ART. 105. Whenever complaint is made to any commanding officer that
damage has been done to the property of any person or that his
property has been wrongfully taken by persons subject to military law,
such complaint shall be investigated by a board consisting of any
number of officers from one to three, which board shall be convened by
the commanding officer and shall have, for the purpose of such
investigation, power to summon witnesses and examine them upon oath or
affirmation, to receive depositions or other documentary evidence,
and to assess the damages sustained against the responsible parties.
The assessment of damages made by such board shall be subject to the
approval of the commanding officer, and in the amount approved by him
shall be stopped against the pay of the offenders. And the order of
such commanding officer directing stoppages herein authorized shall be
conclusive on any disbursing officer for the payment by him to the
injured parties of the stoppages so ordered.

Where the offenders can not be ascertained but the organization or
detachment to which they belong is known, stoppages to the amount of
damages inflicted may be made and assessed in such proportion as may
be deemed just upon the individual members thereof who are shown to
have been present with such organization or detachment at the time the
damages complained of were inflicted, as determined by the approved
findings of the board.


ARREST OF DESERTERS BY CIVIL OFFICIALS.

ART. 106. It shall be lawful for any civil officer having authority
under the laws of the United States, or of any State, Territory,
District, or possession of the United States, to arrest offenders,
summarily to arrest a deserter from the military service of the United
States and deliver him into the custody of the military authorities of
the United States.


SOLDIERS TO MAKE GOOD TIME LOST.

ART. 107. Every soldier who in an existing or subsequent enlistment
deserts the service of the United States or without proper authority
absents himself from his organization, station, or duty for more than
one day, or who is confined for more than one day under sentence, or
while awaiting trial and disposition of his case, if the trial results
in conviction, or through the intemperate use of drugs or alcoholic
liquor, or through disease or injury the result of his own misconduct,
renders himself unable for more than one day to perform duty, shall be
liable to serve, after his return to a full-duty status, for such
period as shall, with the time he may have served prior to such
desertion, unauthorized absence, confinement, or inability to perform
duty, amount to the full term of that part of his enlistment period
which he is required to serve with his organization before being
furloughed to the Army Reserve.


SOLDIERS--SEPARATION FROM THE SERVICE.

ART. 108. No enlisted man, lawfully inducted into the military service
of the United States, shall be discharged from said service without a
certificate of discharge, signed by a field officer of the regiment or
other organization to which the enlisted man belongs or by the
commanding officer when no such field officer is present; and no
enlisted man shall be discharged from said service before his term of
service has expired, except by order of the President, the Secretary
of War, the commanding officer of a department, or by a sentence of a
general court-martial.


OATH OF ENLISTMENT.

ART. 109. At the time of his enlistment every soldier shall take the
following oath or affirmation: "I, ---------, do solemnly swear (or
affirm) that I will bear true faith and allegiance to the United
States of America; that I will serve them honestly and faithfully
against all their enemies whomsoever; and that I will obey the orders
of the President of the United States and the orders of the officers
appointed over me, according to the Rules and Articles of War." This
oath or affirmation may be taken before any officer.




CHAPTER XV.

ENGLISH-FRENCH VOCABULARY.


COMMON WORDS.

  Afternoon (this)   Cet apres-midi.
  Army (an)          Une armee.
  Bandage            Un bandage.
  Bath               Un bain.
  Bayonet            Une baionnette.
  Bed                Un lit.
  Blanket            Une couverture.
  Boy                Un garcon.
  Bullet             Une balle,
                     Un pruneau (soldier slang).
  Camp               Un camp,
                     Un campement.
  Cartridge          Une cartouche.
  Child              Un enfant,
                     Une enfant.
  Cook               Un cuisinier,
                     Un cuistot (slang),
                     Une cuisiniere, (fem.).
  Dance              Un bal,
                     Une danse (one dance).
  Dark               Obscur.
  Day                Un jour.
  Dead               Mort.
  Deserter           Un deserteur.
  Door               Une porte.
  Farm               Une ferme.
  Firearms           Des armes a feu.
  Field gun          Une piece de campagne.
  Flag               Un drapeau.
                     Un etendard (standard).
  Forest             Une foret,
                     Un bois (woods),
                     Un boqueteau (clump of trees).
  Friend             Un ami,
                     Une amie.
  Girl               Une jeune fille.
  Guide              Un guide.
  Gun                Un fusil.
  Halt!              Halte!
  Hand               Une main.
  Hat                Un chapeau,
                     Un kepi (cap),
                     Un casque (helmet),
                     Un feutre (campaign hat).
  Head               La tete.
  Headquarters       Le quartier-general.
  Horse              Un cheval.
  Interpreter        Un interprete.
  Knife              Un couteau.
  Lake               Un lac.
  Man                Un homme.
  Meat               De la viande.
  Name               Un nom.
  Night              La nuit.
  Noon               Midi.
  Machine gun        Une mitrailleuse.
  Mess call          La soupe.
  Password           Le mot de passe.
  Pay                Le pret (enlisted men),
                     La solde (officers).
  Prisoner           Un prisonnier.
  Recruit            Une recrue,
                     Un bleu (slang),
                     Un bleuet (slang),
                     Un blanc-bec (slang).
  Restaurant         Un restaurant,
                     Un cafe.
  Road               Un chemin,
                     Une route.
  Retreat            La retraite.
  Reveille           Le reveil,
                     La diane
  Saber              Un sabre.
  Saddle             Une selle.
  Shoe               Des chaussures (shoes in general),
                     Des souliers (low shoes),
                     Des bottines (high shoes),
                     Des brodequins (marching shoes).
  Shotgun            Un fusil de chasse.
  Sick               Malade.
  Soup               Une soupe,
                     Un potage.
  Spy                Un espion.
  Supper             Le souper.
  Sword              Une epee.
  Tent               Une tente.
  Shelter tent       Une tente-abri.


NUMERALS.

  One                Un, une.
  Two                Deux.
  Three              Trois.
  Four               Quatre.
  Five               Cinq (pronounce _sank_).
  Six                Six (pronounce _cease_).
  Seven              Sept (pronounce _set_).
  Eight              Huit (pronounce _weet_).
  Nine               Neuf.
  Ten                Dix (pronounce _deess_).
  Eleven             Onze.
  Twelve             Douze.
  Thirteen           Treize.
  Fourteen           Quatorze.
  Fifteen            Quinze.
  Sixteen            Seize.
  Seventeen          Six-sept.
  Eighteen           Dix-huit.
  Nineteen           Dix-neuf.
  Twenty             Vingt (pronounce _vant_).
  Twenty-one         Vingt-et-un.
  Thirty             Trente.
  Thirty-one         Trente-et-un.
  Thirty-two         Trente-deux.
  Forty              Quarante.
  Fifty              Cinquante.
  Sixty              Soixante.
  Seventy            Soixante-dix.
  Seventy-one        Soixante-et-onze.
  Seventy-two        Soixante-douze.
  Eighty             Quatre-vingts.
  Eighty-one         Quatre-vingt-un.
  Ninety             Quatre-vingt-dix.
  Ninety-one         Quatre-vingt-onze.
  One hundred        Cent.
  One hundred and one   Cent un.
  Two hundred        Deux cents.
  Two hundred and one   Deux cent un.
  One thousand       Mille.
  Two thousand       Deux mille.
  One thousand one hundred    Mille cent; onze cents.
  Thousands of soldiers       Des milliers de soldats.
  A million          Un million.
  Two million men    Deux millions d'hommes.
  A score            Une vingtaine.
  About forty men    Une quarantaine d'hommes.
  Hundreds of men    Des centaines d'hommes.


CURRENCY, MEASURES, AND WEIGHTS.

  1 cent             Un sou; cinq centimes.
  10 cents           Dix sous; cinquante centimes.
  20 cents (about)   Un francs.
  1 dollar           Cinq francs.

(The French have gold pieces of 10 francs and 20 francs; bank notes of
50 francs, 100 francs, and higher. The gold pieces are probably
replaced by bank notes now.)

  1 meter (1.0936 yards)           Un metre.
  1 kilometer (0.62138 mile)       Un kilometre.

     NOTE.--For all ordinary purposes, the "Kilometre" = 5/8 of a
     mile; the "Centimetre" = 4/10 of an inch.

  1 league (2.48552 miles)         Une lieue.
  1 hectare (2.4711 acres)         Un hectare.
  1 gram (15.43239 grain Troy)     Un gramme.
  1 kilogram (2.204621 pounds
    avoirdupois)                   Un kilogramme.
  220.46 pounds avoirdupois        Un quintal; 100 kilos.
  2,204.6 pounds avoirdupois       Une tonne; 1,000 kilos.

(Coal is sold by the _tonne_; grain and hay by the _quintal_. Dix
quintaux de ble, de foin=10 quintals of grain, of hay.)

  1.0567 quart (liquid)            Un litre.
  26.417 gallons                   Un hectolitre.
  0.9081 quart (dry)               Un litre.
  2.8379 bushels                   Un hectolitre.

(The _litre_, which is the principal unit of both fluid and dry
measures, is the contents of 1 cubic _decimetre_ (decimetre = 1/10
metre).)


DAYS, MONTHS, AND SEASONS.

  Sunday                 Dimanche.
  Monday                 Lundi.
  Tuesday                Mardi.
  Wednesday              Mercredi.
  Thursday               Jeudi.
  Friday                 Vendredi.
  Saturday               Samedi.
  January                Janvier.
  February               Fevrier.
  March                  Mars.
  April                  Avril.
  May                    Mai.
  June                   Juin.
  July                   Juillet.
  August                 Aout (pronounced _oo_).
  September              Septembre.
  October                Octobre.
  November               Novembre.
  December               Decembre.
  The seasons            Les saisons.
  Winter                 L'hiver.
  Spring                 Le printemps.
  Summer                 L'ete.
  Fall                   L'automne.
  Year                   Un an; une annee.
  Month                  Un mois.
  Week                   Une semaine.
  Day                    Un jour.
  Hour                   Une heure.
  Minute                 Une minute.
  Second                 Une seconde.


COMMON PHRASES

  Good morning, sir,
          madam, miss.             Bonjour, monsieur, madame,
  Good afternoon                   mademoiselle.
  Good evening, sir                Bonsoir, monsieur.
  Good night, sir                  Bonne nuit, monsieur.
  Pardon me                        Pardon; je vous demande pardon.
  Don't mention it                 Je vous en prie.
  How do you do?                   Comment allez-vous?
                                   Comment ca va?
                                   Comment vous portez-vous?
  Very well, thank you             Tres bien, merci.
                                   Je vais bien, merci.
                                   Ca va bien, merci.
                                   Je me porte bien, merci.
  Do not trouble yourself          Ne vous genez pas.
                                   Ne vous derangez pas.
  I am very glad to see you        Je suis bien aise de vous voir.
                                   Je suis content (heureux) de vous
                                    voir.
  What time is it?                 Quelle heure est-il?
  It is 10 o'clock                 Il est dix heures.
  Take care; look out              Prenez garde.
  Do not bother me                 Ne me derangez pas.
  Stop here                        Arretez-vous ici.
  Does Mr. -- live here?           M. -- demeure-t-il ici?
  Come in                          Entrez.
  You are very kind                Vous etes tres aimable.
  At what time does the first
   train start?                    A quelle heure part le premier
  What is the name of this          train?
   station?                        Comment s'appelle cette station
                                    (gare)?
  I want                           Je desire..Je veux (stronger).
  I do not want it.                Je n'en veux pas.
  Let me know what I owe you.      Dites-moi ce que je vous dois.
  Are you not mistaken?            Ne faites-vous pas erreur?
                                   Ne vous trompez-vous pas?
  Please give me                   Veuillez me donner.
  Move on.                         Avancez.
                                   Circulez. (Policeman.)
  I want something to eat.         Je desire quelque chose a manger.
  Where is it?                     Ou est-ce?
  Go and look for it.              Allez le chercher.
  Take this letter to the post
   office.                         Portez cette lettre a la poste.
  How much is it?                  Combien?
                                   Combien cela coute-t-il?
  It is dear.                      C'est cher.
  Thank you.                       Merci.
                                   Je vous en remercie.
  Don't mention it.                Il n'y a pas de quoi.
                                   De rien.
  Allow me to present my friend.   Permettez-moi de vous presenter
                                    mon ami ----.
  I am glad to make your
   acquaintance.                   Je suis enchante de faire votre
                                    connaissance.
  How far is it?                   A quelle distance est-ce?
  What can I do for you?           Que puis-je faire pour vous?
  Do you speak English?            Parlez-vous anglais?
  I do not speak French very       Je ne parle pas tres bien le
   well.                            francais.
  Where do you come from?          D'ou venez-vous?
  How did you come?                Comment etes-vous venu?
  On foot, in a carriage, in an    A pied, en voiture, en auto, en
   auto, by rail, by boat, on a     chemin de fer, en bateau, a
   bicycle, horseback, in an        bicyclette, a cheval, en aeroplane.
   aeroplane.


MILITARY TITLES, RANKS, AND GRADES.

  General officers                 Les officers generaux.
  General staff                    L'etat-major general.
  Field officers                   Les officiers superieurs.
  Company officers                 Les officiers subalternes.
  Enlisted men                     Les hommes de troupe.
  Noncommissioned officers         Les sous-officiers.
  Private soldiers                 Les simples soldats.
  Colonel                          Le colonel (addressed[15] as "Mon
                                     colonel").
  Major                            Le commandant ("Mon commandant").
  Captain                          Le capitaine ("Mon capitaine").
                                   Le piston (slang).
  First lieutenant                 Le lieutenant (en premier) ("Mon
                                     lieutenant").
  Second lieutenant                Le sous-lieutenant ("Mon lieutenant").
  A doctor                         Un (medecin) major.
  A sergeant                       Un sergent (addressed as "Sergent").
                                   Un marechal des logis (mounted
                                     service).
  A corporal                       Un caporal ("Caporal").
                                   Un brigadier (mounted service).
  A private                        Un simple soldat.
  A body of troops                 Une troupe.
  French troops                    Des troupes francaises.
  A wagoner                        Un conducteur.
                                   Un fourgonnier.
  A horseshoer                     Un marechal-ferrant.
  A saddler                        Un sellier.
  A signaler                       Un signaleur.
  A deserter                       Un deserteur.
  A soldier of Infantry            Un fantassin.
               Cavalry             Un cavalier.
               Artillery           Un artilleur.
               Engineers           Un sapeur-mineur.
          Quartermaster Corps.     Un homme de l'intendance.
               Signal Corps        Un homme du corps des signaux.
               Hospital Corps      Un infirmier.
          Line of Communications   Un garde des voies et communications,
                                     G. V. C.
  Infantry                         L'infanterie.
  Cavalry                          La cavalerie.
  Artillery                        L'artillerie.
  Engineers                        Le genie.
  Signal Corps                     Le corps des signaux.
  Hospital Corps                   Le corps de sante.
                                   Le service de sante.
  Aviation Corps                   Le corps d'aviation.

         [Footnote 15: See note, p. 388.]


MILITARY TERMS.

  The headquarters                 Le quartier general.
  The train                        Le train des equipages.
  Railway service                  Le service des chemins de fer.
  Telegraph service                Le service des telegraphes.
  Rural guards                     La gendarmerie.
                                   Des gendarmes.
  A paymaster                      Un tresorier.
  A chaplain                       Un aumonier.
  An army                          Une armee.
  General So-and-so's army         L'armee--(l'armee Foch).
  An army corps                    Un corps d'armee.
  A division                       Une division.
  A brigade                        Une brigade.
  A regiment                       Un regiment.
  A battalion                      Un bataillon.
  A company                        Une compagnie.
  A platoon                        Un peloton.
  A section                        Une section.
  A squad                          Une escouade.
  A detachment                     Un detachement.
  Barracks                         Une caserne.
  A camp                           Un camp (more or less permanent).
                                   Un campement (temporary).
  A cantonment                     Un cantonnement.
  Line                             (Une) ligne.
  Column                           (Une) colonne.
  As skirmishers                   En tirailleurs.
  Follow me, as skirmishers        A moi, en tirailleurs.
  Scouts                           Des eclaireurs.
  A patrol                         Une patrouille.
  The advance guard                L'avant-garde.
  The rear guard                   L'arriere-garde.
  Flankers                         Des flanc-gardes.
  The main body                    Le gros (de la colonne).
  Combat train                     Le train de combat.
  Field train                      Le train regimentaire.
  Outposts                         Des avant-postes.
  Cossack posts                    Des avant-postes a la cosaque.
  A sentinel                       Une sentinelle.
                                   Un factionnaire.
  On post                          En faction.
                                   De faction.
  Guard mounting                   La garde montante (also _new
                                     guard_).
  The sentinel challenges: "Halt!  La sentinelle crie: "Halte! Qui
   Who's there?"                     vive?"
  The answer is: "France"          La reponse est: "France."
  Advance with the countersign     Avance au ralliement.

(The person challenged gives the _mot d'ordre_, which is the name of
some general, and the sentinel replies with the _mot de ralliement_,
which is the name of a battle or a city.)

  Go away; you can't pass          (Passe) au large.
  Halt, or I fire                  Halte, ou je fais feu.
  Put down your arms               Deposez vos armes.
  Hands up!                        Levez les bras.
  Face about                       (Faites) demi-tour.
  Come here                        Venez ici.
  A spy                            Un espion.
  A flag of truce                  Un drapeau blanc.
                                   Un drapeau parlementaire.


UNIFORMS, ARMS, CLOTHING, AND EQUIPMENT.

  Clothing                         Les vetements, l'habillement.
  Change your clothes              Changez de vetements.
  Overcoat (worn by French
    infantry)                      Une capote.
  Trousers                         Un pantalon.
  Breeches                         Une culotte.
  Shirt                            Une chemise.
  Blouse                           Un dolman, une vareuse.
  Cap                              Un kepi.
  Campaign hat (United States)     Un (chapeau de) feutre.
  Helmet                           Un casque (de tranchee).
  Cap with visor worn by French
    off duty.                      Un bonnet de police.
  Tam-o'-shanter worn by Alpine
    chasseurs.                     Un beret.
  Shoes in general.                Des chaussures.
  Service shoes                    Des brodequins.
  Leggins                          Des guetres.
  Wrap putties                     Des bandes molletieres.
  Leather putties                  Des houseaux (or housseaux).
  Full-dress uniform               La grande tenue.
  Dress uniform                    La petite tenue.
  Field uniform                    La tenue de campagne.
  Overcoat (mounted men)           Un manteau.
  Overcoat (officers)              Un manteau.
                                   Un manteau-capote.
  Fatigue coat                     Le bourgeron.
  Fatigue trousers (overalls)      Un pantalon de treillis.
  Fatigue uniform                  La tenue de corvee.
  Magazine rifle                   Un fusil a repetition.
  The barrel                       Le canon.
  The bolt                         Le verrou.
  The ramrod                       La baguette.
  The butt                         La crosse.
  The gun sling                    La bretelle.
  The trigger                      La detente.
  Rear sight                       La hausse.
  Front sight                      Le guidon.
  A bayonet                        Une baionnette.
                                   Rosalie (slang).
  Ball cartridge                   Une cartouche a balle.
  Blank cartridge                  Une cartouche a blanc.
  Dummy cartridge                  Une fausse cartouche.
  Belt                             Un ceinturon.
  Cartridge box                    Une cartouchiere.
  First-aid packet                 Un paquet de pansement.
  The pack                         Le sac.
  A haversack                      Un etui-musette.
  Canteen                          Un bidon.
  Tin cup                          Un quart.
  Mess can                         Une gamelle.
  Equipment                        L'equipement.
  Compass                          Une boussole.
  Field glasses                    Des jumelles (de campagne).
  Whistle                          Un sifflet.
  Revolver                         Un revolver.


QUESTIONS ABOUT THE ROADS, ETC.

  Pardon me, sir, do you speak            Pardon, monsieur, parlez-vous
    English?                                anglais?
  (German, French, Italian, Russian)      (Allemand, francais, italien,
                                            russe.)
  All right, then show me, please,        Tres bien, alors indiquez-moi, je
    the road to ----                        vous prie, le chemin de ----.
  Is it far from here?                    Est-ce loin d'ici?
  How long does it take to go             Combien faut-il de temps pour y
    there?                                  aller?
  How many kilometers?                    Combien de kilometres?
  Is there a short cut? (road)            Y a-t-il un chemin de traverse?
  Is there a short cut? (trail)           Y a-t-il un sentier plus court?
  Where does this road go?                Ou mene cette route?
  Are we on the right road to go          Sommes-nous sur le bon chemin
    to ----?                                pour aller a ----?
  Does this road go through Compiegne?    Cette route passe-t-elle par
                                            Compiegne?
  Shall we find any villages on           Trouverons-nous des villages sur
    our road?                               notre chemin?
  Are there any other roads going         Y a-t-il d'autres chemins pour
    to ----?                                aller a ----?
  Is this road in good condition?         Cette route est-elle en bon etat?
  Are there hills?                        Y a-t-il des cotes (des coteaux)?
  Are they steep?                         Sont-elles raides?
  Does the road go through open           La route, traverse-t-elle un pays
    or wooded country?                      decouvert ou boise?
  Can we get through with artillery?      Peut-on passer avec de
                                            l'artillerie?
  Can we get through with heavily         Peut-on passer avec de grosses
    loaded wagons (auto                     voitures chargees (avec des
    trucks)?                                camions-automobiles)?
  Is this road practicable for artillery? Cette route est-elle praticable
                                            pour l'artillerie?
  Can infantry march on the sides         L'infanterie peut-elle marcher
    of the roads?                           sur les cotes de la route?
  Is the ground practicable               Le terrain est-il praticable?
  Is the ground marshy                    Le terrain est-il marecageux?
  What is the nature of the ground        Quelle est la nature du sol?
  Does the telegraph line follow          Est-ce que la ligne telegraphique
  this road as far as X?                    (le telegraphe) suit cette
                                            route jusqu'a X?
  Where does your railroad come
  from?                                   D'ou vient votre chemin de fer?
  Where does it go to?                    Ou va-t-il?
  Is it single tracked or double          Est-il a une voie ou a deux voies
    tracked the whole way?                  sur tout le parcours?
  Where is the station? Is it far?        Ou est la gare? Est-elle loin
                                            d'ici?
  How can the river be crossed?           Comment peut-on passer la
                                            riviere?
  Is there a bridge? a ferry?             Y a-t-il un pont? un bac?
  Are there fords?                        Y a-t-il des passages a gue
                                            (des gues)?
  Can we get boats?                       Peut-on trouver des bateaux?
  In that wood are there clearings,       Dans ce bois, y a-t-il des
    ravines, brooks, marshes, pools?        clairieres, des ravins, des
                                            ruisseaux, des mares?
  Are there any places near here          Y a-t-il des endroits pres d'ici
    for watering horses?                    pour abreuver les chevaux?
  Is the water good?                      L'eau est-elle bonne?
  Is this water drinkable?                Est-ce de l'eau potable?
  Are there watering troughs?             Y a-t-il des abreuvoirs?
  Where is there good grass for the       Ou y a-t-il de bonne herbe pour
    animals?                                les animaux?
  Can we buy provisions?                  Peut-on acheter des vivres?
  Is there a field where we can           Y a-t-il un champ ou nous pouvons
    camp?                                   camper (installer notre
                                            campement)?
  Can you give me any information         Pouvez-vous me donner des
    about the enemy?                        renseignements sur l'ennemi?
  Please find me a guide who              Veuillez me trouver un guide qui
    knows the country?                      connaisse le pays.
  We are going to follow this trail
    (tracks).                             Nous allons suivre cette piste.
  Crossroads                              Un carrefour.


TOWNS.

  Where is the post-office and            Ou est le bureau des postes et
    telegraph office?                       telegraphes?
  The postmaster                          Le directeur des postes et
                                            telegraphes.
  The mail                                Le courrier.
  When was the last mail distributed?     A quelle heure a-t-on fait la
                                            derniere distribution?
  General delivery                        Poste restante.
  Are there any letters for ----?         Y a-t-il des lettres pour ----?
  I should like to send a telegram.       Je voudrais expedier un
                                            telegramme.
  Have you received a telegram            Avez-vous recu un telegramme
    for ----?                               (une depeche) pour ----?
  A telegraph instrument                  Un appareil (telegraphique).
  Can you tell me where the               Pourriez-vous me dire ou se
    mayor's office is?                      trouve la mairie?
  I couldn't tell you; I am a             Je ne saurais vous renseigner;
    stranger here.                          je ne connais pas la ville.
  Good morning, sir, are you the          Bonjour, Monsieur, etes-vous le
    mayor?                                  maire?
  No, sir, I am his assistant.            Non, Monsieur, je suis son adjoint.
  I should like to speak to the           Je voudrais parler au maire lui-meme.
    mayor himself.
  Listen, sir. A detachment will          Ecoutez, monsieur. Un detachement
    arrive here to-morrow morning           arrivera, ici demain matin
    at 5 o'clock.                           a cinq heures.
  Can you arrange to lodge 2,000          Pouvez-vous prendre des dispositions
    men for two days?                       pour loger 2,000 hommes
                                            pendant deux jours?
  A policeman                             Un sergent de ville, un agent de
                                            la paix.


RAILROADS.

  The station agent                       Le chef de gare.
  The conductor                           Le conducteur.
  The engineer                            Le mecanicien.
  The fireman                             Le chauffeur.
  The brakeman                            Le serre-freins.
  The telegraph operator                  Le telegraphiste.
  An engine                               Une locomotive.
  Passenger cars                          Des wagons (de voyageurs).
  Flat cars                               Des trucks.
  Box cars                                Des wagons de marchandises.
  Stock cars                              Des wagons a bestiaux.
  An express train                        Un train express.
  A through train                         Un train direct.
  A local train                           Un train omnibus.
  A passenger train                       Un train de voyageurs.
  A freight train                         Un train de marchandises.
  To entrain the troops                   Embarquer les troupes.
  To detrain the troops                   Debarquer les troupes.
  To get on a train                       Monter dans un train.
  To get off a train                      Descendre d'un train.
  The railroad track                      La voie (ferree).
  A side track                            Une voie de garage.
  A ticket                                Un billet.
  A round trip ticket                     Un billet d'aller et retour.
  One way only                            Aller seulement.
  The ticket window                       Le guichet.
  At what time does the Paris             A quelle heure part le train pour
    train start?                            Paris?
  It is late (15 minutes late).           Il est en retard (de quinze minutes).
  Do we have to change cars?              Faut-il changer de train?
  The train stops                         Le train s'arrete.
  All aboard!                             En voiture!
  The train starts                        Le train s'ebranle.


RATIONS AND FOOD.

  Provisions (in general)                 Les vivres.
  The ration                              La ration.
  Fresh beef                              De la viande fraiche.
  Bacon                                   Du lard.
  Flour                                   De la farine.
  Soft bread                              Du pain frais.
  Hard bread (crackers)                   Du biscuit.
  Field bread                             Du pain de guerre.
  Corn meal                               De la farine de mais.
  Coffee                                  Du cafe.
  Sugar                                   Du sucre.
  Eggs                                    Des oeufs.
  Chickens                                Des poulets.
  Potatoes                                Des pommes de terre.
  Peas                                    Des pois.
  String beans                            Des haricots verts.
  Vegetables (in general)                 Des legumes.
  An apple                                Une pomme.
  A pear                                  Une poire.
  A cherry                                Une cerise.
  A peach                                 Une peche.
  Cheese                                  Du fromage.
  Wine                                    Du vin.
  Beer                                    De la biere.
  A glass of beer                         Un bock.
  I am hungry.                            J'ai faim.
  Bring me something to eat,              Apportez-moi quelque chose a
    please.                                 manger, s'il vous plait.
  I am thirsty.                           J'ai soif.
  Please give me, a glass of water.       Veuillez me donner un verre d'eau.
  Waiter, I'll take a beefsteak.          Garcon, je desire un bifteck.
  Some black coffee                       Du cafe noir.
  Coffee with milk                        Du cafe au lait.
  Rolls                                   Des petits pains.
  Crescent rolls                          Des croissants.


HOSPITALS.

  A field hospital                        Une ambulance.
  A hospital (in general)                 Un hopital (plural: des hopitaux).
  A dressing station                      Un poste de secours.
  A first-aid dressing                    Un pansement sommaire.
  Red Cross                               La Croix Rouge.
  A doctor                                Un medecin.
                                          Un docteur.
  A surgeon                               Un chirurgien.
  A military surgeon                      Un (medecin) major.
  Assistant surgeon                       Un aide-major.
  A male nurse, hospital corps man        Un infirmier.
  A female nurse                          Une infirmiere.
  An ambulance                            Une ambulance.
  A stretcher (litter)                    Un brancard.
  A litter bearer                         Un brancardier.
  A roll of bandages                      Un rouleau de bandage.
  A first-aid packet                      Un paquet de pansement.
  A wounded man                           Un blesse.
  I am sick                               Je suis malade.
  I have a fever                          J'ai la fievre.
  I have chills and fever                 J'ai des frissons de fievre.
  I am constipated                        Je suis constipe.
  I have diarrhea                         J'ai la diarrhee.


POINTS OF THE COMPASS.

  North                                   Le nord.
  South                                   Le sud.
  East                                    L'est.
  West                                    L'ouest.
  Northeast                               Le nord-est.
  Southeast                               Le sud-est.
  Northwest                               Le nord-ouest.
  Southwest                               Le sud-ouest.


TRENCH WARFARE.

  Trench warfare                          La guerre des tranchees.
                                          La guerre de position.
                                          La guerre de taupe (_moles_).
  Trench                                  Une tranchee.
  Communication trench                    Un boyau (de communication).
  The parapet                             Le parapet.
  A loophole                              Un creneau.
                                          Une meurtriere.
  A grenade                               Une grenade.
  A grenadier, bomber                     Un grenadier.
  Barbed wire                             Du fil de fer barbele.
  Barbed wire entanglement                Un reseau de fils de fer barbeles.
  Trench mortar                           Un mortier.
                                          Un crapouillaud.
                                          _Minenwerfer_ (German).
  Bomb                                    Une bombe.
  Howitzer                                Un obusier.
  Machine gun                             Une mitrailleuse.
  Fieldpiece                              Une piece de campagne.
  75 millimeter field gun                 Une piece de soixante-quinze.
  Siege gun                               Une piece de siege.
  120 long                                Cent vingt long.
  120 short                               Cent vingt court.
  77 (German)                             Soixante-dix-sept (allemand).
  Shell                                   Un obus.
                                          Une marmite (slang).
                                          Un colis a domicile (slang).
  Shrapnel                                Un shrapnell.
                                          Un rageur (slang).
  Periscope                               Un periscope.
  Trench knife                            Un couteau de tranchee.
  Dugout                                  Un abri dans les tranchees.
                                          Un cagibi (slang).
                                          Une cagna (slang)
                                          Un gourbi (slang).
                                          Une guitoune (slang).

     NOTE.--In addressing an officer of grade superior to his own, an
     officer must use the possessive adjective; a senior addressing a
     junior uses the title of the grade only. Thus: A major to a
     colonel says "Mon colonel," but the colonel to the major would
     say "Commandant."




APPENDIX.

FORM FOR LAST WILL AND TESTAMENT.


Last Will and Testament

OF

  _____________________________________________________________________

  _I_, __________________________________________________________________

  _of_ _____________________________________________________________________

  _do make, publish, and declare this my last will and testament.
  I give, devise, and bequeath to_[16] _______________________________________

  ________________________________________________________________________

  ________________________________________________________________________

  ________________________________________________________________________

  ________________________________________________________________________

  ________________________________________________________________________

  ________________________________________________________________________

  ________________________________________________________________________

  ________________________________________________________________________

         [Footnote 16: Here insert specific legacies and devises.]

  _And I do give, devise, and bequeath all the rest and residue of
  my estate, both real and personal, to_ ___________________________________

  ________________________________________________________________________

  ________________________________________________________________________

  ________________________________________________________________________

  _heirs and assigns forever_,[17] ____________________________________________

  ________________________________________________________________________

  ________________________________________________________________________

  ________________________________________________________________________

         [Footnote 17: If the residue of the estate is given to
         several persons, add here the manner in which it is to be
         divided, as "in equal shares as tenants in common."]

  _I hereby appoint_____________________________________________________

  ________________________________________________________________________

  _______________________________________________________________ _executor

  of this my last will and testament, and I desire that_ ______________________
  _shall not be required to give bond for the performance of the
  duties of that office_.


  _Witness my hand this_[18]_________________________________________________

         [Footnote 18: If the will is made in Nevada, or if the
         testator has real estate in that State, he should affix his
         seal.]

  _day of_ __________________________________, _191_

                                            ______________________________________________


  _Signed, published, and declared by_ ______________________________________

  _________________________________________________________________________

  _the above-named testator, as and for his last will and testament,
  in the presence of us, who, at his request and in his
  presence, and in the presence of each other, have subscribed
  our names as witnesses thereto._[19]_

                        _________________________________________________________

                                       Residence: _____________________________________

                        _________________________________________________________

                                       Residence: _____________________________________

                        _________________________________________________________

                                       Residence: _____________________________________

  ________________________________________________________________________

         [Footnote 19: If the will is made in Louisiana, unless it is
         wholly in the handwriting of the testator, there should be
         seven witnesses and a notary at the "sealing up." If wholly
         in his handwriting, no formalities are required.]




INDEX.


  Abbreviations on maps, 323
  Advance guards, 210
  Advance party of advance guard, 211
  Advice to riflemen, 241
  Aiming rifle, 235
  Alignments, 235
  Ammunition, 20
  Arm signals, 154
  Arms (_see_ Field kit), 30
  Articles of War:
    Extracts from, 353
    Reading, 353
  Assembling Infantry equipment, 33


  Ball cartridges, 20
  Battle sight, 20
  Bayonet, manual of:
    Attacks, 75
    Combat, 84
    Combined movements, 83
    Defenses, 79
    Fencing exercises, 85
    Foot movements, 85
    General rules, 85
    Instruction without bayonet, 81
    Instruction with rifle, 74
    Instruction without rifle, 74
    Suggestions for fencing at will, 93
  Blanket roll, 33


  Calling the shot, 241
  Care of feet, 47
  Care of rifle, 21
  Company, school of:
    Close order drill--
      Alignments, 146
  Cossack post, 215
  Course in small-arms firing, 243
  Courtesies in conversation, 18
  Courtesy, military, 13


  English-French vocabularies, 371
  Equipment:
    Assembling, 33
    Part of, 33


  Facings, 61
  Feet, care of, 47
  Field kit, 30
  Field service:
    Outposts--
    Combat, 181
      Principles of Infantry training, 180
  Fire:
    Control, 192
    Direction, 191
    Discipline, 192
    Ranges, 193
  Firing with rests, 243
  First-aid rules, 338
  Flank guards, 213
  Forage ration, 41
  Form for last will and testament, 389
  French-English vocabulary, 371


  Guard duty (extracts from Manual of Interior):
    Classification of interior guards, 255
    Color sentinels, 271
    Commander of the guard, 258
    Compliments from guards, 284
    Corporal of the guard, 266
    Countersigns, 282
    Details, 255
    Flags, 296
    Guard mounting, 259
      Formal, 256
      Informal, 256
    Guard patrols, 283
    Guarding prisoners, 289
    Introduction, 254
    Musician of the guard, 271
    Orderlies, 271
    Orders for sentinels, 273
    Paroles, 282
    Prisoners, 286
    Privates of the guard, 273
    Relieving the old guard, 306
    Retreat gun, 298
    Reveille gun, 298
    Rosters, 255
    Sergeant of the guard, 263
    Watchmen, 283
  Guard mounting, 298
    Formal, 299
    Informal, 297


  Hygiene, personal, 43


  Individual cooking, 30
    Recipes, 34
  International Morse code, 327


  Laws governing Army, 350
  Line of observation, 102
  Loadings and firings, 95
  Loyalty, 11


  Manual of arms, 30
  Manual of the Bayonet. (_See_ Bayonet, Manual of.)
  Manual of Interior Guard Duty. (_See_ Guard duty.)
  Manual of Tent Pitching. (_See_ Tent Pitching, Manual of.)
  Maps:
    Abbreviations, 323
    Contours, 313
    Datum plane, 314
    Directions, 309
    Distances, 312
    Ground forms, 316
    Hachures, 314
    Making (sketching), 322
    Orienting, 311
    Reading, 313
    Ridges, 317
    Scales, 313
    Signs, 323
    Slopes, 315
    Stream lines, 319
    Valleys, 316
    Vertical intervals, 315
  Marching, 223
    Preparation for, 223
  Markmanship, preliminary training, 233
  Message blanks, 235
  Metal fouling solution for cleaning rifle, 26
  Military courtesy, 13
  Morse, international code. (_See_ General service code.)


  National anthem, 17
  Noncommissioned officers:
    Corporal of guard, 352
    Insignia, 353
    Precedence, 352
    Rank, 353
    Sergeant of guard, 352


  Oath of enlistment, 9
  Obedience, 9
  Observation, line of. (_See_ Line of observation.)
  Officers:
    Insignia, 353
    Precedence, 352
    Rank, 353
  Orienting maps, 311
  Outguards, 215
  Outposts, 213


  Pack, 35
    Close, 35
    Open, 35
  Patrolling, 199
  Patrols:
    Advance guards, 210
    Outposts, 213
  Personal hygiene, 43
  Pickets, 215
  Pistol:
    Cleaning, 104
    Practice, 104


  Rations:
    Carried on person, 37
    Cooking, 37
    Emergency, 41
    Forage, 41
    Grain, 42
    Kinds of, 38
  Reading maps, 309
  Rear guards, 312
  Regulations governing Army, 350
  Rifle:
    Aiming, 242
    Care of, 241
    Cleaning, 242
    Coordination in firing, 241
    Trenches, 219


  Salutes:
    Hand, 14
    Rifle, 14
    Saber, 15
    Sentinels, 16
  Saluting, 13
    Rules governing, 15
  Scales on maps, 324
  Soda solution for cleaning rifle, 26
  Soldier, school of:
    Duties of instructor, 57
    Eyes right or left, 61
    Facings, 61
    Instruction without arms, 58
    Manual of arms, 30
    Position of the soldier on attention, 59
    Rifle salute, 71
    Salute with the hand, 14
    Salute with saber, 16
    Steps and marchings, 61
      Back step, 64
      Change step, 65
      Quick time, 62
      Side step, 63
      The half step, 63
      To halt, 64
      To march by the flank, 64
      To march to the rear, 64
      To mark time, 63
    The bayonet, 75
    The inspection, 72
    The rests, 70
    To dismiss the squad, 72
  Solutions for cleaning rifle, 26
  Squad, school of:
    Alignments, 146
    Instruction, 74
    Kneeling and lying down, 74
    Loadings and firings, 95
    Observation, 102
    The assembly, 172
    The oblique march, 158
    The use of cover, 101
    To cease firing, 100
    To deploy as skirmishers, 169
    To fire at will, 99
    To fire by clip, 99
    To fire by volley, 98
    To form squad, 142
    To load, 96
    To set the sight, 98
    To stack and take arms, 73
    To suspend firing, 99
    To take intervals and distance, 65
    To unload, 97
  Steps and marchings, 61
  Subsistence. (_See_ Rations.)
  Surplus kit, 32
  Swabbing solution for cleaning rifle, 26


  Target practice:
    Advice to riflemen, 241
    Aiming rifle, 235
    Battle sight, 236
    Calling the shot, 240
    Coordination, 241
    Firing positions, 238
    Preliminary training in markmanship, 233
    Sight adjustment, 233
    Table of sight corrections, 235
    Targets, 244
    The course in small-arms firing, 243
    Trigger squeeze, 237
  Targets, 244
  Tent Pitching, Manual of:
    Conical wall tent, 177
    Folding tents, 178
    Pitch all type Army tents (except shelter and conical wall tents), 176
    Striking tents, 178
  Trigger squeeze, 237
  Two-arm semaphore code, 231


  Uniforms, 27
    Care of, 27
    Disposing of, 27
    Dress, 28
    Full dress, 28
    How worn, 28
    Service, 28
  Use of cover, 101


  Visual signaling (_see_ Signals):
    In general, 328
    Flag, 329
  Vocabulary--English-French, 391




[Transcriber's note: Obvious printer's errors have been corrected.
Hyphenation and accentuation have been standardised, all other
inconsistencies are as in the original. The author's spelling has been
maintained.

Bold text is marked with =.]





End of the Project Gutenberg EBook of Manual for Noncommissioned Officers
and Privates of Cavalry of the Army of the United States 1917
to be also used by Engineer Companies (Mounted) for Cavalry Instruction and
Training, by U. S. War Department

*** END OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK MANUAL FOR NONCOMMISSIONED ***

***** This file should be named 35139.txt or 35139.zip *****
This and all associated files of various formats will be found in:
        http://www.gutenberg.org/3/5/1/3/35139/

Produced by Chris Curnow, Christine P. Travers and the
Online Distributed Proofreading Team at http://www.pgdp.net


Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions
will be renamed.

Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no
one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation
(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without
permission and without paying copyright royalties.  Special rules,
set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to
copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to
protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark.  Project
Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you
charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission.  If you
do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the
rules is very easy.  You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose
such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and
research.  They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do
practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks.  Redistribution is
subject to the trademark license, especially commercial
redistribution.



*** START: FULL LICENSE ***

THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE
PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK

To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free
distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work
(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project
Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project
Gutenberg-tm License (available with this file or online at
http://gutenberg.org/license).


Section 1.  General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm
electronic works

1.A.  By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm
electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to
and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property
(trademark/copyright) agreement.  If you do not agree to abide by all
the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy
all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession.
If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project
Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the
terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or
entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8.

1.B.  "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark.  It may only be
used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who
agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement.  There are a few
things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works
even without complying with the full terms of this agreement.  See
paragraph 1.C below.  There are a lot of things you can do with Project
Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement
and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
works.  See paragraph 1.E below.

1.C.  The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation"
or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project
Gutenberg-tm electronic works.  Nearly all the individual works in the
collection are in the public domain in the United States.  If an
individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are
located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from
copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative
works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg
are removed.  Of course, we hope that you will support the Project
Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by
freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of
this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with
the work.  You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by
keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project
Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others.

1.D.  The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern
what you can do with this work.  Copyright laws in most countries are in
a constant state of change.  If you are outside the United States, check
the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement
before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or
creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project
Gutenberg-tm work.  The Foundation makes no representations concerning
the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United
States.

1.E.  Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg:

1.E.1.  The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate
access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently
whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the
phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project
Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed,
copied or distributed:

This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with
almost no restrictions whatsoever.  You may copy it, give it away or
re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included
with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org

1.E.2.  If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived
from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is
posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied
and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees
or charges.  If you are redistributing or providing access to a work
with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the
work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1
through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the
Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or
1.E.9.

1.E.3.  If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted
with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution
must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional
terms imposed by the copyright holder.  Additional terms will be linked
to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the
permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work.

1.E.4.  Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm
License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this
work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm.

1.E.5.  Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this
electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without
prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with
active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project
Gutenberg-tm License.

1.E.6.  You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary,
compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any
word processing or hypertext form.  However, if you provide access to or
distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than
"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version
posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org),
you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a
copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon
request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other
form.  Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm
License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1.

1.E.7.  Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying,
performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works
unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9.

1.E.8.  You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing
access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided
that

- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from
     the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method
     you already use to calculate your applicable taxes.  The fee is
     owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he
     has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the
     Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation.  Royalty payments
     must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you
     prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax
     returns.  Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and
     sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the
     address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to
     the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation."

- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies
     you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he
     does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm
     License.  You must require such a user to return or
     destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium
     and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of
     Project Gutenberg-tm works.

- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any
     money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the
     electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days
     of receipt of the work.

- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free
     distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works.

1.E.9.  If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm
electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set
forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from
both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael
Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark.  Contact the
Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below.

1.F.

1.F.1.  Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable
effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread
public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm
collection.  Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain
"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or
corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual
property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a
computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by
your equipment.

1.F.2.  LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right
of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project
Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project
Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project
Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all
liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal
fees.  YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT
LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE
PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH 1.F.3.  YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE
TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE
LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR
INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
DAMAGE.

1.F.3.  LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a
defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can
receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a
written explanation to the person you received the work from.  If you
received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with
your written explanation.  The person or entity that provided you with
the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a
refund.  If you received the work electronically, the person or entity
providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to
receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund.  If the second copy
is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further
opportunities to fix the problem.

1.F.4.  Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth
in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS' WITH NO OTHER
WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE.

1.F.5.  Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied
warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages.
If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the
law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be
interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by
the applicable state law.  The invalidity or unenforceability of any
provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions.

1.F.6.  INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the
trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone
providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance
with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production,
promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works,
harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees,
that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do
or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm
work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any
Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause.


Section  2.  Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm

Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of
electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers
including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers.  It exists
because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from
people in all walks of life.

Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the
assistance they need, are critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's
goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will
remain freely available for generations to come.  In 2001, the Project
Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure
and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations.
To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation
and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4
and the Foundation web page at http://www.pglaf.org.


Section 3.  Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive
Foundation

The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit
501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the
state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal
Revenue Service.  The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification
number is 64-6221541.  Its 501(c)(3) letter is posted at
http://pglaf.org/fundraising.  Contributions to the Project Gutenberg
Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent
permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws.

The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S.
Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered
throughout numerous locations.  Its business office is located at
809 North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887, email
business@pglaf.org.  Email contact links and up to date contact
information can be found at the Foundation's web site and official
page at http://pglaf.org

For additional contact information:
     Dr. Gregory B. Newby
     Chief Executive and Director
     gbnewby@pglaf.org


Section 4.  Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg
Literary Archive Foundation

Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide
spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of
increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be
freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest
array of equipment including outdated equipment.  Many small donations
($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt
status with the IRS.

The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating
charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United
States.  Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a
considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up
with these requirements.  We do not solicit donations in locations
where we have not received written confirmation of compliance.  To
SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any
particular state visit http://pglaf.org

While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we
have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition
against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who
approach us with offers to donate.

International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make
any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from
outside the United States.  U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff.

Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation
methods and addresses.  Donations are accepted in a number of other
ways including checks, online payments and credit card donations.
To donate, please visit: http://pglaf.org/donate


Section 5.  General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic
works.

Professor Michael S. Hart is the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm
concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared
with anyone.  For thirty years, he produced and distributed Project
Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support.


Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed
editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S.
unless a copyright notice is included.  Thus, we do not necessarily
keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition.


Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility:

     http://www.gutenberg.org

This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm,
including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary
Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to
subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks.